USER GUIDE
v2016 as of Q1 2017
Date of issue: February 15, 2017
Getting Started With Tax Provision 14
Platform & Support's Customer Center 15
..........................................
Overview of Provision Calculations 17
................................
ONESOURCE Tax Provision 18
CONTENTS
Data Navigation Bar 19
. 20
. 21
Datasets 22
. 23
. 23
. 24
Included for State 25
. 26
Filing Group 27
Tag Letters 27
Classes and Subclasses 28
Manage Attachments 30
Records - Unit/State 31
Current/Non-Current 32
. 33
. 34
. 35
. 36
. 37
. 38
. 38
. 39
. 39
Common Actions 40
My Datasets 41
. 42
. 43
Viewing All Datasets 44
Creating My Review List 45
Dataset Actions 46
Review 47
Calculate 47
............................................
More - Dataset Administration 52
CONTENTS
Units 95
Manage Units Interface 96
Manage Units 97
Activate All Units 98
Unit Actions 98
Lock/Unlock Units 99
...............................
More - Unit Administration 99
..............................................
Setting up Unit Administration 100
.....................................
Unit Rates 107
Unit Other 113
Unit Properties 118
Jurisdictions 127
Review & Edit 136
. 137
Summary Page 138
Leadsheets 141
....................................
Data Entry 145
...............................................
Adding Data Entry Components 147
...............................................
Editing Data Entry Components 148
..................................................
Deleting Data Entry Components 148
Attachments 149
Data Entry 150
...............................................................
After Tax Temporary Differences -Tax Basis 151
..........................................................................
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155
..............................
Forecast PTBI 161
.................................
................................................
Intercompany Transaction Entry 164
.........................................................
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167
Payable Entry 171
..................................................
CONTENTS
Permanent Differences - Tax Basis 174
...........................................................
Permanent Differences - Book/Tax Basis 177
...............................
Tax Adjustments 184
..................................................
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187
............................................................
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196
...................................
...............................
............................................................................................
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204
..........................................................................
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209
..........................................
State Permanent Differences 214
..................................
...........................................................
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224
..................................
Reporting 230
. 230
. 232
Run a Report 233
. 234
. 235
Class Options 236
My Reports 237
..............................................
Creating User-Defined Reports 238
...........................................................
Applying Multiple Datasets to a Report 239
..........................................................................
Applying Units/Sub-Conslidations/Filing Groups 240
Shared Reports 241
. 241
Notes 242
. 243
Page 246
Margins 247
Header/Footer 247
Sheet 248
Printing Reports 249
. 249
..............................................................
CONTENTS
Reporting Overview & Reference Information 251
............................................
Self Reconciliation of Reports 253
...................................
Tax Provision Report 255
...........................................
Tax Provision Unit Summary 255
......................................................
Tax Provision (Estimated Payments) 257
................................
Tax Provision 261
...............................................
Tax Provision Unit Comparison 263
.........................................
.........................................................................
Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison 267
FERC 268
................................
..........................................................
Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison 273
................................................
Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout 274
........................................
Effective Tax Rate (Interim) 275
....................................
Deferred Support 284
.......................................
....................................................................
Temporary Diffs Summary (Fed Filing Group) 286
...................................
....................................................
Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities 288
......................................
NOL Balances 292
NOLs Expiration 294
...............................
Flow Through 297
Trial Balance 298
....................................
...........................................
Tax Basis Income Statement 300
Trial Balance 301
..................................................
Trial Balance - Income Statement 302
Other Reports 303
....................................................
Tax Expense on Income Statement 303
....................................
...............................
...............................
CONTENTS
State Support 307
...................................
..............................
...................................
.......................................
. 317
Tax Provision 318
..............................
...............................
Payable Detail 327
......................................................
Tax Provision - Estimated Payments 328
.................................................................
Legacy Tax Provision (Estimated Payments) 330
.......................................
.................................................
State Inclusion Summary Report 335
Payable 335
...............................
Payable Detail 337
................................................................
Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Report 339
Journal Entry 339
Global Access 340
Sign-Off Summary 340
................................................
Sign-Off Summary Comparision 340
Forecast True Up 341
. 342
...................................
Forecast Deferred Provision 345
......................................
. 346
Unit 346
Summary 348
AMT Estimator 348
......................................
.............................................
Reporting Currency Approach 350
Administration 351
. 352
....................................
CONTENTS
Analysis 355
. 357
..............................
Using Bookmarks 359
.....................................................
Exporting a Dashboard for Viewing 366
.............................................
My Analysis 370
Shared Analysis 370
Design 370
Workpapers 371
Settings 373
Administration 376
. 378
Datasets 379
..........................................
.View Reporting Dataset Log 408
...................................
........................................
Manage Units 417
Units 417
.....................................
.................................
..................................
..................................
..........................................
................................................
After Tax Temporary Differences 427
Tax Adjustments 428
.........................................
CONTENTS
................................
.................................................
Import Master Chart of Accounts 433
.................................
Export Mappings 435
Import Mappings 435
Manage States 436
States 436
State Types 437
.......................................
State After Tax Temp Diffs 437
........................................
State After App Temp Diffs 438
..................................
Manage Bridge 440
................................
Tax Accounts 442
.................................
..........................................
.Temp Diff Activity - Tax Basis 444
..............................................
.Temp Diff BSO Adjs - Tax Basis 445
.........................................
.Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis 446
..................................................
Temp Diff Activity Book/Tax Basis 447
.Trial Balances 448
.Unit Mapping 449
Manage Payable 450
....................................................
.Manage Payable Transaction Types 450
.....................................
.....................................
.......................................
Manage Tags 457
System 457
......................................................
.Manage Global Access Components 458
.Manage Users 459
...........................................
.Manage Global Attachments 468
.Login History 468
.............................................
.Manage Countries/Currencies 469
..............................................
Manage Deferred Rollforwards 470
........................................
........................................
...........................................................
Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tags Only) 478
CONTENTS
.Manage Licenses 480
...................................
..........................................
Manage Restricted Features 534
Manage Rollups 536
....................................
Plugin Reports 538
...................................
Audit Trail 542
.....................................................
View Numbers Data Source History 543
......................................................
.View Categories Data Source History 545
Help 546
Documentation 546
......................................................
Integration with ONESOURCE Fileroom 547
..................................................................
Adding Documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom 547
Jobs 551
. 552
Log Files 554
Importing 555
............................................
.Spreadsheet Import - Dataset 556
Bridge Import 562
.Bridge Process 565
.................................................................
ONESOURCE Import from Other Applications 568
......................................
.....................................................
ONESOURCE State Apportionment 576
....................................................
ONESOURCE Estimated Payments 579
Category Import 589
..........................................
Import Categories Template 591
.........................................
Import Mappings 592
Exporting 593
CONTENTS
. 594
Export All Units 596
. 598
. 600
..............................
Functionality 603
...............................
....................................................
.AMT Reporting Currency Approach 605
.............................................
.AMT Local Currency Approach 606
.................................
Scenario 1 610
Scenario 2 611
Scenario 3 612
Scenario 4 613
Scenario 5 614
Scenario 6 615
Scenario 7 616
Scenario 8 617
Scenario 9 618
Scenario 10 619
Current Issues 619
Flow-Through 620
Manage Licenses 621
.....................................................
Flow-Through Classes & Subclasses 621
..................................
..................................
......................................................
Calculate Flow-Through - Manually 629
Review & Edit 630
Reporting 630
Jobs 631
Settings 631
...................................
.....................................................................................
Using the Flow-Through functionality with Tag Datasets 635
Terminology 642
..........................................
Currency Types and Options 643
....................................
.............................................................
CONTENTS
.Change in Rate and Currency Translation 644
...............................................................
.Combining Units with Different Currencies 648
.................................................
.Currency Translation Adjustment 648
...............................
Forecast 663
Actual 667
.Interim Process 669
Journal Entries 673
Core Calculation 674
....................................................
Simple Journal Entry (default view) 675
.................................
Custom JE Report 676
........................................
Configurable Journal Entry 677
................................
....................................................
.Journal Entries System Parameters 689
..................................................
.Additional Configuration Options 690
...............................................
Journal Entry Standard Reports 691
...........................................................................................
T..a..x..A...c.c..o..u..n..t.s....................................
Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of 693
.Example - Journal Entry Calculations 694
Payable 696
.Exchange Rates 699
........................................
Report Configuration 708
.........................................................
Custom Sub-Consolidation Reporting 708
..............................
.................................
Stock Based Compensation 711
APIC Pool 712
.............................................................
Tax Basis Balance Sheet/Income Statement 712
...................................................
Cumulative Temporary Differences 713
....................................
........................................
RTP Posting 716
....................................
.........................................
CONTENTS
Aggregated Attribute Basis 728
.......................................................
Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis 728
................................................................................
Converting from Aggregated to Aggregated Post-Tax 729
...........................................................................
Associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision Applications 729
Global Access 730
............................................
Uncertain Tax Positions (UTP) 731
...............................
Export Provision to Return 731
Reference Items 732
. 732
Resize Columns 734
Filter Data 734
Sort Data 737
.....................................
Reorder Columns 739
Group Columns 739
....................................
State and Jurisdiction Codes 740
. 746
.......................................
Default Payable Transaction Types
. 751
..............................................
. 751
.......................................
. 754
................................
Component Rollup Codes - Deferred
...................................................
Component Rollup Codes - Effective Rate
. 755
...........................................................
. 756
.........................................................
Component Rollup Codes - Trial Balance 756
Query Filters 757
. 765
..............................
. 772
........................................
. 773
Where to Enter Items in Onesource Tax Provision
. 775
.....................................................................
. 776
CONTENTS
777
Getting Started With Tax Provision
ONESOURCE Tax Provision separates the tax provision process into four sections: My Datasets, Review & Edit, Reporting and Administration. Each section presents tasks for creating your Tax Provision. When data entry is complete, you can use the various data you've entered to assemble and store reports in the system.
Use the Release Notes, Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial Videos provided within the Customer Center 15
to start using Tax Provision and become comfortable with the interface.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The following system requirements are associated with the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. For further information, contact the support team at 1-877-829-5969, Option 2 or by email: provisiontechsupport@thomsonreuters.com.
Environment | Current Support | Notes |
OPERATING SYSTEM | Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows 8.1 Professional (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows 10 Professional (32-bit and 64- bit) | Apple OS X and various Linux systems may also perform adequately, however, they are not fully tested nor guaranteed. See browser note below. |
Windows 2008 R2 | ||
Windows 2012 R2 | ||
INTERNET BROWSER | Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 (32-bit and 64-bit) | Internet Explorer 11 with Enterprise Mode or normal Compatibility mode turned on is no longer required or supported. We recommend using the latest version of Chrome and Firefox. If attempting to work under a non- Microsoft operating system, we strongly recommend using Chrome. |
Mozilla Firefox | ||
Google Chrome | ||
Apple Safari | ||
Microsoft Edge | ||
MOBILE/OTHER | iOS 9 – Chrome, Safari, Firefox Android 5 – Chrome, Firefox | Screen size for iOS iPad - 9.4 inches Screen size for Android Tab - 9.7 inches |
SCREEN RESOLUTION | 1024 x 768 or higher | Desktop only |
MICROSOFT OFFICE | 2007 or later (32-bit and 64-bit) | |
OPERATING SYSTEMS | Google/Android Apple/IOS Microsoft/Windows |
Platform & Support's Customer Center
ONESOURCE SUPPORT SITE
In the ONESOURCE platform, you can use Resources to access Support's Customer Center.
Here you can choose a product tile or View All Products to view a complete list of products. In the product's page, you can enter text to Search the knowledge base and find Alerts, Suggested Articles, Top FAQs, Trending Articles, Release Notes, Guides, Training options, and Support contact information.
IMPORTANT! The first time that you open the ONESOURCE Product Support page, you are required to set up a OnePass Profile to access the content for each product.
Click
in the Global Navigation bar to open the Customer Center page.
Click Resources > Customer Center > For full access, be sure to sign up for a OnePass Account.
To find ONESOURCE Tax Provision's Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial videos, select Support & Learning > ONESOURCE Product Support > Tax Provision > Search > Suggested Articles.
Note: You can also find ONESOURCE Workpapers' Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial videos in Tax Provision's Suggested Articles.
To contact the support team, click Support & Learning > ONESOURCE Product Support > Tax Provision > Contact Us.
This section describes the most common basic tasks you will use when working with ONESOURCE Tax Provision. This is an introduction to the Tax Provision terminology and concepts used in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. The provision calculation, the user interface, and concepts are described in detail. These concepts provide the building blocks for the rest of the guide.
Reviewing the following concepts will help you to understand ONESOURCE Tax Provision's features.
Overview of Provision Calculations 17
ONESOURCE Tax Provision 18
Data Navigation Bar 19
Codes 20
System Codes 21
Datasets 22
Components 23
Reporting Datasets 23
Units 24
Included for State 25
Sub-Consolidations 26
Filing Group 27
Tag Letters 27
Classes and Subclasses 28
Manage Attachments 30
Records - Unit/State 31
Current/Non-Current 32
Global Access 33
Parameters 34
Audit Trail 35
Reporting Levels 36
Currency 37
Deferred Rollforwards 38
Roll-up Codes 38
Data Refresh 39
Overview of Provision Calculations
In ONESOURCE Tax Provision, you enter the lowest level of data available. When you enter the data at the lowest level of detail, you can configure and present data in multiple ways. Additionally, you can use the provision data to calculate estimated payments, extension payments or planning scenarios.
To enter data at the lowest level of detail, select Review & Edit > Data Entry > select a Component and enter data.
Data Entry Components
Use the data navigation bar to select a Base Dataset, Comparing Dataset, Leadsheet, or Data Entry page to review, compare and enter your data. You can use the data navigation bar buttons to refresh, export, and print the data within the grid.
Data Navigation Bar
Refresh - Export - Print
You can refresh the data in the grid and see the changes made by other users. When reviewing the grid, if a row number is highlighted orange, then refresh the data.
| |
You can export the data in the grid to Excel to create a pre-defined pivot table.
| |
To print the data that appears in the grid:
|
In Administration, administrators can add codes to create and maintain category items. If codes are already established in another application, consider using those codes in ONESOURCE Tax Provision to create a one-to-one relationship with the data in the other application.
Codes are user-defined. You can enter any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces.
The application uses System codes 21 for automatic postings.
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining codes.
Example - Temporary Code
The application also requires system codes. These codes alter the functionality, such as calculations. Although you have the ability to modify system codes, contact the support team for assistance.
Here are a few examples of system codes.
Valuation Allowance Automation system codes include:
Temporary Difference codes: VA_SYS_PTTD_C and VA_SYS_PTTD_NC
NOL Temporary Difference codes: VA_SYS_NOLTD_C and VA_SYS_NOLTD_NC
After Tax Temporary Difference codes: VA_SYS_ATTD_C and VA_SYS_ATTD_NC
Other Automation system codes include:
NOL Temporary Difference code: NOL_SYS. You can extend the code. For example, NOL_SYS_2013.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments code: NC_
See Customer Center 15 for more information about how to contact the support team.
A dataset retains a collection of the tax & accounting data for a specific period of time. You can create new datasets, copy them, roll them over, and combine them. Users are given permissions to access datasets in the system. Some users will have Administrator permissions and others may be assigned Read-Only or
Read-Write permissions. Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining datasets of datasets that you work with include Provision, Estimated Payments, and Interim.
Provision
Use Provision datasets to manage all aspects of a standard provision dataset.
Collect, store and calculate provision data to generate provision reports.
379 . The types
Estimated Payments
Use Estimated datasets to manage all aspects of a standard compliance dataset.
Collect, store and calculate compliance data to generate estimated payments and extension reports.
Interim
Use Interim datasets to manage all aspects of an interim dataset.
Collect, store and calculate interim provision data to generate the forecast rate to arrive at the interim provision reports.
Collect actual data to compare with the forecast data.
Datasets
379
41 to learn more about setting up and using datasets.
Component is the general term for an item in the application. Typically, you will find components in drop- down lists.
Some examples of components are:
Book to Tax Adjustments: Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, and Tax Adjustments.
Payable Items: Transaction Codes, Buckets.
Unit Attributes: State, Jurisdiction, Attachments, and Roll-up Codes.
System Items: User Rights.
Administrators can create Reporting Datasets to combine data in datasets.
There are two types of reporting datasets that you can use for reporting purposes: Sequential
404 and
405.
In Reporting, you can select sub-consolidation or consolidated types to see the Reporting dataset data. Reporting datasets are only sub-consolidation and consolidated types.
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining the Reporting Datasets
404 .
Warning: If one of the datasets in a Reporting Dataset is Archived, then the entire reporting dataset is archived.
Reporting Dataset Type
You can enter and organize your data within units.
A unit is a legal entity, a cost center, a department or a division. A unit contains the lowest level of detail for reporting requirements.
Combine units with other units to create multiple sub-consolidations 26
data.
for various representations of
When using filing groups 27, the unit's attributes are grouped with other units.
When data is entered into a unit, the application creates a Record 31 to store data for the unit.
Administrators create and maintain Units
417 .
Units
The Included for State option determines which adjustments flow from the federal provision to the state provision.
424 difference in administration, you can designate
whether or not to include the amount in the state provision calculation.
You can include each adjustment for all States, no states or a custom state.
You can add custom state allocation on a state by state basis by using the custom state functionality. You can set this up at the administration or dataset level.
Once you use a permanent or temporary difference in the provision or estimated payments datasets, you cannot modify this option.
Included for State
You can combine units and create additional views of data by setting up sub-consolidations.
Adding units to sub-consolidations will not change the consolidated view.
Sub-consolidations are consolidated in the CSC 708 report views. To activate this feature, enable the
481 .
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining sub-consolidations.
419
Examples of sub-consolidations include:
Management reporting
U.S. Domestic Tax Return Filing view
State groupings
Regional reporting (EMEA, APAC)
Sub-Consolidations
Administrators can set up a filing group so that the attributes, such as components, in a child unit will appear in the parent unit. Parent units have automation settings; child units do not. A child unit uses the same automation settings and attributes as those of the parent unit; therefore, a child unit has the same automation settings and attributes as those of the parent unit.
A unit can remain a parent unit, or it can be designated as a child of another parent unit.
When you designate a unit as a parent unit, it cannot be deactivated.
Filing group reports show the results of the relationship with other units.
You can use tag letters to indicate the specific source of your data.
Tags are often referred to as source tags or source codes.
Any letter of the alphabet can be assigned a tag description.
The letter A is used by the application for automated settings; therefore, do not assign the letter A for a tag.
Administrators can assign a tag name pages.
457 to any letter so that it appears in the list of data entry
Use tag letters to identify transferred, imported and bridge import data.
During the scrunch process, you have the option to scrunch data by tag letter.
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining tag letters in Manage Data Options > Manage Tags.
Manage Tags
You can assign data to a specific source by using classes and sub-classes. You must select the class and sub-class option when creating a new dataset. Then, all data entry fields are tracked by class/sub-class.
Data Entry
You can track all data entry fields by assigning a class/sub-class to them.
Class
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
Subclass
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
Data Transfer
You can transfer data with class/sub-class assignments.
The spreadsheet import, Excel Add-In and Active Workpapers confirm the dataset has class permissions before transferring the data.
The next available sub-class is added, automatically, as part of the import process.
Bridge
You can select the class/sub-class when using the bridge import process.
Reporting
Class and sub-classes appear in reports to identify and sort data entry fields.
Classes can be grouped for reporting.
235 for reports to view additional information in reports.
You can use classes and sub-classes in Plug-in reports
538 .
Administration
Administrators assign classes and sub-classes to users.
During the scrunch process, you have the option to scrunch data by class.
Classes & Subclasses
You can support data by attaching documentation files to entries such as book/tax differences, payable, and intercompany transactions.
The manage attachments icon appears after you enter and save data.
The user who attached the file along with the date and time are displayed in the attachments and comments page.
In the data entry pages, when an attachment is added to an adjustment the attachment icon is highlighted in yellow for that adjustment.
During the rollover process, when you select the option With Attachments, all documentation files roll over with the dataset.
You will find the list of attachments in the Attachments Review 306 report.
Add Attachment
To enter data in a dataset, you need to activate the unit(s). To activate units select My Datasets > Units > Activate. You can activate All Units or one unit at a time.
Warning:
If you choose to deactivate a unit, the unit/state records are deleted. All data in the dataset for that unit/state is deleted.
You can sellect Deactivate Unit upon Rollover during the rollover process. If each deferred and payable line in the unit equals zero, the unit will not roll over to the new dataset and no record is created.
For entries that impact the deferred tax accounts, you must designate the Type as either Current or Non- Current.
In Data Entry, for Temporary, NOL Temporary and After Tax Temporary Differences select C - Current or NC
- Non-Current.
Current or Non-Current List
You can filter Deferred balances and NOL balances to view current and non-current balances separately.
Current or Non-Current Type
You can review the temporary difference summary report for the current and non-current balances by asset and liability.
Global Access 730 is the web-based data collection tool where remote users enter data. The system can be
set up so the Global Access data also appears in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision system.
Global Access application
Administrators can activate parameters in the application making certain functionality, calculations, report
views, and other functionality available. The four types of parameters are System
135 .
Administrators activate system parameters in Manage Restricted Features and Manage Configurations.
Manage Restricted Features 534 : You can set up these parameters with the assistance of support or
you can import them. You can export categories from administration, update the exported file with the parameter information within the #CP# parameter sheet and then import that file. You can save the file as .xls, or .xlsx file.
Manage Configurations 481 : You will find a list of parameters in organized pages. Within each tab, you
can activate additional functionality in the application.
Dataset Parameters 57: You can set up parameters for a specific dataset. You can add these
parameters in My Datasets > Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters.
Unit Dataset Parameters: 57 You can set up parameters for a specific unit. You can add these
parameters in My Datasets > Datasets > Units > More > Unit Dataset Parameters.
State Dataset Parameters: 57 You can set up parameters for a specific state. You can add these
parameters in My Datasets > Datasets > Units > Fed, States > Select a state > Unit State Dataset Parameters.
Notes:
Dataset parameters affect data at the dataset level.
Unit parameters affect data at the unit level, only.
State parameters affect data at the state level, only.
System parameters affect data within the entire application.
Within the audit trail, you can track all entries made in the application. A list of components appears in an Excel-like format. You can select All components and each component appears with the number of audit entries that are logged. You can expand the component line items to review the list of audit trail entries. The default view is designed to give you the best overview; however, you can filter the view.
You can see the updates and additions to the categories.
You can filter the audit trail data. If a significant number of entries exist, filtering the list generates the information in a reasonable amount of time.
You can print the audit trail by right clicking and then selecting print.
In Administration > Audit Trail you can select the following folders to see your audit trail data.
View Numbers Data Source History
View Categories Data Source History
Audit Trail
By using reporting levels, you can combine data for different reporting views. The four reporting types available include Unit, Filing Unit, Sub-Consolidated and Consolidated.
Unit - You can view reports based on the Dataset and Report Level for a designated unit type in the Report Level list. hyperlink to unit.
Consolidated - You can view reports based on the Dataset and Report Level, with consolidated as the designated Type in the Report Level list.
Sub-Consolidated - You can view reports based on the Dataset and Report Level, with sub- consolidation as the designated Type in the Report Level list.
Filing Unit (Federal) - You can view reports based on the Dataset and Report Level, with filing unit as the designated Type in the Report Level list.Filing Units utilize the print settings of the parent in that filing unit to create their reports.
Reporting Dataset & Report Level
Report Level Types
The system uses the local currency level to calculate all entries.
Unit level reports appear in local or reporting currency by selecting the appropriate currency in Reporting.
The system converts the entries to reporting currency by using the appropriate foreign exchange rates
643 .
Consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports appear in local or reporting currency as long as all the
units have the same assigned currency code
746 .
The system automatically computes a currency translation adjustment 643 by using the foreign
exchange rates entered in the unit. The currency translation adjustment appears in the appropriate reports.
Currency Types
Functional Currency: Primary Currency in which the books of record are maintained. The currency in which an entity does business.
Local Currency: Currency of the country where the business is physically located.
Reporting Currency: Currency in which the entity reports financial statements. Reporting currency symbol options are US Dollar, Euro, and Japanese Yen. The default is US Dollar. It can be modified
758 .
Hyper inflationary Environment: When the cumulative rate of inflation exceeds 100% over the three year period, then FAS 52 requires USD to be the functional currency. The unit’s local currency should be set to USD.
Currency Options
Currency Codes: There are pre-populated currency codes
746 that can be expanded, as necessary, in
the Manage Countries/Currencies 469 screen.
Thousands Separators: The system defaults to a comma (1,000.00) for the thousands separator.
The comma can be changed to a period (1.000,00) with a system parameter
758 .
The expanded view of the Deferred Balances and NOL balances reports has user-defined columns to which data can be mapped.
Each of three types of deferred events
776
28 to a column in
the deferred balances and NOL balances reports.
There can be up to 26 user-defined columns.
You can set up the deferred balances report in Manage Deferred Rollforwards appears in user-defined columns.
470 so that the activity
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining Manage Deferred Rollforwards
470 and
473 .
By using Roll-up Codes, you can group line items for specific provision activity that appear in the deferred balance and the effective tax rate reports.
The deferred roll-up maps the temporary, NOL temporary, after tax temporary, state after tax temporary and state after apportionment differences.
The effective roll-up maps all the items in the deferred roll-ups, plus permanent differences, tax adjustments and deferred provision only adjustments.
You can use the trial balance roll-up to map the trial balance sub-lines.
For each type of roll-up mappings, there can be multiple user-defined roll-up mappings.
The roll-up mappings appear in the Report Options within the reporting ribbon of the page for the
277 , Effective Tax Rate
Statement 300 reports. The Roll-ups will appear on a summary or hybrid basis.
Notes:
For the hybrid view to show the unassigned details, first, you need to click a roll-up mapping view.
Administrators create and maintain the Roll-up 536 mappings.
Pre-Tax Book Income (Report)
Users can select the PTBI Data Entry Policy and Wghtd Avg FX Rate to calculate data for the report.
PTBI Data Entry Policy
There are five options for entering Pre-Tax Book Income, which are determined by the data entry policy. From the PTBI Data Entry Policy drop-down menu, select the desired PTBI method.
The default PTBI Data Entry Policy is Enter Local, FX; Calc USD.
Policy | Local Currency PBT | Reporting Currency PBT | FX Rate | Rounding |
Enter Local, FX and Calc USD | Entered | Calculated | Entered | N/A |
Enter USD, FX and Calc Local | Calculated | Entered | Entered | N/A |
Enter Local, USD and Calc FX | Entered | Entered | Calculated | N/A |
Enter Local, USD and FX | Entered | Entered | Entered | N/A |
Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding | Entered | Entered | Entered | Calculated |
If Enter Local, USD and Calc FX policy is selected and the Local PTBI equals zero:
The system attempts to compute the reporting by dividing zero by the Weighted Average FX and returning "unknown," with no amounts displaying in reporting currency. To display amounts in reporting currency, select another PTBI policy and enter the Weighted Average FX.
Reports in reporting currency display with the message: "Unit(s) included in the report have an Unknown Weighted Average FX. Amounts in those units will be excluded in reporting currency.
When using the last two policies, Effective Tax rates may differ in Local Currency and Reporting
Currency because the PTBI is using a different Weighted Average rate than the entered Weighted Average.
When using the last policy, the rounding amount is included on a separate line in the Effective Tax Rate report.
Regardless of the policy selected, amounts other than the PTBI are converted at the entered Weighted Average or Spot rate.
The system automatically refreshes your data to keep the most current information available to review.
You can use the data navigation bar options to refresh, export, and print the data within the grid.
Refresh - Export - Print
You can refresh the data in the grid and see the changes made by other users. When reviewing the grid, if a row number is highlighted orange, then refresh the data. | |
You can export data from the Summary page, Lead Sheet pages, and Data Entry pages. This file cannot be used as a template to import data into the system. | |
To print the data that appears in the grid: |
Click Refresh to refresh the data in the page.
Click Print.
You can use the Data Table buttons to view specific data in the grid without having to run various reports.
Review & Edit Grid Options
Use to maximize the space on the page. | |
Use to change the comparison from Column to Side by Side view. All Datasets and Datasets are grouped together. | |
Use to change the percentage from % to $ amount. | |
Use to change the currency from Local to Reporting. | |
Use to turn on and off the grid filters. The grid filters let you define which data will appear in the grid so you can review specific data. | |
Use to hide various columns. For example, you can hide the columns so that you see only the Effective Tax Rate column. |
My Datasets is the first page you see upon opening the Tax Provision application. You can find the link for My Datasets in the Tax Provision Navigation Bar. Within the grid, you will find all datasets assigned to you. From that list, you can select datasets to use for the period in which you are working. When you select a dataset to review, the data refreshes, and the data appears for that dataset type.
In this page, you can export a group of datasets, add/remove datasets to My Review List, and customize the grid using filters and column settings.
You have options in which you can select your datasets.
Select datasets in My Datasets for Review 43 (My Review List and All Datasets).
You can use My Datasets to perform the various tasks.
Access all datasets 44
Create a custom dataset list 43
594
556
594
47
Configure Dataset Administration 52
Select units 95
You can access My Datasets from the Tax Provision navigation bar. Here you will access and set up your datasets and units.
1 | Use My Datasets in the Tax Provision navigation bar to access the datasets assigned to you. |
2 | Use My Datasets for Review to access all datasets available to you, create a custom dataset list, select options from the ribbon, and work with the grid. |
3 | Use My Datasets for Review ribbon to export a group of datasets, add/remove datasets to My Review List, and customize the grid with filters and column settings. |
4 | Use the Data Table to access your data, review dataset information, select actions, and select units. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid. |
5 | Use Actions to open the Review & Edit page, import and export dataset data, run various calculations, and access the Dataset Administration pages related to the dataset. |
6 | Use Units to see how many units are activated in a dataset and open the Manage Units page. |
In My Datasets for Review, you can see every dataset that you have permission to access regardless if they are Read-Only or Locked. These include your non-archived datasets. Use My Datasets for Review to see all datasets available in All Datasets or a specified dataset list in My Review List.
My Datasets for Review
You can use the All Datasets tab to access all of the datasets that are available to you. The number on the tab shows you how many datasets are assigned to you. All dataset types are available including Interim and Reporting datasets. In All Datasets, you can select datasets to create a review list.
Click All Datasets to see all datasets assigned to you.
All Datasets
In My Datasets, you can add datasets in the All Datasets tab to the My Review List tab and create a manageable list of datasets to review. You can remove the datasets from My Review List when you no longer
need them in the list. Note that this also reduces the list of datasets that appear in the Base Dataset
137 and
137
drop-down lists in the Review & Edit
136 page.
In My Review List 45, you can select datasets for a specific period then review and edit them.
The number that appears on the My Review List tab shows how many datasets you added to the review list.
To add datasets to My Review List:
Click the All Datasets tab to see all the datasets assigned to you.
Select for each dataset that you want to add to My Review List.
Click to add the dataset to My Review List.
To remove datasets from My Review List:
Click My Review List to access all datasets assigned to you.
Select for each dataset that you want to remove from My Review List.
Click to remove the selected dataset(s) from My Review List.
My Review List
You can use each line of the grid to perform actions for a dataset. In Actions, you can import and export dataset data, run various calculations, and access the Dataset Administration pages related to a dataset.
You can perform the following Actions in the All Datasets and My Review List grids.
47
556
594
Calculate 47
More - Dataset Administration 52
Dataset Actions
You can use the review button to access the data within a dataset. When you select review for a dataset the Review & Edit page opens and lets you begin your review process.
To review the data in a dataset:
Click for a dataset in My Datasets grid and the Review & Edit page opens to review the dataset's data.
In My Datasets, you can use the Calculate action to run various calculations and then transfer data to another dataset or unit.
Select the calculator button to calculate:
Recalc Payable Reclasses 48
Delete All Journal Entries 48
Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results 49
Post Ret-To-Prov 50
Current Quarter - Q 51
Mass Update Rates 91
Calculate Options
Posted provision amounts are reclassed between entities in the Payable Entry option in the system. The reclass allows for multiple companies to transfer the provision tax amounts to a single parent unit (or paying unit). The system transfers the entire tax from the unit where it was originally posted to the parent unit.
702
for more information about the Recalc Payable Reclasses option.
Note: The Recalc Payable Reclasses option is available once you add a dataset and system parameter.
You can delete all of the Journal Entries in the system, if desired.
To delete all journal entries, you must activate two parameters in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries > Show Delete All Journal Entries Menu Option and Show Delete All button on Journal Entry Screen.
In My Datasets, click the calculate icon and select Delete All Journal Entries. The following message appears.
Delete All Journal Entries
Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results
You can use the Flow-Through functionality to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another which is useful for partnership reporting. To enable Flow-Through, an appropriate License Code and License Key are required. You can manually calculate the Flow-Through Factor Results or run the Flow-Through calculation, automatically when you run a report. You must set up the system parameter to run the calculation.
In the Flow-Through page, you define the Source and Target relationship, the Flow-Through Profile, what percentage, and an elimination.
To set up the calculation to manually Calculate Flow-Through Factors:
In Administration, click System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Flow- Through > Yes for Display Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item.
The option Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results will appear in My Datasets > Calculate.
To manually calculate the Flow-Through Factors:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Click Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results.
The message appears "Are you sure you would like to calculate unit factor results? WARNING: This will erase all existing flow through data before calculating the new results."
To set up the calculation to Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors:
In Administration, click System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Flow- Through > Yes for Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors.
To automatically calculate the Flow-Through Factors:
When you set up the system parameter to Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors, the Flow Through is calculated when you run a report.
Notes:
If a unit is locked, you cannot transfer data to another unit. A message appears "The Source/Target unit data can not be moved."
To exclude all Flow Through classes for the Target dataset add the Dataset parameter 57
EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGH.
SeeFlow-Through 620 for more information about transferring data from one unit to another.
Tax returns for the prior year are typically filed in the current year. Once returns have been filed, a true-up must be booked for the difference between what was accrued in the prior year's provision and the actual amount on tax returns. This true-up must be booked in the current year's provision.
See Return to Provision (RTP) Posting 716 for more information about the Post Ret-to-Prov option.
To post Return-to-Provision calculation:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Post Ret-to-Prov.
Choose Dataset (all units), Sub-consolidation or Unit.
Click Run and the data posts to the units.
To see the Post Ret-to-Prov option, you must relate a RTP Return, RTP Provision, and RTP Target
dataset to each other in Dataset Relations the RTP Return.
394 . Then, in My Datasets, select the dataset assigned as
The RTP posting activates the units/states which are inactive in the related provision dataset (RTP Provision).
If a posting is generated for any inactivate units/states, rates are copied from the related return dataset.
The State RTP correctly allocates the amount for the return basis provision between the RTP PERM and RTP TEMP components.
When using the automatic RTP posting functionality, if one of the datasets (Provision or Return) has a state with an apportionment percentage that does not equal 100% the NC_ postings for perms and temps are separated correctly between NC_PERM and NC_TEMP.
Current/Advance/Roll Back Quarter - Q
You can see the active quarter as the current quarter in Data Entry for an Interim dataset. The work flow for the interim dataset allows for one quarter to be active at any given time. Once a quarter is complete, it can be advanced to the next quarter or an advanced quarter can be rolled back to a prior quarter.
Advance to Q
The Q1 active quarter can advance to Q2 by selecting Advance to Q2. When the Advance option is selected the Q1 data is locked as read-only, and the Q2 data entries become available. The forecasted data from Q1 is copied to Q2 and the Actual ending rates and ending balances in Q1 become the beginning rates and beginning balances in Q2.
The Q2 active quarter can advance to Q3 by selecting Advance to Q3. When the Advance option is selected the Q2 data is locked as read-only, and the Q3 data entries become available. The forecasted data from Q2 is copied to Q3 and the Actual ending rates and ending balances in Q2 become the beginning rates and beginning balances in Q3.
Roll Back to Q
When the current quarter is Q2, you have the option to Roll Back to Q1 or Advance to Q3. When the current quarter is Q3, you have the option to Roll Back to Q2.
More - Dataset Administration
Administrators, Read/Write, and Read Only users can access the Dataset Administration options by selecting the More button. Not all users can view or access the options within this list. The options available
within this list depend on the user's rights and parameters 57 activated in the system.
The following Dataset Administration options are available for dataset administration:
Setting up Dataset Administration 53
Class Groups 54
Currency Rates 55
Country Rates 56
Dataset Parameters 57
Dataset State Inclusions 58
Deferred Entry Set-up 62
Flow-Through Profiles 63
Journal Entry Profiles 69
Manage Deferred Rollforwards 59
Manage NOL Rollforwards 75
Payable Settings 79
Post Ret-to-Prov 50
State Rates 81
Tax Basis Mapping 82
Tax Account Mapping 83
Tax Adjustment Payable Mapping 83
Lock/UnlockUnit 87
Payable Summary Entry 84
Jurisdiction Management 89
Restricted Read/Write 93
Setting up Dataset Administration
To set up a dataset's administration:
In My Datasets, select a dataset and then the More button. A list of options for dataset administration appears
Select an option from the list to open that page.
Dataset More Options
In Class Groups, you can create a group with specified classes. For example, you can create a group to include only the Effective Tax Rate classes to filter out Return To Provision classes. Class Groups appear if you select Classes & Subclasses when creating the dataset.
To create Class Groups:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Class Groups, and select the Plus Sign to add a Class Group.
Type the Name for the New Class Group.
Click OK.
Assign Classes
Available Classes are assigned to the Class Groups. You can select one class or multiple classes and then assign to a class group.
In Available Classes, select a Class and then click the arrow to assign the class. The Class then appears in the Assigned Classes list.
To add multiple classes to a class group, press the Ctrl key and then select the classes to assign.
Click the arrow to assign the classes.
Click Save.
Un-Assign Classes
In Assigned Classes, select a Class and then click the arrow to un-assign the class. The Class appears in the Available Classes list.
To un-assign multiple classes from a class group, press the Ctrl key and then select the classes to un-assign.
Click the arrow to un-assign the classes.
Click Save.
You can populate your currency rates in a specific dataset by using the Currency Rates option. You can select the currency as well as enter the Beginning Deferred FX Rate, Ending Deferred FX Rate, and Weighted Average FX Rate.
You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the Country Rates option. To activate the Currency Rates option, select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type CurrencyRates for the Parameter Name > Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.
To enter data for Currency Rates:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Currency Rates.
Select the Currency.
Type the Beg Deferred FX Rate.
Type the End Deferred FX Rate.
Type the Wghtd Avg FX Rate.
Symbol
Select a Currency Symbol from the list.
Rates
Enter the Beginning Deferred FX, Ending Deferred FX and Weighted Average FX rates.
Copy From Admin
Select Copy from Admin to copy the currency rates set up in My Datasets > More > Currency Rates.
Populate All
Select Populate All to add all default currency rates from in My Datasets > More > Currency Rates.
Notes
Mass Update Rates 91
lets you to apply Tax and Currency Rates on a universal basis to datasets.
93.
You can populate your country rates in a specific dataset by using the Country Rates option. You can select the country as well as enter the Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate and Current Tax Rate.
You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the Country Rates option. To activate the Currency Rates option, select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type CountryRates for the Parameter Name > Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.
To enter data for Country Rates:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Country Rates.
Select the Country.
Type the Beg Deferred Rate.
Type the End Deferred Rate.
Type the Current Tax Rate.
Code
Select a Country Code from the drop-down list.
Rates
Enter the Beginning Deferred, Ending Deferred, and Current Tax rates.
Copy From Admin
Select Copy from Admin to copy the country rates set up in My Datasets > More > Country Rates.
Populate All
Select Populate All to add all default country rates from My Datasets > More > Country Rates.
Notes:
This screen in used in the Mass Update Rates Rates on a universal basis to datasets.
91 feature, with which you can apply Tax and Currency
For information on overriding rates, see the Override Option 93 page.
In My Datasets, you can set up the Dataset Parameters for Provision, Interim and Estimated Payments datasets. Administrators use dataset parameters to change how data is treated or represented within a dataset.
You can add, modify or delete pre-established dataset parameters.
When adding or modifying parameters, use care, as they can potentially change calculations across all datasets.
Parameters are pre-defined and are case-sensitive. The Key Type and Value have specific designations for each parameter.
Deleting parameters is not recommended, because they may be required for the system to function properly. It is recommended that you de-activate a parameter, rather than deleting it.
To import a new dataset parameter, complete the appropriate fields on the #DP# Dataset Params worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
Dataset Parameters
Dataset Parameters 57 let you enter parameters in order to have additional functionality in the software.
To configure a parameter in Dataset Parameters:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Dataset Parameters.
In Manage Dataset Parameters, type the Parameter Name.
Select Alphanumeric for Parameter Type and type any letter from B through Z for the Parameter Value.
Click Save.
Warning: Parameters are generally set up by an Implementation Manager or with the help of the Support team.
In My Datasets, you can set up the State Inclusions for Provision, Interim and Estimated Payments datasets.
To set up the State Inclusions for a dataset:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Dataset State Inclusions.
Select Type, Code, Name and Included for State and Detail.
State Inclusions
Administrators can manage Deferred Rollforwards at the System administration and Dataset administration levels. They can set up Tags or Classes & Subclasses to define how adjustments appear in reports. They can create up to 26 Columns for reporting purposes. Unassigned adjustments will appear in the Default column.
You can manage Deferred Rollforwards in Administration or My Datasets. To manage deferred rollforwards in Administration:
Select Administration and then System.
Click Manage Deferred Rollforwards
470 .
When new datasets are created, deferred rollforward information is populated using the information set up in Administration > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
To manage deferred rollforwards in a dataset:
Select My Datasets > More > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
To set up Manage Deferred Rollforwards in Data Entry, click Copy from Admin to copy information to the dataset from Administration > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
Note:
Information set up in Dataset Administration is used to populate the Deferred Balances report
277 in
the column breakout view, the Deferred Entry Set-up 38 page, and the Rollforward section in the
Temporary Differences pages. The rollforward section is in Data Entry in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.
Here are the guidelines for managing deferred rollforwards at the dataset level:
The setup for new datasets is copied from the Administration area. Datasets that are copied or rolled over use the setup of the dataset from when they are copied/rolled over. You can reset these datasets to the Administration set up by clicking Copy From Admin.
Select the number of columns.
You enter amounts according to defined Column Names. Therefore, for each column name, you can only have one Type (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance Sheet Only). Be sure to click Save when you finish entering information.
The letters on the right side of the page are the tag letters.
Check the Active box for the Column name to appear as a data row in the Rollforward section of Temporary Difference pages.
Note: If the information for a Column name is entered in the Detail section, the Column name will display as a data row in the Rollforward section of Temporary Difference pages even if the Active box is not checked in the Rollforward section.
If a column name is associated with multiple tags, amounts associated with that name become Read- Only.
If more than one Type is defined for a column name the default is as follows:
If Activity, Deferred Only, and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
If Activity and Deferred Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
If Activity and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Balance Sheet Only.
If Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
Settings
At the Dataset level, you can Add, Edit, and Delete deferred rollforward columns by class. You can also move the deferred rollforward columns Up and Down in the list.
To assign a default class to the ending balance.
Click Post End Balance Default Class to post the ending balance to the default class.
Copy From Admin
Deferred rollforward settings in administration are applied to new datasets. Datasets that are copied or rolled over are assigned the settings of the dataset from which they are copied/rolled over. You can reset the dataset deferred rollforward to the Administration settings by clicking Copy From Admin.
Information set up in the Dataset folder is used to generate the Deferred Balances report
277
for the column
break out view, the Deferred Entry Set-up 38 page, and the Rollforward section in the Temporary Difference
Rollforward pages. The Rollforward section is in Data Entry in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.
Manage Deferred Rollforward Columns
To manage deferred rollforwards in a dataset:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Manage Deferred Rollforwards
59.
Select Copy From Admin to copy the settings from the System level in Administration. This will overwrite the data for the current dataset.
Click the arrow to move the deferred rollforward columns up and down.
New Deferred Rollforward Columns
To add a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select Add and then type the name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
Click OK.
Edit Deferred Column
To edit a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select Edit and then type the new name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
Delete Deferred Column
To delete a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select a Deferred Rollforward Column.
Select Delete and the message appears All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to.
Select the Deferred Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the Deferred Rollforward Column.
Click OK to delete.
To Assign Deferred Rollforward Column Value to Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:
Class Code - Name is a list of available classes.
Select a class for the columns: Activity, Deferred, and/or Balance Sheet Only.
Unassigned is the default class.
The Deferred Rollforward class defines where the balances are entered for an adjustment. Therefore, for each class name, you can only have one Type (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance Sheet Only).
Assignment Summary
The Assignment Summary page lists the classes, column, and assignments.
Deferred Rollforward Column Name
The column name assigned to the class.
Class
The class assigned to the deferred rollforward column.
Class Type
There are four types of classes available:
Data Entry
Transfer
Flow Through
System
Data Entry Set-up Screen Default
Assignment will default the class for the single line item Deferred Entry Set-up pages.
Deferred Setup - Tag Datasets
In My Datasets, you can set up the Deferred Entry Set-up defaults for Provision and Interim datasets. The Deferred Entry Set-up screen is for informational use only. You cannot enter any data.
The Deferred Entry Set-up screen is populated automatically by the system using the configuration set up in
the Manage Deferred Rollforwards 59 Dataset level screen.
Columns with more than one source tag have a status of Read Only - Multi Tag.
The column designated with the DefEndBalDefault dataset parameter has a status of End Bal Post. This column is where the difference is posted when Ending Balances are entered vs Activity for Temporary Differences.
Note: If more than one source tag is set to the same column as the DefEndBalDefault column, the DefEndBalDefault column will have a status of Read Only - End Bal Post.
Review the following information along with the screenshots to see how Deferred Rollforward relates to the Deferred Entry Set-up.
In the Deferred Entry Set-up screen, columns 1-4 are Activity because the column number is entered
once in the Activity Column for tags M, I, B, R in Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
In the Deferred Entry Set-up screen, column 5 is Def Only because the column number is entered once in the Def Only Column for tag V in Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
In the Deferred Entry Set-up screen, column 6 is Bal Sheet Only because the column number is entered once in the Bal Sheet Only Column for tag P in Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
In the Deferred Entry Set-up screen, columns 7 and 8 are Unavailable since the column number is entered multiple times for multiple tags in Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
By using Flow-Through Profiles, you can set up various components
23 and transfer data from one unit
24 to
another. You use the Flow-Through Profiles option in My Datasets > More to transfer data from one unit to another.
To set up a Flow-Through Profile, first, you create a dataset with classes. Flow-Through Profiles utilize only
datasets with classes. If you set up Flow-Through in datasets with tags, that functionality did not change.
If you have a dataset set up to use classes, you can set up a Flow-Through Profile.
To create a Flow-Through Profile:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Flow-Through Profiles. If you don't have access to Flow-Through Profiles, you may not have a valid license.
See the Administration > System > Manage Licenses page.
Select the plus sign to add a profile and then type the Name in Add Flow-Through Profile. You need to create a unique flow-through profile.
To configure a new Flow-Through Profile:
In the General tab, type the Profile Description to add options to the profile.
For Data Movement:
Select Gross Balances to transfer the following balances:
PTBI
Permanent Differences
Temporary Differences
After Tax Adjustments
Tax Adjustments
Select Net Adjustments to transfer calculated values.
Current Provision
Deferred Provision
Equity Adjustments
For Jurisdictions:
Click Federal.
Click State to transfer the State only modifications. This option is not available if you select Gross Balances.
Notes:
If Gross Balances is selected, only the Federal data will transfer. The State only modifications will not transfer. Currently, Gross Balances for states are not transferred because the Source units may have different states than the Target units. Also, partnerships have different tax laws to consider for states than federal. You can transfer the federal data to the states. Data that transfers to the states include State NOL's, State Credits, and State Bonus Depreciation.
If Net Adjustments is selected, federal and state data will transfer. You can select a State to receive the data.
For Source Classes select classes from a source unit to transfer out.
Click All to select all classes from a source unit.
This option includes all new classes created after the Flow-Through Profile is assigned.
Click Selected to select the Source Classes individually.
Click Select All to select all the Source Classes.
Click Unselect All to remove all the selected Source Classes.
Click Flip Selection to remove the selected Source Classes and add the unselected Source Classes.
Select the Target Class to post transferred records data at the target unit.
Select the Elimination Class to post elimination entries at the source unit.
Select Elimination Type from one of the three options.
Select Details for the detailed elimination balances for the Source Unit.
Select Summary by Source for the summary using system component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.
Select Summary by Target for the summary using mapped target component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.
Note:
You can select the same class for Target Class and Elimination Class on Source.
The sub-class is defined automatically for Target Unit with the Source Unit code and description.
In Gross Balances, you can map a source component code to the target code for the selected flow-through profile. You can also select the components to include as part of the flow-through profile.
Column with checkbox list
The selected box represents the component type being mapped for the selected Flow-Through profile.
Include in Copy
The Include in Copy column lists the Components Types that you can include in the profile.
Type
The Type column lists the component type.
Pre-Tax Book Income Trial Balance component types don't have values.
All or Mapping Configuration
Click the checkbox All or checkbox from the first column to configure profile mapping for the selected component type.
To map the source code to the target, select one of the following options:
All - By using this option, you can select all source component codes and then map to one target adjustment code.
When this option is selected, "All " all source component codes are selected for a specific component type.
Selected - By using this option, you can select one or multiple source code and then map to the same target component code.
To map a different source code to the different target code or target type, you will map each code separately.
Cross - You can also map components for Pre-Tax Book Income and Tax Adjustment component types.
All except - You can map all source component types to one target code except checked ones.
Selected Components
Based on the selection from the previous Mapping Configurations step, user should see configurable mapping option: ALL, SELECTED, or EXCEPT ALL.
Target Components
The Target Components column lists selected by user target adjustment code from the Mapping Configurations step.
Target Type
The Target Type column lists the target Component type value from the Mapping Configurations step.
Net Adjustments
Select Net Adjustments on the General page to calculate the values for current and deferred taxes for the Flow-Through configurations.
For the jurisdiction value, select the target adjustment code, type and state for each tax affected value to appear on the target unit.
FEDERAL NET ADJUSTMENTS
Target Adjustment for Federal Current Taxes
Select the Component and then Type.
Target Adjustment for Federal Deferred
Select the Component and then Type.
Target Adjustment for Federal Equity
Select the Component and then Type.
STATE NET ADJUSTMENTS
Target Adjustment for State Current Taxes
Select the Component, Type and then State.
Target Adjustment for State Deferred Taxes
Select the Component, Type and then State.
Target Adjustment for State Equity
Select the Component, Type and then State.
To assign a new Flow-Through Profile to units:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Click Units and then Properties.
Select the Flow-through tab.
Select the Flow-Through Target or Source to assign units:
Target (Source) Unit: add target (Source) active unit from the list.
Profile: Select a Flow-Through Profile.
Factor: Define the percentage allocated to the selected flow-through profile.
Select the Create Auto Elim? option to create an elimination entry at the source unit based on the profile elimination type.
The Profile Comment is an optional field to add comments as needed.
Click Save. The same profile can be assigned to multiple target (source) units.
To configure the Flow-Through data transfer:
Select Administration >System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality.
3. Select Flow Through options to transfer data:
Select Yes for the parameter Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors.
This option allows the application to transfer data as information is saved in the source unit component.
Select Yes for the parameter “ Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item" to calculate the flow-through manually.
See Calculate Flow-Through Factor 49 for more information about calculating the Flow-Through Factor.
Unit Properties
To review the Flow-Through data transfer history:
In Review & Edit select the Base Dataset.
Select the component (Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, etc.) for review.
Click the Data Source field. (You can also review by filtering the Target/Elimination Classes.)
Select the Flow-Through Source page to review the source data.
Right click on the page and then select Export to Excel.
When a dataset is copied you can select the option to omit flow-through records from the source dataset. To eliminate Flow-Through data from the Source dataset:
In My Datasets select the Source Dataset.
Select More and then Dataset Parameters.
Type EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES for the Parameter Name.
Type Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.
Type 1 for the Parameter Value.
Click Save.
Copy the Source dataset to create a new dataset from the source dataset.
When you select Net Adjustments, the calculated values are transferred. By selecting the appropriate Components, you can define current taxes as deferred taxes. For the State, you can select a state for the state taxes.
Target Adjustment for Federal Current Taxes:
Select the Component and then the Type.
Target Adjustment for Federal Deferred:
Select the Component and then the Type.
Target Adjustment for Federal Equity:
Select the Component and then the Type.
Target Adjustment for State Current Taxes:
Select the Component, Type and then the State.
Target Adjustment for State Deferred Taxes:
Select the Component, Type and then the State.
Target Adjustment for State Equity:
Select the Component, Type and then State.
In My Datasets, you can create journal entry profiles. By using Journal Entry Profiles, you can set up a Profile Definition, Journal Entry Lines and then Assign Units.
Journal Entry Profiles let you create multiple journal entry configurations and assign them to one or
more units.
You can create a Classes or a Tags dataset for journal entry profiles.
Each unit can have either Journal Entry profiles or Unit Journal Entry configurations, not both.
Journal Entry profiles are located within Data Entry dataset administration.
The Unit Journal Entry configuration page is located in the Data Entry administration for Federal and State.
A Unit does not have to be assigned to a Journal Entry Profile.
NEW JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE (DATASET LEVEL)
To create a Journal Entry Profile:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Journal Entry Profiles.
Select the plus sigh to add a profile and then type the Code, Name and Description.
NEW JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE (UNIT LEVEL)
To create a Unit Journal Entry Line:
Select My Datasets and then Units for a dataset.
Select More and then Journal Entry Profiles.
Click Create New.
Select the JE Type and then JE Code.
Select the JE Summary and type the Description.
Select the Debit GL Account and Credit GL Account.
Type the Cost Center and Department Code, if needed.
Warning: If you create a Journal Entry at the Unit level, journal entries are deleted. You will receive a message to confirm the deletion of journal entries.
EDIT JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE
To edit a Journal Entry Profile:
Type the new Name and then the new Description.
Code cannot be edited.
COPY JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE
To copy a Journal Entry Profile:
Select Journal Entry Profile.
Select Copy and then type the New Code(required).
Type the new Name for Edit Journal Entry Profile and then Description.
Click OK.
DELETE JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE
To delete a Journal Entry Profile:
Select Delete.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the journal entry profile.
Click OK to delete.
PROFILE DEFINITION
To set up the Profile Definition:
Select the Journal Entry Profile.
To ensure you selected the correct journal entry profile, review the Code, Name, and Description.
For Datasets with classes:
Click Include All Classes to include all classes in the journal entry profile.
This function is for datasets created with classes.
This option includes all new classes.
To select all Source classes, select the box on the header row.
To define specific source classes, click the box next to the selected class.
You can sort and filter the Source Class list by Type, Code, or Class Name.
To select Journal Entry Codes, click Include All Classes to remove the check mark.
To select all Journal Entry Codes, select the box in the header row and then select each Journal Entry Code.
If you need to exclude a few Journal Entry Codes, select all the Journal Entry Codes and then select each Journal Entry Code, to remove the check mark.
Click Save.
Note: If using a Tag dataset, the Source Classes will not appear.
JOURNAL LINES
To create new Journal Lines:
Click Create New.
Click JE Type.
This is a required field.
You will define the jurisdiction type applicable for the new journal entry.
You can select Federal, State, or both.
Click JE Code.
Each journal entry line must have a unique JE Code.
Click JE Summary.
The JE Summary is optional for data entry.
You create the user defined value for the Journal Entry Summary page within the System folder in Administration.
You can group multiple Journal Entry lines together.
The grouping depends on the JE Summary values created in Administration.
The Journal Entry lines are grouped together for Reporting.
Type Name.
Enter the journal entry name in the required field.
Select the Debit and Credit Account.
The accounts selected appear on the JE reports. If an account value is unavailable:
Select Administration.
Click Manage Trial Balances.
Select Trial Balances Sublines.
For the JE Post column, select the account to post the JE.
Click Save.
Select the Flex 1-9 and type notes.
Click the Show/Hide button to see supplemental information.
The "Flex" fields are optional and apply to custom reports.
To change the Flex field labels:
Select Administration.
Select System.
Select Manage Configurations.
Select Advanced Functionality and then Journal Entries.
Type the new label name for Journal Entry Supplemental Field #1-9.
Click Save.
Note: To complete the setup for the Journal Entry lines, configure both the Tax and Book entries.
TAX CALCULATIONS
To set up the Tax Calculations (These steps configure the Tax journal entries):
Click Create New.
Click Tax Calc Filter to filter the list of tax calculations.
Click Tax Calculation to select the tax calculation.
Select Component to separately state a code with a tax calculation in the Difference column.
Type the Factor.
Click Save.
To delete the tax calculations:
Select the Tax Calculation from the Tax Calculations list.
Click Delete.
Click Delete All to delete all the Tax Calculations from the list.
GL SOURCES
To set up the General Ledger Sources (These steps configure the Book journal entries):
Click Create New.
Click GL Account to select the GL Account.
The list is the same for both Debits and Credits.
Type the Factor.
Enter a negative Factor to create a difference between the Book and Tax values (most common) in the Journal Entry report.
Click Save.
To delete the General Ledger Sources:
Select the GL Account from the GL Account list.
Click Delete.
Click Delete All to delete all the Tax Calculations from the list.
ASSIGNED UNITS
You assign a Journal Entry Profile to Available Unit(s). A unit can be assigned to multiple journal entry profiles.
To assign a Journal Entry Profile to selected unit(s):
In the Available Units list, select the Unit(s).
To add multiple units to a journal entry profile, press the Ctrl key and then select the units.
To sort or filter the Available and Assigned Units by code or name, click the Code or Name
header row.
Click the Right Arrow to assign the units to the Assigned Units list.
You can assign one Journal Entry Profile per unit.
Click Save.
Warning: Journal Entry configurations previously set up at the unit level
101
will be permanently removed.
To change the values for a selected unit:
Select the Unit from the Assigned Units list.
Click the Add Unit Flex Field Overrides icon.
Type the new value in the flex field.
Click Save to update the unit with the new value.
Click Cancel to leave the page without saving changes.
To reset all values, click Clear All Fields.
Notes:
To change the view of the page layout from vertical to horizontal, select Horizontal or Vertical in the top right corner.
When you assign a unit to a different profile, a message appears This unit has journal entry configurations defined. These records will be removed(deleted) upon save. Would you like to continue with the assignment of the unit? Select Yes, or Yes to All to assign the profile. Select No to keep the current Journal Entry Configuration.
The Unit Code and Name are provided in Available Units (Not Already Assigned to this Profile)." The Unit Code, Name, and Override? are provided in Assigned Units.
You can set up additional Journal Entry options such as rounding, creating groups, and adding
supplemental information in Manage Configurations, within the Journal Entry tab
496 .
Administrators can manage Deferred Rollforwards at the System administration and Dataset administration levels. They can set up Tags or Classes & Subclasses to define how adjustments appear in reports. They can create up to 26 Columns for reporting purposes. Unassigned will appear in the Default column.
SETTINGS
At the Dataset level, you can Add, Edit, and Delete NOL rollforward columns by class. You can also move the NOL rollforward columns Up and Down in the list.
COPY FROM ADMIN
NOL rollforward settings in administration are applied to new datasets. Datasets that are copied or rolled over are assigned the settings of the dataset from which they are copied/rolled over. You can reset the dataset NOL rollforward to the "Administration" settings by clicking Copy From Admin.
Information set up in the Dataset folder is used to generate the Deferred Balances report
277
for the column
break out view, the Deferred Entry Set-up 38 page, and the Rollforward section in the Temporary Difference
pages. The rollforward section is in Data Entry in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.
MANAGE NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS:
To manage NOL rollforwards in a dataset:
In My Datasets and then More.
Select NOL Rollforwards.
Select Copy From Admin to copy the settings from the System level in Administration. This will overwrite the data for the current dataset.
Click the arrow to move the NOL rollforward columns up and down.
NEW NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS:
To add a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select Add and then type the name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
Click OK.
EDIT NOL COLUMN:
To edit a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select Edit and then type the new name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
Click OK.
DELETE NOL COLUMN:
To delete a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select a NOL Rollforward Column.
Select Delete and the message appears, All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to.
Select the NOL Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the NOL Rollforward Column.
Click OK to delete.
To Assign NOL Rollforward Column Value to Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:
Class Code - Name is a list of available classes.
Select a class for the columns: Activity, Deferred, and/or Balance Sheet Only.
Unassigned is the default class.
The NOL Rollforward class defines where the balances are entered for an adjustment. Therefore, for each class name, you can only have one Type (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance Sheet Only).
ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY
The Assignment Summary page lists the classes, column and assignments.
NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMN NAME
The column name assigned to the class.
CLASS
The class assigned to the NOL rollforward column.
CLASS TYPE
There are four types of classes available:
Data Entry
Transfer
Flow Through
System
DATA ENTRY COLUMN
The type defined for the adjustment.
You can manage NOL Rollforwards for dataset classes in My Datasets. To manage NOL rollforwards in Administration:
Select Administration and then System.
470.
When new datasets are added, the NOL rollforward uses the information set up in the Administration, Manage NOL Rollforward folder.
To manage NOL rollforwards in a dataset:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Manage NOL Rollforwards.
To set up Manage NOL Rollforwards in My Datasets, click the Copy from Admin option to copy the information from the administration to the data entry.
Notes:
When new datasets are created, NOL rollforward information is populated using the information set up in Administration, Manage NOL Rollforwards.
In Manage NOL Rollforwards, click Copy from Admin to copy information to the dataset from the Administration, System folder.
Information set up in the Dataset Administration folder is used to populate the Deferred Balances
277 in the column breakout view, the Deferred Entry Set-up
38 screen, and the Rollforward
section in the Temporary Difference screens. The rollforward section is in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.
You can follow these guidelines to manage NOL rollforwards at the dataset level:
The setup for new datasets is copied from Administration. Datasets that are copied or rolled over use the setup of the dataset from which they are copied/rolled over. You can reset these datasets to the Administration area by clicking Copy From Admin.
Select the number of columns.
You enter amounts according to defined Column Names. Therefore, for each column name, you can only have one Type (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance Sheet Only). Be sure to click Save when you finish entering information.
The letters on the right side of the screen are the tag letters.
Check the Active box if the Column name should display as a data row in the Rollforward section of Temporary Difference screens.
Note: If the information for a Column name is entered in the Detail section, the Column name will display as a data row in the Rollforward section of Temporary Difference screens even if the Active box is not checked in the Rollforward section.
If a column name is associated with multiple tags, amounts associated with that name become Read- Only.
If more than one Type is defined for a column name the default is as follows:
If Activity, Deferred Only, and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
If Activity and Deferred Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
If Activity and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Balance Sheet Only.
If Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only are defined, the Type posts as Deferred Only.
By using Payable Settings, you can assign Transaction Types to a Custom Tab for the Payable Summary option. You use the Payable Summary option in My Datasets > More to assign transaction types. You can assign transaction types to limit the number of transaction types available in the Custom Tab.
To view the Payable Settings option in the More drop-down list, you will import the system parameter, SHOW_PAYABLE_SETTINGS, to activate it.
To activate the Payable Settings system parameter:
In the Categories import spreadsheet, select the #XXX worksheet.
Type SHOW_PAYABLE_SETTINGS for parameter and then 1 for the parameter value.
In Administration, select Import Categories.
To assign a Transaction Type to a Custom Tab:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Click Payable Settings.
Select a Transaction Type from the drop-down list.
Select a Custom Tab from the drop-down list.
Click Save.
Payable Settings
You can populate your state rates in a specific dataset. You use the State Rates option in My Datasets > More to work with the state rates. You will select the state then enter the Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate and State Tax Rate. You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the State Rates option in the More drop-down list.
To activate the parameter for the State Rates option select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type StateRates for the Parameter Name > select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.
COPY FROM ADMIN
Select Copy from Admin to copy the state rates set up in Administration.
POPULATE ALL
Select Populate All to add all default state rates from Administration.
To enter data the State Rates:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select State Rates.
Select the State.
Select a State from the State drop-down list.
Type the Beg Deferred Rate.
Type the End Deferred Rate.
Type the State Tax Rate.
Mass Update Rates 91 lets you apply Tax and Currency Rates on a universal basis to datasets.
See Override Option 93 for more information about overriding rates.
You can layer Temporary Differences to create the Tax Basis Balance sheet. You use the Tax Basis Mapping option in My Datasets > More to create the mappings.
Component Types available: After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences.
You will see Tax Basis Mapping only in Tax Provision datasets.
The Debit and Credit drop-down lists contain trial balance sublines and are used to configure the Tax Basis Balance Sheet and Tax Basis Income Statement.
The trial balance sublines are available in the Debit and Credit drop-down lists. The sublines remain in the lists, even after the sublines are assigned to a temporary difference.
You can map multiple temporary differences to the same trial balance sublines.
The same trial balance subline can be entered as a debit and credit for a single temporary difference.
A Temporary Difference will not appear in the Difference list, once you add it to Tax Basis Mapping.
To change or delete a Tax Basis mapping line, you must remove all data associated with the mapping.
When both sides post to the Balance Sheet, you can set one account as the offsetting Contra Account.
You can designate whether the debit account or the credit account has the reverse sign. Then, the two temporary adjustments will offset each other.
You can set one account as the offsetting Contra Account when you are setting up two Balance Sheet accounts and select a credit or debit balance for the entry.
The temporary difference and trial balance sublines are set up in the Trial Balance Sublines page in Administration.
The same trial balance subline can be entered as a debit and credit for a single temporary difference.
Trial Balance Sublines are set up in Administration > Manage Trial Balances > Trial Balance Sublines.
431 for more information about setting up the Tax Basis Balance Sheet
298 and
300 .
By using the Tax Account Mapping option, you can configure the payable presentation in the report. You will assign where each of the Payable Txn Types appear by mapping them to Transaction Categories.
Note: Dataset Tax Accounts Mapping is a separate mapping from the Payable mapping.
Tax Adjustment Payable Mappings
By using the Tax Adjustment Payable Mapping option, you can designate how the adjustments with the NC_ (Non-Cash Tax Adjustments) are posted into the Payable. You can determine how adjustments such as NC_RTP, NC_ATR, NC_OTHER,NC_FIN48 and other items are posted.
An administrator can choose one or both of the following options to setup dataset parameters within the application. You can select both parameters to activate the functionality and configure other Non Cash tax adjustment codes posted to the payable.
To set up the parameter for all datasets to configure specific Non Cash tax adjustment code(s) to post to the payable:
You can check both boxes and use a combination of the two methods. For example, if you want to manually configure all the NC_ adjustments except NC_RTP, NC_ATR, NC_OTHER you would check the Post NC_ to payable with system mapping, and utilize the existing functionality. Next, select the Post NC_ to payable with manual mapping, to enable the manual mapping functionality.
The following options appear in the bottom left of the Tax Adjustment Payable Mapping page. Select these options to post payables.
Post NC_ to payable with manual mapping.
Post NC_ to payable with system mapping.
To activate the functionality to post the Non Cash tax adjustment code(s) NC_RTP, NC_ATR, NC_OTHER to the payable, select Post NC_ to payable with system mapping.
Select the tax adjustments for payable mapping.
You will find the Tax Adjustment Payable Mappings are available at the Federal and State tax adjustment levels.
Select the Code-Description, Tax Adj. Tag or Class & Subclass, Fiscal Year, Txn Type, Txn Bucket, and Payable Tag or Payable Class & Subclass.
4. Select the Code-Description.
The Payable Tag and Classes determine how the adjustment will be sorted within the Payable. You can configure the settings on a NC_ basis if you want to set up a parameter.
By using the Payable Summary Entry option, you can enter the payable transactions for all units and jurisdictions in one list.
Warning: If the tax adjustments are also mapped in Tax Adjustment Payable Mapping is posted twice.
83, the adjustment
You must activate system parameters to access the payable pages.
Enable Payable Summary Entry (Manage Configurations)
Custom Tab (Manage Configurations)
Enable Reclass Tab (Manage Configurations)
Payable Settings (Manage Restricted Feature)
You can import the Payable Settings parameter or call the ONESOURCE Provision support team to activate the parameter.
You define the payable transaction groups within the Payable Settings 79 page.
PAYABLE DETAIL
By default, the system parameter Enable Payable Summary Entry is not activated.
Once activated, the Enable Payable Summary Entry page appears in data entry.
By default, the system parameter Enable Reclass Tab is not activated.
Once activated, the Reclass tab appears in the payable summary page for data entry.
You can create two Custom Tabs to separate transaction types. Custom tabs are created by activating the Custom Tabs system parameters.
If payable data exists for the Federal or State payables, that data will appear on the first Custom Tab by default.
The data entered to the Payable Summary page is linked the Federal and State payable data entry pages for all units.
ENABLE PAYABLE SUMMARY ENTRY
To Enable the Payable Summary Entry:
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable
Enable Payable Summary Entry.
NAME CUSTOM TABS
To can create Custom Tabs:
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality >
Payable.
Select the Number of Tabs to display (maximum 2).
Type the Custom Tab Name 1. Default value: Payable 1.
Type the Custom Tab Name 2. Default value: Payable 2.
ENABLE RECLASS TAB
To Enable the Reclass Tab page:
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality >
Payable.
3. Click Enable Reclass Tab.
RECLASS DATA ENTRY
To enter Reclass Data Entry transactions for Reclass:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Payable Summary Entry.
Select the Unit and then Fiscal Year.
Select the Jurisdiction and then Rollup.
Select the Txn Type (Transaction Type) and then Txn Bucket (Transaction Bucket).
Select Class and then Subclass.
Type the Amount and then Date.
Select the FX Rate and then Description.
Click Save.
If the Total Reclass does not equal zero a message appears that a reverse entry must be made.
A reverse entry is required to Save the data entry.
Read-Only data appears after the reclass is Saved.
PAYABLE SUMMARY ENTRY (CUSTOM TAB 1 & 2)
To enter Payable Summary Entry transactions:
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Payable Summary Entry.
Select the Unit and then Fiscal Year.
Select the Jurisdiction and then Rollup.
Select the Txn Type (Transaction Type) and then Txn Bucket (Transaction Bucket).
Select Class and then Subclass.
Type the Amount and then Date.
Select the FX Rate and then Description.
Click Save.
Note:
If a Jurisdiction does not appear in the drop-down, then activate the jurisdiction. To activate the jurisdiction, in My Datasets, click Units, Jurisdictions (Fed/State) and then Activate.
If a Txn Type does not appear in the drop-down, the administrator must set up the transaction type in Administration.
If a Rollup does not appear in the drop-down, the administrator must set up the rollup type in Administration.
You can review the results of the Unit Summary report in the Lock/Unlock Unit option. You can Lock/Unlock units within a dataset. You can view the Unit Code, Name, Pre-Tax, Total Tax, ETR, Note, Locked, Primary Contact, Last Modified, and Date.
You can Export the data from the Lock/Unlock Units page. However, you cannot Import data into this page.
By default, the filter is turned on, and only the units that are assigned to the Primary Contact appear. The option filters the unit list using the Primary Contact name. Apply and Clear filters to view specific information in the list.
To lock units in a dataset:
In My Datasets, select More.
Select Lock/Unlock Unit.
Click Locked for each Unit Code.
3. Click Save.
To lock all units in a dataset:
Click Locked in the column header.
Click OK to proceed or Cancel to close without locking all units.
To unlock units in a dataset:
Click Locked in the Locked column to remove the option.
Click Save.
GAAP to STAT Dataset Parameters
DATASET PARAMETER CHANGE FOR RTP GAAP/STAT POSTING
You can change the tags for the permanent, temporary, GAAP RTP tag and RTP tag. The tags change in the provision dataset designated as the return dataset (RTP Return) in Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets Dataset Relations.
To change the tags for the permanent, temporary, GAAP RTP, and RTP :
Select My Datasets and then More.
Select Dataset Parameters and then Type the Parameter Name.
List of Parameter Names:
GAAPADJTAG
STATADJTAG
GAAPRTPTAG
RTPTAG
Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.
Type the Tag Letter for the Parameter Value.
Parameter Value is the letter you want to designate as the tag letter.
An Administrator can configure the percentage of estimated liability in the quarters, the extension payment, and the minimum taxes that may be required.
The Jurisdiction Management option is only available in Estimated Payments datasets.
Each jurisdiction, including Federal, needs to be formatted in Jurisdiction Management for data to
compute and flow to the Federal Estimated Payments
346 and State Estimated Payments
332 reports.
To add a percentage for payments, extensions, and minimum taxes:
Select a jurisdiction in the Jurisdictions column.
Double-click a cell and type a percentage.
To import 588 the jurisdiction management parameter, complete the appropriate fields in the #J# Jurisdictions
sheet in the Import Numbers template.
In My Datasets, you can manage Estimated Payments items in Estimated Payments datasets only. Items entered are added to the provision when calculating estimated payments.
To access the Estimated Payments option select My Datasets > More > Jurisdiction Management.
Other Income Tax (additive to Cash Provision): Adds an additional amount to the provision liability in the state estimated payments calculation.
Calculated Income Tax Pymt Override: Overrides the calculated state estimated payments.
Franchise Payments: Additional amount of Franchise Tax that should be included with the provision liability in the state estimated payments calculation.
Include this State in Estimated Payments Calc?: Includes or excludes the state for the estimated payments calculation.
To import information to the Estimated Payments section, complete the appropriate fields on the #S# States sheet in the Import Numbers template.
Jurisdiction Management
Estimated Payment Jurisdiction Management
By using the Mass Update Rates option in the system, you can apply Tax and Foreign Currency Rates on a universal basis to datasets. Administrators maintain Mass Update Rates in Administration > System.
There are separate rates for each Country and State, as well as the FX rate for Currency. The columns added to track rates include Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate, Current Tax Rate, Beginning FX (Spot) Rate, Weighted FX Rate, Ending FX (Spot), and State Tax Rate. There are also options to override the rates.
You can upload Mass Update Rates to a dataset from the Manage States 436 , and the Manage Countries
469
options within Administration. The Mass Update Rates parameters must be activated.
The Mass Update Rates option automatically transfers the rates for a dataset, once. After the initial transfer of rates, you can enter all rate changes to the dataset manually.
You can use Mass Update Rates for the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets.
Rates are maintained in My Datasets.
All units created before setting up the Currency/Country/State parameters dataset parameters are automatically populated with the default values. The Rate default value is 0% for Tax and 1 for FX.
Once the Currency/Country/State parameters are activated, the Override Rate options for the Federal and State levels appear in the Unit and State Details screens.
When the States, Countries, and Currencies do not have data, the Override Rate functionality appears in Read-only mode.
This section describes the process of creating Mass Update Rates
SET UP MASS UPDATE RATES
To set up the Mass Update Rates:
Select Administration and then System.
Select Manage Countries and type the Countries Rates.
Select Manage Currencies and type the Currencies Rates.
91 .
Select Manage States, then States and type the States Rates.
MASS UPDATE RATE PARAMETERS
To set up the Mass Update Rate Parameters:
In the My Datasets, select a Provision dataset.
Select More and then Dataset Parameters.
Type the Parameter Name.
List of Parameter Names:
CountryRates
CurrencyRates
StateRates
Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.
Type Y for the Parameter Value.
RATE POPULATION
There are two ways to initially complete the State, Country, and Currency with Mass Update Rates:
The rates are transferred from Administration to populate the lists:
In My Datasets, select a Provision dataset.
Select More and then select Currency Rates, Country Rates or State Rates.
Click Populate All to transfer all rates.
The alternative method is to add individual rates at the Dataset level:
In the My Datasets, select the Provision dataset.
Select More and then select Currency Rates, Country Rates or State Rates.
Click Add and then select a code from the list.
Click Save. The application automatically transfers the rates to the units for this Symbol/Code along with the existing Mass Update Rates.
To refresh the Dataset level rates with the updated rates in the Administration area, click Copy From Admin.
When you create a new unit, it uses the rates set at the dataset level as the default. Override Rate options
132 Details are now Read/Write. The default for the Override Rate options is unselected.
When the Override Rate check box is selected, the rate becomes the rate at the Unit level, not for the entire dataset.
There are three views of the Override functionality in the Unit and State Details screens.
Before parameters and rates are set up, the new units created are populated with default rates. No override rate functionality is available. All rates set up for the unit and state details pages are available for the Unit level only.
Units created after parameters are set, but before States, Countries, and/or Currencies are populated, use default rates. Override rate functionality is available in read-only mode.
Units created after States, Countries, and/or Currencies are populated use dataset level rates and have override rate functionality available.
Here are some important points to remember:
The Mass Update Rate process works the same for the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets.
All rates move with a dataset when it is rolled over 380 or copied.
Deleting a dataset does not affect any rates, including the Mass Update Rate, for the remaining datasets.
When a PTBI Data Entry Policy 108 is selected for Enter Local, USD, FX and the Override Rate box is
not checked for the Weighted Average FX Rate, even though the policy states you can enter a value, the Weighted Average FX Rate remains Read-only when Mass Update Rate parameters are applied.
Parameters can restrict the data entry and modifications that Read/Write users can perform. However, they do not affect Administrators, who always have full privileges. Read/write users can view all data; however, they are limited in what they can create or modify, depending on how parameters are set up.
There are two dataset parameters available that restrict data entry for read/write users:
RestrictTA: This parameter determines the tax adjustment existing entries or creating new ones.
184 codes that cannot be used for editing
RestrictTag_X: This parameter determines the tags that cannot be used for editing existing entries or creating new ones.
Administrators create the parameters for restrictions in My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters
765 for
a Provision dataset. (A read/write user cannot set up parameters.) The Parameter Value is the first part (or entire string) of the Tag or Tax Adjustment Code that becomes restricted for Read/Write users. The Parameter Type is Alphanumeric.
Note: You can set up Parameters before or after entries are created. If a user is working in the system while parameters are being created, the user needs to refresh the system in order for the parameters to take effect.
For example, if the RestrictTA parameter has a value of D, the entry for D1000 is marked as Restricted. Read/Write users cannot edit the entry, nor can they create a new entry with a tax adjustment code beginning with D (D will not be available in the Code-Description drop-down list).
If the restricting tag is M, then M is part of the parameter value and parameter type. Because the RestrictTag_M was created, the entry with the tag M is marked as Tag Restricted. Read/Write users cannot edit the entry, nor can they create a new entry with any M tag.
Note: The restricting character, in the case - M, must be the Parameter Value, as well as part of the Parameter Type.
The RestrictTag_X parameter controls which tags Read/Write users can modify and limits the entries they can create. The Parameter Value can end with any letter from B-Z.
Notes:
The letter A should not be used as a Tag Letter. It is reserved for system automation.
Read/write users can edit the entry (the adjustment can be changed) and delete it (the Delete button is active).
For the tag marked Tag Restricted, all buttons are inactive. In addition, once a tag is restricted, the Source field only displays a single letter code (M for example). It no longer displays the Source code's description. However, Administrators can still view the entire entry (M - Manual for example) in the Source field.
The RestrictTA parameter controls which tax adjustment codes Read/Write users can modify and limits the entries they can create. The Parameter Value can be the first character, a combination of the first few characters, or the entire code.
Note: Read/write users can edit the entry (the adjustment can be changed) and deleted (the Delete button is active). The tax adjustment code is marked Restricted and all buttons are inactive.
In My Datasets, you can see how many units are active or inactive for a dataset in the Units column. When you activate units for a dataset, the number of units activated appears in the units column. The dataset's Status changes from Inactive to Active. If no units are activated in a dataset, the dataset has an Inactive Status.
To access the Manage Units :
Select My Datasets.
Click the Units button for a dataset and the Manage Units page opens giving you access to all units in the system.
Units
You can access Manage Units from the My Datasets grid. Here you will access and set up your units.
1 | Use the back button to go to My Datasets page. |
2 | Use Manage Units to see the dataset name, year, period, type and option, along with the number of Active/Inactive Units within the dataset. |
3 | Use the Manage Units ribbon to Activate All Units, Export All Units, and the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table. |
4 | Use the Data Table to review and group unit information, select actions, activate a unit, and manage jurisdictions. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid. |
5 | Use Actions to lock/unlock units and select More for access to the Unit Administration pages related to the unit. |
In Manage Units, you can Activate All Units, and Export All Units in the grid. For each unit, you can use each line of the grid to Lock/Unlock the unit, perform Unit Dataset Administration tasks. You can also access the Jurisdictions/States page to activate and then edit them. To change the view of the grid, you can filter, sort, and search as well as Show/Hide columns in the grid.
You can use use the options to edit, configure and manage your units and jurisdictions within the dataset.
98
596
98
127
Manage Units
Use the Back Arrow to return to the My Datasets page.
Manage Units
In the Manage Units page, you can activate all units by selecting the Activate All Units button. You must activate the Units for a Dataset in order to review and edit the unit's data.
Activate All Units
In Manage Units, you can use each line of the grid to perform actions for a unit. You can Lock/Unlock Units, and access the Unit Administration pages related to the unit.
You can perform the following Actions for units.
Lock/Unlock Units 99
More - Unit Administration 99
Manage Units Actions
In the Manage Units page, you can lock and unlock a unit by selecting the Lock/Unlock button.
Lock/Unlock button
Administrators, Read/Write, and Read Only users can access the Unit Administration options by selecting the More button. Not all users can view or access the options within this list. The options available within
this list depend on the user's rights and parameters 57 activated in the system.
The following Unit Administration options are available for unit administration:
Setting up Unit Administration
100
106
101
118
107
113
Setting up Unit Administration
To set up a unit's administration:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Select an option from the list to open that page.
Units More Options
JOURNAL ENTRY DETAILS
In Manage Units, you can add Journal entries for Provision and Interim datasets.
See Journal Entry Profiles 69 for more information about setting up your Journal Entries.
Note: When a unit is assigned to a Journal Entry Profile, the Journal Entry page no longer appears Manage Units. You will receive a message that there is already a Journal Entry Profile associated with this unit.
The balances calculated on the journal entry page appear on the Journal Entry reports.
Journal entries are created on a unit-by-unit basis.
You can create Journal Entries in one unit and then copy them for other units using the import spreadsheet.
Each unit can have either Unit Journal Entry configurations or Journal Entries profiles, not both.
Unit journal entries configuration page is located in Manage Units > More drop-down list.
To import journal entries, copy the data to the #JES# Journal Entries and #JETAX# JE Tax Calcs sheets for the "Import Numbers" template.
Tax effected balances based on journal entry configurations appear in the Journal Entry reports.
To add Journal Entries in Manage Units:
Select the JE Type and then JE Code.
Select the JE Summary and type the Description.
Unit Journal Entries
To create Journal Entries 673 at the unit level:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Select Journal Entry Profiles.
Select Add.
Select the JE Type.
This field is required.
Define Jurisdiction (Federal, State, or both) type applicable to new Journal Entry.
Select the JE Code.
Each journal entry line is required to have a unique JE Code.
Select the JE Summary.
This field is optional.
User defined value at Journal Entry Summary page from the System folder within Administration area.
Based on the JE Summary value and groups multiple journal entries together for reports.
Type the Name.
Type the Description.
Select the Debit GL Account and then the Credit GL Account.
The accounts will appear on the journal entry reports.
If the Debit GL Account and Credit GL Account are not listed then:
Select Administration > Manage Trial Balances > Trial Balances Sublines.
Select the account Code listed on the JE Post column.
Click Save.
Type Supplemental Information.
To rename the Flex Field Labels:
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries.
Type the label name in the "Journal Entry Supplemental Field Name #1-9."
The entries are immediately saved.
Warning: Journal Entry configurations previously set up at the "unit level" within the Federal and State folders will be permanently removed.
TAX CALCULATIONS
To set up the Tax Calculations (These steps configure the Tax journal entries):
Click Add.
Click Tax Calc Filter to filter the list of tax calculations.
Click Tax Calculation to select the tax calculation.
Select Component to separately state a code with a tax calculation in the Difference column.
Type the Factor.
Click the plus sign to add the calculation.
To delete a Tax Calculation:
Select a Tax Calculation.
Click X.
GL SOURCES
To set up the General Ledger Sources (These steps configure the Book journal entries):
Click Add.
Select the JE Type Federal or State.
The list is the same for both Debits and Credits.
Type the JE Code. The code entered is associated with the journal entry.
Select the JE Summary.
Type the Description.
Click the GL Sources tab.
Select the GL Account.
The GL Account to select the General Ledger account.
Type the Factor.
Enter a negative Factor to create a difference between the Book and Tax values (most common) in the Journal Entry report.
To delete the General Ledger Sources:
Select the GL Account.
Click X.
Click Delete All to delete all of the Tax Calculations from the list.
To delete Journal Entries:
Select the Journal Entry Code Name.
Click Delete.
To delete all of the Journal Entries, you must activate the Delete All option.
Activate the Delete All option by selecting Administration > System > Manage Configurations >
Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries.
For the parameter "Show Delete All Journal Entries Menu Option", click Yes.
For the parameter "Show Delete All button on Journal Entry Screen", click Yes.
Click Delete All to delete all journal entries.
Note: To complete the setup for the Journal Entry lines, select the Tax Calculation tab to configure Tax entries and the GL Sources tab to configure the Book entries.
TAXES PER BOOK
Taxes Per Book are entered on the Taxes Per book page. The balances entered are used for Journal entry reports and compare the balances entered to the provision calculations.
To enter in taxes per book for a Provision dataset:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and then click Other.
Click the Taxes Per Book.
Type the balances.
To import taxes per book complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import numbers template.
In Manage Units, you can set up the Unit Dataset Parameters for Provision, Interim and Estimated Payments datasets. Administrators use Unit dataset parameters to change how data is treated or represented within a unit.
You can add, modify or delete pre-established unit dataset parameters
772 .
When adding or modifying parameters, use care, as they can potentially change calculations across all the units in the dataset.
Parameters are pre-defined and are case-sensitive. The Key Type and Value have specific designations for each parameter.
Deleting parameters is not recommended, because they may be required for the system to function properly. It is recommended that you de-activate a parameter, rather than deleting it.
To import a new unit dataset parameter, complete the appropriate fields on the #UDSP# UDS Params sheet in the Import Numbers template.
Unit Dataset Parameters
You can enter Unit Dataset Parameters
Select My Datasets.
772 to activate additional options in the system.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and select Unit Dataset Parameters.
Type the Parameter Key, Parameter Type and Parameter Value.
Click Save.
Warning: Parameters are generally set up by an Implementation Manager or with the help of the Support team.
In the Unit Rates page, you can view and set up the rates needed for calculations. You can set up the PTBI Data Entry Policy, Weighted Average FX Rate, Statutory Tax Rates, FX Rates, and Deferred Provision Only Adjustment.
To set up a unit's rates:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, select the More drop-down list.
Click Rates.
Unit Rates
In the Rates page, you can use the Deactivate Unit button to remove the unit record from the dataset by deactivating the unit.
Warning:
If you choose to deactivate a unit, the unit records are deleted. All data in the dataset for that unit is deleted.
You can choose Deactivate Unit upon Rollover during the rollover process. If each deferred and payable line in the unit equals zero, the unit will not roll over to the new dataset and no record is created.
PRE-TAX BOOK INCOME (REPORT)
You can select the PTBI Data Entry Policy to calculate data for the report. The default PTBI Data Entry Policy is Enter Local, FX; Calc USD.
PTBI DATA ENTRY POLICY
There are five options for entering Pre-Tax Book Income, which are determined by the data entry policy. From
the PTBI Data Entry Policy drop-down list, select the desired PTBI method
108.
To change the PTBI Policy:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Select Rates.
Click Change.
Select one of the following policies to calculate data for reporting:
Enter USD, FX and Calc Local.
Enter Local, USD and Calc FX.
Enter Local, USD and FX.
Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding.
Policy | Local Currency PBT | Reporting Currency PBT | FX Rate | Rounding |
Enter Local, FX and Calc USD | Entered | Calculated | Entered | N/A |
Enter USD, FX and Calc Local | Calculated | Entered | Entered | N/A |
Enter Local, USD and Calc FX | Entered | Entered | Calculated | N/A |
Enter Local, USD and FX | Entered | Entered | Entered | N/A |
Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding | Entered | Entered | Entered | Calculated |
If Enter Local, USD and Calc FX policy is selected and the Local PTBI equals zero:
The system attempts to compute the reporting by dividing zero by the Weighted Average FX and returning "unknown," with no amounts displaying in reporting currency. To display amounts in reporting currency, select another PTBI policy and enter the Weighted Average FX.
Reports in reporting currency display with the message: Unit(s) included in the report have an Unknown Weighted Average FX. Amounts in those units will be excluded in reporting currency.
When using the last two policies, Effective Tax rates may differ in Local Currency and Reporting Currency because the PTBI is using a different Weighted Average rate than the entered Weighted Average.
When using the last policy, the rounding amount is included on a separate line in the Effective Tax Rate report.
Regardless of the policy selected, amounts other than the PTBI are converted at the entered Weighted Average or Spot rate.
The Wghtd Avg FX Rate is the specified Weighted Average Foreign Exchange rate for the unit for the period covered by the dataset. Enter the rate using the ratio of 1 unit of the reporting currency equals the local currency. The Weighted Average Foreign Exchange rate is used to convert entries for the unit that have an Income Statement provision impact. You can enter 1 if the local and reporting currency are the same. If you do not enter a rate, the system will populate the field with 1.
Weighted FX Rate
In the Unit Rates page, you can enter the following rates.
CURRENT TAX RATE
Type the Current Tax Rate
BEGINNING DEFERRED RATE
Type the Beginning Deferred Rate
ENDING DEFERRED RATE
Type the Ending Deferred Rate
UNIT TAX RATES
The current and deferred tax rates for the specified unit are used for all unit specific reports and are taken into account for Federal Benefit of State (FBOS) calculations when working with state data.
If the Beginning and Ending Deferred Tax rates differ for a unit the system automatically calculates any necessary change in rate adjustment on the beginning temporary difference balances. Support for the calculated adjustment displays in the deferred balances report as a separate column.
If the Current Tax rate and the Ending Deferred Tax rate differ for the unit, the system automatically calculates the necessary impact of the rate difference for activity entered for temporary differences. The impact of the rate difference can be viewed in the Effective Tax Rate report.
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock the Beg, End, Beg Deferred, and FX Rates.
In the Unit Rates page, you can enter the following rates.
BEGINNING SPOT
Type the Beginning Spot rate.
ENDING SPOT
Type the Ending Spot rate.
DEFERRED FX RATES
Enter the specific Beginning and Ending Spot rate for the unit for the period covered by the dataset in the Beginning and Ending entry fields. The rate should be entered using the ratio of what 1 unit of the reporting currency would equal in the local currency. The Beginning and Ending Spot rate is used to convert entries for the unit that have a Balance Sheet provision impact. You can enter 1 if the local and reporting currency are the same.
Note: If Enter Local, RC; Calc FX is selected as the Data Entry Policy, and Local or USD PTBI is zero, an unknown FX rate populates the Unit details. The Unit PTBI will be ignored in all reports.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustment
The adjustment to the deferred tax provision expense is presented on the tax provision report as a separate line item and impacts the Effective Tax Rate. The deferred expense amount does not have a related deferred tax asset or liability associated with it.
Ensure that you use this field appropriately because it may require additional support to justify the expense on the provision.
If you utilize this adjustment additional support to justify the expense on the provision may be required.
This field can be configured as Read-Only or removed with the system parameter
758.
To activate the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment functionality an administrator will need to active the following system parameter.
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Other. Click Yes to activate the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment. Click No to remove the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment from the page.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustment
In the Unit Other page, you can set up Automation, Taxes Per Book and Miscellaneous data entry.
114
116
116
117
Unit Other
You can set up the Automation policies by using the Other option. Automation is available for Provision, Estimated Payments and Interim datasets.
TO SET UP THE AUTOMATION FOR A DATASET:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Click Other.
Select the Automation tab.
Click Valuation Allowance Rates to activate the Valuation Allowance Automation.
Click NOL to activate the NOL Automation.
Click AMT to activate the AMT Automation.
Manage Valuation Allowance automation policies in Provision and Interim datasets.
Manage NOL automation polices in Provision, Estimated Payments, and Interim datasets.
Manage AMT automation policies in Provision and Estimated Payments datasets.
Based on the automation policies, the application automatically calculates and posts balances which directly impact the provision calculations. The automation policies do have limitations. For example, if a unit has a different unit as its filing unit, it is assigned that filing unit's automation policies.
To import the Automation policies, complete the cells in the #U# Unit worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
556
VALUATION ALLOWANCE RATES
The system considers any line item starting with the VA_prefix when calculating the balance to be used for a valuation allowance. Line items, such as VA_2006, are taken into account when calculating.
The automation posts two amounts in the Temporary Difference, NOL Temporary Difference, and After Tax Temporary Difference pages with codes that begin with VA_SYS_; the Current and Non-Current
amounts with the source tag 27 of A.
There are system codes 21 that must exist for the automation to post.
There are three approaches to the Valuation Allowance Automation Aggregated Post-Tax.
726
Separate, Aggregated, and
NOL AUTOMATION
The automation posts an amount as an NOL Temporary Difference with the code
21 NOL_SYS and
the source tag 27 of A. The NOL automation posts a reclass that creates the NOL Temporary
difference when the unit has a taxable loss or draw down an available NOL Temporary Difference when the unit has taxable income.
Selections made in the NOL Allowance rate and Base NOL Allowance impact the amount of the reclass to NOL that is posted.
The NOL Allowance Rate is the percent of taxable income/loss that should be considered when computing the NOL that should be reclassed for the specified unit.
The Base NOL Allowance (e.g., §382 limitation) limits the amount of NOL that is considered. If there is no Base NOL Allowance, the default value of zero should remain in the field. The Base NOL Allowance sets the minimum amount to be considered and does not set a ceiling.
AMT AUTOMATION
The automation computes the Alternative Minimum Tax and posts an amount for the additional tax liability amount and added to the Regular Tax.
AMT has two approaches to the Alternative Minimum Tax Currency (Original).
604
Reporting Currency (New) and Local
Enter AMT Adjustments (pre- and/or post-tax), and the AMT Tax Rate that you use for calculations for
both approaches.
When you select the Reporting Currency basis, you have the to the AMT Net Operating Loss Carryover amount.
You can set up the Taxes Per Book by using the Other option. Taxes Per Book is available for Provision and
Interim datasets. The accounts can be used for Journal Entry 673 reports by comparing the balances and the
provision calculations to arrive at the appropriate journal entries required to be posted for the period.
To set up the taxes per book for a dataset:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Click Other.
Select the Taxes Per Book tab.
Type the amount for each field.
Federal and State Current Provision: Amounts on the Trial Balance for the current provision tax expense.
Federal and State Deferred Provision: Amounts on the Trial Balance for the deferred provision tax expense.
Federal and State Deferred Balance: Amounts on the Trial Balance for the deferred tax assets and liabilities.
Federal and State Liability Balances: Amounts on the Trial Balance for the taxes payable.
To import taxes per book information, complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import
Numbers 556 template.
You can set up the Additional CTA (Reporting), Unit Dataset Extensions, Global Access Flags, YTD PTBI, YTD Accrual Factors, Alternate Unit/Entity ID Code by using the Other option, Miscellaneous tab.
Miscellaneous is available in the Provision and Interim datasets. Custom options appear in this page. For example, you can create data entry fields for Liability Balances and Unit Dataset Extensions (UserNum9).
To set up the unit dataset extensions for a dataset:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Click Other.
Select the Miscellaneous tab.
You will enter estimated payment information in an Estimated Payments dataset, only. The data you enter is added to the provision when calculating estimated payments.
To enter items for estimated payments:
Select My Datasets.
For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.
In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.
Click Other.
Select Estimated Payments.
To import information to Estimated Payments, complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import Numbers template.
OTHER INCOME TAX (ADDITIVE TO CASH PROVISION)
Adds an additional amount to the provision liability in the estimated payments calculation.
CALCULATED INCOME TAX PYMT OVERRIDE
Overwrites the calculated estimated payments.
FRANCHISE PAYMENTS
Additional amount of Franchise Tax that to include with the provision liability in the estimated payments calculation.
INCLUDE FOR ESTIMATED PAYMENT CALC?
Includes or excludes the unit for the estimated payments calculation.
In the Unit Properties page, you can view and set up the following properties for a unit.
124
Unit Properties
In the General tab, you can view the Unit Code, Unit Name, Unit Type, Country Name, and Country Symbol (you entered this information when adding the dataset to the system). Here, you can enter a Description, and select a Primary Contact, Filing Unit for the Unit.
Other options available include: Activate the Transfer Tab, Deactivate a Unit from the Target Dataset during Rollover, view the Closed Date, and enter Comments.
If desired, enter a Description for for the unit.
You can enter a description at the dataset level. If you change the description in the Unit System Level or within the import template, this description remains unchanged. The maximum characters is 60, with special characters and numbers allowed.
Select a Primary Contact Name from the drop-down list.
Select the Filing Unit from the drop-down list.
The system considers the Filing Unit as the Parent unit and lets you group units. When you group units with a Parent unit, the system considers them as Child units. Currently, the application does not allow multiple tiered filing units. The system calculates all units within a Filing Unit as a single unit when applying the automated NOL, AMT, and netting of assets and liabilities.
Click Yes to Activate the Transfer Tab.
A unit transfer is a transfer of a balance from one unit to another.
Click Yes to Deactivate a Unit from the Target Dataset during Rollover.
When the option is selected, the unit is not activated during the rollover process if the deferred and payable balances equal zero.
The unit appears as an Inactive unit for the dataset.
Select a Deactivate Unit to make the unit inactive.
You cannot deactivate a unit that is designated the parent of a filing unit.
General tab
In the Assigned Users tab, you can review the Primary Contact, User ID, User Name, and Role for the unit selected in My Datasets.
Assigned Users tab
In the Flow-Through tab, you can set up the Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources. Flow-Through is used to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another. It is useful for partnerships. To set up the Flow-Through functionality select My Datasets > Units > More > Properties.
Flow-Through tab
To define the Flow Through Targets and Flow Through Sources:
In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.
Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.
Select the Flow-Through tab. The Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources tabs appear with the Unit Code/Description for the Source and Target unit.
For the Flow Through Targets:
You can Add, Delete, Import, and Export the Flow-Through Target information.
From the Target Unit drop-down list, select a Unit.
From the Profile drop-down list, select a profile.
For Factor, double-click the cell and type the factor.
Click Create Auto Elim? to create an elimination.
Type a Profile Comment, if desired.
Flow-Through Target
To define the Flow Through Targets and Flow Through Sources:
In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.
Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.
Select the Flow-Through tab. The Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources tabs appear with the Unit Code/Description for the Source and Target unit.
For the Flow Through Sources:
You can Add, Delete, Import, and Export the Flow-Through Source information.
From the Source Unit drop-down list, select a Unit.
From the Profile drop-down list, select a profile.
For Factor, double-click the cell and type the factor.
Click Create Auto Elim? to create an elimination.
Type a Profile Comment, if desired.
Flow-Through Sources
A Unit Transfer is the transfer of a partial or full balance from one unit to another. To set up the unit transfer use the Transfer Wizard. You can transfer units that have the same Federal Ending Deferred rate and the same Ending Deferred FX rate. You may need to make an adjustment to account for any State rate differences that occur during the unit transfer.
To transfer deferred/payable balances from one unit to another:
In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.
Select Properties for a unit.
In the General tab, click Yes to Activate the Transfer Tab.
Select the Transfers tab and the Data Transfer Summary page opens.
Click Transfer Wizard to open the Transfer Unit Data page.
TRANSFER UNIT DATA
In the Transfer Unit Data page, the Source Unit is the unit where you selected More > Properties.
Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.
Select the Target Unit from the drop-down list.
For Transfer Data:
Select All Data at 100%.
Select Percentage and then type a percentage.
Select Custom to transfer an amount of a particular adjustment.
For Transfer Items:
Select Temporary to transfer the deferred balances.
Select Payable to transfer the payable balances.
Select Temporary & Payable to transfer deferred and payable balances.
Click Next.
For Transfer Unit Data:
You can select the following Temporary Diffs Components to Transfer.
Click Federal Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
Click Federal Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
Click Federal After Tax Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
Click Federal After Tax Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
Click Federal NOL Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
You can select the following Payable Components to Transfer.
Click Federal Payable.
Click State Payable.
Click Next.
TRANSFER CLASSES -TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
To set up the Classes to transfer with temporary differences, you will select classes for the Temporary Differences. The Classes are set up in Administration within Manage Options. You can select Classes/Subclasses to review the classes set up for Transfers.
Select Transfer Out Current Class.
Select Transfer Out Non-Current Class.
Select Transfer In Current Class.
Select Transfer in Non-Current Class.
Type Notes, if desired.
Click Yes to Review Transfer Payable.
Click Next.
TRANSFER CLASSES - PAYABLE
To set up the Classes to transfer with payable balances, you will select classes for the Payable Balances. The Classes are set up in Administration within the Manage Options. You can select Classes/Subclasses to review the classes set up for Transfers.
Select Transfer Out Class.
Select Transfer Out Transaction Type.
Select Transfer Out Transaction Bucket.
Select Transfer In Class.
Select Transfer In Transaction Type.
Select Transfer In Transaction Bucket.
Type Notes, if desired.
Click Yes to Review Transfer Payable data.
Click Next.
REVIEW TRANSFER
If you selected Yes to Review Transfer for Temp Diffs and Payable data, the Next pages lets you review the balances for each transfer. If no balances are transferred the Total Selected line will equal zero.
Review the Ending Balance.
Balance from the Source Unit.
Review the Transfer Amount.
Balance to Transfer.
Review the Total Selected.
Click Next.
For the Final Review, click By checking this box, you agree to transfer selected data immediately.
Click Save.
REVIEW DATA TRANSFER SUMMARY
The data transfer information appears on the Jobs page.
Source Unit - the balances transfer from the Source unit.
Target Unit - the balances transfer to the Target unit.
Transfer Data - the data selected to transfer. For example, All or Selected will appear depending on selections made during the set up.
Transfer Items - the items selected to transfer. For example, Temporary or Payable will appear depending on selections made during the set up.
Date - the date of the transfer.
User - the user that transferred the data.
Note: In Data Entry, you can review the transferred data in Temp Diffs - Tax Basis as a Balance Sheet Only adjustment.
In Manage Units, you can access the Jurisdiction/State page and enter all of your Jurisdiction/State data. You must activate a jurisdiction to add it to the system, then you can enter your jurisdiction data.
The system contains pre-populated states 740 . However, administrators can create additional user-
defined jurisdictions/states. For example, administrators can create jurisdictions such as Canadian
Provinces. See Manage States Jurisdictions list.
436 for more information about creating new jurisdictions for the
Once you activate a jurisdiction, the jurisdiction no longer appears in the Add Jurisdictions list.
You can enter data for each jurisdiction in the Activated Jurisdictions list.
When you select Fed/States in the Jurisdictions column, in Manage Units, the jurisdiction information is specific to that unit.
To access the Jurisdictions/States functionality, select My Datasets > My Review List/All Datasets >
Units button > Jurisdictions (Fed, State) > Activated Jurisdictions > Activate or Edit.
128
129
Jurisdictions - Fed, State
You can add jurisdictions/states and then enter the state data for a dataset/unit. Use the expand/collapse icons to see more or fewer jurisdictions in the list.
Click to collapse the jurisdiction list.
Click to exand the jurisdiction list.
Add Jurisdictions
1
to add all jurisdictions in the system.
In the header row for Add Jurisdictions, click
2 Click to add a State in the system.
3
to add a Province in the system.
Click
4 Click to add All Other in the system.
5
Manage States 436 for more information about creating new jurisdictions for the Jurisdictions list.
to add a City in the system.
Click
See
You can edit the jurisdiction/state information in the Activated Jurisdictions list. Click Edit for a specific jurisdiction and that jurisdiction page opens.
You can update the following items for each jurisdiction.
130
130
131
132
132
132
132
133
133
134
134
135
Administrators can set up a filing unit so that the attributes of a child unit will roll up to a parent unit. Parent units have automation settings; child units do not. A child unit uses the automation settings and attributes as those of the parent unit; therefore, a child unit has the same automation settings and attributes as those of the parent unit.
A filing unit provides the ability to group units. The Filing Unit is considered the Parent unit. Units that are grouped with the parent unit are referred to as Child units. Currently, the system does not permit multiple tiered filing units.
The unit can remain a parent unit, or it can be designated as a child of another parent unit.
Once a unit is designated as a parent unit, it cannot be deactivated.
When using filing units, the unit's attributes are grouped with other units.
Filing unit reports show the results of the relationship with other units.
You can designate a filing unit at the jurisdiction level; however, Jurisdiction Filing Unit reports are not available to view.
You can manage the Jurisdiction Apportionment information for Provision, Estimated Payments and Interim datasets in the Apportionment section of the Activated Jurisdictions page.
To enter your tax rate data select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Activated Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment Pcts.
Type the Apportionment Pcts for the unit selected. The State Apportionment percentage is applied to
compute the apportioned current state taxable income.
The Begin Apportionment percentage is applied to the state beginning temporary differences.
The End Apportionment percentage is applied to the state ending temporary differences.
IMPORTING APPORTIONMENT
To import information to the Apportionment section, complete the appropriate fields on the #S# States sheet in the Import Numbers template.
To update the Apportionment rates, for a single state across either a single unit or multiple units in a Sub-consolidation, complete the appropriate fields on the #SRATES# State Rates worksheet in the Import Update Rates template. If the #SRATES# worksheet is not functional, sort the #S# States sheet in the Import Numbers template by state and update as needed.
Note: The difference between the Begin Apportionment percentage and End Apportionment percentage
causes a rate change adjustment in the State-level Deferred Balances report
324 .
You can manage the Federal Deductibility Rate information for Provision and Estimated Payments datasets in the Deductibility Rates section of the Activated Jurisdictions page.
To enter your tax rate data select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Activated Jurisdictions > Edit >
Federal Deductibility Rates.
Percentage of the state amounts used to compute the federal benefit of state.
The Current Deductible Rate computes the percentage of the current federal benefit of state.
The Beginning Deductible Rate computes the percentage of the beginning deferred federal benefit of state.
The Ending Deductible Rate computes the percentage of the ending deferred federal benefit of state.
Federal Deductibility Rate
You can manage the Jurisdiction Tax Rate information for Provision, Estimated Payments and Interim datasets in the Tax Rates section of the Activated Jurisdictions page.
To enter your tax rate data select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Activated Jurisdictions > Edit >
Tax Rates.
Type Tax Rates for the unit selected. The State Tax Rate is applied to the apportioned current state taxable income.
The Beginning Deferred Rate is applied to the apportioned deferred state temporary differences.
The Ending Deferred Rate is applied to the apportioned deferred state temporary differences.
CALCULATIONS
If the Beginning and Ending Deferred Tax rates differ for a unit the system automatically calculates any necessary change in rate adjustment on the beginning temporary difference balances. Support for the calculated adjustment displays in the Deferred Balances report as a separate column.
If the Current Tax rate and the Ending Deferred Tax rate differ for the unit the system automatically calculates the necessary impact of the rate difference for activity entered for temporary differences. The impact of the rate difference can be viewed in the Effective Tax Rate report.
IMPORTING TAX RATES
To import information for the Tax Rates section, complete the appropriate fields on the #S# States worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
To update the Current and Deferred Tax rates for a single state across either a single unit or multiple units in a Sub-consolidation, complete the appropriate fields on the #SRATES# State Rates worksheet in the Import Update Rates template. If the #SRATES# worksheet is not functional, sort the #S# States sheet in the Import Numbers template by state and update as needed.
You can manage the NOL Automation information for Provision and Estimated Payments datasets in the Automation section of the Activated Jurisdictions page. You will select Enable to open the NOL fields to enter data.
To enter NOL Allowance Rate and Base NOL Allowance data select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions >
Activated Jurisdictions > Edit > Automation.
Type the percentage and amount.
NOL AUTOMATION
The automation posts an amount as a NOL Temporary Difference with the system code 21
NOL_SYS
and the tag of A. The NOL automation posts a reclass that creates the NOL Temporary difference, when the unit has a taxable loss. It draws down an available NOL Temporary Difference when the unit has taxable income.
The automation posts an amount as a NOL Temporary Difference with the system code 21 NOL_SYS
and the class of A. The NOL automation posts a reclass that creates the NOL Temporary difference, when the unit has a taxable loss. It draws down an available NOL Temporary Difference when the unit has taxable income.
Selections made in the NOL Allowance rate and Base NOL Allowance impact the amount of the reclass to NOL that is posted.
The NOL Allowance rate is the percent of taxable income/loss that should be considered when computing the NOL that should be reclassed for the specified unit.
The Base NOL Allowance, such as the §382 limitation, limits the amount of NOL that is considered. If there is no Base NOL Allowance, the default value of zero should remain the same.
To import information to the Automation section, complete the appropriate fields on the #S# States sheet in the Import Numbers template.
Automation
Note: In Consolidated State reports, the total NOL will not be reduced by entities that have income. To make this reduction adjustment, an elimination entity should be created with the NOL entry only.
You can select the Deactivate Jurisdiction button to delete the record
31 which removes all data for the
jurisdiction for the unit. It does not affect any other jurisdiction or unit in the dataset.
To deactivate a jurisdiction select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Activated Jurisdictions > Edit >
Deactivate Jurisdiction. Deactivate Jurisdiction
You can use the Manage Attachments functionality in the Activated Jurisdictions page to attach supporting documents.
To add attachments for jurisdictions select My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Manage
Attachments.
Manage Attachments
Unit State Dataset Parameters
Administrators can access unit state dataset parameters
135 to control some unit level features in My
Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Unit State Dataset Parameters. Administrators use unit state dataset parameters to change how data is treated or represented within a jurisdiction for a unit/dataset. Unit State Dataset Parameters let you add parameters and then additional functionality is available in the system.
Pre-established unit dataset parameters
772
can be added, modified, or deleted. When adding or modifying
parameters, use care, as they can potentially change calculations across all the units in a dataset. Parameters are pre-defined and are case-sensitive. The Key Type and Value have specific designations for each parameter. Deleting parameters is not recommended because they may be required for the system to function properly. It is recommended that you de-activate a parameter, rather than deleting it.
To import a new unit state dataset parameter, complete the appropriate fields on the #USDSP# USDS Params sheet in the Import Numbers template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
Unit State Dataset Parameters
To add parameters in Unit State Dataset Parameters:
Select My Datasets and then Units
For a unit, select Fed/State in the Jurisdictions column.
In Activated Jurisdictions, click Unit State Dataset Parameters.
Type the Parameter Key, Parameter Type, and then Parameter Value.
Click Save.
Manage Unit State Dataset Parameters
In the Review & Edit page, first you select the Base Dataset that has the data that you want to work with. Then, you can navigate through your data by selecting a Comparing Dataset, Lead Sheet or Data Entry component. This page lets you review your data in various ways without having to create a report to check the impact of a data entry.
Upon opening the Review & Edit page, you can see a Summary view of your data. By default, the system
populates the Base Dataset with the first dataset in your Review List 45 . Optionally, you can select
for a dataset in My Datasets 42, making that dataset's data available to review. To review other
dataset's data, you can select a dataset in the Base Dataset drop-down list. The Base Dataset list is populated with datasets that reside in your Review List.
There are four views in which you can review your data.
138
140
141
145
In the data navigation bar, you can select a base dataset, a comparing dataset, a lead sheet or a data entry component to change the view.
When an orange underline appears beneath the Base Dataset and Comparing Dataset, the data that
you see in the Data Table is called the Review data.
When an orange underline appears beneath the Lead Sheet, the data that you see in the Data Table is called the Lead Sheet data.
When an orange underline appears beneath the Data Entry, the data that you see in the Data Table is called the Data Entry data.
Data Navigation Bar
See Review & Edit Interface 137 to review the page help you become familiar with the data navigation bar.
You can access the Review & Edit page from the Tax Provision Navigation Bar. Here you can review, compare, and edit your data on a Unit or Sub-Consolidation basis.
1 | Use the back button to go to the previous page. |
2 | Use the Primary Filters to select a Base Dataset and a Comparing Dataset. Selecting the compare button turns the data comparison on and off. You can also access Lead Sheets or Data Entry pages. |
3 | Use the Lead Sheet filter to select Provision, Deferred or Payable and review your data. |
4 | Use the Data Entry filter to select a component and then enter or review your data. For example, Permanent Differences Tax Basis and Temporary Differences Tax Basis and so on. |
5 | Use these options to Refresh, Export, and Print your data. Note: The Refresh button is permission based. The button is available for clients that are Administrators, Read/Write or it is set up as a Custom Role. |
6 | All active units for Units or Subconsolidations in your Base Dataset and Comparing Dataset (if you select a comparing dataset) appear in the Data Table. |
7 | Use the grid to review your data and select hyperlinks to see the detail for that amount. |
8 | Use the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table. |
9 | Use the row number to see if data in the grid needs refreshed. If the row number is highlighted orange, the data for that page has changed and needs to be refreshed. |
In the Summary page, you can review your data on a Unit basis or on a Sub-Consolidation basis. In the Sub- Consolidations tab, you can contract/expand the list of sub-consolidations. You also have the ability to contract some Sub-Consolidations while keeping others expanded.
Units/Sub-Consolidations tabs list the Codes and Names of your Units and Sub-Consolidations.
Lead Sheets each have a column where you can review the Summary values for each Lead Sheet. You can click values with hyperlinks to see the underlying detail. You can also select a Lead Sheet from the Lead Sheet drop-down list to see the lead sheet's data.
By default, the system uses Local currency in the Summary page. A warning message appears when viewing data in Local Currency in the Units tab if the dataset selected has units with different currencies.
To review the summary data for your Units and Sub-Consolidations.
Select a Base Dataset to see all Units and Sub-Consolidations that are active for that dataset.
Select a Comparing Dataset 140 to compare data with the Base Dataset.
Click to view data for Reporting or Local currency.
Click to update data for Units with orange highlight in the first column to see the most current data. In this column, you can Sort, Filter, and Search for Refreshed and Not Refreshed Units, as well as Select All units. Clear filters and click to see the most current data when multiple users are using the same dataset.
Note: The Datasets that appear in the Base Dataset and Comparing Dataset lists are assigned to My
42 page.
141
to review the Provision, Deferred or Payable Lead Sheet data. A warning
message appears when viewing data in Local Currency within the Sub-Consolidation tab if the Base or Comparison dataset selected has units with different currencies.
145
component to review and edit data for all jurisdictions (Federal, State,
Province, All Other, and City).
Select a Hyperlink to see the detail for that Summary value.
The data navigation bar options let you refresh, export, and print data in the grid.
The grid buttons and filters let you determine the data to view in the grid for the Effective Tax Rate, Total Tax Provision (Benefit), Deferred Tax Asset (Liability), and (Payable) Receivable columns.
See Data Table 732 for more information about the data navigation bar and grid options.
Summary Page - Review & Edit
In Review & Edit, you can review and compare the summary data for your Units and Sub-Consolidations. You
can use the compare 140 functionality to review data for multiple datasets, units, and sub-consolidations.
Select a Base Dataset and Comparing Dataset to compare balances for your Units and Sub- Consolidations. When you select a comparing dataset, the grid will have a side by side comparison for the Dataset and Dataset.
When an orange underline appears beneath the Base Dataset and Comparing Dataset, the data that you see in the Data Table is called the Review data.
By default, the compare button automatically activates when you select a Comparing Dataset. Click to turn off the compare mode.
You can compare Provision to Interim datasets.
You can compare Provision, Deferred or Payable balances.
Click to change between the Reporting and Local currency.
Click to change the variance between a percentage and dollar amount.
Comparing Datasets
In Review & Edit, you can use Lead Sheets to review your balances for Total Tax Provision (Benefit), Deferred Tax Asset ( Liability) or (Payable) Receivable. There are three different Lead Sheets: Provision, Deferred, and Payable. In the Lead Sheet grid, you can review the line item name and it's value.
To review the Lead Sheet data for your Units and Sub-Consolidations.
Select a Base Dataset to see all Units and Sub-Consolidations that are active for that dataset.
Select a Lead Sheet from the drop-down list.
Click to change between the Reporting and Local currency.
Lead Sheet - Provision
You can export the Leadsheet to create a pre-defined pivot table that includes the Code, Class & Subclass.
The navigation bar options let you refresh, export, and print data in the grid.
The grid controls let you view and select a different unit or sub-consolidation. Here you can open
Manage Units 97 to see all of the units for the selected dataset.
See Data Table 732 for more information about the data navigation bar and grid options.
Note: There is not a Lead Sheet for Effective Tax Rate as the ETR value is derived from the provision lead sheet.
PROVISION LEAD SHEET
The provision Lead Sheet data provides information showing you how the Summary value was calculated in the system.
When you pause on the Total Tax Provision Expense, the definition appears showing you the calculation.
When you pause on the Effective Tax Rate, the definition appears showing you the calculation.
DEFERRED LEAD SHEET
The Deferred Lead Sheet shows a summary of deferred's for the Federal + State + FBOS. In the unit's column, you can review the Tax Effected values for the deferred entries.
PAYABLE
The Payable Lead Sheet shows a summary of Payables. The Payables Leadsheet requires some configuration. The activity uses the Txn Types (CPROV - Payable Auto Posting) set up for the payable. The system determines the BBAL- Beginning Balance, Ending Balance, and CTA balance.
COMPARING LEAD SHEETS
When comparing values in the Summary page, you can select a hyperlink for a Lead Sheet to review that lead sheets data. The system will retain the comparing values for that lead sheet to review. Additionally, in the Lead Sheet, you can use the unit drop-down list to select another unit to review.
Comparing Lead Sheet - Change Unit/Sub-Consolidation
Comparing Values - Provision Lead Sheet
Comparing Values - Deferred Lead Sheet
Comparing Values - Payable Lead Sheet
136, you will find the data entry functionality for all jurisdictions (Federal, State, Province,
All Other, and City). For each component, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
598
data. Then, using the grid options, you can enter
your tax provision data, add attachments
149
and review your entry's history.
To enter data into the ONESOURCE Tax Provision system, you will select a Base Dataset and then a component from the Data Entry list. You can only access components in which you have permission.
An administrator assigns you permission to access all or specific components.
See Data Table 732 for information about the grid options.
See Importing data.
598 Data Entry for more information about importing/exporting component
The Data Entry list, appears in the Review & Edit data for all jurisdictions.
136 page. Here you can access components and enter your
1 | Use Review & Edit in the Tax Provision Navigation Bar to access the Data Entry pages. |
2 | Use Data Entry to select and enter data for your components. |
3 | Use the tabs for Temporary Differences to enter Detail or Rollforward data. |
4 | Use the Data Entry ribbon to Add, Delete, Import, Export, and use the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table. |
5 | Use Grouping to group your data into a new order by dragging columns to this section of the page. |
6 | Use the Data Table to review your data entry information. |
When you create data entries in the system, they are assigned to a dataset. You will select a Base Dataset and then a component in the Data Entry list to add your entries.
Only Administrators and Read-write users can add data entry line items.
You can add entries only for units that you have permission to access.
If a component is not assigned to a unit, the component is hidden and cannot be viewed in the components list.
The columns will vary depending on which component you select in the Data Entry list. See Data Table
732 for more information about the grid options.
To add data entries for a component:
In Review & Edit, select a dataset in the Base Dataset list.
Select a component in the Data Entry list and the grid for that component opens.
Click Add in the Data Entry ribbon to add an entry.
To complete an entry, you will click the fields highlighted in blue and make your selections from the drop-down lists.
For amounts, you will type the amount that applies.
Click Save to save your entry. You cannot save the entry until you make the required selections in the data entry fields.
Permanent Difference with Classes
Editing Data Entry Components
To edit an entry, you will click the fields highlighted in blue to change that information.
Only Administrators and Read-write users can to edit data entry line items.
Only some data can be edited, for example, for a permanent difference you can only edit Attachments, Amounts, and Notes.
You can edit entries only for units that you have permission to access.
If a component is not assigned to a unit, the component is hidden and cannot be viewed in the components list.
The columns vary depending on which component you are editing in the Data Entry list. See Data Table
732 for more information about the grid options.
To Edit Component Data entries in the data entry grid:
In Review & Edit, select a component from the Data Entry list and the grid for that component opens.
Click the fields highlighted in blue and then update those fields.
Click Save to save your entry. You cannot save the entry until you make the required selections in the data entry fields.
Deleting Data Entry Components
For a Base Dataset, you will select a component from the Data Entry list to find the entry to delete. You can select any field in the entry row and then click Delete to remove the entry from the system.
You can delete specific entries, in the data entry grid page for a dataset and unit.
You can delete all entries from the data entry grid pages for a dataset and unit. If you click Delete in the components ribbon without selecting any entries you will delete all entries from all component data entry grid pages.
Warning:
All entries selected are deleted on that page.
If no components are selected and you click Delete, All components for the selected Dataset and Unit are deleted.
You can cancel this action before deleting.
To delete a specific entry for a dataset and unit, in the component grid, select an entry line and then
click Delete in the components ribbon.
146
Attachments let you attach documents and supplement detail for your data entry. The Attachments Review report for Provision and Interim datasets shows a list of documents that are attached to various components
23.
To attach a file to an entry:
Double click in the Attmnts cell and the Attachments and Comments page opens.
Click Browse to find the file.
Type a Description.
Click Add.
Click Close Window.
The user who attached the file along with the date and time are displayed in the attachments and comments screen.
In the data entry screens, when an attachment is added to an adjustment the attachment icon is available for that adjustment.
When you select the option With Attachments, all documentation files roll over with the dataset.
Active Workpapers files automatically roll over with a dataset.
You will find the list of attachments in the Attachments Review
Attachments and Comments
306 report.
In the Data Entry list, you will select a component and enter data for all jurisdictions (Federal, State, Province, All Other, and City).
Data Entry - Components
After Tax Temporary Differences -Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page you can refresh, export
(use for informational purposes)
588 , export (template)
598 , group
columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
For each component,
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
38 default rules and
ALL DATASETS
The Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
776
The after tax temporary difference should be entered on a post rate basis. The appropriate federal benefit of state is computed based on these balances.
To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTD# U AfterTx TDs-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
You can adjust an after tax temporary difference multiple times by making additional entries with different tag letters or different class/subclass combinations.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTD# U AfterTx TDs-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import import process.
588 for more information about the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis data
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data
732
for more information about the grid options.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the after tax temporary difference
427.
There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that
best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative after tax temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset balance can be overridden manually or with an import.
22 . The beginning
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ACTIVITY
776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated using the unit's weighted average FX rate to the reporting currency.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments to prior year balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
Balance only impacts 776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision report Adjustment from the Deferred Provision.
NOTE
261 removes the BSO
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
ENDING BALANCE
The component is set up by an administrator as an "Assigned Component Type."
To enter the ending balance only, select the tax adjustment assigned with the "End Bal" class.
Type or Import the balance.
Notes:
A Default Type can be set by the System Administrator and you may not have the ability to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The System Administrator may have allowed the ability to deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report will be available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that have been overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Please contact your administrator if you have questions about the default type set up.
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis page, you can
refresh, export (informational purposes)
588 , export (template)
598 , group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
PROVISION DATASET ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
The system computes the Tax-Book Difference using the book and tax amounts entered in the Detail section. This information also displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
PROVISION AND ESTIMATED PAYMENTS DATASETS
The Activity and Deferred column amounts impact the tax provision 776 differently.
To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
If you wish to adjust the same after tax temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import data import process.
588 for more information about the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See
Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the after tax temporary difference
427.
There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that best
relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The beginning balance rolls over from the prior period and should represent the remaining temporary differences for book and tax that should be allocated. The beginning balance can be overridden manually or with an import.
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING
Select Enter Activity or Enter Ending balance to apply to both book and tax calculations:
Enter Activity - You can enter data in Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet fields. The system automatically calculates the Ending balance, which is Read-Only.
Enter Ending - You can enter data in Ending Balance, Deferred and Balance Sheet fields. The system automatically calculates the Activity, which is Read-Only.
ACTIVITY
The activity is the appropriate amount of the beginning balance based on the months entered. In a dataset that was not rolled over, you must populate this field.
Activity impacts 776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated using the unit's weighted average FX rate to the reporting currency.
DEFERRED
Deferred impacts 776 the deferred provision, as well as the deferred balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
Balance only impacts 776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
Note: You will need to activate the parameter to view the Audit Trail created when working with the Enhanced Integration transfer. For more information on Enhanced Integration, see the Enhanced Integration
User Manual.: The Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision report Adjustment from the Deferred Provision.
261 removes the BSO
ENDING BALANCE
The ending balance based on the months entered. In a dataset that was not rolled over, you must populate this field.
MONTHS
The months entered for both book and tax are used to compute the ratable amount applicable to the period.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
Additional Paid in Capital (APIC) Pool Amounts information is managed in the APIC Pool Amounts page. In the Data Entry list, select the component, APIC Pool Amounts to enter the data. The APIC Pool data entry area tracks activity in the APIC Pool which will appear in the APIC Pool Report for Provision, Estimated Payments, Actual Interim datasets.
Note: The APIC Pool Amounts page and report are only available when the system parameter is enabled.
To activate the APIC Pool functionality, an Administrator needs to add the following system parameter Manage Configurations. Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > APIC Pool > APIC Pool Data Entry + Report > Yes.
758 in
In the APIC Pool Amounts page, you select a unit, then enter your APIC amounts, Suspense amounts, and Rates. You can also add attachments to support your data.
The windfalls and shortfalls from FAS 123R Stock Option Exercise are measured against the APIC
Pool to determine the required provision treatment.
You can track the Deferred Tax Asset related to the issuance of stock options (Amortized Compensation) with the related APIC Pool.
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
Enter the following APIC amounts:
Beginning Balance
Pre-Adoption APIC Adj.
Tax Benefit/(Detriment)
Intercompany Reclass
Other - With DTA Impact
Other - Without DTA Impact
Posted to Deferred Only
Enter the following Suspense amounts:
Beginning Balance
Other - With DTA Impact
Other - Without DTA Impact
Enter the following tax rates:
Federal Beginning
State Beginning
MANAGE ATTACHMENTS
Attmnts enable you to attach documents and supplement detail for an adjustment.
Note: Enter all amounts in Reporting currency.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the APIC Pool Amounts page, complete the appropriate fields in the #UAPIC# APIC Pool Amounts worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
Enter the following APIC amounts: | Enter the following Suspense amounts: | Enter the following Rates: |
Beginning Balance
Pre-Adoption APIC Adj.
Tax Benefit/(Detriment)
Intercompany Reclass
Other - With DTA Impact
Other - Without DTA Impact
Posted to Deferred Only
Beginning Balance
Other - With DTA Impact
Other - Without DTA Impact
Federal Beginning
State Beginning
APIC Pool Amounts
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income component to enter your data. In the Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income page, you can select a unit, and enter your estimated Pre-Tax Book Income. Estimated Annual Weighted Average FX Rate, Statutory Tax Rates, and FX rates fields are read- only. To edit these values go to the Interim Unit Details page under the More dropdown in Manage Units (My Datasets).
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to this page, complete the appropriate fields on the #FORU# Forecast Unit worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
Note: If you select Provision, Estimated Payments or Interim Actual datasets, you will not see Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income in the components list.
PRE-TAX BOOK INCOME - ESTIMATED PRE-TAX BOOK INCOME
Pre-Tax Book Income should be entered in local currency. Estimated Pre-Tax Book Income can either be entered as an annualized amount or in amounts for the four quarters that make up the annual amount when Enable Quarterly PTBI is selected.
Note: When Enable Quarterly PTBI is selected, Instead of adding rounding excess to the fourth quarter, each quarter now shows its own rounding. Check the rounding when the annual amount is not evenly divisible by four.
ESTIMATED ANNUAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE FX RATE
The specified Weighted Average Foreign Exchange rate for the unit for the period covered by the dataset. Enter the rate using the ratio of what 1 unit of the reporting currency would equal in the local currency. The Weighted Average Foreign Exchange rate is used to convert entries for the unit that have an Income Statement provision impact. Enter 1 if the local and reporting currency are the same.
EXCLUDE UNIT DESIGNATION
Exclude Foreign Loss: The system excludes the unit from the interim provision calculations if the Forecast Federal Taxable Income is a negative amount. If the amount is positive, the unit is included in the calculation.
Exclude Unit: The system excludes the unit from the interim provision calculations.
The dataset parameter 57 USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR determines how Exclude Foreign Loss or
Exclude Unit will affect the interim provision calculations. The dataset parameter has a value of 0 or 1.
When the parameter value is equal to 0: The interim provision and effective tax rate calculations will not include the Pre-tax book income of Exclude Foreign Loss or Exclude Unit units.
When the parameter value is equal to 1: The interim provision and effective tax rate calculations will include the Pre-tax book income of Exclude Foreign Loss or Exclude Unit units.
Note: The interim reports are indicated with an asterisk and footnote in a report, if the unit is an Excluded Foreign Loss or Excluded Unit unit (for example, Exclude Unit or Exclude Foreign Loss).
UNIT TAX RATES
The current and deferred tax rates for the specified unit are used for all unit specific reports. They are also taken into account for Federal Benefit of State (FBOS) calculations when working with state data.
If the Beginning and Ending Deferred Tax rates differ for a unit, the system automatically calculates any necessary change in rate adjustment on beginning temporary difference balances. Support for the calculated adjustment displays in the deferred balances report as a separate column.
If the Current Tax rate and the Ending Deferred Tax rate differ for the unit, the system automatically calculates the necessary impact of the rate difference for activity entered for temporary differences. The impact of the rate difference can be viewed in the Effective Tax Rate report.
DEFERRED FX RATES
In the Beginning and Ending fields, enter the specific Beginning and Ending Spot rates for the unit for the period covered by the dataset. Enter the rate using the ratio of what 1 unit of the reporting currency would equal in the local currency. The Beginning and Ending Spot rate is used to convert entries for the unit that have a Balance Sheet provision impact. Enter 1 if the local and reporting currency are the same.
DEFERRED PROVISION ONLY ADJUSTMENT
The adjustment to the deferred tax provision expense is a separate line item on the tax provision report. It impacts the Effective Tax rate. The deferred expense amount does not have a related deferred tax asset or liability associated with it.
Be sure to use this field appropriately, because additional support may be required to justify the expense on the provision.
For the Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income, you can enter data in the following fields: | For Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income, the following fields are read only. To change these fields you must do so in the Unit Details page. |
|
|
Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income
Flow-Through is used to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another. It is useful when working with partnerships. To enable Flow-Through, an appropriate License Code and License Key are required.
For more information about licenses, see Manage Licenses
480.
For more information about Flow-Through refer to the Flow-Through
620
section.
Intercompany Transaction Entry
In the Data Entry list, you can select the InterCompany Transaction component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the InterCompany Transaction page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
598 ,
598 , show/hide columns, and filter your
provision and estimated payment data. You will select Receiving or Paying to create a permanent difference in the unit.
Transactions among units can be set up to account for the movement of tax amounts and the impact of the associated withholding tax treatment on transactions. Entries can be entry on either the paying or receiving unit and are posted as a permanent difference on the units.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the InterCompany Transaction Entry page, complete the appropriate fields on the #ICOTXNS# Inter Co Txns sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the InterCompany Transaction data import process.
INTERCOMPANY TRANSACTION
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The InterCompany Transaction component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ATTMNTS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
SOURCE UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the InterCompany Transaction.
SOURCE UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the InterCompany Transaction.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
PAYING/RECEIVING UNIT
There can be intercompany transactions between any two units
TYPE
417 .
The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction types
429 .
CODE
The transaction code is user-defined.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
DATE
The date of the transaction.
AMOUNT
The transaction amount for the intercompany transaction.
FX RATE (PAYING UNIT TO RECEIVING UNIT)
The weighted average rate that the paying unit uses to pay the receiving unit.
WITHHOLDING TAX RECEIVING UNIT
Percentage of the transaction amount that is withheld for the receiving unit.
TAXABLE AT RECEIVING UNIT
Designate if the transaction amount is taxable by the receiving unit. It is posted as a permanent difference.
DEDUCTIBLE AT PAYING UNIT
Designate if the transaction amount is deductible by the paying unit. It is posted as an offset permanent difference. Withholding Tax Treatment: Designate if the withholding is D for Deductible, C for Creditable, or N for Neither.
TREATMENT
Select if the transaction amount is Deductible or Creditable.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export
588 , export (template)
598, group
columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
ALL DATASETS
38 default rules and
The Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
776
Each NOL temporary difference line defaults to being tax effected using the unit rate. The beginning and ending unit rate can be overridden on a line-by-line basis. If only the beginning or ending rate is overridden, you must populate the fields. If a field is not populated, it defaults to a zero rate.
The NOL temporary difference can be automated to take the generated or utilized loss impact.
114 net operating
To import information to the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #UNOLTD# Unit NOL TDs-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.
If you wish to adjust the same NOL temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
Note: To use default unit rates, enter U in the rate columns when importing. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UNOLTD# Unit NOL TDs-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import process.
588 for more information about the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis data import
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table
732 for more information about the grid options.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the NOL temporary difference
426.
Automated NOL amounts are posted to a code that begins with NOL_SYS.
TYPE
There are two types of NOL temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current
32. Select the type
that best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
GENERATED
Tracks the year the NOL was generated.
EXPIRES
Tracks the year the NOL is expected to expire.
The expiration year is a place holder.
The application does not automatically delete NOLs from reports in the expiration year. You must manually remove the NOL from the application.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset 22. You can replace
the beginning balance with a manual entry or by importing.
The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances preventing "Read/Write" users from entering data into the Begin Bal column.
ACTIVITY
Activity impacts 776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income.
Amounts are entered in local currency and translated to the reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
The entry is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments to prior year balances.
BALANCE SHEET
Balance only impacts 776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision report Adjustment from the Deferred Provision.
NOTE
261 removes the BSO
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details for a specific temporary difference line by clicking the Override unit rates check box.
Notes:
The Default Type is NC-Non-Current.
The Default Type is set by an administrator and the ability to select C -Current and NC -Non-Current may not be an option.
The administrator can deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report will be available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that have been overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Please contact your Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up.
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Payable Entry component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In
the Payable Entry page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and
estimated payment data. You will select Receiving or Paying to create a permanent difference in the unit.
To maximize the payable functionality, ensure that the payable set-up taxes payable account.
696 reflects the activity in the
You must activate the Payable Functionality system parameter 34
Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality.
in Administration > System >
Automatic posting from the calculated provision to the payable is activated with a dataset parameter In My Datasets > More > Payable Settings.
Amounts are entered as debit or credit.
34 .
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Payable Entry page, complete the appropriate fields on the #FL# Fed Liability Txns sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Payable Entry data import process.
Payable Entry
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Payable Entry component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table about the grid options.
732 for more information
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Payable Entry.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Payable Entry.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Payable Entry.
FISCAL YEAR
The fiscal year should be the year to which the payable entry relates.
JURISDICTION
The jurisdiction defaults to FED when data is entered at the unit level.
TXN TYPE
The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction types
ROLLUP
450 .
You cannot select a rollup the column is provided for viewing purposes. The "Rollup" is defined in "Administration" to allow the roll up of user-defined lines.
TXN BUCKET
The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction buckets.
TAG
451
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
AMOUNT
Negative amounts increase and positive amounts reduce the taxable payable account. Amounts should be entered in local currency.
DATE
The dates are limited to the dates within the dataset year.
To select dates outside the dataset year, you can activate the system parameter single year restriction.
Select Administration and then System.
21 to remove the
Click Manage Configurations and then click Yes for "Adjust Payable Date Range."
FX RATE
The weighted average rate on the date of the entry can be entered.
DESCRIPTION
A description is required for each entry. If you do not enter a description, a message appears "Please check your entries for accuracy."
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
Permanent Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Perm Diffs - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction
data. In the Perm Diffs - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
588 , export (template)
598, show/hide columns, and filter your Provision, Interim
Actual, Interim Forecast, and Estimated Payment data.
There are two types of Permanent Differences: Equity Adjustments and P&L Adjustments. Select the appropriate type to achieve the desired provision effect.
The list of Unit Codes, Jurisdictions, Classes, Subclasses and Tags are assigned to you by your administrator. For more information, review user permissions.
To create adjustments using the same permanent difference code, you can make additional entries using different tag letters or class/subclass combinations.
You can edit only the Attachment, Amount and Note data entry fields.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Permanent Differences- Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields for the #UPD# and #SPD# Unit Perm Diffs worksheets in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import process.
588 for more information about the Permanent Differences - Tax Basis data import
Perm Diffs - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Perm Diffs - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ADJUSTMENT COLUMNS
Columns are sorted by clicking on the column headers.
You can drag and drop the columns to create a new view of the grid.
"Drag a column header here to group by that column" lets you group data using the column headers. You drag each header(s) to that area and the data is sorted, accordingly.
To "Hide" a column, click on a column header, right mouse click and select the header name. To restore the column header, right mouse click on the column header and select the column header. Select "Reset all saved settings" restores the column headers to the "Default" settings.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TAG
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the permanent difference
423.
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
TYPE
Type P (P&L Adjustment) results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account. The result does impact the overall effective tax rate.
Type E (Equity Adjustment) results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account, as well as an equity contra expense that is offset in an equity account. This does not impact to the overall effective tax rate.
AMOUNT
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Enter amounts in local currency. They are translated using the unit's weighted average FX rate to reporting currency.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
DELETE ADJUSTMENTS
To delete multiple adjustments:
Hold down the Ctrl key and select the Delete key.
Note: To create adjustments using the same permanent difference code, you must make additional entries using different tag letters.
Permanent Differences - Book/Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component to enter amortized permanent difference data for federal data. In the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export
588 , export (template)
598, show/hide
columns, and filter your Provision, and Estimated Payment data.
There are two types of Permanent Differences: Equity Adjustments and P&L Adjustments. Select the appropriate type to achieve the desired provision effect.
Permanent Difference - Book/Tax Basis lets you enter different book and tax amortizable basis and amortization periods. The resulting permanent difference between the basis is automatically computed. The remaining balance of the basis and periods rolls over to future datasets when the dataset is rolled over.
To create adjustments using the same permanent difference code, you can make additional entries using different tag letters or class/subclass combinations.
This component type does not apply to interim data and will not appear in an interim dataset.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UPDAM# Unit Perm Diff Amort worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import import process.
588 for more information about the Permanent Differences - Book/Tax Basis data
Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table more information about the grid options.
732
for
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the permanent difference
423.
Type P results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account. The result does impact the overall effective tax rate.
Type E results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account, as well as an equity contra expense that is offset in an equity account. This does not impact the overall effective tax rate.
TAG
The tag 27
CLASS
letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
BEGINNING BALANCE
Rolls over from the prior period and should represent the remaining Permanent Differences for book and tax that should be allocated.
ACTIVITY
The appropriate amount of the activity based on the months entered. In a dataset that was not rolled over, you must populate this field.
DEFERRED
To increase or decrease the balance. Amounts entered do not have any impact on the provision.
ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING
Select Enter Activity or the Enter Ending balance:
Enter Activity - The system automatically calculates the Ending balance.
Enter Ending - The system automatically calculates the Activity.
ENDING BALANCE
The ending balance based on the months entered. In a dataset that was not rolled over, you must populate this field.
MONTHS
The months entered for both book and tax are used to compute the ratable amount applicable to the period.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
In the Data Entry list, select the Pre-Tax Book Income component to enter your data. In the Pre-Tax Book
Income page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
588 , export (template) 598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your Provision, Interim Actual, and
Estimated Payment data.
Depending on the Data Policy either the Pre-Tax Book Income (Local) and/or Pre-Tax Book Income (USD) are editable. If the Data Policy selected calculates the balance, then the balance is not editable. Although the field is named Pre-Tax Book Income (USD), this figure also represents Pre-Tax Book Income in Reporting Currency other than the US Dollar.
PRE-TAX BOOK INCOME DETAILS
An administrator will set up the PTBI Data Entry Policy 108 in the Rates page.
An administrator will set up the Wghtd Avg FX Rate
110
in the Rates page.
You can enter Local and Reporting amounts.
When reviewing Pre-Tax Book Income, an income amount is entered as a positive number and a loss amount is entered as a negative number.
For the Wghtd Avg FX Rate 110 , the balance amounts are available for both local and reporting currency.
Depending on the PTBI Data Entry Policy, you can edit the Pre-Tax Book Income (Local) or Pre-Tax Book Income (USD).
FX Rate 110 balance amounts.
Although the field's label is Pre-Tax Book Income (USD), this amount also represents Pre-Tax Book Income in reporting currency other than the US Dollar.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information in the Pre-Tax Book Income page, complete the appropriate fields on the #PTBI# PTBI worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the PTBI data import process.
Pre-Tax Book Income
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Pre-Tax Book Income component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions enable you to attach documents and supplement detail for an adjustment. To Manage Attachments
30 double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
PTBI DATA ENTRY POLICY
The PTBI Data Entry Policy is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
WEIGHTED AVG FX RATE
The Weighted Avg FX Rate is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
The code 20 and description are established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.
TAG
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source. The Tag column only appears in Tag
Datasets.
CLASS
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The list of Classes are created and assigned in "Administration."
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line entered in the originating source. The list of Subclasses are created and assigned in "Administration."
AMOUNT (LOCAL)
Type the Local balance.
AMOUNT (REPORTING)
Type the Reporting balance.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Tax Adjustments component to enter federal and jurisdiction data.
In the Tax Adjustments page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
148 ,
588 , export (template)
598 , group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision,
interim, and estimated payment data.
There are two types of Tax Adjustments, depending on the code, Cash and Non-Cash. Non-Cash Tax Adjustments have a code that begins with NC_. The cash provision is the amount of current tax liability that is expected to be represented on the tax return. The non-cash provision is any current taxes that should be accrued for prior years or for amounts that are not represented on the tax return. The Cash and Non-Cash are
segregated on separate lines of the Tax Provision 261 report.
Note: If you wish to adjust the same after tax adjustment more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Tax Adjustments page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UTA# Unit Tax Adjs sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Tax Adjustments data import process.
Tax Adjustments
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Tax Adjustments component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
The code 20
and description are established by an Administrator for tax adjustments
428.
Codes beginning with NC_ designate the tax adjustment as a non-cash tax adjustment.
TAG
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
CLASS
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
TYPE
Select E-Equity Adjustment or P- P&L Adjustment from the drop-down list.
ADJUSTMENT
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated using the weighted average FX rate to reporting currency.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction
data. In the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, and Estimated Payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
In the Provision dataset, there are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the
section that displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
38 default rules and
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward 192 page.
ALL DATASETS
The Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
776
Each temporary difference line defaults to being tax effected using the unit rate. The beginning and ending unit rate can be overridden on a line-by-line basis. If only the beginning or ending rate is overridden, you must populate the field for both rates. If a field is not populated, it defaults to a zero rate.
Valuation Allowances 726 computed on Temporary Differences can be automated.
To import information to the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields
on the #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis 187 sheet in the Import Numbers template.
To adjust the same temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different classes or tag letters.
Note: To use default unit rates, enter U in the rate columns when importing. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the
#UTD# and #STD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis 187 sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis data import process.
Temp Diffs - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Temp Diffs - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History. The Transfer Out balance appears in data source history for the Source unit.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are set up by an administrator for the temporary difference
424 .
There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current 32. Select the type that
relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability is represented.
Click the Adj Type drop-down and then select C -Current or NC -Non-Current.
TAG
The tag 27
CLASS
letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
Transfer Out appears in the "Class" column when the balance of a temporary difference is transferred to another "Unit."
Transfer In appears in the "Class" column when the balance of a temporary difference is transferred to another "Unit."
Balances that are "Transferred In" appear in the Balance Sheet Only column.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
The default target Unit number appears in "Subclass" when the balance is transferred to another
"Unit." If all data is transferred the ending balance will equal zero.
Transfer In
Important:
A Default Type is set by the system administrator and you may not have the ability to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The system administrator may have allowed the ability to deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select C -Current or NC -Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report is available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that are overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Contact an administrator if you have questions about the Default Type.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset
The beginning balance can be overridden manually or by importing.
22.
The beginning balance can be locked by activating the system parameter in Manage Configurations.
Note: The administrator can lock the "Beginning Balances" and Read/Write users are not allowed to enter data for the Begin Bal column.
ACTIVITY
776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency and are translated using the unit's weighted average FX rate to reporting currency.
The "Assigned Component Type" is set up making the field available for data entry.
Type or Import the balance.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments to prior year balances.
The "Assigned Component Type" is set up making the field available for data entry.
Type or Import the balance.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
Balance only impacts 776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision report Adjustment from the Deferred Provision.
261 removes the BSO
The "Assigned Component Type" is set up making the field available for data entry.
Type or Import the balance.
ENDING BALANCE
The component is set up by an administrator as an "Assigned Component Type."
To enter the ending balance only, select the tax adjustment assigned with the "End Bal" class.
Type or Import the balance.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the unit rates for a temporary difference line.
Click Override Unit Rate.
BEGINNING RATE
Type the Beg Rate.
ENDING RATE
Type the End Rate.
In Temporary Differences - Tax Basis and Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis, you can enter data in the
optional fields available within the Rollforward tab. Here you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
598,
598 data.
TAG DATASETS
It uses the Dataset level Manage Deferred Rollforwards
59 page to set a default tag and type when data is
entered. Data entered in the Rollforward section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up rules and posted in the Detail section with the appropriate Tag and Deferred Type.
38 default
Click the +Expand link to display a preview of the Deferred Balances report 277 (pre-tax). The column
headers are those established in Dataset Administration Manage Deferred Rollforwards
59.
The OTHER ENTRIES row populates all items entered in the Detail section that cannot be uniquely
classified because of multi tags or multi-type entries in Manage Deferred Rollforwards
To display the data entry section, click Create New or Edit.
59.
If you choose Use Ending Balance for a Code, the Ending Balance Override option is automatically selected in the Rollforward section. You can edit the Ending Balance for book and tax.
CLASS DATASETS
It uses the Dataset level Manage Deferred Rollforwards
59 page to set a default class and adjustment type
when data is entered. Data entered in the Rollforward section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up default rules and posted in the Detail section with the appropriate "Posting Class" and "Posting Column."
Click Expand to view all columns on the Deferred Balances report (pre-tax). The column headers are
those established in the Dataset level Manage Deferred Rollforwards screen.
Click Add or Edit to enter data.
Choosing Post to Ending Balance for a Code enables you to edit the Ending Balance for book and tax.
Temp Diffs - Tax Basis - RollForward
Temp Diffs - Tax Basis - RollForward Details
DATA ENTRY FIELDS - ROLLFORWARD
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Temporary Differences - Tax Basis and Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis component grid
includes the following columns. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.
TAG DATASETS
EDIT
Edit lets you edit the data for the adjustment. Click to add an attachment.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference
424 .
BEGINNING BALANCE
Beginning balances are read-only.
TYPE
There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current
32. Select the type that best
relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details for a specific temporary difference line by
clicking the Override unit rates check box.
BOOK AMOUNT
Enter the Book amount. The system displays the Tax-Book Difference based on how it should display in the Deferred Rollforward name listed.
TAX AMOUNT
Enter the Tax amount. The system displays the Tax-Book Difference based on how it should display in the Deferred Rollforward name listed.
CLASS DATASETS
UNIT CODE
20 is established by an Administrator for the temporary difference
424 .
UNIT NAME
You can select the Temp Diff Code - Name.
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the designated unit rates for a temporary difference.
BEGINNING BALANCE
Beginning balances are Read-Only.
UNASSIGNED
Type the unassigned balance in the Tax column for the Deferred Rollforward column.
ENDING BALANCE
Ending balances are Read-Only.
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
598 , group columns, show/hide columns,
and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
You have the ability to enter beginning and ending balances for both book and tax balances. ONESOURCE Tax Provision calculates the tax adjustment by taking the difference between the beginning and ending balances.
Note: The mapping functionality is not yet available for the Excel Add-In.
PROVISION DATASET ONLY
In a Provision dataset, there are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the
section that displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
The system computes the Tax-Book Difference using the book and tax amounts entered in the Detail section. This information also displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
PROVISION AND ESTIMATED PAYMENTS DATASETS
The Activity and Deferred column amounts impact the tax provision
776 differently.
Each temporary difference line defaults to being tax effected using the unit rate.
To import information to the Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields in the #UTDAM# U Temp Diff-Bk Tx Basis tab in the Import Numbers template.
If you wish to adjust the same temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different classes or tag letters.
Note: To use default unit rates, enter U in the rate columns when importing. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields in the #UTDAM# U Temp Diff-Bk Tx Basis tab in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis data import process.
Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table more information about the grid options.
732 for
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference
424 .
ADJ TYPE
There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current
32 . Select the type that best
relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The beginning balance rolls over from the prior period and should represent the remaining temporary differences for book and tax that should be allocated. The beginning balance can be overridden manually or with an import.
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING
You can choose the entry type in Administration.
MONTHS
The months entered for both book and tax are used to compute the ratable amount applicable to the period.
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details for a specific temporary difference line by clicking the Override unit rates check box.
TAG DATASETS
In Administration, select Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tag Only).
For a Code, select Use Ending and then Temp Diff Entry Type.
CLASS DATASETS
In Administration, select Manage Data Options and then Classes & Subclasses.
Select Component Types.
For each Class, choose Post to Ending Balance and the Data Entry Rule.
ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING
Enter Activity/Ending applies to book and tax balances.
Enter Activity/Deferred/Balance Sheet - The system automatically calculates the Ending balance, which is Read-Only.
Enter Ending - When Use Ending or Post to Ending Balance is selected, the system automatically calculates the Activity/Deferred/Balance Sheet, which is Read-Only.
ACTIVITY
The activity is the appropriate amount of the beginning balance based on the months entered. In a dataset that was not rolled over, you must populate this field.
Activity impacts 776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts are entered in local currency. They are translated to the reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
DEFERRED
776 the deferred provision, as well as the deferred balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision report Adjustment from the Deferred Provision.
261 removes the BSO
ENDING BALANCE
The ending balance is based on the months entered. You must populate this field if the dataset is not rolled over. Select the class assigned in Deferred Rollforwards to post and enter the ending balance.
In the Data Entry list, you can select the Trial Balance/Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction
data. In the Trial Balance/Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your
provision and estimated payment data.
This area populates the ending trial balance amounts and allows you to make book adjustments, tax reclasses, and other adjustments. This can ultimately be used as the starting point for the tax basis balance sheet. Typically, the trial balance data is bridged into the system from an extract of the general ledger.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the Trial Balance/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UTBBS# Unit Tax Basis BalSheet worksheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Trial Balance/Tax Basis data import process.
Trial Balance/Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The Trial Balance/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TAG
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the trial balance sublines
431 .
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
ENDING BOOK BALANCE
Populates the trial balance ending balance data for the period.
Book Adjustments: Book adjustments to the ending balances can be made to generate the adjusted ending balances.
TAX RECLASS
Tax reclasses can be made to the adjusted ending balances.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Other adjustments can be made to the adjusted ending balances.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
In the Data Entry list, you can select a component to enter state data for all jurisdictions (State, Province, All Other, and City).
Data Entry - Components
436
for more information about creating user-defined states in the system.
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences -
Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
148 ,
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated
payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
38 default rules and
ALL DATASETS
The Activity, Deferred and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
776
Each state after apportionment temporary difference line defaults to being tax effected using the unit rate. The beginning and ending state and unit rates can be overridden on a line-by-line basis. If only the beginning or ending rate is overridden, you must populate the fields for both rates. If a field is not populated, it defaults to a zero rate.
Enter temporary differences that are applicable for the state, but not for federal purposes.
To import information to the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen complete the appropriate fields on the #SAATD# St AfterApp TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template.
If you wish to adjust the same state after apportionment temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
Note: To use default unit rates enter U in the rate columns when importing.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen complete the appropriate fields on the #SAATD# St AfterApp TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences -
Tax Basis data import process.
State After App Temp Diffs - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following
columns. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
The code difference
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the state after apportionment temporary
438 .
There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32. Select the type that
best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
The tag 27
CLASS
letter identifies each line entered on the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.
22. The beginning balance
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ACTIVITY
776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as the deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments to prior year balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The State Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision (State) report BSO Adjustment from the State Deferred Provision.
318 removes the
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details/State Details for a specific temporary difference line by clicking the Check to override unit rates check box.
Notes:
A Default Type can be set by your System Administrator, and you may not have the ability to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The System Administrator may have allowed the ability to deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report will be available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that have been overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Contact your Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, you can
refresh, export (informational purposes)
588 , export (template)
598 , group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
ALL DATASETS
38 default rules and
The Activity, Deferred and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
Enter temporary differences that are applicable for the state, but not for federal purposes.
776
To import information to the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page complete the appropriate fields on the #SATTD# St AfterTax TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
If you wish to adjust the same state after tax temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page complete the appropriate fields on the #SATTD# St AfterTax TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import data import process.
588 for more information about the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See
Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
437 .
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the state after tax temporary difference
There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that best
relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
The tag 27 letter identifies each line entered on the originating source.
CLASS
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.
22. The beginning balance
Note: The administrator can lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ACTIVITY
776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments for the prior year balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The State Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision (State) report BSO Adjustment from the State Deferred Provision.
318 removes the
Note:
A Default Type can be changed by an Administrator, and you may not have the ability to select between C - Current and NC - Non-Current.
The System Administrator may have allowed the ability to deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select between C - Current and NC - Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report is available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that are overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Contact an Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
598 , show/hide columns, and filter your
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, and Estimated Payment data.
There are two types of permanent differences: Equity Adjustments and P&L Adjustments. You can select the appropriate type to achieve the desired provision effect. Enter permanent differences that are applicable for state, but not for federal purposes.
You can edit only the Attachment, Amount and Note data entry fields.
To create adjustments using the same state permanent difference code, you can make additional entries using different tag letters or class/subclass combinations.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State Permanent Differences screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #SPM# State Perm Mods sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis data import process.
State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table more information about the grid options.
732 for
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State Perm Diffs - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the permanent difference
423.
Type P results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account. The result impacts the overall effective tax rate.
Type E results in a current tax provision expense offset in the payable account, as well as an equity contra expense that is offset in an equity account. There is no impact on the overall effective tax rate.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered to the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.
AMOUNT
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State Payable Entry component to enter federal and jurisdiction
data. In the State Payable Entry page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your
provision and estimated payment data. You will select Receiving or Paying to create a permanent difference in the unit.
To maximize the payable functionality ensure that the payable set-up in the taxes payable account.
696
is done to reflect the activity
The payable functionality is activated with a system parameter 34 in Administration > System >
Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality with the Payable Functionality (Recommended), and select Yes.
Automatic posting from the calculated provision to the payable can be activated with a dataset
34.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State Payable Entry screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #SL# State Liability Txns sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the State Payable Entry data import process.
State Payable Entry
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The State Payable Entry component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State Payable Entry.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State Payable Entry.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State Payable Entry.
FISCAL YEAR
The fiscal year should be the year to which the payable entry relates.
JURISDICTION
The jurisdiction defaults to FED when data is entered at the unit level.
TXN TYPE
The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction types
ROLLUP
450 .
You cannot select a rollup the column is provided for viewing purposes. The "Rollup" is defined in "Administration" to allow the roll up of user-defined lines.
TXN BUCKET
The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction buckets.
TAG
451
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.
AMOUNT
Negative amounts increase and positive amounts reduce the taxable payable account. Amounts should be entered in local currency.
DATE
The dates are limited to the dates within the dataset year.
To select dates outside the dataset year, you can activate the system parameter single year restriction.
Select Administration and then System.
21 to remove the
Click Manage Configurations and then click Yes for "Adjust Payable Date Range."
FX RATE
The weighted average rate on the date of the entry can be entered.
DESCRIPTION
A description is required for each entry. If you do not enter a description, a message appears "Please check your entries for accuracy."
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State Tax Adjustments component to enter federal and jurisdiction
data. In the State Tax Adjustments page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
147 ,
588 , export (template)
598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your
provision, interim, and estimated payment data.
There are two types of Tax Adjustments, depending on the code, Cash and Non-Cash. Non-Cash Tax Adjustments have a code that begins with NC_. The cash provision is the amount of current tax liability that is expected to be represented on the tax return. The non-cash provision is any current taxes that should be accrued for prior years or for amounts that are not represented on the tax return. The Cash and Non-Cash are segregated on separate lines of the Tax Provision report.
Note: If you wish to adjust the same state tax adjustment more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State Tax Adjustments screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #STA# State Tax Adjs sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the State Tax Adjustments data import process.
State Tax Adjustments
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The StateTax Adjustments component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State Tax Adjustments.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State Tax Adjustments.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State Tax Adjustments.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the state tax adjustments
439 .
Entries with codes beginning with NC_ designate the tax adjustment as a non-cash tax adjustment.
TYPE
Select E-Equity Adjustment or P- P&L Adjustment from the drop-down list.
TAG
Select a value from the drop-down list.
CLASS
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.
AMOUNT
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
In the Data Entry list, you can select the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the StateTemp Diffs - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)
598 , group columns, show/hide columns,
and filter your Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, and Estimated Payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.
Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.
PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY
There are two sections: Detail and Rollforward. By default, the Detail section displays first. All users can enter and modify data in both sections, also by default. Administrators can use the
766 and RESTRICT_TD_TABS
770 dataset parameters to change the section that
displays by default and determine whether or not Read/Write users can enter data in the Details section.
Data entered in the Detail section is translated using the Deferred Entry Set-up displays in the Rollforward section.
For information on the Rollforward section, go to the Rollforward page.
38 default rules and
ALL DATASETS
The Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only column amounts impact the tax provision differently.
776
Each state temporary difference line defaults to being tax effected using the unit rate. The beginning and ending state and unit rates can be overridden on a line-by-line basis. If only the beginning or ending rate is overridden, you must populate the fields for both rates. If one is not populated, it defaults to a zero rate.
By default, each state temporary difference line is also tax-affected by the default state rates as defined under the State Details screen.
Enter temporary differences that are recognized for state, but not federal purposes.
To import information to the State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen, complete the appropriate fields on the #STD# St TD-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.
To update the State by State Override Deferred Tax rate on all State Temporary Differences, complete the appropriate fields on the #STDR# State Temp Diff Rates sheet in the Import Update Rates template. To generate a State Temporary Difference based on the Federal Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #GSTD# Generate State Temp Diff sheet in the Import Update Rates template.
If you wish to adjust the same state temporary difference more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.
Note: To use default unit rates type U in the rate columns when importing.
IMPORT TEMPLATE
To import information to the State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #STD# St TD-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.
See Data Entry Import import process.
588 for more information about the State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis data
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
DATA ENTRY FIELDS
The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.
The StateTemp Diffs - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.
732 for more
ACTIONS
Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.
DATA SOURCE
Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History. The Transfer Out balance appears in data source history for the Source unit.
DATASET
The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.
UNIT CODE
The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
UNIT NAME
The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.
JURISDICTION
Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.
CODE - DESCRIPTION
TYPE
20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference
424 .
There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32. Select the type that
best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.
TAG
CLASS
27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.
SUBCLASS
The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.
BEGINNING BALANCE
The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.
22. The beginning balance
Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.
ACTIVITY
776 the current and deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.
DEFERRED
776
the deferred provision, as well as deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of valuation allowances or adjustments on prior year balances.
BALANCE SHEET ONLY
Balance only impacts 776 deferred balances.
Typically this entry type is used for the impact of equity or other comprehensive income items.
The State Balance Sheet Only (BSO) adjustment on the Tax Provision (State) report BSO Adjustment from the State Deferred Provision.
OVERRIDE UNIT RATES
318 removes the
You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details/State Details for a specific temporary difference line by clicking the Check to override unit defaults check box.
Notes:
A Default Type can be set by your System Administrator, and you may not have the ability to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The System Administrator may have allowed the ability to deviate from the Default Type and allow you to select between C -Current and NC -Non-Current.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report will be available to review the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis that have been overridden and deviate from the default type set up by the administrator.
Contact your Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up.
NOTE
You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."
The list of components available in the Data Entry is determined by the Dataset Type you've selected as the Base Dataset in the Review & Edit page. It is also determined by your administrator who can assign you
permission to all components or individual components. See User Role Permissions about component permissions.
COMPONENT LIST
DATASET TYPE
The following chart shows the component list and respective dataset type(s).
465 for more information
151
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
After App Temp Diffs - Tax Basis
204
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
APIC Pool Amounts 159 See Manage Provision, Interim Actual, Estimated Payment
480 .
See Manage Configurations activate the parameter.
492 to
AT Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis
155
Provision, Estimated Payment
229 See
Provision, Estimated Payment
480 .
See Manage Configurations activate the parameter.
496 to
161
Interim Forecast
167
Provision, Interim Actual
164
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
174
Provision, Estimated Payment
171
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
Pre-Tax Book Income 181
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
174
Provision, Interim Actual, Estimated Payment, Reporting Dataset
187
Provision, Estimated Payment
184
Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, Estimated Payment
201
Provision, Estimated Payment
196
Provision, Interim Actual, Estimated Payment
In Reporting, you can create tax provision, interim provision, and estimated payments reports in multiple
views using the various Format
234 and Report Options
235 . You will find details for User-defined options,
including general setup, user permissions, parameters, and querying the database.
All Reports appear in Local Currency and Reporting Currency except Journal Entry reports.
Journal Entry reports appear only in Local Currency.
View reports for the following report levels 36 ; Unit, Sub-Consolidations, Filing Unit (Federal), and
Consolidated. You can search and sort the reporting level list. Also, if a lock icon appears for locked units and sub-consolidations.
The reporting levels represent four types of data and values.
Unit - View reports based on the dataset and report level for the designated unit type. The Units list shows the Unit Code and Unit Name.
Sub-Consolidations - View reports based on the dataset and report level, with sub-consolidation as the designated type. The Sub-Consolidated list shows the Sub-Consolidation Code and Sub- Consolidation Name.
Filing Unit (Federal) - View reports based on the dataset and report level, with filing unit as the designated type. The Filing Unit list shows the Code and Name.
Consolidated - View reports based on the dataset and report level, with consolidated as the designated type. You will see the Consolidated reporting level at the top of the Sub-Consolidations list.
Administration - Select the Regen Report Data option and launch the TS Database Analyzer.
Set up additional reporting views by creating reporting
23, sequential
23 datasets.
You can select Reporting in the Tax Provision Navigation Bar to perform your reporting tasks. Changing the
language in Settings 373 lets you translate the report to another language. However, the data you enter is not
translated, for example, dataset and unit names. When you access reporting, the Dataset that appears in the list is the dataset you selected in the Review & Edit page. However, all datasets that you have in My Review List within the My Datasets page appear in the list.
Reporting Interface
1 | Use the Dataset 233 drop-down list to select a dataset and review reports for a that dataset. |
2 | Use the Report Level 233 drop-down list to select the level of reporting for reviewing reports. You can select a Unit, Sub-Consolidation, Filing Group, or Consolidated type. |
3 | Use Currency to review the reports in Local or Reporting currency. |
4 | Use the Repository (My Reports 237 & Shared Reports 241 ), Batch Report 241 , and Notes 242 buttons to create, batch print, and add notes to user-defined reports 237 . |
5 | Use the reporting list to select a report and then run the report to review the data. |
6 | Use Options to view and select the Format, Report, and Class options for a report. |
7 | Use Format 234 to change the way a report appears in a report page and how a report prints. Select |
options to freeze/unfreeze panes, modify the column size, contract/expand all lines, show grid lines, | |
highlight the row/columns, and alternate row colors. | |
8 | Use Report Options 235 to select various options for a report. The options available depend on the report you select. |
9 | |
10 | Use the reporting ribbon to Run 233 , Print 249 , Save 243 and select page settings 245 . |
11 | Use the Maximize button to maximize the grid. Use to minimize the grid. |
12 Use the report to review your tax provision, interim provision, and estimated payments reports in multiple views.
You can find the following list of reports in the system.
261
263
264
Tax Provision (GAAP - STAT) Dataset Compare
267
270
Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison
273
277
280 ry
282
284
297
298
303
307
335
To run a report:
Select a dataset in the Dataset drop-down list. In the list, you will see the Dataset Name, Year, Period, Type and Data Option.
Select the level of reporting in the Report Level drop-down list. In the list, you will see the Display Name, Code, and Type. For example, you can choose a Unit or Consolidated type.
Click Local or Reporting for your reports.
In the report list, select a report to run. For example, click Tax Provision.
Click Options to open the options menu.
Select the Format, Report Options and Class Options that apply.
Click Run.
Reporting
FREEZE
To activate the freeze panes functionality, select Freeze and then lock the headers for the area in the report that you want to review.
You can select a cell and the screen locks. Then, you can scroll to the right and down and the page shows only the data that you want to view.
To designate a fixed number of rows to appear across the top and lock column headers to the left, select Freeze. The data appears as you scroll to the right and down the page.
UNFREEZE
You can choose Unfreeze to unfreeze panes.
COLUMN SIZE
You can modify the size or hide columns. You can hide columns by dragging them to the left. When you Run a report, only the data you view on the page will print on the report.
CONTRACT ALL (EXPAND ALL) LINES
Select Contract All or Expand All to see more or less lines of detail in a report. Depending on the report, line items are grouped together in the report. This lets you make a report smaller for printing. The report will print the line items as they appear on the page. For example, if you have expanded permanent differences then all permanent differences will print while the contracted line items will print only that line.
GRID LINES
Shows a grid view and has an Excel-like grid, look and feel. To expand the column width click on the line and use the cross-hairs to drag the column just as you would do in Excel. The grid lines will print when you run the report.
HIGHLIGHTING THE ROW/COLUMN
Select Highlighting to identify a row and column, easily. Highlighting provides a visual view helping you see where you are as you scroll across the report. You can click on the row or column and drag your mouse to highlight the cells to review specific data.
ALTERNATE COLORS FOR EVERY OTHER ROW
Select Alternate Colors and the rows in the report will have alternating colors making it easier to review your the data. Every other row will have a gray background.
REPORT SPECIFIC OPTIONS
The Report Options vary from one report to another. The selections in the options page depends on the report you select. For example, the Effective Tax Rate report has the Rollup option where the Tax Provision report does not.
Some reports do not have report options, for example the Unit Summary report.
The Breakout Option is not available for Tags.
Report Options
TAX PROVISION REPORT (ONLY)
To select Report Options for the Tax Provision Report:
Select Reporting and then a report.
Select View and then Summary or Detail.
Select Breakout and then Class.
The Class breakout option lets you view the Tax Provision report by class.
Report Options
The reports that utilize the Class Options include:
Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
Deferred Balances
Payables
State Deferred Balances
To select Class Options:
Select a Class (All Classes or a specific class).
Click a Class or Group.
The Class or Class Group name will appear in the report header.
Click Run.
Class Options
In My Reports, you can create User-Defined reports by saving the Report Options and Format along with a user-defined report name.
Click to open the repository and see My Reports. When you select a Dataset, you can see all of the reports and folders added to the repository for that dataset.
The report options and format let you select and save the reporting level as well as the views.
You can batch print the reports and run up to 20 reports at the same time.
You can roll over these report settings during the dataset rollover process.
You can also create user defined folders to organize your custom reports.
When creating the user defined folders, incorporate a naming convention to reflect the level of the report. For example, if the report is a Sub-Consolidated report, you want to include sub-consolidation as part of the report name.
My Reports
Creating User-Defined Reports
To create a user defined report:
Click to add a new report to My Reports.
In Add New Report, choose the Report Name Rule.
In Custom Text, you can type a custom name, for example, Reports for External Auditor.
In Folder Location, choose a folder where you want the report to reside. The report will be saved in the selected folder or subfolder location.
Reports in My Reports are available to the administrator that created the original reports.
Reports in Shared Reports unit.
241 are available to users with access to the selected dataset and
Only users in the Administrator group are allowed to create, delete, edit or move reports within the same folder or across system folders.
My Reports
Applying Multiple Datasets to a Report
The option Apply to Multiple lets multiple datasets share a report. To apply a report to multiple datasets:
Select Datasets to apply the report to multiple datasets.
Click Next. A grid with the available datasets will appear. The dataset selected in the Reporting page is automatically selected.
Select the datasets that will share the report.
Add New Report - Datasets
Add New Report - Apply to Datasets
Applying Units/Sub-Conslidations/Filing Groups
The option Apply to Multiple lets multiple units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups share a report.
To apply a report to multiple units:
Select Units to apply the report to multiple units.
Click Next. A grid with the available units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups will appear. The unit, Sub-consolidation, or Filing Group selected in the Reporting page is automatically selected.
Select the units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups that will share the report.
Add New Report - Units
Add New Report - Apply to Units
Using Shared Reports lets you share the same report between multiple datasets, units, sub-consolidations and filing groups. Multiple users can also view a shared report (as long as the users have permissions to the dataset or unit). Administrators can share reports with all users to ensure consistent reporting.
Click to open the repository and see Shared Reports. When you select a Dataset, you can see all of the reports and folders added to the repository for that dataset.
You can share new reports to multiple datasets and units.
You can share existing reports in My Reports
237
to multiple datasets and units.
Reports are shared with users based on their user permissions.
Reporting - Shared Reports: Example of the Shared Reports Naming Convention
You can select multiple folders or reports in the My Reports/Shared Reports repository, then submit the reports to a User Defined batch for batch printing. The reports can run while you continue to work in the Tax Provision application. The reports will be available for 24 hours upon completion of the batch. Note that you can add Plug-In Reports to My Reports and print them as custom reports.
See My Reports 237 for more information about adding new reports.
To Create Batch Reports:
Click and select the reports to submit for batch printing.
Click and the Submit Selected Reports dialog box appears.
Enter a Batch Name and then select the Output Type.
You can select the following additional options for your batch reports.
Group by report level in separate files: When you select this option, submitted reports with a common report level are saved into separate files and zipped. Otherwise, all reports are saved in one file.
Compressed report: Select this option to zip the file. The option will automatically be selected when the Group by report level option is selected.
Submit Selected Reports
Once created, the Batch Reports are listed by Batch Name.
Click to see the list of batch reports.
You can check the status of the submitted batch reports, including the details of the batch print.
To analyze a report, click Download and save the batch report.
Batch Reports
Use Notes to create User-Defined notes for a report. You must Run a report to enable the Notes button. When you select the notes field appears at the bottom of the page for entering data.
You can save files in CSV, PDF, XLSX, and XLS file formats. The reports you create use a standard format for all reports to include time, date stamp, page numbers as well as the header for client name, report title, and unit/sub-consolidations.
Click to save your report in a CSV, PDF, XLSX, or XLS file format.
Reports saved as XLSX:
Maintain the format as seen on the report and saves in a number format not as text format.
Hyperlinks no longer appear on the Excel file.
Expand/Contract hierarchy of lines are grouped and will be included in the Excel file as + signs.
Example: XLSX file
Reports saved as .CSV
The following reports may take additional time to export and therefore have been recommended to be printed in the .CSV format.
Tax Provision - View: Detail - Consolidated level
ETR - View: Detail - Breakout all-Consolidated level
State Summary, Provision Summary - Breakout by unit, by state - Consolidated level
Use Page Setup and select the various options to format your reports. The Page Setup menus provide the same options as Microsoft to set up your reports. These options are part of your reports when they are opened or saved.
The Page Setup tabs include:
246
247
247
248
Page Setup
In the Page tab, you can set up the orientation and page layout.
Use Orientation to select the option to print in Portrait or Landscape.
Use Scaling to adjust the page layout.
Adjust to: % of normal size
Fit to: number of page(s) wide by the number tall
Use Miscellaneous to select the Include Comments option. Then, you can view and print the footnote text for PDF or Excel files in the report.
Note: You can enter a text footnote in the Comments area with up to 1000 characters of data in length. The Date, Time, and Page number is printed along with the comments, if the box to Print Comments is selected. (If modified, the Modified date and Modified by is available for review.)
Page Setup
In the Margins tab, you can set up the Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Header and Footer page margins. You can also select the option to center your information either Horizontally or Vertically.
Margins Setup
Use Header/Footer to type your information and customize the header/footer. Note that the iinformation you enter in Page Setup for the Header and Footer will overwrite the information entered in Administration > Manage Configurations > Reporting.
Header/Footer Setup
PRINT TITLES
You can select Use freeze pane coordinates to print titles and keep columns and rows consistent from page to page.
PAGE ORDER
You can select the order of the pages.
Down, then over
Over, then down
Sheet
After you run a report, you can print it. The report will print using the options you selected in Page Setup
245 .
To print a report:
Select a report and click Run.
Click Print and the Print dialog box opens.
Click OK to print the report.
You can use embedded reporting hyperlinks links to validate and drill into some of the more complex values calculated in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. The reports are linked so that you can easily go back and forth between reports.
The Tax Provision report has hyperlinks to the Deferred Balance (Expanded I/S) report.
The Tax Provision report has hyperlinks to the Effective Tax Rate report.
The Interim Forecast Rate and Interim Forecast State Rate reports have hyperlinks to the Forecast Deferred Provision (Expanded I/S) report.
Reporting – Interim Forecast Rate and Forecast State Rate hyperlinks
The Forecast Deferred Provision report has hyperlinks to the Forecast Rate report.
Reporting - Forecast Deferred Provision hyperlinks
Reporting Overview & Reference Information
Overview of basic reports and available reporting levels report.
36. Click a link to view information about a specific
REPORT NAME | DATASET TYPE | UNIT | FILING GROUP | CONSOL | SUB- CONSOL |
Federal | |||||
Forecast Rate | Intrm 342 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Forecast Deferred Provision | Intrm 342 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Forecast True Up | Intrm 341 | ✓ | ✓ | ||
Tax Provision | 257 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Tax Provision GAAP - STAT | Prov/Intrm 264 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Tax Provision - Interim | Intrm 258 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Federal Est Pymt | Est Pymt 346 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Effective Tax Rate | Prov/ 270 Intrm 275 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Effective Tax Rate – Breakout | Prov 708 | ✓ | |||
Deferred Balances | Prov/Intrm 277 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Deferred Workpaper | Prov/Intrm 295 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Expected Deferred Rate | Prov/Intrm 313 | ✓ | ✓ | ||
NOL Balances | Prov/ 292 Intrm 313 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
NOLs Expiration | Prov/Intrm 294 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Temporary Difference Summary | Prov/Intrm 284 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Temporary Difference Summary (Fed Filing Group) | Prov 286 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Net Deferred Tax Assets/ Liabilities | Prov/Intrm 288 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Unit Summary | Prov/Intrm 255 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Foreign/Domestic Summary | Prov/Intrm 280 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Payable Rollforward | Prov/Intrm 335 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Payable Detail | Prov/Intrm 337 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
AMT Estimator | Prov/Est Pymt 348 | ü |
REPORT NAME | DATASET TYPE | UNIT | FILING GROUP | CONSOL | SUB- CONSOL |
Tax Basis Balance Sheet | Prov/Intrm 298 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Tax Basis Income Statement | Prov 300 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Trial Balance - Balance Sheet | Intrm 301 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Trial Balance - Income Statement | Intrm 302 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Flow Through | Prov 297 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
APIC Pool Summary | Prov/Intrm 304 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Journal Entry Reports | Prov/Intrm 339 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Attachments Review | Prov/Intrm 306 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
User Status | Prov/Intrm 306 | ✓ | |||
State/Jurisdiction | |||||
State Summary | Prov 297 | ||||
Forecast State Rate | Intrm 315 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Provision Summary | Prov/Est Pymt/ Intrm 309 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
State Est Pymt Summary | Est Pymt 332 | ✓ | ✓ | ||
State/Unit Summary | Prov/Intrm 310 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Deferred Balances | Prov/Intrm 311 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Expected Deferred Rate | Prov//Intrm 313 | ✓ | ✓ | ||
State Specific | Prov 297 | ||||
Tax Provision | 328Intrm 333 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Legacy Tax Provision | 330 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
State Est Pymt | Est Pymt 332 | ✓ | |||
Deferred Balances | Prov/Intrm 324 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Payable Rollforward | Prov/Intrm 335 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | |
Payable Detail | Prov/Intrm 337 | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
Self Reconciliation of Reports
Computed amounts for all Reports, based on the selections made in a reporting level, always agree with one another. Each report shows different views or aspects of the data, but common line items (for example, Total Provision, Effective Tax Rate) always agree in all other reports at the reporting level.
Parameters for Reports
You can use parameters to configure additional functionality, calculations, and report views.
Administrators can activate pre-defined parameters at four levels: System
99 ,
135 .
Each pre-defined parameter is designed for a specific level of reporting: System Params 758, Dataset
772 , and Unit State Dataset Params
773 .
If new parameters are added with a new version of the application, the functionality is explained in the release notes and user guide.
Interim Provision/Interim Effective Tax Rate
Administrators can use the dataset parameter 57, USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR, to show different line
items in the Interim Tax Provision and Interim Effective Tax Rate reports. You can select the Detail view of the report to see the underlying balances that make up the Total Pre-Tax Book Income.
The interim effective tax rate is calculated in two ways. The designation is made by using the
USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR dataset parameter 57 with a parameter value of 0 or 1.
If you set the dataset Parameter Value to "0", the report starts with total consolidated pre-tax book income and subtracts the pre-tax book income of Exclude Foreign Loss and Exclude Units. There are four lines of data – Total Pre-Tax Book Income, Less: Excluded Units, Less: Excluded Foreign Losses, and Total Adjusted Pre-Tax Book Income - Actual.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR
Parameter Value: 0
If you set the Parameter Value to "1", the report adds the pre-tax book income of all units and builds up to total consolidated pre-tax book income. There are four lines of data – Included Units, Excluded Units, Excluded Foreign Losses, and Total Pre-Tax Book Income – Actual.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR
Parameter Value: 1
Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR applies to both the Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.
You can calculate the forecast state rate two ways. The designation is made by using the
USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE dataset parameter 57 with a paramvalue of 0 or 1.
If you set the dataset Parameter Value to "0", the system uses consolidated pre-tax book income that includes only units with an active state record.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE
Parameter Value: 0
If you set the Parameter Value to "1”, the system uses consolidated pre-tax book income that includes the pre-tax book income of all units, regardless of whether is has an active or inactive state record.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE
Parameter Value: 1
Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE applies to both Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.
Allow Multiple Currencies in Reports
Reports show the currency selected in the Reporting page.
The Currency option in the Reporting page lets you to toggle between reporting currency and local currency.
Currency Translation Adjustments and other advanced currency concepts are discussed in Foreign
643 .
Reporting Currency reports use foreign exchange rates when computing your data.
Local Currency reports use data, as it was entered in the system, allowing reports to agree with the source information.
You can view most reports in either Local or Reporting Currency for a single unit. However, other reporting levels may not combine if the underlying units' currency designations differ.
To view the local currency report with multiple currencies, you must activate the parameter, Allow Multiple Local Currencies on Reports, in the system.
o To activate this parameter go to Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Other > Allow Multiple Local Currencies on Reports. Select Yes for Allow Multiple Local Currencies on Reports.
To import this parameter into the system, use ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPORT system parameter with a paramvalue of Yes.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
View Detail / View Summary Unit Breakout Breakout Comparison | ||||
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Unit Summary report for Provision and Interim datasets creates an overview of key data for the units in the dataset, filing group, or sub-consolidation. You can view supporting detail calculations in separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a unit-by-unit view.
LINE BY LINE
There is a line for each unit in the sub-consolidation/consolidation.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI Interim dataset.
181 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > PTBI
181 in an
261
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL)
line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report lines in an Interim dataset.
258 - Pre-Tax Book Income plus Discretes pre Rate
Total Tax Provision: Tax Provision Report 261 - Total Tax Provision line in a Provision dataset. Interim
258
Total Tax Provision line in an Interim dataset.
Effective Tax Rate: Tax Provision Report 261 - Effective Tax Rate line in a Provision dataset. Interim
258
Effective Tax Rate line in an Interim dataset.
Tax Provision (Estimated Payments)
The Tax Provision/Federal Est Pymt report for the Estimated Payments dataset creates an overview of the
current tax calculation. You can view supporting detail calculations in separate reports. Parameters change the view of this report.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Federal Tax Expense.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a summarized view of report details.
The View detail option shows the available underlying detail.
LINE BY LINE
253
can
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Deductible State Tax: Current state tax provision (from State Summary after applying each unit/state's Current Federal Deductibility rates.
310 - Provision Summary
309 )
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
Financial Taxable Income - Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income, Deductible State Tax and Permanent Differences lines.
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 . Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet
Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL): Sum of Financial Taxable Income and Temporary Differences lines.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 . Only amounts entered as
Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL): Sum of Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) and NOL Reclass lines.
Unit Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates. Displays only at the Unit reporting level.
Federal Tax - Current: Taxable Income (Post-NOL) times the current unit tax rate(s)
110 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
and
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred
Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only cash items with codes that do not
Cash Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Current, After Tax Temporary Differences, and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only non-cash items with codes that
Total Current Federal Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
The Interim Tax Provision report for an Interim dataset creates an overview of the provision calculation 17
using Interim methodology. You can view supporting detail for some calculations in this report, while
underlying support for other items are in separate reports. Parameters 253can change the view of this report.
Note: When exporting to Excel, create sub-consolidations of a maximum 250 units and export to Sub- consolidated reports for the report to spill over to additional sheets.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Federal Tax Expense
Deferred Federal Tax Expense
State Tax Expense
Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a summarized view of report details.
View detail: Displays available underlying detail.
Unit breakout: In sub-consolidated and consolidated reports, details the unit-by-unit breakout. Displays in the page or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI.
181
Forecast Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates > Forecast Rate
PTBI at Forecast Rate: Pre-Tax Book Income times Forecast Rate.
342 .
Deductible State Tax: Cash Discretes provision after applying each unit/state's Current Federal Deductibility rates.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
174 and InterCompany Transaction Entry
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 . Only amounts entered as
Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 . Only amounts entered as
Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Discretes Pre Rate: Sum of Deductible State Tax, Permanent Difference, Temporary Differences, and NOL Reclass lines.
Unit Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Interim Unit Details > Rates. Only displays at the Unit reporting level.
Discretes at Actual Rate: Discretes pre Rate times the current unit tax rate
110(s)
181 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only cash items with codes that do not
Cash Discretes: Sum of Discretes at Actual Rate, After Tax Temporary Differences, and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Cash Provision: Sum of PTBI at Forecast Rate and Cash Discretes.
Non-Cash Tax Discretes Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
184 . Only non-cash items with
Total Current Federal Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Discrete Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances Fed view option.
277
report Total Beginning Balance column with the
Balance Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 and NOL
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 times the appropriate rates
181
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 . Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances view option.
277 report Total Ending Balance column with the Fed
CTA: Deferred Balances statement) view options.
277 report Total CTA column with Fed or Fed+FBOS and Expanded (income
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total Federal Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision and Equity Adjustment lines.
Total State Provision: Total State Tax Provision (from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 ).
Total Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Federal Provision and Total State Provision.
Effective Tax Rate: Total Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income.
The Tax Provision report for a Provision dataset creates an overview of the provision calculations
17. You can
view some supporting detail calculations in this report, while underlying support for other items is detailed on
separate reports. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting report. Parameters
253 can
change the view of this report. To add the parameters go to the Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting.
Notes:
Differing rounding policies can cause amounts on this report, as well as the Effective Tax Rate and Foreign/Domestic reports, to be out of sync by a minimal amount.
A Deferred Provision Only adjustment can cause this report and the Deferred Balances report to be out of balance by the amount of the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Federal Tax Expense
Deferred Federal Tax Expense
State Tax Expense
Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a summarized view of report details.
View detail: Displays available underlying detail. The view detail link no longer appears in the exported file.
Unit breakout: On sub-consolidated and consolidated reports, details the unit-by-unit breakout. Displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Unit breakout comparison: You can create a side-by-side comparison of two datasets. The result is a total and unit-by-unit variance report. It displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Deductible State Tax: Current state tax provision (from State Summary after apply each unit/state's Current Federal Deductibility rates.
310 - Provision Summary
309 )
Note: If you do not want to take the State tax deduction, set the Federal Deductibility rate for the Current Provision to zero in the Rates section of the Activated Jurisdictions page.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
Financial Taxable Income - Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income, Deductible State Tax and Permanent Differences lines.
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 . Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet
Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL): Sum of Financial Taxable Income and Temporary Differences lines.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 . Only amounts entered as
Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL): Sum of Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) and NOL Reclass lines.
Unit Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates. Only displays at the Unit reporting level.
Federal Tax - Current: Taxable Income (Post-NOL) times the current unit tax rate
110(s)
181 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
and
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred
Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only cash items with codes that do not
Return Basis Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Current, After Tax Temporary Differences and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only non-cash items with codes that
Total Current Federal Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances Fed view option.
277
report Total Beginning Balance column with the
Bal Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 times the appropriate
181 plus Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 . Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact
the current tax provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances view option.
277 report Total Ending Balance column with the Fed
CTA: Deferred Balances statement) view options.
277 report Total CTA column with Fed or Fed+FBOS and Expanded (income
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total Federal Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision, and Equity Adjustment lines.
Total State Provision: Total State Tax Provision (from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 ).
Total Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Federal Provision and Total State Provision.
Effective Tax Rate: Total Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income.
Tax Provision Unit Comparison
With the Tax Provision Unit Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.
To compare two datasets:
In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Tax Provision Unit Comparison.
Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.
Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.
Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.
The Tax Provision GAAP – STAT report for the Provision and Interim datasets creates an overview of the provision calculations and the separation of the components between GAAP to STAT and STAT to TAX. Supporting detail for some calculations can be viewed in this report, while underlying support for other items is detailed on separate reports.
The Tax Provision GAAP – STAT report is available only when the following system parameters are activated.
SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT with a paramvalue of 1.
gstags# with a paramvalue of the designated tag letter.
To activate the parameters go to the Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting >
Tax Provision.
Select Add GAAP-STAT Report.
Select a GAAP-STAT Tag from the drop-down list.
PTBI policies 181 Enter Local, USD and FX and Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding can cause
amounts in the Effective Tax Rate and Foreign/Domestic reports to be out of sync by a minimal amount.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Federal Tax Expense
Deferred Federal Tax Expense
State Tax Expense
Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a summarized view of report details with GAAP to STAT and STAT to TAX adjustments.
View detail: Displays available underlying detail of GAAP to STAT and STAT to TAX adjustments.
Unit breakout: On sub-consolidated and consolidated reports, details the unit-by-unit breakout. Displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Note: Unit code columns are sorted alphabetically.
Unit breakout comparison: Allows you to create a side-by-side comparison of two datasets. The result is a total and unit-by-unit variance report. It displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Note: The view detail link no longer displays in the exported file.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Deductible State Tax: Current state tax provision (from State Summary after apply each unit/state's Current Federal Deductibility rates.
310 - Provision Summary
309 )
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 with the designated GAAP to STAT tag letter.
Financial Taxable Income - Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income, Deductible State Tax and Permanent Differences lines.
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 with the designated GAAP to STAT tag letter. Only amounts entered
as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL): Sum of Financial Taxable Income and Temporary Differences lines.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 . Only amounts entered as
Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL): Sum of Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) and NOL Reclass lines.
Unit Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates. Only displays at the Unit reporting level.
Federal Tax - Current: Taxable Income (Post-NOL) times the current unit tax rate(s
110 )
181 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
and
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred
Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only cash items with codes that do not
Return Basis Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Current, After Tax Temporary Differences and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only non-cash items with codes that
Total Current Federal Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances Fed view option
277
report Total Beginning Balance column with the
Bal Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 times the appropriate
181 plus Tax Provision After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 . Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact
the current tax provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: Deferred Balances view option.
277 report Total Ending Balance column with the Fed
CTA: Deferred Balances statement) view options.
277 report Total CTA column with Fed or Fed+FBOS and Expanded (income
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total Federal Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision, and Equity Adjustment lines.
Total State Provision: Total State Tax Provision (from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 ).
Total Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Federal Provision and Total State Provision.
Effective Tax Rate: Total Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income.
Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison
With the Tax Provision GAAP-STAT Dataset Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.
To compare two datasets:
In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison.
Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.
Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.
Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.
Use the FERC Regulated report to control which columns the activity appears. You can activate the Regulated parameters in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Regulated.
Activity for Utility designated units shows up in the 410.1/411.1 columns.
Activity for Non Utility designated units shows up in the 410.2/411.2 columns.
Activity for other units shows up in the debits/credits columns.
Activity for Utility designated units shows up in the 410.1/411.1 columns.
Activity for Non Utility designated units shows up in the 410.2/411.2 columns.
Activity for other units shows up in the debits/credits columns.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Custom Rollups Summary / Detail Contracted / Expanded Use Unit Tax Rate / Use Group Tax Rate Use Blended Rate / Use Group Tax Rate State Component Breakout | ||||
The Effective Tax Rate report for Provision datasets creates an overview of the reconciliation going from each
756 at the group rate
380
designated for the dataset and the effective tax rate calculated in the
provision calculation 17. Supporting detail for some calculations can be viewed in this report, while
underlying support for other items is on separate reports. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a
supporting report. Parameters 253 can change the view of this report.
To add the parameters go to the Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting.
Note: Differing rounding policies can cause amounts on this report, as well as the Tax Provision and Foreign/Domestic reports, to be out of balance by a minimal amount.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to summary and contracted views.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, a Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain the results for management reporting.
Detail: Displays underlying detail by the selected rollup code or the default rollup by component type.
Expanded: Displays additional columns for the pre-tax amount, the effect of rates different from statutory, rate changes from period to period, and any deferred-only adjustments that may impact the overall taxable rate for each item.
Breakout all: On Sub-Consolidated and Consolidated reports, displays underlying unit data that made up the total result. A single column can be expanded by selecting Brkout. To collapse data, select Non breakout. Expanded results display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Use Unit Tax Rate: On Unit and Filing Group level reports, displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate selected for the dataset or the Unit's current tax rate. This view option only displays in versions 6.0 and higher when the EFFRATEBRKOUT system parameter is set to 1.
Use Blended Rate: On Sub-Consolidated and Consolidated reports, displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate selected for the dataset or the Unit's current tax rate. The reconciliation starts either with PTBI at the Group Tax rate or at the Blended rate of the underlying units in the sub-consolidation/consolidation. This view option only displays when the EFFRATEBRKOUT system parameter is set to 1.
The Breakout All view shows the underlying units in the sub-consolidation/consolidation.
State Breakdown: Displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate. It displays specific state differences, as well as federal.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
FX Adjustment: The Pre-Tax Book Income (local) divided by Weighted average FX rate subtracted from Pre-Tax Book Income (reporting).
State and Local Income Taxes: Provision from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 plus the
Federal Benefit of State 307 impact.
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates differences in the current tax rates and the dataset's group tax rate, as defined in Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets. The difference of the unit current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to arrive at an adjustment to account for unit rates different from statutory.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
174 , and InterCompany Transaction Entry
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
Differences - Book/Tax Basis in the deferred tax rate.
196 . Only amounts entered as Deferred Only or when there was a change
NOLs: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Only or when there was a change in the deferred tax rate.
167 . Only amounts entered as Deferred
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments
184 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , and
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155. Only amounts entered as Deferred Only.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustments: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates for differences in current tax rates in the unit’s Unit Details screen and the group tax rate defined by the dataset in Administration > Manage
Datasets > Datasets 379 . If a unit’s current tax rate is different from the group rate, the difference of the
unit’s current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by the unit’s Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to accommodate for rates different from statutory.
Effect Deferred Rate Changes: Provides for the impact of restating beginning deferred balances, if the beginning and ending deferred tax rates found in the unit’s Unit Details screen differ.
Effect Rate Differences between Current and Deferred: Provides for activity in deferred balances that is rate effected at a current tax rate that differs from the ending deferred tax rate found in the unit’s Unit Details screen.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustments: Displays overrides to the deferred tax provision made in the Unit Details – deferred only adjustment or any Deferred Only Adjustments entered in the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, or After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screens.
Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison
With the Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.
To compare two datasets:
In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison.
Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.
Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.
Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.
Click OK.
Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout
Available only at the sub-consolidated level for Provision datasets, the Effective Tax Rate Breakout report displays a detail and summarized view of all the components at the group rate selected for the dataset and the effective tax rate calculated in the provision calculation.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Default: to summary and contracted views
Detail: Displays underlying detail by component types, tax effect, rate effect calculations.
Expanded: Displays additional columns for the pre-tax amount, the effect of rates different from statutory, rate changes from period to period, and any deferred-only adjustments that may impact the overall taxable rate for each item.
Use Blended Rate: The report displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate selected for the dataset or the Unit's current tax rate. The reconciliation starts either with PTBI at the Blended rate of the underlying units in the sub-consolidation.
Use Group Tax Rate: The report displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate selected for the dataset.
State Breakdown: Displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate. It displays specific state differences components, as well as federal.
Breakout All: This view shows the breakdown of the components of all the units included in the sub- consolidation.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
FX Adjustment: The Pre-Tax Book Income (local) divided by Weighted average FX rate subtracted from Pre-Tax Book Income (reporting).
State and Local Income Taxes: Provision from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 plus the
Federal Benefit of State 307 impact.
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates differences in the current tax rates and the dataset's group tax rate, as defined in Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets. The difference of the unit current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to arrive at an adjustment to account for unit rates different from statutory.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
174 and InterCompany Transaction Entry
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
- Book/Tax Basis deferred tax rate.
196 . Only amounts entered as Deferred Only or when there was a change in the
NOLs: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Only or when there was a change in the deferred tax rate.
167 . Only amounts entered as Deferred
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments
184 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
and
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155. Only amounts entered as Deferred Only.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustments: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates for differences in current tax rates in the unit’s Unit Details screen and the group tax rate defined by the dataset in Administration > Manage
Datasets > Datasets 379 . If a unit’s current tax rate is different from the group rate, the difference of the
unit’s current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by the unit’s Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to accommodate for rates different from statutory.
Effect Deferred Rate Changes: Provides for the impact of restating beginning deferred balances, if the beginning and ending deferred tax rates found in the unit’s Unit Details screen differ.
Effect Rate Differences between Current and Deferred: Provides for activity in deferred balances that is rate effected at a current tax rate that differs from the ending deferred tax rate found in the unit’s Unit Details screen.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustments: Displays overrides to the deferred tax provision made in the Unit Details – “deferred only adjustment” or any Deferred Only Adjustments entered in the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, or After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screens.
The Interim Effective Tax Rate report for Interim datasets displays an overview of the reconciliation going
756 at the group rate
406 designated for the dataset and the effective tax rate calculated
in the provision calculation 17. Supporting detail for some calculations can be viewed in this report, while the
underlying support for other items is detailed in separate reports. Parameters report.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the summary and contracted views.
253
can change the view of this
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, a Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain results for management reporting.
Detail: Displays underlying detail by the selected rollup code or the default rollup by component type.
Expanded: Displays additional columns for the pre-tax amount, the effect of rates different from statutory, rate changes from period to period, and any deferred-only adjustments that may impact the overall taxable rate for each item.
Breakout all: On Sub-Consolidated and Consolidated reports, displays underlying unit data that made up the total result. A single column can be expanded by selected Brkout. To collapse data, select Non breakout. Expanded results display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Use Unit Tax Rate: On Unit level reports, displays the effective tax rate report, reconciling to the Group Rate selected for the dataset or the Unit's current tax rate. This option displays only in certain versions with a parameter setting.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Impact of Difference in Forecast vs Actual: Accommodates for the difference between the Forecast
rate and Actual on Pre-Tax Book Income. PTBI times the Forecast Rate Rates.
342 minus PTBI times Actual
State and Local Income Taxes: Provision from State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 plus the
Federal Benefit of State 307 impact.
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates differences in the current tax rates and the dataset's group tax rate, as defined in Administration > Manage Datasets. The difference of the unit current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by the Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to arrive at an adjustment to account for unit rates different from statutory.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
174 and InterCompany Transaction Entry
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Deferred Only or when there was a change in the deferred tax rate.
187 . Only amounts entered as
NOLs: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Only or when there was a change in the deferred tax rate.
167 . Only amounts entered as Deferred
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments
184 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis amounts entered as Deferred Only.
Deferred Provision Only Adjustments: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
151 . Only
Effect of Rates Different from Statutory: Accommodates for differences in the current tax rates in that unit’s Unit Details screen and the group tax rate defined by the dataset in Administration > Manage Datasets. If a unit’s current tax rate is different from the group rate, the difference of the unit’s current tax rate and the group rate is multiplied by the unit’s Pre-Tax Book Income and Permanent Differences to accommodate for rates different from statutory.
Effect Deferred Rate Changes: Provides for the impact of restating beginning deferred balances, if the beginning and ending deferred tax rates found in the unit’s Unit Details screen differ.
Effect Rate Differences between Current and Deferred: Provides for activity in deferred balances that is rate effected at a current tax rate that differs from the ending deferred tax rate found in the unit’s Unit Details screen.
Def Only Adj: Displays overrides to deferred tax provision made in the Unit Details – deferred only adjustment or any Deferred Only Adjustments entered in the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, or After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screens.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Custom Rollups Summary / Hybrid / Detail / Unit Pre-Tax Fed / State / FBOS / Fed+State+FBOS / state/fed+FBOS All / current / non-current Contracted / expanded (balance sheet) / cir expanded (balance sheet) / expanded (income statement) | ||||
The Deferred Balances report for Provision and Interim datasets displays beginning and ending cumulative temporary difference balances. When it is expanded, it shows the amounts that made up the change. The default view is pre-tax. Balances can also display at various tax effected levels by selecting options in the upper right corner. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting report.
Note: A Deferred Provision Only adjustment can cause the Interim Provision and the Deferred Balances report to be out of balance by the amount of the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment.
PROVISION ITEMS
Translation Adjustment (CTA)
Deferred Tax Expense
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
Currency
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the pre-tax and contracted views.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, a Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain results for management reporting.
The Summary, Hybrid, Detail, and Unit options display either rate effected or pre-tax balances with various levels of detail. To view the Summary, first select a rollup code, then click Summary. The Hybrid view displays both rollup sub-totals and the underlying detail for each rollup code. The Detail view shows the report at a detailed level. The Unit view groups balances into a single line for each unit in the sub-consolidation or consolidation.
Note: In order to view the detail for a user-created custom roll-up (such as a footnote), after clicking a Custom Rollup view option, you must also click the Hybrid view option.
The pre-tax, Fed, State, FBOS, Fed+State+FBOS, and State/Fed+FBOS options determine the rates that should be applied to temporary differences. Either default unit rates or the rates that were entered to override the unit rate for a specific line item are applied. The State+FBOS or the Fed+FBOS option
displays, depending on the federal benefit of state
307
253 that is selected.
The All, Current, and Non-current options allow the report to be filtered by balance sheet status.
The Contracted, Expanded (balance sheet), cir expanded (balance sheet), and Expanded (income statement) options allow you to view beginning balances, period changes, and ending balances in different ways:
The Balance sheet view can display both pre- and post-rate.
The Change in Rate (cir) column can display on a contracted basis or be divided into the change in deferred rate and the change in foreign exchange rate.
The Income statement view only displays when a rate option is selected.
The rate effected views support the Deferred Tax Asset/Liability when Expanded (balance sheet) is selected, and the Deferred Tax Expense and CTA when Expanded (income statement) is selected.
The user-defined column headers that display in the Expanded views are defined in the
Manage Deferred Rollforwards Rollforwards.
470 section in My Datasets > More > Manage Deferred
A single column can be expanded to see underlying unit-by-unit data by selecting Brkout. Expanded results display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 in the Provision section. Data Entry > Temporary Differences -
187 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , and State After Apportionment Temporary
204
in the Interim section.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in the Provision section. Data
Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in the Interim section.
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209 in the Provision section. Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151 and
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209
in the Interim section.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Beginning Balance: Beginning balances are typically populated by rolling over balances from prior periods. Amounts are populated in the beginning balance field in Data Entry > Temporary Differences -
187 , Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 , After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 and After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax
155, State Temporary Differences -Tax Basis
224 , State After Apportionment Temporary
204
and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 for the Provision
section; and Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax
167, After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 and State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204
for the Interim section.
Rate Change: When balances are rate effected, the system automatically adjusts beginning balances to accommodate for any change in the deferred rate and any change to the foreign exchange rate. The difference needed to adjust the beginning balance that was rated using the beginning deferred rate and the ending deferred rate impacts deferred tax expense. The currency translation adjustment needed to adjust beginning balances for a change in the foreign exchange rate does not impact deferred tax expense. It is treated as an equity item. View the report in Expanded (income statement) to display the components of the CTA calculation.
Note: This column cannot be moved or removed. It is system-generated.
Change Columns: The columns that explain the change in deferred balances are user-defined in the
Manage Deferred Rollforward 470 section. Each tag and item can be defined to up to 26 columns.
Adjusted Beginning Balance: A sub-total column can be inserted in the report to define adjusted beginning balances. There are several options, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Ending Balance: Total of beginning balances and all items that occurred during the period.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Summary, Prior Year Breakout | ||||
The Foreign/Domestic Summary report for Provision and Interim datasets displays an overview of the different elements of the tax provision broken out for foreign and domestic entities for the dataset, unit, or sub- consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
Note: Differing rounding policies can cause amounts in this report, as well as the Effective Tax Rate and Tax Provision reports, to be out of sync by a minimal amount.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to domestic federal and state, and foreign federal and state provision entries.
Prior Year Breakout: Provides domestic federal and state, and foreign federal and state provision entries for the prior year. This view is available when using the Prior_Year_Tag # dataset parameter
.
LINE BY LINE
769
Depending on the unit's Domestic or Foreign designation two or the lower two sections.
417 , data for the unit displays either in the top
261 - Total Current Federal Provision or State Summary
309 - State Current Tax Provision line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report
258 -
Total Current Federal Provision line or State Summary Provision line in an Interim dataset.
310 - Provision Summary
309 - State Current Tax
261 - Deferred Tax Provision or State Summary
310
309 - State Deferred Tax Provision line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report 258 - Deferred
Tax Provision line or State Summary an Interim dataset.
310 - Provision Summary
309 - State Deferred Tax Provision line in
261 - Equity Adjustment or State Summary
310 - Provision Summary
309 -
State Equity Adjustment line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report 258 - Equity Adjustment
310
309
State Equity Adjustment line in an Interim
dataset.
Pre-Tax Book Income line in an Interim dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI Interim dataset.
181 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > PTBI
181 in an
Total Tax Provision: Tax Provision Report 261 - Total Tax Provision line in a Provision dataset. Interim
258
Total Tax Provision line in an Interim dataset.
Effective Tax Rate: Tax Provision Report 261 - Effective Tax Rate line in a Provision dataset. Interim
258
Effective Tax Rate line in an Interim dataset.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Summary, Rollforward | ||||
The Tax Accounts Summary Report gives you the impact of the Trial Balance and the breakout of all the different tax accounts. You can review the different tax accounts for the Balance Sheet and the Income Statement on one page. This report enables you to check the payable and ensure the movements in deferred items went to the right place. This report also helps to validate the Journal Entries. You can easily track changes for all of your tax accounts maintained in Tax Provision with the Tax Account Rollforward report.
REPORT VIEWS
The report defaults to the Summary view. Select Rollforward view to see the detail of the change between the beginning and ending balances for the tax accounts. This view also includes a journal entry proof.
BALANCE SHEET
The report will show all of the impact to the balance sheet items for deferred and the current and non current breakdown. The breakdown includes the Balance Sheet for your Expense, Beginning, and Ending Balance for Current and Non-Current Deferred Income Tax for Federal, State, and Foreign.
There will be line items for Total Current Deferred, Total Non-Current Deferred, and Total Deferred.
PAYABLE
The payable will need additional mappings set up to be complete. You have the ability to map specific payable transaction types for various accounts. This allows you to give different presentations of your data and easily verify other items that you may track separately such as Franchise Tax.
You may want to map the following items for the payable:
Accrued Income Tax, Federal, State, and Local
Current UTB
Current UTB - Interest and Penalties
Non-Current UTB
Non-Current UTB - Interest and Penalties
ALL OTHER PAYABLE ENTRIES
If the mapping has not been configured then all items will go to the All Other Payable Entries.
INCOME TAX
The report shows the Income Statement impact of the changes in balances. The difference creates the deferred expense. The breakdown includes the Income Tax for your Expense, Beginning, and Ending Balance for Current and Non-Current Income Tax for Federal, State, and Foreign.
There will be line items for Total Current Income Tax, Total Deferred Income Tax Current Temps, Total Income Tax Non-Current Temps, and Total Income Tax Expense.
To the extent the that there are Balance Sheet Only items going to Equity, that data is available to review, as well.
TOTAL CURRENT EQUITY ADJUSTMENT
This line item will show the impact of the current for equity.
TOTAL DEFERRED EQUITY OFFSET
This line item will show the impact of the deferred for equity.
Note: Use the Tax Account mapping at the dataset level to take a transaction type within the payable and assign it to a category. Otherwise, by default, the items appear in the All Other Payable Entries line.
Data is available from three separate reports, Tax Provision, Payable, and Deferred Balances in one report.
Tax Account Summary - Rollforward report
You can find the following list of reports in the system.
284
Temporary Diffs Summary (Fed Filing Group)
284
287
Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities
288
291
292
294
295
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
By Unit: Federal Only / Federal + State / State Only By Deferred: Federal Only / Federal + State / State Only Sub-Totals: No Sub-Totals / Sub-Totals | ||||
The Temporary Differences Summary report for Provision and Interim datasets displays temporary and NOL differences, and separates ending deferred balances into current and non-current designations. The report lists current assets and liabilities, as well as non-current assets and liabilities, and sums them together to obtain the total value of current temporary differences and non-current temporary differences by unit. Totals for both current and non-current differences appear at the bottom of the report. Data can be viewed using
Rollup 38 codes at the Filing Group (Federal) reporting level or in the report named Temporary Differences
Summary (Fed Filing Group) at consolidated and sub-consolidated levels.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid using the default rollup. Only view data in a rollup that is configured to display categories that are in use.
PROVISION ITEMS
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the By Unit and Federal + State views of the report.
By Unit view: Displays balances sub-totaled by unit. Can be segregated by federal, federal and state, or state balances.
By Deferred view: Displays balances sub-totaled by temporary difference code. Can be segregated by federal, federal and state, or state balances.
By Sub-Totals view: Inserts two columns that sub-total the asset and liability columns in their current or non-current status.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary Differences -
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > Temporary Differences -
187 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , and State After Apportionment Temporary
204
in an Interim dataset.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in a Provision dataset. Data
Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in an Interim dataset.
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151 , and
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
COLUMN BY COLUMN
209
in an Interim dataset.
Temporary differences are netted by item to arrive at the asset or liability determination. For only this report, temporary differences entered for each unit are considered when netting. The Temporary
Differences Summary (Fed Filing Group) 286 report nets balances across units in a filing group. The
Net Deferred Asset/Liability designation.
288
report nets balances across units, based on the unit's country
Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Non-Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Non-Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Temporary Diffs Summary (Fed Filing Group)
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Custom Rollups / Default By Unit: Federal Only / Federal + State / State Only By Deferred: Federal Only / Federal + State / State Only Sub-Totals: No Sub-Totals / Sub-Totals | ||||
The Temporary Differences Summary (Fed Filing Group) report for Provision datasets displays temporary and NOL differences, and separates ending deferred balances into current and non-current designations. The report lists current assets and liabilities, as well as non-current assets and liabilities, and sums them together to obtain the total value of current temporary differences and non-current temporary differences by unit. Totals for both current and non-current differences appear at the bottom of the report. Data can be
viewed using Rollup 38 codes.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid using the default rollup. Only view data in a rollup that is configured to display categories that are in use.
PROVISION ITEMS
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to By Deferred and Federal + State views.
Rollup: Displays the balances sub-totalled by rollup code with underlying detail for the user-defined
rollup established in the Manage Rollups
536
by an Administrator.
By Unit: Displays balances sub-totalled by unit. Can be segregated by federal, federal and state, or state balances.
By Deferred: Displays balances sub-totalled by temporary difference code. Can be segregated by federal, federal and state, or state balances.
By Sub-Totals: Inserts two columns that sub-total the asset and liability columns in their current or non-current status.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , and State After Apportionment
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 in a Provision dataset.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in a Provision dataset.
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209 in a Provision dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Temporary differences are netted by item to arrive at the asset or liability determination. For this report, all units in the filing group's temporary differences are considered when netting.
Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Non-Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
Non-Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for the same temporary difference category item.
The Temp Diffs Discrepancy report shows when a user deviated from the Default Type set up in Manage Configuration for the C -Current, N -Non-Current Adjustment Type. You can use this report to see when users have deviated from the default.
For example, if a Temp Diff has the Default Type set up as C -Current and a user selects NC -Non-Current for the Temp Diff the report would reflect the following results.
Note: The Default Type set up in Administration > Manage Configurations > Data Entry is the Default Value in the Temp Diffs Discrepancy report.
Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Custom Rollups Federal / State / FBOS / Fed+State+FBOS / state/fed+FBOS Summary / Detail / Hybrid Total / By Country | ||||
The Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities report for Provision and Interim datasets nets temporary and NOL differences by jurisdiction and displays ending deferred balances in their current and non-current designations. The report considers current and non-current balances separately. It then nets all units with a common country designation from the Administration area in Manage Units folder > Units. If there is more than one Jurisdiction netting concept in a country, you can create another country in the Administration area in System > Manage Countries/Currencies (e.g., if there are two UK netting groups, you could have two countries: UK1 and UK2). The Temporary Differences Summary report lists current assets and liabilities, as well as non-current assets and liabilities.
Note:
In order for the Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities report to display at the Sub-consolidated level, all entities associated with each country represented in the sub-consolidation must be included. If they are not included, you will receive a message “Unit does not consist of complete country, cannot display report” error message.
PROVISION ITEMS
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the Default, Federal + State, Detail, and Total views.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, one Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain the results for management reporting.
The Federal, State, FBOS, Fed+State+FBOS, and State/Fed+FBOS options determine the rates that should be applied to temporary differences. Either the default unit rates or the rates that were entered to override the unit rate for a specific line item are applied. The State+FBOS or the Fed+FBOS option
displays, depending on the Federal Benefit of State
253 that is selected.
The Summary, Hybrid and Detail options display either rate effected or pre-tax balances with various levels of detail. For the Summary view, select a rollup code, then click Summary. The Hybrid view displays rollup sub-totals and the underlying detail for each rollup code. The Detail view shows the report at a detailed level. The Unit view group balances into a single line for each unit in the sub- consolidation or consolidation.
The Total, By Country, and By Unit options determine the level of unit detail that displays. Total displays four columns, By Country displays balances sub-totalled by the country used for jurisdiction netting, and By Unit displays country balances by underlying units.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , and State After Apportionment
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 in a Provision dataset.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in a Provision dataset.
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209 in a Provision dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Temporary differences are netted on a jurisdiction basis by looking to the unit's country code designation to arrive at the asset or liability determination. The Temporary Differences Summary report considers only temporary differences entered for each unit when netting. The Temporary
284
Differences Summary (Fed Filing Group) 286 report nets balances across units in a filing group.
Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for units with the same country designation.
Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as C (current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for units with the same country designation.
Non-Current Assets: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have an asset balance when summed with all activity for units with the same country designation.
Non-Current Liabilities: Temporary differences identified as NC (non-current) that, after tax rate, have a liability balance when summed with all activity for units with the same country designation.
Note:
If you are using a code starting with VA_, you can activate a parameter to enable VA contra accounts for the Net Deferred Balance Report to disregard the net deferred by country logic and present as an asset.
To activate the parameter, select Administration > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Other > Enable VA Contra Accounts and select Yes for the Net Deferred Report which shows the valuation allowances as Non-Contra accounts.
The Deferred Book/Tax Detail report has the ability to track the book/tax deferred balances for all temporary differences. The report shows the book and tax detail for the items entered for temporary differences on a book/tax basis or entered on a tax basis. The report will tie to other deferred reports.
The report displays the Code, Name, as well as the Book entries for the Beginning Balance to the Ending Balance, all pre rate. Also, the report displays the Tax entries for the Beginning Balance to the Ending Balance as well as the Temporary Difference entries in Pre-Tax Beginning Balance, Pre-Tax Ending Balance, After Tax Beginning Balance, and After Tax Ending Balance.
You can view the report in the ALL, tax, and book/tax basis views and sort by the different types. The report displays the After Tax Temporary difference and a different view for deferred balances to track book/tax basis balances.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, NOL Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Summary / Hybrid / Detail / Unit Pre-Tax Fed / State / FBOS / Fed+State+FBOS / state/fed+FBOS All / current / non-current Contracted / expanded (balance sheet) / expanded (income statement) | ||||
The NOL Balances report for Provision and Interim datasets displays the beginning and ending cumulative NOL balances. When it is expanded, it shows the amounts that made up the change. The default view is a pre-tax view. Balances can also display at various tax effected levels by selecting options in the upper right corner. Although this report resembles the Deferred Balances report, it can display additional information on the years the NOL arose and is expected to expire.
PROVISION ITEMS
Deferred Tax Expense
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the pre-tax and contracted views.
The Summary, Hybrid, Detail and Unit options display either rate effected or pre-tax balances with various levels of detail. The Summary view displays NOL balances by expected expiration years. The Hybrid view displays expected expiration years for sub-totals, as well as the underlying detail for each expiration year. The Detail view shows the report at a detailed level. The Unit view groups balances into a single line for each unit in the sub-consolidation or consolidation.
The Pre-tax, Fed, State, FBOS, Fed+State+FBOS, and State/Fed+FBOS options determine the rates that should be applied to NOL temporary differences. Either default unit rates or the rates that were entered to override the unit rate for a specific line item are applied. The State+FBOS or the Fed+FBOS
option displays, depending on the federal benefit of state
253
that is selected.
The All, Current, and Non-current options allow the report to be filtered by balance sheet status.
The Contracted, Expanded (balance sheet), and Expanded (income statement) options allow you to view beginning balances, period changes, and ending balances in different ways. The Balance sheet view can display both pre- and post-rate, while the Income statement view only displays when a rate option is selected. The rate effected views support the Deferred Tax Asset/Liability when Expanded (balance sheet) is selected, and the Deferred Tax Expense and CTA when Expanded (income statement) is selected. The user-defined columns that display in the Expanded views are defined in
the Manage NOL Rollforwards 473 section under the Administration area.
Any single column can be expanded to see underlying unit-by-unit data by selecting Brkout. Expanded results display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
NOL: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 in a Provision dataset, and Data Entry
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in an Interim dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Beginning Balance: Beginning balances are typically populated by rolling over balances from prior periods. Amounts are populated in the Beginning Balance field in Data Entry > NOL Temporary
167
in a Provision dataset, and Data Entry> NOL Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 167 in thane Interim dataset.
Rate Change: When balances are rate effected, the system automatically adjusts the beginning balances to accommodate for any change in the deferred rate and any change to the foreign exchange rate. The difference needed to adjust the beginning balance that was rated using the beginning deferred rate and the ending deferred rate impacts the deferred tax expense. The currency translation adjustment needed to adjust the beginning balances for a change in the foreign exchange rate does not impact the deferred tax expense. It is treated as an equity item. View the report in Expanded (income statement) to display the components of the CTA calculation.
Change Columns: The columns that explain the change in NOL balances are user-defined in the
Manage NOL Rollforward 473 section. Each tag and item can be defined to up to 15 columns.
Ending Balance: Total of beginning balances and all items that occurred during the period.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, NOL Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Summary/Detail | ||||
The NOLs Expiration report for Provision and Interim datasets displays Federal NOL temporary differences by the year in which they expire. The first year in the report is the latest expiration year for any NOL in the dataset for any unit. NOL balances can display either summarized or with underlying detail.
Note: NOL amounts remain on this report indefinitely. They are not automatically removed after the year in which they expire. To remove NOL amounts from reports, zero them out manually in the NOL Temporary
167
page.
PROVISION ITEMS
Pre-Tax Balances
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the Summary view
Click Detail to display specific NOLs with their expiration years.
LINE BY LINE
NOL: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 in a Provision dataset and Data Entry
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
COLUMN BY COLUMN
167 in an Interim dataset.
Expiration Year: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 > Year Expired.
Code: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Name: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 > Code.
167 > Description.
167
End Balance.
DTA/DTL: Pre-tax amount multiplied by My Datasets > Units > More > Rates > Ending Deferred Rate.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Deferred Support report for Provision and Interim datasets complements the Deferred Balances report. It displays a snapshot of temporary difference beginning and ending balances. These balances are shown pretax, tax-effected, and with the effective rate, as well as the number of overrides.
PROVISION ITEMS
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary Differences -
196 , and State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 in a Provision dataset. Data
Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Interim dataset.
187
and State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 in an
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
and
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209
in an Interim dataset.
NOL Temporary Differences: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167
in a Provision
dataset. Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167
in an Interim dataset.
State After-Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 in
an Interim dataset.
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary
Differences - Tax Basis Differences - Tax Basis
204
204
in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary in an Interim dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
BEGINNING BALANCE
Pre-Tax: Displays amounts populated in the beginning balance field in Data Entry > Temporary
187 , Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
196 , NOL Temporary Differences -
167 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , and State After Apportionment Temporary
204
for a Provision dataset. Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187
, NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167, State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204
for an Interim dataset.
Tax Effected: Displays above listed Pre-Tax amounts times either the Unit Beginning Deferred Rate or the Override Begin Rate as well as amounts populated in the beginning balance field in Data Entry >
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196, and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151, and State
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209 in an Interim dataset.
Effective Rate: Displays the combined rates applied to each item to go from pre-tax to tax effected. Depending on the dataset parameter, the Federal Benefit of State impact is represented as a component of either the Federal or State rate.
ENDING BALANCE
Pre-Tax: Displays combined amounts populated in the beginning balance, activity, deferred only and
balance sheet only fields in Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167, State Temporary
Differences, and State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204
for a Provision
dataset. Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 , and State After Apportionment Temporary
204
for an Interim dataset.
Tax Effected: Displays above listed Pre-Tax amounts times either the Unit Ending Deferred Rate or the Override End Rate as well as amounts populated in the beginning balance field in Data Entry >
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196, and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 in a Provision dataset. Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151, and State
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209 in an Interim dataset.
Effective Rate: Displays the combined rates applied to each item to go from pre-tax to tax effected. Depending on the dataset parameter, the Federal Benefit of State impact is represented as a component of either in the Federal or State rate.
Number of Overrides: Displays the number of entries where the pre-tax item was entered with a rate that overrode the unit rate.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Flow-Through Factors | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Flow-Through report for Provision datasets allows you to review how data moves between units as a result of the Flow-Through Factors that have been set up. It displays, by Target unit, the contributing Source unit(s) and their components and factor information as they relate to that Target unit.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Target Code: Code of unit for which Flow-Through Factors are entered.
Target Unit: Name of unit for which Flow-Through Factors are entered.
Source Code:My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Source Unit.
Source Name: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Source Unit.
Component Type: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Component Type.
Category Type: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
Balance Factor: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Balance Factor (Temporary Differences Only).
Activity Factor: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Activity Factor.
Def Only Factor: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Def Only Factor (Temporary Differences Only).
Bal Sheet Only Factor: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors > Bal Sheet Only Factor (Temporary Differences Only).
Rollup Type Code: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
Rollup Category Type: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
Rollup Component Code: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
Rollup Target Tag: My Datasets > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
You can find the following list of reports in the system.
298
300
301
Trial Balance - Income Statement
302
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Trial Balance/Tax Basis | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
default / Roll Ups detail / summary expand / contract | ||||
The Tax Basis Balance Sheet report for Provision datasets displays Balance Sheet accounts in the trial balance. The trial balance ending book basis and related adjustments are populated in the Trial Balance/Tax
Basis 201 page.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the Summary view of trial balance lines.
Select the Detail view to display trial balance lines with sub-line detail.
Select the Contract view to display total amounts per activity.
Select the Expand view to display temporary difference activity.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow trial balance sub-line data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Create and manage rollups
LINE BY LINE
536
in Administration.
Balance Sheet: Displays trial balance lines designated as asset, liability, or equity in Manage Trial Balance
430 mappings.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Book Balance: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Book Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Tax Reclass: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Adjusted Reclassified Book: Data Entry> Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Book Tax Differences: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Other Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Trial Balance/Tax Basis | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
default / Roll Ups detail / summary expand / contract | ||||
The Tax Basis Income Statement report for Provision datasets displays Income Statement accounts in the trial balance. The report layers on the book/tax adjustments to P&L to arrive at taxable income on a trial balance basis. The trial balance ending book basis and related adjustments are populated in the Trial
REPORT VIEWS
201 page.
Defaults to the Summary view of trial balance lines.
Select the Detail view to display trial balance lines with sub-line detail.
Select the Contract view to display total amounts per activity.
Select the Expand view to display temporary difference activity.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow trial balance sub-line data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
LINE BY LINE
536
for the report occurs in Administration.
Income Statement: Displays trial balance lines designated as income statement in Manage Trial Balance mappings.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
430
Book Balance: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Book Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Tax Reclass: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Adjusted Reclassified Book: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Book Tax Differences: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in a Provision dataset.
Other Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in a Provision dataset.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Control Centre Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Trial Balance/Tax Basis | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
default / Roll Ups detail / summary expand / contract | ||||
The Trial Balance - Balance Sheet report for Interim datasets displays Balance Sheet accounts in the trial balance. The trial balance ending book basis and related adjustments are populated in the Trial Balance/Tax
Basis 201 page.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a Summary view of trial balance lines.
Select the Detail view to display trial balance lines with sub-line detail.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow trial balance sub-line data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in Administration.
LINE BY LINE
Balance Sheet: Displays trial balance lines designated as asset, liability, or equity in Manage Trial Balance
430 mappings.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Book Balance: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
Book Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Tax Reclass: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
Adjusted Reclassified Book: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Book Tax Differences: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Other Adjustments: Data > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
Trial Balance - Income Statement
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Control Centre Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Trial Balance/Tax Basis | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
default / Roll Ups detail / summary expand / contract | ||||
The Trial Balance - Income Statement report for Interim datasets displays Income Statement accounts in the trial balance. The trial balance ending book basis and related adjustments are populated in the Trial Balance/
Tax Basis 201 page.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a Summary view of trial balance lines.
Select the Detail view to display trial balance lines with sub-line detail.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow trial balance sub-line data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
LINE BY LINE
536
for the report occurs in Administration.
Income Statement: Displays trial balance lines designated as income statement in Manage Trial Balance mappings.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
430
Book Balance: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
Book Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Tax Reclass: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
Adjusted Reclassified Book: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Book Tax Differences: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201
in an Interim dataset.
Other Adjustments: Data Entry > Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 in an Interim dataset.
You can find the following list of reports in the system.
Tax Expense on Income Statement
303
303
304
306
Tax Expense on Income Statement
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Review Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Tax Expense on Income Statement provides a report that displays the Tax Per Income Statement. Current Tax and Deferred Tax are calculated and provide the respective Total Current Tax and Total Deferred Tax.
This report is available when the system parameter is enabled for SHOW_PROOFPLREPORTS with a paramvalue of 1. To activate the Tax Expense on I.S. functionality, an Administrator needs to add the system parameter in Manage Restricted Features.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Review Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Effective Tax Rate Detail provides the Components and displays the Profit for the period and adjustments to arrive at the total. The PTBI, Tax Effect and Rate Effect are available.
This report is available when the system parameter is enabled for SHOW_PROOFPLREPORTS with a paramvalue of 1. To activate the Tax Expense on I.S. functionality, an Administrator needs to add the system parameter in Manage Restricted Features.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | ||
Source Data: | ||||
APIC Pool Amounts | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The APIC Pool Summary report for Provision and Interim datasets displays the Rollforward of Additional Paid In Capital (APIC) Pool balances including Unit Breakout of the APIC by entity, as well as the APIC Pool Summary of the Beginning APIC, activity in APIC, and the Ending APIC.
Note: This report is only available when the system parameter is enabled. To activate the APIC Pool Summary functionality, select Administration > Manage Configurations > Reporting > APIC Pool > APIC Pool Data Entry + Report > Yes.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the APIC Pool Activity - Unit Breakout and the APIC Pool Summary.
LINE BY LINE – APIC POOL ACTIVITY – UNIT BREAKOUT
Unit by unit APIC detail: Displays each unit’s entered data to arrive at the Ending APIC Balance.
COLUMN BY COLUMN – APIC POOL ACTIVITY – UNIT BREAKOUT
Unit Code: Displays the Unit’s code identifier.
Unit Name: Displays the Unit’s name.
Beginning Balance: Displays the Beginning APIC pool balance.
Pre-Adoption APIC Adj: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances established pre-adoption.
Tax Benefit/(Detriment): Displays the entered impact to the APIC pool for current period option activity.
Intercompany Reclass: Displays entered intercompany reclasses between units.
Other – With DTA Impact: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which have an impact to the associated Deferred Tax Assets.
Other – Without DTA Impact: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which have no impact to the associated Deferred Tax Assets.
Posted to Deferred Only: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which generated Deferred Tax Expense.
Ending Balance: Sum of the above lines.
LINE BY LINE – APIC POOL SUMMARY
Beginning APIC Balance: Displays the Beginning APIC pool balance.
Pre-Adoption APIC Adj: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances established pre-adoption.
Tax Benefit/(Detriment): Displays the entered impact to the APIC pool for current period option activity.
Intercompany Reclass: Displays entered intercompany reclasses between units.
Other – With DTA Impact: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which have an impact to the associated Deferred Tax Assets.
Other – Without DTA Impact: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which have no impact to the associated Deferred Tax Assets.
Posted to Deferred Only: Displays entered adjustments to APIC balances which generated Deferred Tax Expense.
Posted to Balance Sheet Only: Displays adjustments to APIC balances for offset due to exercises.
Ending Balance: Sum of the above lines.
COLUMN BY COLUMN – APIC POOL SUMMARY
Totals: Displays total APIC balances
Posting to DTA: Displays the posting to the associated Deferred Tax Assets
Impact on APIC: Displays the impact to the APIC Pool
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Manage Attachments to Each Component | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Attachments Review report for Provision and Interim datasets displays a list of documents that were
attached to various components
REPORT VIEWS
23 .
Defaults to a listing view of the report.
LINE BY LINE
Each attachment is listed separately.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Date Added: Displays the date the attachment was added in Year-Month-Day format.
User: Identifies the user who attached the document.
Dataset: Identifies the dataset.
Unit: Identifies the unit.
Jurisdiction: Identifies the jurisdiction/state.
Component Type: Identifies the component type (e.g., PD = Permanent Differences).
Component: Identifies the component code.
Tag: Identifies the tag ID for the component code.
Filename: Displays the filename for the attachment.
Description: Displays the user-defined description for the attached file.
The State Support area of reports shows state information for all states with records for the Unit, Sub- Consolidation, and Consolidation selected in the Reporting page.
307
309
310
311
313
314
315
The impact of the Federal Benefit of the State tax deduction can be represented as a component of the Federal or State deferred rate in reports. The determination is made on a dataset-by-dataset basis and rolls over when a dataset rolls over.
The benefit or deduction of the current state provision in the federal provision can automatically calculate at 100%. It can be limited if it is not based on a method other than the current year’s accrual of tax. On a state-by-state basis, you can enter the appropriate Federal Deductibility rates for the unit and for the specific state.
The designation is made with a FEDBENEFITOFSTATE dataset parameter with a paramvalue of FED
or STATE, which is established by an Administrator for the dataset
57.
Note: The FEDBENEFITOFSTATE dataset parameter cannot be deleted.
You can find the benefit of state taxes in the line, Deductible State Tax, within the Federal Tax Provision report. To view the underlying states that generated the deduction, view the report in the Detail view. The amount that appears is computed after the Federal Deductibility rate for the Current Provision (default setting is 100%).
You can set the Federal Deductibility rate to zero for the Current Provision if you do not wish to take the State tax deduction.
Select the Detail view for the Effective Tax Rate report to see the underlying data used to calculate the state line and the Local Income Taxes line.
The Effective Tax Rate report will have different lines depending on which dataset parameter is activated.
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE dataset parameter set to STATE:
Four lines of data show in the report - Current Provision, Deferred Provision, Equity Adjustments, and Effect of Current Provision Fed Deduction.
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE dataset parameter set to FED:
Six lines of data show in the report - Current Provision, Deferred Provision, Equity Adjustments, Effect of Current Provision Fed Deduction, Fed Benefit of Deferred Provision, and Fed Benefit of Equity Adjustments.
The Deferred Balances report displays different views depending on which parameter is activated in the system.
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE parameter set to STATE: The view is State+FBOS.
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE parameter set to FED: The view is Fed+FBOS.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
excel breakout (States) | ||||
The Provision Summary (State Summary) report in the Provision, Estimated Payments, and Interim datasets displays an overview of the various elements of the state tax provision broken out by states for the dataset, unit or sub-consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total State Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the state-by-state view of the current, deferred, and equity tax provision.
Selecting Breakout (States) displays underlying detail calculations for state provision expenses.
LINE BY LINE
317 - Tax Provision
318
State Current Tax Provision line.
317 - Tax Provision
318 - State Deferred Tax Provision line.
317 - Tax Provision
318 - State Equity Adjustment line.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The State/Unit Summary report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays an overview of key state data for the units in the dataset, filing group, or sub-consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
State Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a unit-by-unit view.
LINE BY LINE
There is a line for each unit in the sub-consolidation/consolidation.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Total State Tax Provision: Tax Provision Report 261 - State by State Tax Provision line.
Effective Tax Rate: Total State Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
State Details, State Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences, State NOL Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Unit / Detail State / FBOS / State+FBOS All / current / non-current Contracted / expanded (balance sheet) / cir expanded (balance sheet) / expanded (income statement) | ||||
The Deferred Balances (State Summary) report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays beginning and ending cumulative temporary difference balances. When it is expanded, it shows the amounts that made up the change. The default view is pre-tax. Balances can also display at various tax effected levels by selecting options in the upper right corner. Amounts with hyperlinks will generate a supporting report when the hyperlink is selected.
Note: The State name displays in the report's header.
PROVISION ITEMS
State Deferred Tax Expense
State Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the pre-tax and contracted view of the report details.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail-level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, a Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain the results for management reporting.
The Summary, Hybrid, Detail, and Unit options display either rate effected or pre-tax balances with various levels of detail. To view the summary, first select a rollup code, then select Summary. The Hybrid view displays both rollup sub-totals and the underlying detail for each rollup code. The Detail view shows the report at a detailed level. The Unit view groups balances into a single line for each unit in the sub-consolidation or consolidation.
The Pre-tax, State, and FBOS options determine the rate that should be applied to temporary differences. Either the default unit rates or the rates that were entered to override the unit rate for a specific line item are applied. Either the State+FBOS or the Fed+FBOS option displays, depending on
307
253 that is selected.
The All, Current,and Non-current options allow the report to be filtered by balance sheet status.
The Contracted, Expanded (balance sheet), and Expanded (income statement) options allow you to view beginning balances, period change, and ending balances in different ways. The balance sheet view can display both pre and post rate, while the income statement view only displays when a rate option is selected. Rate effected views support the Deferred Tax Asset/Liability when Expanded (balance sheet) is selected or the Deferred Tax Expense and CTA when Expanded (income statement) is selected. User-defined columns that display in the Expanded views are defined in the Manage
470
screen in the Administration area.
Any single column can be expanded to see underlying unit-by-unit data by selecting Brkout. Expanded results either display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis,
224
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 .
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Beginning Balance: Beginning balances are typically populated by rolling over balances from prior periods. Amounts populate in the Beginning Balance field in Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax
187, Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 ,
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , and After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax
155, and Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , State After Apportionment
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 .
Rate Change: When balances are rate effected, the system automatically adjusts beginning balances to accommodate for any change in the deferred rate and any change to the foreign exchange rate. The difference needed to adjust the beginning balance that was rated using the beginning deferred rate and the ending deferred rate impacts the deferred tax expense. The currency translation adjustment needed to adjust the beginning balances for a change in the foreign exchange rate does not impact the deferred tax expense. It is treated as an equity item. View the report in Expanded (income statement) to display the components of the CTA calculation.
Change Columns: The columns that explain the change in deferred balances are user-defined in the
Manage Deferred Rollforward 470 section. Each tag and item can be defined to up to 15 columns.
Adjusted Beginning Balance: A sub-total column can be inserted in the report to define adjusted beginning balances. There are several options, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Ending Balance: Total of beginning balances and all items that occurred during the period.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | ||
Source Data: | ||||
State Details | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Expected Deferred Rate (State Summary) report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays the state expected deferred tax rate for units that have states with active records. The expected deferred rate is computed by multiplying each state's ending deferred rate times the ending apportionment factor. The rate does not take into consideration the federal deductibility percentage. This report is activated by adding the
253 .
To activate the Expected Deferred Rate functionality, you must activate the system parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > State Level > Add Expected Deferred Report.
PROVISION ITEMS
State Ending Deferred Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detailed view.
LINE BY LINE
For each unit in the sub-consolidation/consolidation, there is a line for each state.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | SState | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
payment breakout | ||||
The State Estimated Payments Summary report in the Estimated Payments datasets displays only in the consolidated and sub-consolidated levels.
PROVISION ITEMS
Payment Amount
REPORT VIEWS
Default is the only available view.
The Payment breakout option on sub-consolidated and consolidated reports details the unit-by-unit
332
report breakout.
LINE BY LINE
Unit-by-Unit and State-by-State Summary of State Est Pymt Tax.
332 by either I - Income Tax or F- Franchise
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
Forecast - Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Foreign-Domestic / Unit Breakout Q1-Q2 Variance / Q2-Q3 Variance View Overview / View Summary / View Detail | ||||
The Forecast State Rate report in the Interim dataset displays an overview of the calculation of the State
Forecast rate. It uses information entered for each component 756 in the Forecast section. The rate
calculated in this report carries over to the Tax Provision report in the Interim dataset.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Forecast Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the Foreign-Domestic and Summary views.
Unit Breakout: Displays the underlying unit-by-unit column detail.
Q1-Q2 Variance: Displays a comparison of the total forecasted rate at Quarter 2 with Quarter 1. The Q2-Q3 Variance view displays a comparison of the total forecasted rate at Quarter 3 with Quarter 2.
View Overview: Rolls up the report to display the Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate, the Total Tax Provision, and the Forecasted Rate for Federal and State information.
View Summary: Displays the report with component level information.
View Detail: Displays the report with line-by-line level information.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate: Data Entry > Interim Unit Details
161.
Permanent Differences Includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
Modifications: Data Entry >
164 .
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
214 .
Temporary Differences Includable for State: Data Entry >
187.
Weighted Allocable Income: Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income- Annual Estimate, Permanent Differences, and Temporary Differences weighted by the number of states activated.
Total Allocable Income All States: Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income- Annual Estimate, Permanent
Differences, and Temporary Differences.
Apportionment Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS.
Apportioned Income (Pre-NOL): Allocable Income times Apportionment Rate.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportionable Income: Sum of Apportioned Income (Pre-NOL) and NOLs.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Displays only at the Unit reporting level.
Tax Before Credits: Apportionable Income times State Tax Rate.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209.
Cash State Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments that do not start with NC_.
220 . Only "cash" items with codes
Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments with codes that start with NC_.
220. Only "non-cash" items
Current State Provision: Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences, Cash State Tax Adjustments, and Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments.
Deferred State Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
State Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences current provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the
Total State Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Current State Provision, Deferred State Tax Provision, and State Equity Adjustment lines.
State Forecasted Rate: Total State Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate.
State level reports are on a single state level based on the state selected in the Navigation tree for a dataset.
State Reporting
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Unit Breakout / Unit Breakout Comparison | ||||
The Tax Provision (State) report in the Provision dataset displays the state tax provision calculations for the state selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting report.
Note: A Deferred Provision Only adjustment can cause this report and the Deferred Balances report to be out of balance by the amount of the Deferred Provision Only Adjustment.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current State Tax Expense
Deferred State Tax Expense
State Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total State Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detail view.
Selecting Unit breakout generates an Excel spreadsheet that details the unit-by-unit underlying calculations for the state's provision expenses.
Note: The Total Effective Tax Rate does not tie to the Effective Tax Rate report and the mix of Federal deductibility causes this report to not tie to other reports.
The Unit breakout comparison view option allows you to create a side-by-side comparison of two datasets. The result is a total and unit-by-unit variance report. It displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry> PTBI
181 .
Permanent Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
25 is Yes.
Modifications: Data Entry > State Permanent Differences
214 .
Temporary Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187 and
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
196, where includable status 25
is Yes. Only amounts
entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Temporary Difference Adjustments: Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Allocable Income: Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income, Permanent Differences includable for State, Modifications, Temporary Differences includable for State, and Temporary Difference Adjustments lines.
State Apportionment Percentage: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS. Only displays at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Apportioned Income Pre-NOL: Allocable Income line times State Apportionment Percentage line.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportioned Income: Sum of Apportioned Income Pre-NOL and NOLs lines.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Displays only at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Tax Before Credits: Apportioned Income line times the current State Tax Rate line.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments not start with NC_.
220 . Only cash items with codes that do
Cash Provision: Sum of Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
220 . Only non-cash items with
Current State Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Beginning Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
Balance Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 times the appropriate rates
181
and apportionment Percentage
plus Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 times the
181 plus Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 plus Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences
- Tax Basis 209 . Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax
provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Ending Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
CTA: The Total CTA column of the Deferred Balances 277 report with State or State+FBOS and
Expanded (income statement) view options.
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total State Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision, and Equity Adjustment lines.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Unit Breakout | ||||
The Legacy Tax Provision (State) report shows state tax provision calculations for the state selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed In separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current State Tax Expense
Deferred State Tax Expense
State Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total State Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detail view.
Selecting Unit breakout generates an Excel spreadsheet that details unit-by-unit underlying calculations for the state's provision expenses.
LINE BY LINE
Federal Taxable Income: Federal Taxable Income Post-NOL line from the Federal Tax Provision report
261 . In the consolidated and sub-consolidated views, each unit must have the state record 31
activated in order to include the unit's Federal Taxable Income in the state level report. If the record has not been activated, there is a difference in the two reports. The state does not have to have a tax rate or apportionment.
Backout: Permanent Differences not includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
25 is No.
Backout: Temporary Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187 and Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
25 is No. Only amounts
entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Add-back: Deductible State Tax: Deductible State Tax line from the Federal Tax Provision report
261.
Adjusted Federal Taxable Income: Sum of Federal Taxable Income, Backout: Permanent Differences not includable for State, Backout: Temporary Differences includable for State, and Add-back: Deductible State Tax.
Modifications: Data Entry > State Permanent Differences
214 .
Temporary Difference Adjustments: Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Allocable Income: Sum of Adjusted Federal Taxable Income, Modifications, and Temporary Difference Adjustments lines.
State Apportionment Percentage: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS. Only displayed at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Apportioned Income Pre-NOL: Allocable Income line times State Apportionment Percentage line.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportioned Income: Sum of Apportioned Income Pre-NOL and NOLs lines.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Only displays at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Tax Before Credits: Apportioned Income line times the current State Tax Rate line.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments not start with NC_.
220 . Only cash items with codes that do
Cash Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences, and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State > State Tax Adjustments with codes that start with NC_.
220. Only non-cash items
Current State Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Beginning Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
Bal Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 times the appropriate rates
181
and apportionment percentage
plus Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204 times the
181 plus Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
151
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 plus Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences -
Tax Basis 209 . Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax
provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Ending Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
CTA: The Total CTA column of the Deferred Balances Expanded (income statement) view options.
277 report with the State or State+FBOS and
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total State Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision, and Equity Adjustment lines.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, State Details, State Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences, State NOL Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Custom Rollups Summary / Hybrid / Detail / Unit Pre-Tax / Pre-Tax post-app State / FBOS / state/fed+FBOS All / current / non-current Contracted / expanded (balance sheet) / expanded (income statement) | ||||
The Deferred Balances (State) report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays the beginning and ending cumulative temporary difference balances. When it is expanded, it shows the amounts that made up the change. The default view is pre-tax. Balances can also display at various tax effected levels by selecting options in the upper right corner. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting report.
Note: The State name displays in the report's header.
PROVISION ITEMS
State Deferred Tax Expense
State Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the pre-tax and contracted view of the report details.
Rollups 38 are user-defined groupings that allow detail-level component data to be consolidated and
rolled up to a higher level. Creating and managing rollups
536
for the report occurs in the Administration
area. For example, a Rollup may assist in generating the footnote, while another may explain the results for management reporting.
The Summary, Hybrid, Detail, and Unit options display either rate effected or pre-tax balances with various levels of detail. To view the summary, first select a rollup code, then select Summary. The Hybrid view displays both rollup sub-totals and the underlying detail for each rollup code. The Detail view shows the report at a detailed level. The Unit view groups balances into a single line for each unit in the sub-consolidation or consolidation.
The Pre-tax, State, and FBOS options determine the rate that should be applied to temporary differences. Either the default unit rates or the rates that were entered to override the unit rate for a specific line item are applied. Either the State+FBOS or the Fed+FBOS option displays, depending on
307
253 that is selected.
The All, Current,and Non-current options allow the report to be filtered by balance sheet status.
The Contracted, Expanded (balance sheet), and Expanded (income statement) options allow you to view beginning balances, period change, and ending balances in different ways. The balance sheet view can display both pre and post rate, while the income statement view only displays when a rate option is selected. Rate effected views support the Deferred Tax Asset/Liability when Expanded (balance sheet) is selected or the Deferred Tax Expense and CTA when Expanded (income statement) is selected. User-defined columns that display in the Expanded views are defined in the Manage
470
screen in the Administration area.
Any single column can be expanded to see underlying unit-by-unit data by selecting Brkout. Expanded results either display on the screen or export to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , Temporary Differences -
196 , State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis,
224
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 .
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 .
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , After
Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Beginning Balance: Beginning balances are typically populated by rolling over balances from prior periods. Amounts populate in the Beginning Balance field in Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax
187, Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
196 , NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 ,
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 , and After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax
155, and Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 , State After Apportionment
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 , and State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
209 .
Rate Change: When balances are rate effected, the system automatically adjusts beginning balances to accommodate for any change in the deferred rate and any change to the foreign exchange rate. The difference needed to adjust the beginning balance that was rated using the beginning deferred rate and the ending deferred rate impacts the deferred tax expense. The currency translation adjustment needed to adjust the beginning balances for a change in the foreign exchange rate does not impact the deferred tax expense. It is treated as an equity item. View the report in Expanded (income statement) to display the components of the CTA calculation.
Change Columns: The columns that explain the change in deferred balances are user-defined in the
Manage Deferred Rollforward 470 section. Each tag and item can be defined to up to 15 columns.
Adjusted Beginning Balance: A sub-total column can be inserted in the report to define adjusted beginning balances. There are several options, depending on the version and parameter settings.
Ending Balance: Total of beginning balances and all items that occurred during the period.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Provision Calculations, Payable Entry | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Fed Only / State Only Year-Unit-Jurisdiction-Bucket / Year-Jurisdiction Type / Unit-Jurisdiction-Year / Jurisdiction Type-Jurisdiction-Year / Year-Bucket | ||||
The Payable Rollforward (State) report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays the taxes payable for the units in the dataset or sub-consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Current Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a Year-Unit- Jurisdiction-Bucket view of Federal and State balances.
LINE BY LINE
Depending on the view selected, the lines can be Year, Unit, or Jurisdiction Type.
State Only displays payable entries in the State or user-defined Jurisdiction section.
Year-Unit-Jurisdiction-Bucket sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Unit, then Jurisdiction, and then Payable Bucket.
Year-Jurisdiction Type sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Jurisdiction type.
Jurisdiction Type-Jurisdiction-Year sorts payable data on Jurisdiction type, then Jurisdiction, and then Fiscal Year.
Year-Bucket sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Payable Bucket.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Fiscal Year: The Fiscal Year selected in the Payable Entry
Unit Code/Unit Name: The Unit in which the Payable Entry
171 screen.
171 was made.
Jurisdiction: The Jurisdiction (Federal, State, or user-defined jurisdiction 436 ) in which the Payable
Entry 171 was made.
451
171 screen.
Jurisdiction Type: Amounts are classified as Federal or State, depending on the Unit in which the
171
was made.
Beginning Balances: Amounts in the Payable Entry 171 screen for the years before the dataset year.
Transaction Amounts by Rollup: Each payable transaction Amounts are filtered into columns by rollup code.
450 has an assigned payable rollup
450 .
Ending Balances: Sum of Beginning Balances and Transaction Amounts by Rollup.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Provision Calculations, Payable Entry | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Fed Only / State Only Txn Types Totals / Txn Types Unit Breakout / Txn Types Current and Prior years / Txn Types Current and Prior years Unit Breakout / Txn Types Current and Prior years Bucket Breakout | ||||
The Payable Detail (State) report in the Provision and Interim datasets displays taxes payable detail for units in the dataset or sub-consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Current Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a view of Federal and State balances filtered and sub-totalled by Transaction Types.
State Only displays payable entries in the State or user-defined Jurisdiction section.
Txn Types Totals displays payable data by Transaction Types.
Txn Types Unit Breakout displays the payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Unit.
Txn Types Totals displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year.
Txn Types Totals displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year broken out by Unit.
Txn Types Totals displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year broken out by Bucket.
LINE BY LINE
Beginning Balances: Amounts in the Payable Entry
171 screen for the years before the dataset year.
Transaction Amounts by Rollup: Each payable transaction Amounts are filtered and sub-totalled by rollup code.
450 has an assigned payable rollup
450 .
Ending Balances: Sum of Beginning Balances and Transaction Amounts by Rollup.
Current Year and Prior Years: Depending on the view of the report, a Total for current and prior years, or the Current Year's data appears on the top and the Prior Year's data on the bottom of the report.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Totals: All entries made in the Payable Entry Consolidation selected in the Reporting page.
171 screen for the Unit, Sub-Consolidation, or
Unit Breakout: Payable Entry 171 amounts broken out by Unit and totalled.
171 amounts broken out by the Payable Bucket
451
assigned to each entry.
Tax Provision - Estimated Payments
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Review Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Tax Provision (State) report in the Estimated Payments dataset displays state tax provision calculations for the state selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for the calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current State Tax Expense
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detail view of the report.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Permanent Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
Modifications: Data Entry >
214 .
25 is Yes.
Temporary Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187 and
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
25 is Yes. Only amounts entered
as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Temporary Difference Adjustments: Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Allocable Income: Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income, Permanent Differences includable for State, Modifications, Temporary Differences includable for State and Temporary Difference Adjustments lines.
State Apportionment Percentage: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS. Displays only at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Apportioned Income Pre-NOL: Allocable Income line times State Apportionment Percentage line.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportioned Income: Sum of Apportioned Income Pre-NOL and NOLs lines.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Displays only at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Tax Before Credits: Apportioned Income line times the current State Tax Rate line.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments do not start with NC_.
220 . Only "cash" items with codes that
Cash Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
220 . Only "non-cash" items with
Current State Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Legacy Tax Provision (Estimated Payments)
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Review Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Unit Breakout | ||||
The Legacy Tax Provision (State) report in the Estimated Payments dataset displays state tax provision calculations for the state selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current State Tax Expense
Deferred State Tax Expense
State Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total State Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detail view.
Selecting Unit breakout generates an Excel spreadsheet that details unit-by-unit underlying calculations for the state's provision expenses.
LINE BY LINE
Federal Taxable Income: Federal Taxable Income Post-NOL line from the federal Tax Provision
261
report. In the consolidated and sub-consolidated views, each unit must have the state record 31
activated in order to include its Federal Taxable Income in the state level report. If the record has not been activated, there is a difference in the two reports. The state does not have to have a tax rate or apportionment.
Backout: Permanent Differences not includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
25 is No.
Backout: Temporary Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187 and Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
25 is No. Only amounts
entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Add-back: Deductible State Tax: Deductible State Tax line from the Federal Tax Provision report
261.
Adjusted Federal Taxable Income: Sum of Federal Taxable Income, Backout: Permanent Differences not includable for State, Backout: Temporary Differences includable for State, and Add-back: Deductible State Tax.
Modifications: Data Entry > State Permanent Differences
214 .
Temporary Difference Adjustments: Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Allocable Income: Sum of Adjusted Federal Taxable Income, Modifications, and Temporary Difference Adjustments lines.
State Apportionment Percentage: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS. Only displays at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Apportioned Income Pre-NOL: Allocable Income line times State Apportionment Percentage line.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportioned Income: Sum of Apportioned Income Pre-NOL and NOLs lines.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Displays only at the Unit level. To view this line in the consolidated or sub-consolidated level, select Unit breakout.
Tax Before Credits: Apportioned Income line times the current State Tax Rate line.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments not start with NC_.
220 . Only cash items with codes that do
Cash Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences, and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
220 . Only non-cash items with
Current State Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
The State Estimated Payments report in the Estimated Payments dataset displays the quarterly estimated
payments calculation. There must be data in a Compliance dataset 379 . The Provision dataset can be copied
to create the Compliance dataset with the final Provision data. The Unit(s) to be included in the calculation
must be designated as Included for Estimated Payments Calc 117. The information in the Tax Provision -
257, the configuration from jurisdiction management
379 Data
Range generate report data. Parameters
PROVISION ITEMS
Projected Liability
Total Payment Due
REPORT VIEWS
Default is the only available view.
LINE BY LINE
253 can change this report view.
Cash Provision: Tax Provision - Estimated Payments
Other Income Tax: Data Entry > Estimated Payments
257 report Cash Provision line.
117 .
Adjusted Income Tax: Sum of Cash Provision and Other Income Tax.
Percentage Cushion: Data Entry > Dataset > Administration > Dataset Parameters
253
can be set by an Administrator.
Cushioned Income Tax: Adjusted Income Tax times Percentage Cushion.
Minimum Annual Tax: Data Entry > Dataset > Jurisdiction Mgmt
89.
Projected Liability (Greater of Cushioned or Minimum): Higher of Cushioned Income Tax and Minimum Annual Tax lines.
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 Requirement and Extension Payment: Data Entry > Dataset t> Jurisdiction Mgmt 89
rates applied to Projected Liability line.
Total Required Liability YTD: Sum of Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 Requirement and Extension Payment lines.
PY Overpayment, Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 Payment:
Total Payments YTD: Sum of PY Overpayment, Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 Payment lines.
Rounded Payment Due: Total Required Liability (based on the dataset Date Range) minus Total Payments YTD times rounding set by an Administrator in Data Entry > Dataset > Administration>
253 .
Override Calculated Income Payment?: Data Entry > Unit > Unit Details > Estimated Payments
117 .
Income Payment Override: Data Entry > Unit > Unit Details > Estimated Payments
Income Payment Due: Either Rounded Payment Due or Income Payment Override.
117 .
Franchise Payments: Data Entry > Unit > Unit Details > Estimated Payments
Total Payment Due: Sum of Income Payment Due and Franchise Payments.
117 .
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
View Detail / View Summary | ||||
The Interim Provision (State) report in the Interim dataset displays state tax provision calculations for the state selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current State Tax Expense
Deferred State Tax Expense
State Equity Offset to Current Expense
Total State Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a detail view.
Selecting Unit breakout generates an Excel spreadsheet that details the unit-by-unit underlying calculations for the state's provision expenses.
The Unit breakout comparison view option allows you to create a side-by-side comparison of two datasets. The result is a total and unit-by-unit variance report. It displays on the screen or exports to an Excel file, depending on the version and parameter settings.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income: Data Entry > PTBI
181 .
Forecast Rate: Reports > Unit/Consolidated > Forecast Rate
342 .
PTBI at Forecast Rate: Pre-Tax Book Income times Forecast Rate.
Permanent Differences includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
Modifications: Data Entry >
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
214 .
25 is Yes.
Temporary Differences includable for State: Data Entry >
187,
where includable status 25 is Yes. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance
Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax provision calculation.
Temporary Difference Adjustments: Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224 . Only
amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current
tax provision calculation.
Discretes pre Rate: Permanent Differences includable for State, Modifications, Temporary Differences includable for State and Temporary Difference Adjustments lines.
State Apportionment Percentage: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS. Displays only at the Unit level.
Apportioned Discretes Pre-NOL: Discretes pre Rate line times State Apportionment Percentage line.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 .
Total Apportioned Discretes: Sum of Apportioned Discretes Pre-NOL and NOLs lines.
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Displays only at the Unit level.
Tax Before Credits: Total Apportioned Discretes line times the current State Tax Rate line.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Activity. Deferred Only and Balance Sheet Only entries do not
impact the current tax provision calculation.
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments not start with NC_.
220 . Only cash items with codes that do
Cash Discretes: Sum of Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis and Cash Tax Adjustments.
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
220 . Only non-cash items with
Current State Provision: Sum of Cash Provision and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Beginning Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
Bal Sheet Only Adjustment: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187 , NOL Temporary
167
plus Data Entry > State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
224
times the
appropriate rates 181 and apportionment Percentage plus Data Entry > State After Apportionment
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
204 times the appropriate rates
181
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 plus Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
Basis 209. Only amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only entries do not impact the current tax
provision calculation.
Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S: The Total Ending Balance column of the Deferred Balances with the State view option.
277 report
CTA: The Total CTA column of the Deferred Balances Expanded (income statement) view options.
277 report with State or State+FBOS and
Deferred Provision Only: My Datasets > Units > More > Rates.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total State Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision and Equity Adjustment lines.
State Inclusion Summary Report
The State Inclusion Summary Report shows all users how the application has been set up. The report allows all users (Admin and Non-Admin) the ability to review the dataset information that has been set up for Included for State by adjustment with the states allocation rate.
Additional mappings must be set up in order to complete the payable. You can map specific payable transaction types for various accounts. This provides you with different presentations of the data and allows you to easily verify items that you track separately; for example, tax.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Provision Calculations, Payable Entry | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Fed Only / State Only Year-Unit-Jurisdiction-Bucket / Year-Jurisdiction Type / Unit-Jurisdiction-Year / Jurisdiction Type-Jurisdiction-Year / Year-Bucket/ Year - Bucket Breakout with Rollups | ||||
Example: Year - Bucket Breakout with Rollups allows you to view each years bucket and the Breakout by Bucket.
The Payable Rollforward report for Provision and Interim datasets displays the taxes payable for a unit or sub-consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Current Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a Year-Unit-Jurisdiction-Bucket view of the report for the Federal and State balances.
LINE BY LINE
Depending on the view selected, lines can be Year, Unit, or Jurisdiction Type.
Fed Only: Displays payable entries in the Federal section.
State Only: Displays payable entries in the State or user-defined Jurisdiction section.
Year-Unit-Jurisdiction-Bucket: Sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Unit, then Jurisdiction, then Payable Bucket.
Year-Jurisdiction Type: Sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Jurisdiction type.
Unit-Jurisdiction-Year: Sorts payable data on Unit, then Jurisdiction, then Fiscal Year.
Jurisdiction Type-Jurisdiction-Year: Sorts payable data on Jurisdiction type, then Jurisdiction, then Fiscal Year.
Year-Bucket: Sorts payable data on Fiscal Year, then Payable Bucket.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Fiscal Year: The Fiscal Year selected in the Payable Entry
171 screen.
Unit Code/Unit Name: The Unit where the Payable Entry 171 was made.
Jurisdiction: The Jurisdiction (Federal, State, or user-defined jurisdiction
171 was made.
451
171 screen.
Jurisdiction Type: Amounts are classified as either Federal or State, depending on the Unit where the
171
was made.
Beginning Balances: Amounts in the Payable Entry 171 screen for the years before the dataset year.
Transaction Amounts by Rollup: Each payable transaction Amounts are filtered into columns by rollup code
450 has an assigned payable rollup
450 .
Ending Balances: Sum of Beginning Balances and Transaction Amounts by Rollup.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Provision Calculations, Payable Entry | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Fed Only / State Only Txn Types Totals / Txn Types Unit Breakout / Txn Types Current and Prior years / Txn Types Current and Prior years Unit Breakout / Txn Types Current and Prior years Bucket Breakout | ||||
The Payable Detail report for Provision and Interim datasets taxes payable detail for a unit or sub- consolidation selected in the Reporting page. Supporting detail for calculations can be viewed on separate reports.
Example: Consolidated Payable Report
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Current Tax Provision
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a view of Federal and State balances filtered and sub-totalled by Transaction Types.
Fed Only: Displays payable entries in the Federal section.
State Only: Displays payable entries in the State or user-defined Jurisdiction section.
Txn Types Totals: Displays payable data by Transaction Types.
Txn Types Unit Breakout: Displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Unit.
Txn Types Current and Prior years: Displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year.
Txn Types Current and Prior years Unit Breakout: Displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year broken out by Unit.
Txn Types Current and Prior years Bucket Breakout: Displays payable data by Transaction Types broken out by Current year and Prior year broken out by Bucket.
LINE BY LINE
Beginning Balances: Amounts in the Payable Entry
171 screen for the years before the dataset year.
Transaction Amounts by Rollup: Each payable transaction Amounts are filtered and sub-totaled by rollup code.
450 has an assigned payable rollup
450 .
Ending Balances: Sum of Beginning Balances and Transaction Amounts by rollup.
Current Year and Prior Years: Depending on the view of the report either a Total for current and prior years, or the Current Year's data appears on the top and the Prior Year's data on the bottom of the report.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Totals: All entries made in the Payable Entry Consolidation selected in the Reporting page.
171 screen for the Unit, Sub-Consolidation, or
Unit Breakout: Payable Entry 171 amounts are broken out by Unit and totalled.
171 amounts are broken out by the Payable Bucket
451 assigned to each entry.
Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Report
The Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Report enables the Read/Write user to view the adjustments configured by the Admin. The report lets the Read/Write user understand how NC_ Tax Adjustments are posted within the payable.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | ||||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Provision Expense | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
expand / contract | ||||
The Journal Entry report section for Provision and Interim datasets displays the default Provision Journal Entry (old) report.
Note: You can also view journal entry (JE) reports with configurable JE or custom JE functionality.
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to a contracted view of the simple journal entry report with eight columns: Federal Current Provision Difference, Federal Deferred Provision Difference, Federal Deferred Bal Difference, State Current Provision Difference, State Deferred Provision Difference, State Deferred Provision Difference, Federal Liability Bal Difference and State Liability Bal Difference.
Select the Expand view to display underlying Book amounts and components that make up the report.
LINE BY LINE
The active units appear within the dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Federal Current Provision Difference: ONESOURCE Tax Provision (Federal Current Tax Provision
261 ),
Book (Federal Current Provision Taxes Per Book (difference between Corporate Edition and Book).
116 ), and Federal Current Provision Difference
Federal Deferred Provision Difference: Corporate Edition (Federal Deferred Tax Provision 261 ), Book
(Federal Deferred Provision Taxes Per Book between Corporate Edition and Book).
116 ), and Federal Deferred Provision Difference (difference
Federal Deferred Balance Difference: Corporate Edition (Federal Deferred Balances 277 ), Book (Federal
Deferred Balances Taxes Per Book Corporate Edition and Book).
116 ), and Federal Deferred Balance Difference (difference between
State Current Provision Difference: Corporate Edition (State Current Tax Provision 261 ), Book (State
Current Provision Taxes Per Book Corporate Edition and Book).
116 ), and State Current Provision Difference (difference between
State Deferred Provision Difference: Corporate Edition (State Deferred Tax Provision 261 ), Book (State
Deferred Provision Taxes Per Book Corporate Edition and Book).
116), and State Deferred Provision Difference (difference between
State Deferred Balance Difference: Corporate Edition (State Deferred Balances 277 ), Book (State
Deferred Provision Taxes Per Book Corporate Edition and Book).
116), and State Deferred Balance Difference (difference between
Federal Liability Balance Difference: Corporate Edition (Federal Payable Entry 171 for entries with a
years prior to the dataset year), Book (Federal Liability Taxes Per Book Balance Difference (difference between Corporate Edition and Book).
116 ), and Federal Liability
State Liability Balance Difference: Corporate Edition (State Payable Entry 171 for entries with a years
prior to the dataset year), Book (State Liability Taxes Per Book Difference (difference between Corporate Edition and Book).
ADVANCED QUESTIONNAIRE
116 ), and State Liability Balance
The Advanced Questionnaire Summary report shows questions and answers for the dataset.
To show the questions and answers on a unit-by-unit basis, select Administration > Manage Configurations > Global Access > General. Select Yes for the parameter, Show Unit Details on Questionnaire Report.
The Sign-off Summary report shows the sign-off status for each user. There are three views.
The Overview view shows how many units are in each sign-off level.
The Unit view shows the sign-off status on a unit-by-unit basis.
The Status view shows the sign-off status for each unit.
USER ACCESS
The User Access report shows the permission level for each user on a unit-by-unit basis.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Forecast Interim Unit Details | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The Forecast True Up report for Interim datasets explains the calculation of the True-Up required to make up the difference between applying the Unit by Unit Forecasted rate and the Overall Forecasted rate to the Actual PTBI.
Note: This report is available when either the Unit by Unit
406 basis is selected when creating
an Interim dataset on the Interim Datasets screen in the Administration area.
LINE BY LINE
Shows all active units within the selected dataset.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Units: Code and name of active units.
Actual PTBI: Data Entry > Pre Tax Book Income.
Forecasted Rate Unit by Unit: If Unit by Unit is selected, this will be My Datasets > Units > More > Rates > Interim Rate Number. If Overall is selected, this will be what the Unit By Unit Interim Rate would be, if Unit by Unit was selected.
PTBI at Unit by Unit Forecasted Rate: Actual PTBI multiplied by Forecasted Rate Unit by Unit.
Forecasted Rate Overall: If Overall is selected, this will be My Datasets > Units > More > Rates. If Unit by Unit is selected, this will be what the Unit By Unit Interim Rate would be, if Overall was selected.
PTBI at Overall Forecasted Rate: Actual PTBI multiplied by Forecasted Rate Overall.
True Up Amount: Difference between PTBI at Overall Forecasted Rate and PTBI at Unit by Unit Forecasted Rate.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
Forecast - Data Entry Pages | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Foreign-Domestic / Unit Breakout Q1-Q2 Variance / Q2-Q3 Variance View Overview / View Summary / View Detail | ||||
The Forecast Rate report for Interim datasets displays an overview of the calculation of the Federal and State
forecast rate. It uses the information entered for each component 756 in the Forecast section. The rate
calculated in this report carries over to the Tax Provision report for Interim datasets. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting report.
Note: When exporting to Excel, create sub-consolidations of a maximum 250 units and export to Sub- consolidated reports for the report to spill over to additional sheets.
PROVISION ITEMS
Total Tax Provision
Forecasted Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the Foreign-Domestic and summary views.
The Unit Breakout option displays the underlying unit-by-unit column detail.
The Q1-Q2 Variance view displays a comparison of the total forecasted rate at Quarter 2 with Quarter
1. The Q2-Q3 Variance view displays a comparison of the total forecasted rate at Quarter 3 with Quarter 2.
The View Overview option rolls up the report to display the Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate, the Total Tax Provision, and the Forecasted rate for the Federal and State information.
The View Summary option displays the report with component level information.
The View Detail option displays the report with line-by-line level information.
LINE BY LINE
Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate: Data Entry > Interim Unit Details
161.
Deductible State Tax: Current state tax provision from the calculation at the bottom of the report times the federal deductible rates entered for states.
Permanent Differences: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
164 .
174 and InterCompany Transaction Entry
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
187 .
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
167 .
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL): Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate, Deductible State Tax, Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences, and NOL Reclass lines.
Unit Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > More > Interim Unit Details. Only displays at the Unit reporting level.
Federal Tax - Current: Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) times the current unit tax rate(s)
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
110 .
151 .
Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments start with NC_.
184 . Only "cash" items with codes that do not
Non-Cash Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > Tax Adjustments that start with NC_.
184 . Only "non-cash" items with codes
Federal Current Provision: Sum of Federal Tax - Current, After Tax Temporary Differences, Cash Tax Adjustments, and Non-Cash Tax Adjustments.
Deferred Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
Equity Adjustment: Data Entry > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174 . Reversal of the impact to the current
Total Federal Provision: Sum of the Total Current Provision, Deferred Tax Provision, and Equity Adjustment lines.
Federal Forecasted Rate: Total Federal Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate.
Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate: Data Entry > Interim Unit Details
161.
Permanent Differences Includable for State: Data Entry > Permanent Differences
174 and
InterCompany Transaction Entry
Modifications: Data Entry >
164 .
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
214 .
Temporary Differences Includable for State: Data Entry >
187.
Allocable Income: Sum of Pre-Tax Book Income- Annual Estimate, Permanent Differences, and Temporary Differences.
Apportionment Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Apportionment PCTS.
Apportioned Income (Pre-NOL): Allocable Income times Apportionment Rate.
NOLs: Data Entry > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Apportionable Income: Sum of Apportioned Income (Pre-NOL) and NOLs.
204 .
State Tax Rate: My Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Tax Rates. Only displays at the Unit reporting level.
Tax Before Credits: Apportionable Income times State Tax Rate.
After Tax State Temporary Differences: Data Entry > State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax
209.
Cash State Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments that do not start with NC_.
220 . Only cash items with codes
Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments: Data Entry > State Tax Adjustments codes that start with NC_.
220. Only non-cash items with
Current State Provision: Tax Before Credits, After Tax State Temporary Differences, Cash State Tax Adjustments, and Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments.
Deferred State Tax Provision: Begin Deferred Tax Per B/S plus Bal Sheet Only Adjustment minus Ending Deferred Tax Per B/S plus CTA and Deferred Provision Only lines.
State Equity Adjustment: Data v > Permanent Differences provision for Equity Adjustment Permanent Differences.
174. Reversal of the impact to the current
Total State Tax Provision: Sum of the Total Current State Provision, Deferred State Tax Provision, and State Equity Adjustment lines.
State Forecast Rate: Total State Tax Provision divided by Pre-Tax Book Income - Annual Estimate.
Re porting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Filing Group | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | |
Reporting Configura ble Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | Sub-consolidation | Currency | |
Source Data: | ||||
Unit Details, Temporary Differences, After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, State Temporary Differences, State After Tax Temporary Differences, State After Apportionment Temporary DIfferences | ||||
Ava ila ble Views: | ||||
Federal / State + FBOS Summary / Detail / Unit Expanded (I/S) All / Current / Non-current | ||||
The Forecast Deferred Provision report for Interim Forecast datasets shows the amounts that make up the total forecast deferred provision. Selecting an amount with a hyperlink opens a supporting Forecast Rate report.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Provision
Rate Impacting Items
REPORT VIEWS
The Summary, Detail and Unit options display balances with various levels of detail. To view the Summary, click Summary. The Detail view shows the report in a detailed view. The Unit view groups balances into a single line for each unit in the sub-consolidation or consolidation.
The Federal and State + FBOS options determine the rates that apply to the temporary differences. The default unit rates or the rates you enter to overwrite the unit rate are applied for a specific line item.
The All, Current and Non-current options allow the report to be filtered by balance sheet status.
A single column can be expanded to see the underlying unit-by-unit data by selecting Breakout.
LINE BY LINE
Temporary Differences: Data Entry > Temporary Differences – Tax Basis, Temporary Differences – Book/Tax Basis, State Temporary Differences – Tax Basis and State, State After Apportionment Temporary Differences – Tax Basis in the interim section.
NOL Reclass: Data Entry > NOL Temporary Differences – Tax Basis in the interim section.
After Tax Temporary Differences: Data Entry > After Tax Temporary Differences – Tax Basis and State After Tax Temporary Differences – Tax Basis in the Interim section.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
Activity: The tax effect of temporary differences entry in the activity column in Data Entry > Forecast in the interim section.
Effect Dfrd: The tax effect of rate differences for the beginning of year balances.
Effect Rate Diffs : The tax effect of rate differences for temporary differences in the Activity column.
Dfrd Only Adjs : The tax effect of temporary differences entry in the deferred only column in Data Entry
Forecast in the interim section.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Unit | Sub-consolidation | Consolidation | ||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | State | Sub-consolidation | Currency |
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Entry Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
Payment Breakout | ||||
The Federal Estimated Payments report displays the quarterly estimated payments calculation for Compliance datasets (used for Estimated Payments). A Provision dataset can be copied to create the Compliance dataset with the final Provision data. The Unit(s) to be included in the calculation must be
designated as Included for Estimated Payments Calc 117 . The information in the Tax Provision (Estimated
257 , the configuration from jurisdiction management
379 Data Range
generate report data. Parameters
PROVISION ITEMS
Projected Liability
Total Payment Due
253
can change the view of this report.
REPORT VIEWS
Default is the only available view.
LINE BY LINE
Cash Provision: Tax Provision - Estimated Payments
257 report Cash Provision line.
Other Income Tax: My Datasets > Units > More > Other > Estimated Payments.
Adjusted Income Tax: Sum of Cash Provision and Other Income Tax.
Percentage Cushion: Data Entry > Dataset > Administration> Dataset Parameters
253
can be set by an Administrator.
Cushioned Income Tax: Adjusted Income Tax times Percentage Cushion.
Minimum Annual Tax: Data Entry > Dataset > Jurisdiction Mgmt
89.
Projected Liability (Greater of Cushioned or Minimum): Higher of Cushioned Income Tax and Minimum Annual Tax lines.
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 Requirement and Extension Payment: My Datasets > More > Jurisdiction Management rates applied to Projected Liability line.
Total Required Liability YTD: Sum of Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 Requirement and Extension Payment lines.
PY Overpayment, Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 Payments populate with entries (ADJ, ADJ-F, 1ES, 1ES-F, 2ES, 2ES-F, 3ES, 3ES-F, 4ES and 4ES-F payable transaction codes) in the Payable from a Provision Dataset when the dataset is designated with the dataset parameter PULL_PAY_FROM_DATASET
and the data is refreshed by triggering Reset Report Data 351. If the PULL_PAY_FROM_DATASET
parameter is not used, the system will take all payments from all Provision datasets with the same year as the Estimated Payment dataset.
Total Payments YTD: Sum of PY Overpayment, Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 Payment lines.
Rounded Payment Due: Total Required Liability (based on the dataset Date Range) minus Total Payments YTD times rounding set by an Administrator in Data Entry > Dataset > Administration >
253 .
Override Calculated Income Payment: My Datasets > Units > More > Other > Estimated Payments.
Income Payment Override: Data Entry > Federal > Unit Details > Estimated Payments
Income Payment Due: Either Rounded Payment Due or Income Payment Override.
Franchise Payments: My Datasets > Units >More > Other > Estimated Payments.
Total Payment Due: Sum of Income Payment Due and Franchise Payments.
117 .
The Federal Estimated Payments Summary report for Compliance datasets (used for Estimated Payments) displays only at the consolidated and sub-consolidated levels.
PROVISION ITEMS
Payment Amount
REPORT VIEWS
Default is the only available view.
The Payment breakout option on sub-consolidated and consolidated reports details the unit-by-unit
346
report breakout.
LINE BY LINE
Unit-by-unit summary of Federal Est Pymt 346 by I - Income Tax or F- Franchise tax.
Reporting Levels: | ||||
Filing Group | ||||
Reporting Configurable Options: | ||||
Dataset | Unit | |||
Source Data: | ||||
All Data Review Screens | ||||
Available Views: | ||||
N/A | ||||
The AMT Estimator report for Provision and Estimated Payments datasets displays the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation.
The report only displays when the AMT Automation
114
is selected in Manage Units > More > Other page.
604 to computing the AMT - Reporting Currency
605 or Local Currency
606. Be sure
to review the calculation to ensure that the proper result is computed.
PROVISION ITEMS
Current Federal Tax Expense
Deferred Federal Tax Expense
Total Tax Provision
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability
Effective Tax Rate
REPORT VIEWS
Defaults to the filing group level calculation of the report details.
LINE BY LINE - LOCAL CURRENCY APPROACH
Taxable Income (Before NOL Reclass): Tax Provision Report line.
261 - Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL)
AMT Pre-Tax Adjustments: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT Adjustments.
Alternative Minimum Taxable Income (AMTI ): Sum of Taxable Income (Before NOL Reclass) and AMT Pre-Tax Adjustments.
AMT Tax (Pre-Credits): AMTI times AMT Tax Rate.
114 - AMT Tax Rate.
AMT Credits: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT After Tax Adjustments.
AMT Tax: Sum of AMT Tax (Pre-Credits) and AMT Credits.
Cash Provision (Before NOL, AMT Reclass): Tax Provision Report
261
Cash Provision line minus the
NOL Reclass and any AMT reclass in the After Tax Temporary Difference line.
AMT Reclass: If the AMT Tax line is greater than the Cash Provision (Before NOL, AMT Reclass) line, the difference is recorded. It is posted to the tax provision as a tax adjustment increasing the provision, and as a reclass to an After Tax Temporary Difference.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
A single column displays the calculation for the unit of the filing group.
LINE BY LINE
Taxable Income (Before NOL Reclass): Tax Provision Report line.
261 - Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL)
AMT Pre-Tax Adjustments: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT Adjustments.
Alternative Minimum Taxable Income (AMTI): Sum of Taxable Income (Before NOL Reclass) and AMT Pre-Tax Adjustments.
AMT Tax (Pre-Credits): AMTI times AMT Tax Rate.
114 - AMT Tax Rate.
AMT Credits: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT After Tax Adjustments.
AMT Tax: Sum of AMT Tax (Pre-Credits) and AMT Credits.
Cash Provision (Before NOL, AMT Reclass): Tax Provision Report
261
Cash Provision line minus the
NOL Reclass and any AMT reclass in the After Tax Temporary Difference line.
AMT Reclass: If the AMT Tax line is greater than the Cash Provision (Before NOL, AMT Reclass) line, the difference is recorded. It is posted to the tax provision as a tax adjustment increasing the provision, and as a reclass to an After Tax Temporary Difference.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
A single column displays the calculation for the unit of the filing group.
LINE BY LINE
REGULAR TAX CALCULATIONS
Federal Tax Current: Tax Provision Report
261 - Federal Tax - Current.
Federal FTC: Tax Provision Report
261
Cash Tax Adjustments.
Reclass to FTC C/O: Tax Provision Report 261 - After Tax Temporary Differences identified with
Dataset Parameter 765 with FATTD_Prefix.
Adjusted Cash Provision: Sum of Federal Tax Current, Federal FTC, and Reclass to FTC C/O.
ALTERNATIVE TAX CALCULATION
Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL): Tax Provision Report
261 - Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL).
AMT Preference Items: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT Adjustments.
AMTI (pre NOL): Sum of Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) and AMT Preferences Items.
AMT NOL (max 90% of AMTI): Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT NOL C/O Balance.
Alternative Minimum Taxable Income (AMTI): Sum of AMTI (pre NOL) and AMT NOL (max 90% AMTI).
AMT Rate: Unit Details AMT Automation
114
AMT Rate.
AMT Tax (Pre-Credits): AMTI times AMT Rate.
AMT FTC: Unit Details AMT Automation 114 - AMT After Tax Adjustments.
Tentative Minimum Tax: Sum of AMT (Pre-Credits) and AMT FTC.
AMT Liability (Recapture)
If the Tentative Minimum Tax line is greater than the Adjusted Cash Provision line, the difference is posted to an After Tax Temporary Difference with the code AMT_SYS. This increases the current tax expense and decreases the deferred tax expense.
If the Tentative Minimum Tax line is less than the Adjusted Cash Provision line and there is a beginning balance for the After Tax Temporary Difference with the code AMT_SYS for the parent unit, the difference is posted to an After Tax Temporary Difference with the code AMT_SYS. This decreases the current tax expense and increases the deferred tax expense.
When the units in the filing group have different local currencies, the postings are converted to the parent's local currency. The result displays on the report.
COLUMN BY COLUMN
A single column displays the calculation for the filing group.
An Administrator can Regen Report Data and query a dataset using the TS Database Analyzer functionality.
REGEN REPORT DATA
Regen Report Data is available for the Provision, Estimated Payment, and Interim datasets. To run the Regen Report Data option, select Reporting > Administration > Regen Report Data. This recalculates all system calculations to refresh report data. Although, rarely necessary, this option ensures you that all reports have the most current data.
TS DATABASE ANALYZER
TS Database Analyzer is available for the Provision, Estimated Payment, and Interim datasets. To run the TS Database Analyzer option, select Reporting > Administration > TS Database Analyzer.
To use the functionality, you must agree to the following statement: ONESOURCE Tax Provision does
not support or warrant the accuracy or validity of any numbers produced by this tool. You must agree that you will not rely on the results of queries run within to support any tax provision calculations.
The functionality is designed for users who have a working knowledge of database and database queries (SQL).
The query analyzer lets you run ad hoc queries against the database. It does not allow you to change the database data. Query scripts cannot contain DELETE, UPDATE, CREATE, INSERT, ALTER or TRUNCATE statements.
Export Query results to Excel by selecting Export.
Report-Ready views contain pre-calculated, report-ready results. Views contain both local and
reporting currency numbers. You must use Query filters
757.
The TS Database Analyzer option does not appear in the reporting menu unless you activate the system parameter, SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER, with a paramvalue of 1.
You will use the Legacy option in the Reporting menu to view the Legacy Reports in the application. To see Legacy in the Reporting menu, activate the Show Legacy Reports parameter.
To activate the Show Legacy Reports parameter select Administration > Manage Configurations >
Reporting > Other > Show Legacy Reports.
You can view the following reports in the Legacy reports list. If you do not see a report in the list, review the criteria below to activate the report.
Deferred Balances
Filtered Deferred Balances
The Filtered Deferred Balances reports are reports that you can customize using the following two system parameters. You can add more than one report by replacing the # with the number of the report.
The Filtered Deferred Balances reports are available for unit, sub-consolidated, and consolidated report levels.
Parameter Name | Paramvalue | Parameter Function |
FILTER#_NAME | Text | Names the filtered Deferred Balances Report created with the FILTER#_SQL parameter. |
FILTER#_SQL | SQL query | Filters deferred balances based on a SQL query to show a subset of deferred balances. |
In the following example, you can see three Filtered Deferred reports set up using the parameters:
Filtered Deferred reports
STATE TAX PROVISION
Legacy report with unit breakout and unit breakout comparison.
SIMPLE JE
Available by default.
If you don't see the Simple JE report, select Administration > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries and click No for the Enable Configurable Journal Entry parameter.
The Simple JE report is available for all report levels: unit, sub-consolidation, and consolidated.
EXPECTED DEFERRED RATE REPORT
The report will appear in the Legacy report list when you
Select a sub-consolidated or consolidated report level.
Activate a state jurisdiction in at least one unit.
ESTIMATED PAYMENT TYPE DATASETS ONLY:
Tax Provision
Federal Estimated payment
AMT Estimator - The report only appears in the reporting menu when the AMT Automation selected in Manage Units > More > Other page.
State Estimated Payment Summary
Provision Summary
114 is
Analysis is a reporting tool in which you can analyze, monitor, report and combine information. With this functionality, you can find your tax expense data in a centralized and organized data store. You can justify the results of your data, address questions about your data and strategically plan for the future with real-time reporting.
In Analysis, you can choose Dashboards and Reports containing metadata (data that provides information about other data from the ONESOURCE Tax Provision database) for reporting. A license is required to activate the Analysis functionality within the Tax Provision and Global Access applications.
The Analysis functionality obtains entered and calculated data from the Tax Provision and Global Access applications. As you enter data into the Tax Provision and Global Access applications, those amounts automatically appear in the Dashboard and Reports.
With Analysis you can view multiple years of data from both active and archived datasets. You can use your history of data to create multi-period comparisons and trend analyses.
There are two types of licenses available for the Analysis functionality; End Users and Designers. You must activate a license to see Analysis in the Tax Provision navigation bar.
An End User licensee can utilize an Analysis Dashboard to analyze data; however, cannot change the
format of the existing Dashboards or create new ones.
A Designer licensee can create Analysis Dashboards and ad hoc reports.
Note: Administrators assign datasets to Analysis in the Analysis Datasets Tax Provision Administration.
To access the Analysis page:
403 folder within ONESOURCE
In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the Available Datasets page opens.
In the Available Datasets page, for Step 1 Select Datasets, choose the datasets to analyze.
For Step 2, Select Currency, choose Reporting and Local. You can select one or both currencies.
Click Save.
357 to view your data.
Click Report 368 to access reports.
Notes:
The datasets size is determined by how much data exists in that dataset. You can select datasets until the status bar appears full and view that data in the dashboard and reports.
A message will appear in the Available Datasets page letting you know that datasets selected in Administration may not be immediately available in the page.
A date and time stamp appears so you can see when the Available Datasets list was last updated.
In Analysis, Dashboards provide a way to visualize data. Dashboards are created by the Designer and then assigned to End Users. You can view dashboards in the Dashboard page. If multiple dashboards are available, they appear in the list of tabs at the bottom of the page.
To open a Dashboard:
In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.
Select Dashboard at the top of the page to view your data.
At the bottom of the page, you can choose the tab with the dashboard in which to review. You can see this list of tabs only if multiple dashboards are available.
In the Dashboard page, you can select options to change the presentation of your data. You can adjust the dashboard settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to save.
Dashboard
Note: If a Designer did not create and assign a dashboard to the Dashboard, by default the Report page opens. In the report page, End Users can see the Repository list and find assigned reports within the Shared Analysis folder. A Designer must create and assign reports, to the reports page, in order for them to appear in the reports page.
The dashboard toolbar has the following buttons:
Previous: Undoes the most recent action.
Next: Restores the most recent action that was undone.
Refresh: Updates the dashboard with current data.
Bookmark: Opens the Bookmark menu, in which you can save a bookmark or load a previously saved bookmark. By using a bookmark, you can save modifications (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations) that they have made to the dashboard.
When you reopen the bookmark in the future, the settings that they saved are reapplied to the current data.
Email: Sends an export of the dashboard to another person.
Print: Prints the dashboard on any available printer.
Export: Exports a copy of the dashboard to Excel, PowerPoint or PDF format.
By using a bookmark, you can save your current dashboard settings (filter selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth), so that you can return to these settings at a later time. The following sections explain how to work with bookmarks.
Saving Dashboard Settings in a New Bookmark
To save a dashboard configuration as a new bookmark:
Adjust the dashboard settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to save.
Select the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Select the Save as New Bookmark option. This opens the Bookmark Properties dialog box.
If desired, enter a name for the new bookmark in the Name field. (The default bookmark name is the current date/time.)
Select Private to make the bookmark visible to a user. Select Shared so other users of the dashboard can use the bookmark.
If you select Shared and All Users, then users can share the bookmark with all dashboard users or select Same Groups to share the bookmark only with users that belong to one or more of the current user groups. (User groups are configured by an administrator.)
Choose the Read-only option so other users cannot modify this bookmark. Otherwise, any user who shares this bookmark can change the bookmark settings.
Click OK to save the bookmark.
Restoring Settings from a Bookmark
To restore a dashboard to the settings saved in a bookmark:
Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Select the bookmark to restore.
The dashboard is updated with the settings previously saved in the bookmark.
Updating an Existing Bookmark with New Settings
To update a bookmark with new settings:
Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Select the bookmark to update. This bookmark is now the active bookmark.
Make any desired changes to the dashboard settings (selections, input components and so forth).
(Optional) Click the Bookmark button again, and note that the active bookmark is highlighted.
Select the Save Current Bookmark option or press Ctrl-S on the keyboard. (On Internet Explorer, press Ctrl-Alt-S.) This updates the active bookmark with the current dashboard settings.
Note: You can only update a bookmark in which you have write permission. You can only update the default bookmark (the bookmark shown in italics or the Home bookmark) if you have write permission for the dashboard.
To delete a bookmark:
Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Right-click on the bookmark to delete, and select Remove from the context menu.
Note: You can only delete a bookmark in which they have write permission. (The Home bookmark cannot be deleted.)
To change the name or sharing settings for a bookmark:
Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Right-click on the bookmark to change, and select Properties from the context menu. This opens the Bookmark Properties dialog box.
Make the desired changes to the bookmark name and sharing. See Saving Dashboard Settings in a
359
for more information about these settings.
Click OK to update the bookmark name and sharing.
Note: You can only modify a bookmark that they have created. (The Home bookmark cannot be modified.)
Setting Initial Dashboard State with a Default Bookmark
The default bookmark for a dashboard specifies the settings (filter selections, menu choices, annotations) that are in effect each time you re-open the dashboard. The default bookmark, therefore, specifies the “starting state” of the dashboard.
If you have not yet bookmarked the desired dashboard state, see Saving Dashboard Settings in a New
359 .
To set an existing bookmark as the default bookmark:
Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.
Right-click on the bookmark to set it as the dashboard's starting state, and select Set As Default. The dashboard will open with the settings defined by this default bookmark.
The default bookmark is subsequently shown in italics.
If you do not specify a default bookmark for a dashboard, the dashboard opens with the settings defined by the Home bookmark. To remove the default designation from a bookmark, simply designate a different user- created bookmark or the Home bookmark as the default.
Exporting a Dashboard for Viewing
You can export an image of an entire dashboard, or export data from a particular dashboard component.
To export a copy of the dashboard into Excel, PowerPoint or PDF format:
Click the Export button in the dashboard toolbar. This opens the Export dialog box.
Select the Content tab, and make the following selections:
Choose the export format: Excel, PowerPoint, PDF or Snapshot.
The Snapshot option produces a portable version of the dashboard that incorporates an embedded (static) copy of the underlying data. This “snapshot” dashboard can be loaded into another server installation using an incremental deployment or into InetSoft products such as Style Scope Free Edition (http:// www.dashboardfree.com).
Select Match Layout to obtain the closest possible match between the appearance of the exported copy and the original dashboard.
Select Current View to include the current state of the dashboard in the exported file.
Select the bookmarks to include in the exported file. The selected views are converted to individual pages (PowerPoint and PDF) or sheets (Excel) in the exported copy.
Note: An anonymous user cannot save to the repository, and a Snapshot cannot be saved to the repository.
Select the Location tab, and make the following selections:
Choose Desktop to save the exported file onto the local machine.
Choose Report Repository and select a repository location to save the exported file onto the server.
When you export a dashboard to the repository, the dashboard will appear (with a different icon) within the repository menu; however is not supplied with live data. Rather, the exported dashboard will exist as an archive, reflecting the state of the data at the time that the export was made.
Click OK to close the dialog box and proceed with the export.
The Report Repository is a web-based repository (or report management), which enables you to share and manage reports between users or groups. In the Report page, you can access the Repository, which
contains three folders: ONESOURCE Default Reports
368 , My Analysis
370 , and Shared Analysis
370 . End
Users can choose from a list of reports within the folders to review their data. Reports appear in the "Repository" list only after a "Designer" creates and assigns them to the report repository.
To access reports:
In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.
Click Report and the Repository list appears.
In the Reporting page, the Repository
368
contains the ONESOURCE Default Reports folder which includes
two reports: Tax Expense Validation configured reports.
368 and Deferred Balance Validation
369. You cannot modify these pre-
Tax Expense Validation Report
The Tax Expense Validation report provides the tax expense in a pivot table format with hierarchies. You can select from the multiple filters as well as choose side-by-side comparisons for local and reporting currencies. This report includes both classes and subclasses in the same reports and access to the underlying data for the tag and class/subclass level.
Deferred Balance Validation Report
The Deferred Balance Validation report provides the deferred balance in a pivot table format with hierarchies. You can select from the multiple filters as well as choose side-by-side comparisons for local and reporting currencies. This report includes both classes and subclasses in the same reports and access to the underlying data for the tag and class/subclass level.
In the Reporting page, the Repository contains the My Analysis folder which includes a list of End User reports. End Users can choose reports in the shared analysis folder to review their data. Reports appear in the Repository list only after a Designer creates and assigns them to the report repository.
To access reports:
In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.
Click Report and the Repository list appears.
In the Repository list, click My Analysis and a list of End User reports appear.
You can adjust the report settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to view.
In the Reporting page, the Repository contains the Shared Analysis folder which includes a list of End User reports. End Users can choose reports in the shared analysis folder to review their data. Reports appear in the Repository list only after a Designer creates and assigns them to the report repository.
To access reports:
In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.
Click Report and the Repository list appears.
In the Repository list, click Shared Analysis and a list of End User reports appear.
You can adjust the report settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to view.
ONESOURCE Tax Provision Analysis Designer is a functionality that you can use with Tax Provision and Global Access applications. A license is required to utilize this functionality. Analysis offers an extensive set of features, and ONESOURCE Tax Provision provides mandatory training as well as support to help you master the functionality. Contact your Account Manager or Services contact with any questions regarding the Analysis functionality.
You can access the ONESOURCE Workpapers application, however, you must have the following items in place.
You have a valid Active Workpaper license.
You are assigned to ONESOURCE Workpapers in ONESOURCE Platform's User Administration.
To access your Active Workpapers, select Workpapers from the navigation bar.
As part of the v2016 upgrade process, Active Workpapers in ONESOURCE Tax Provision are moved to the new ONESOURCE Workpapers application. With this transition, no Active Workpaper functionality is lost. When the upgrade is complete, you can find zip files with your active workpapers in ONESOURCE Tax Provision's Administration > Global Attachments.
In ONESOURCE Workpapers, you can
View a new mapsheet, #ONESOURCEMAP#, with the new formula driven mapping and line by line reference to the old mappings for reference.
Find the old mapsheet, #MAP# in your converted workpapers. However, the #MAP# will not exist on any workpapers created after the transition.
Note: See Using the Function Wizard for formulas in ONESOURCE Workpapers online help to learn more about the GET/SET Function Wizard.
ONESOURCE Workpapers GET Function Wizard
Workpapers Permissions
The new ONESOURCE Workpapers application has a robust set of permissions. Users can have specific permissions assigned for a workpaper.
User Administration for Workpapers is only one permission for all instances as permissions are not set for each instance.
Upon upgrade, users that are in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision administration group in any instances will have Admin access in User Administration for Workpapers. All other users will have Read Only access in User Administration for Workpapers.
For more information, see the ONESOURCE Workpapers Quick Reference Cards within the Tax Provision
product in the Customer Center
15 .
Use Settings to review your license status in System Messages, refresh data in the application, select a language, import your license, export the debug file and download the Excel Add-in files.
SYSTEM MESSAGES
In System Messages, your license status appears as License OK or License Expired. If your license is expired, contact Customer Support for assistance.
REFRESH APPLICATION
Click Refresh to update the Administration pages with added or removed data.
LANGUAGE
Select a language in the drop-down list to view menu names, commands, command button names, dialog box titles, tab names and reports in that language. The application does not translate your user-defined descriptions and notes. For example, when you type a description for a temporary difference it is not translated by the application.
The following languages are available in the application:
Deutsch | (DE) | German | Germany |
English | (CA) | English | Canada |
English | (UK) | English | United Kingdom |
English | (US) | English | United States |
Español | (LA) | Spanish | Latin American |
Français | (FR) | French | France |
Français | (CA) | French | Canada |
Italian | (IT) | Italian | Italy |
Nederlands | (NL) | Dutch | Netherlands |
Portuguese | (BR) | Portuguese | Brazil |
APPLICATION LICENSE
When you license ONESOURCE Tax Provision, one person in your organization is set up as a ONESOURCE Administrator, which authorizes that person to add and maintain other users in the system.
Click Import to import your license.
SAVE DEBUG FILE
The debug file keeps a record of recent actions that were performed. This helps support to resolve client issues.
Click Export to save the debug file.
EXCEL ADD-IN DOWNLOAD
Click 32-Bit or 64-Bit to download the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in Import Tab of your MS Excel.
375 , which will appear in the Data
Settings
If you are a licensed ONESOURCE Excel Add-in user, you can download the add-in and install it on your PC. When you open Excel Professional, the add-in appears in the Add-Ins tab of the ribbon control.
The ONESOURCE Excel Add-in is available in both a 32- and 64-bit version. If you have a 32-bit version of Excel Professional, you should install the 32-bit version of ONESOURCE Excel Add-in. If you have a 64-bit version of Excel Professional, you should install the 64-bit version of ONESOURCE Excel Add-in.
ONESOURCE Excel Add-in requires Microsoft Excel Professional 2007 or later.
If you have a license to use ONESOURCE Excel Add-in, a series of Excel Add-in commands are displayed in the Help menu.
To download the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in:
From the Settings command in the navigation bar of ONESOURCE Tax Provision, select Excel Add- in/Download Excel Add-in. Download Excel Add-in appears. This page contains separate download links for the 32- and 64-bit versions of the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in installation program.
Click the download link that is appropriate for the version of Microsoft Excel you have installed on your PC. For more information about determining whether you have a 32- or 64-bit version of Excel, consult your Excel online help.
When you click the download link, a dialog box appears asking whether you want to open or save exceladdinsetup.zip. Save the archive on your PC.
Open the location in which you saved exceladdinsetup.zip.
Right-click exceladdinsetup.zip and in the menu that appears, choose Extract All...
If you're using Windows 7 - In the dialog that appears, choose a location in which to extract the archived installation files, or accept the default. Mark the Show extracted files when complete selection and then click Extract.
To install the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in:
In the Explorer window that appeared when you extracted exceladdinsetup.zip, exceladdinsetup, double-click the Setup icon. One or more messages may appear, depending upon your system's configuration:
If a message appears asking if you want to allow the program to make changes on your PC, click Yes.
If a dialog appears asking if you want to Accept the terms of the license agreement, click
Accept.
If a dialog appears asking if you want to install one or more required components on your system, click Install.
When the first step of the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in Setup Wizard appears, click Next.
Follow the instructions in the Setup Wizard to install ONESOURCE Excel Add-in.
This topic discusses how to establish the system setup information required for data entry in Administration. You will find the details for User-defined options, including general setup, user permissions, parameters, and querying the database.
A company's specific configurations in the system are known as categories. Administrators establish category items in Administration.
Categories are universal to all datasets.
An administrator creates and configures specific categories for their company.
When an administrator creates categories, they apply to all datasets and any changes made to them effect prior and current year data.
A user must have administrator permissions assigned to create categories.
Avoid using symbols when creating category names; they may appear incorrectly in reports. Use the
list of special characters reports.
774 in the reference section to determine if a symbol appears correctly in
Codes are user-defined. You can enter any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces.
If you have codes established in another application, consider using those codes in ONESOURCE Tax Provision to create a one-to-one relationship with the data in the other application.
The application uses System codes 21 for automatic postings.
Some codes determine the presentation of data in reports.
Administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining codes.
You can perform administrative tasks by selecting Administration in the Tax Provision Navigation Bar. Administration pages have various grid options available including Add, Delete, Import, Export, as well as sorting and filtering data.
Administration
1 | Use Administration in the Tax Provision navigation bar to access your system categories. |
2 | Use the Administration list to to set up and maintain system categories. |
3 | Use the Administration ribbon to Add, Delete, Import, Export, and use the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table. |
4 | Use Grouping to group your data into a new order by dragging columns to this section of the page. |
5 | Use the grid to access your data, review dataset information, select actions, and select units. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid. |
You can find the following functionality in Administration > Manage Datasets.
379
403
404
406
408
398
589
410
Manage Datasets
376 > Manage Datasets
378
Datasets, you can create Empty
383
389,
Rollover time.
392 datasets. Datasets represent a set of tax information for a specific period of
Administrators have the option to roll over a provision dataset to an interim dataset as long as the interim rate basis is set to unit by unit.
Administrators can change a dataset from a read only dataset to a read-write dataset if the case number is deleted or if a new case number is added.
You can review data in Read-Only datasets; you cannot edit the data.
383 creates a new dataset to enter new information, not already in the application.
389 creates a new dataset with information already in the application.
A rolled over dataset 387 creates a new dataset and includes the beginning deferred balances.
404 or Combined Dataset
392
feature.
These functionality combine two or more datasets, and associated components. The combined dataset will not reflect which dataset that a component originated.
Use the following options when creating a dataset.
Name
The Dataset Name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha-numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit the Dataset Name.
The dataset name appears in the My Datasets, Review & Edit and report headers.
Type
The dataset types include:
PROV - Provision Dataset
You create Provision datasets to calculate the tax provision.
EST PYMT - Estimated Payment Dataset
You create Estimated Payment datasets to calculate the current liability.
Fiscal Year
Assign a Fiscal Year to the dataset. By default, the current year appears in the Fiscal Year field. You can type a year or select a year from the drop-down list.
Fiscal Period
750
to the dataset. The Fiscal Period defines whether the data in a dataset represents
a month, several months, a quarter, or a year. You can type a year or select a year from the drop-down list.
Type the Group Rate. The Effective Tax Rate report uses the group rate as the statutory rate to which the provision reconciles.
Case Number
An optional field primarily for exporting data to compliance software.
ID
The system assigns a unique identification number to the dataset.
Transaction
Select a Transaction option so the system can determine which data entry fields to populate. For example, the system can copy or rollover data to populate data entry fields. You also have the option to create an empty dataset which will have no data in the data entry fields.
Create an Empty dataset which contains no data.
Copy an existing dataset and all information in the copied dataset resides in the new dataset.
Rollover a dataset and the system creates a dataset for the sequential period. The ending balances and rates in the dataset are the beginning balances and rates in the rolled over dataset.
Combine datasets and the group of datasets generate a single combined dataset 392 . Some
limitations apply to the combine functionality. Please review the combined dataset to ensure accurate calculations appear in the reports. The combine function assumes the rates entered for the calculations. Certain entries and balances sometimes differ from a reporting dataset using the same datasets.
Apply Data Options
Select Tags or Class/Subclasses when creating a new dataset.
Using tags or classes/sub-classes, in data entry for review purposes.
145 pages, lets you indicate the source of your data
Using tags or classes/sub-classes lets you keep track of your data entry amounts by tag or class/ sub-class.
Source Dataset
Select the dataset that you want to copy or rollover.
Depending on the Data Option you select, datasets appear with classes or tags, not both.
Prior Period Dataset
The default dataset used for unit comparison for reporting. The selected value will be the default value for the comparison dataset in the Unit Comparison Report within Reporting.
Date
The system applies a date and time stamp when you create a dataset.
Read-Only
Upon completion of data entry, you can secure your data by selecting the Read Only (R/O) option for the dataset.
You can review data in Read Only datasets. You cannot edit datasets assigned the Read Only status.
A warning No Edit Allowed appears in data entry pages for datasets with Read Only permissions.
Archived
Archived datasets are similar to Read-only datasets. If you archive a dataset, it will not appear in All Datasets or My Review list within My Datasets.
Dataset Relations
With Dataset Relations, you assign (1) tax return data (RTP Return) to the (2) final provision (RTP Provision) and (3) current provision data (RTP Target). Then, the system can automatically update the current tax provision dataset (RTP Target) through the calculation and posting of RTP true-ups.
RTP Return
A PROV type dataset with the filed tax return data.
RTP Provision
A PROV type dataset with the final tax provision data.
RTP Target
A PROV type dataset with the current year tax provision data.
For RTP adjustments to be posted, a Tax Return dataset (RTP Return) that has the filed tax return data must be related to:
The same or previous period dataset with Provision data (RTP Provision) (final provision).
The same or future period Target dataset (current year tax provision).
Locked/Unlock Subcons
You can Lock and Unlock Subcons within a dataset. You cannot edit or import data into a locked dataset.
Search Datasets
To filter the dataset list,
In the Name column select the filter.
In the Search field, type the alpha-numeric information and click Apply. The new list appears.
For example, type 2016 in Search Datasets and the application lists all datasets with 2016 in the name column.
Click Clear in the filter, to clear the information in the Search field.
Import Datasets
To import a new dataset, complete the appropriate fields on the #CD# Datasets sheet in the import categories template.
You select the following options when creating a dataset.
Sub-Consolidations
Sub-Consolidations allow you to combine units and create additional views of data.
Attachments
You can support data by attaching documentation files data entries.
Active Workpapers is listed in application
You can rollover the Active Workpaper Mapping in Tax Provision's administration apart from the dataset rollover.
My Reports
You can copy custom reports options when adding a dataset.
Shared Reports
You can share a report when adding a dataset.
Report Footnotes
You can copy the report footnotes when adding a dataset.
Security Access
You can copy the user's permissions when adding a dataset.
Data Source History
You can copy the data source history when copying a dataset.
Clear Global Access Sign-off
You can clear global access sign-off when copying a dataset.
Selected Components
You can select Yes and then choose specific components to copy to the new dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and the system copies all components to the new dataset.
Scrunch Temporary Differences
You can Scrunch data when creating a dataset. The Tag or Classes selected during the Scrunch process appear for informational purposes.
Copy Notes
When adding a dataset, you can select the option to copy the notes.
How to Add New (Empty) Datasets
To add an Empty new dataset:
In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.
Click Add to add a dataset.
Type a Name.
Select the dataset Type: PROV, or EST PYMT.
Select a Fiscal Year from the list.
Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.
Type a Group Rate %.
If required by your administrator, type a Case #.
Select Empty for the dataset Transaction.
Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to apply a datasource to the dataset for reporting functionality.
Select Tags to apply tags as the datasource for the dataset.
Select Classes & Subclasses to apply classes & subclasses as the datasource for the dataset.
Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and you can enter information into the dataset.
You can include the following items when rolling over dataset.
Subconsolidations
Attachments
Active Workpapers
My Reports
Shared Reports
Report Footnotes
Security Access
Scrunch Temporary Differences (You have the option to designate separate scrunch tag letters for current and non-current deferred balances.)
Copy Notes
Dataset Rollover Options
Before rolling over a provision dataset to an interim dataset, remove check marks for the VA and NOL
Automation 114 options in My Datasets > Units > More > Other.
To Rollover a dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Click Add to add a dataset.
Type a Name.
Select the dataset Type: PROV,or EST PYMT.
Select a Fiscal Year from the list.
Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.
Type a Group Rate %.
If required by your administrator, type the Case #.
Select Rollover for the dataset Transaction.
Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.
If you want to apply Tags to the dataset select Tags for the rolled over dataset.
If you want to apply Classes & Subclasses to the dataset select Classes & Subclasses for the rolled over dataset.
Select a dataset in the Source Dataset drop-down list.
Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.
Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.
Click Next.
Choose the components in the Include from the Source Dataset dialog box that you want to include in the rolled over dataset.
The list of components include: Sub-Consolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports,
Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Scrunch Notes.
398
Temporary Differences, and Copy
Click Save. A message appears asking if you want to refresh the report data.
Click Yes.
The Deferred Validation information is provided by the Source Dataset and Selected Dataset. You can review all changes made to rolled over balances in the Deferred Validation tab.
To review ending and beginning unit balances for the rolled over dataset:
In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.
Select Deferred Validation.
The Deferred Validation information provides the unit ending balances for all temporary differences from the source dataset.
The Deferred Validation information provides the unit beginning balances for all temporary differences from the dataset selected in Review & Edit.
The amounts in red are the result of modifications made by a user after a dataset is copied or rolled over.
To sort and filter the information, select a column header within the table.
A total amount appears for the Ending, Beginning and Difference columns.
Click Save.
The Payable Validation information is provided by the Source Dataset and Selected Dataset. You can review all changes made to rolled balances in the Payable Validation tab.
To review ending and beginning unit balances for the new rollover dataset:
In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.
Select Payable Validation.
The Deferred Validation information provides the unit ending balances for all temporary differences from the source dataset.
The Deferred Validation information provides the unit beginning balances for all temporary differences from the dataset selected in Review & Edit.
The amounts in red are the result of modifications made by a user after a dataset is copied or rolled over.
To sort and filter the information, select a column header within the table.
A total amount appears for the Ending, Beginning and Difference columns.
Click Save.
When copying dataset, you can include the following items in the copied dataset: Subconsolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports, Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Data Source History, Clear Global Access Sign Off, Selected Components and Copy Notes.
Note: To exclude data entries from the source dataset during the copy process, select the subclass assigned to the specific class (up to 5). Also, you can select all classes in Class/Subclasses in Administration, within the System, Manage Configuration folder for data entry.
To Copy a dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Click Add to add a dataset.
Type a Name.
Select the dataset Type: PROV, EST PYMT, or ACTR.
Select a Fiscal Year from the list.
Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.
Type a Group Rate %.
If required by your administrator, type the Case #.
Choose Copy for the dataset Transaction.
Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to Apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.
If you want Tags applied to the dataset, select Tags for the copied dataset.
If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset, select Classes & Subclasses for the copied dataset.
Select a dataset in the Source Dataset drop-down list.
Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.
Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.
Click Next.
Choose components in the Include from the Source Dataset dialog box that you want to include in the copied dataset.
The list of components include: Sub-Consolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports, Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Data Source History, Clear Global Access Sign Off, Copy Notes and Selected Components.
For Selected Components, clicking Yes lets you select components and then the system copies those to the new dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and and all components are copied to the new dataset.
Click Yes to copy components to the new dataset.
Selected Components
Click Next.
In the Copy Checked Components dialog box, select the components from the Beg Bal, Activity, Deferred, Bal Sheet and Expense lists.
Clicking a header name selects all components in that column. For example, click Beg Bal and all components are selected.
Copy Checked Components
Click Save.
The combined datasets option takes data from separate datasets and combines that data to create a new set of data. Several configurable items and several assumptions are made by the system when combining existing datasets. Be sure to check the dataset's combined results because they may not be what you expect.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ideal when looking to merge certain activity in multiple datasets when the Weighted Average FX rates, Federal and State Current rates, and State Apportionment rates are the same across all the datasets.
When the combined dataset is created, you can specify the first dataset, which is used to populate beginning rates, and the last dataset, which is used to populate ending rates.
The new combined dataset sets all the unit's Weighted Average FX, Federal and State Current rates, and State Apportionment rates to the rates for the first dataset.
Only entries from the first dataset for Payable, Intercompany Transactions, Trial Balance, APIC Pool, Amortized Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis, and After-Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis are included in the combined dataset.
The payable re-computes the automated posting and posts it in the payable for the combined dataset year. Other entries made to the payable, in any dataset, except the first, are not part of the combined dataset.
Combined Datasets does not restrict a user to merging appropriate period datasets. Use care when selecting datasets to ensure that correct time frames are selected. For example, a dataset designated as Q1 2010 can be combined with a dataset designated as the 11th Month 2012.
Due to the limitation of this functionality, please be sure to review the resulting dataset thoroughly for accuracy.
To Combine Multiple Datasets:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Click Add to add a dataset.
Type a Name.
Select the dataset Type: PROV, EST PYMT, or ACTR.
Select a Fiscal Year.
Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.
Type a Group Rate %.
If required by your administrator, type the Case #.
Choose Combine for the dataset Transaction.
Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to Apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.
If you want Tags applied to the dataset, select Tags for the combined dataset.
If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset, select Classes & Subclasses for the combined dataset.
Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.
Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.
Click Next.
Select a dataset from the Beginning Dataset drop-down list.
Select the datasets that you want to combine from the list of available datasets.
Select a dataset from the with Ending Rates from drop-down list.
Select Security Access, if desired.
Click Next and a note appears explaining how the combined datasets are calculated.
Click Save.
Note: If you attempt to create a duplicate dataset, a message appears stating "A dataset or reporting dataset with the name you are updating to already exists. Please specify a unique name."
You can set up a relationship between the tax return, final provision and current provision in the Dataset Relations tab.
RTP Return: Return Dataset
RTP Provision: Provision Dataset
RTP Target: Current Provision Dataset
When this relationship is set up, the system automatically updates the Tax Provision through the calculation
and posting of RTP true-ups 716 . In order to post RTP adjustments, relate the tax return dataset to the same
or previous period RTP Provision dataset, as well as the same or future period RTP Target dataset.
Set up a relationship between a Return dataset, Provision dataset and Current Provision dataset. This set up is required to Post the RTP:
Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
In the Actions column, select the pencil icon to open the page to edit a Return dataset.
Select Dataset Relations.
The application assigns the RTP Return to the selected dataset by default.
Select the RTP Provision dataset to calculate a difference between the Return and Provision dataset.
Select the RTP Target dataset to calculate the true-up difference.
Note:
After you relate the Return, Provision and Current datasets, the Post Ret to Prov option appears in My Datasets > More > Post Ret-to Prov.
To post the Return-to-Provision calculation, select My Datasets > More > Post Ret-to Prov 50. If the
Post Ret-to Prov option does not appear in the list, be sure you have the Dataset Relations set up.
To delete a Dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Select a Dataset. To select multiple datasets hold the Ctrl Key and then select the datasets to delete.
Click Delete.
A message appears, Confirm Delete?, select Continue to delete the dataset.
Click Cancel to exit the request without deleting the dataset.
WARNING:
Deleted datasets cannot be restored. Please take the following precaution before deleting datasets. Export the dataset data before deleting datasets. This creates a spreadsheet file of the data for backup. Then, you can import the data into a new dataset to restore the data.
376
section, you can archive datasets that you don't need to view any longer. Archiving
datasets helps to maximize the performance of ONESOURCE Tax Provision calculations.
With fewer active datasets, the speed of calculations and overall usability increases.
In My Datasets, the All Datasets tab has fewer datasets to sort through.
Administrators can can Un-Archive datasets.
Archiving one dataset in a Reporting Dataset will archive the Reporting Dataset, as well.
An archived dataset will not appear for administrators or read only users in My Datasets. The dataset is set as Read-Only.
Note:
At any time, an administrator may select No for the Archived dataset. The dataset will then appear in My Datasets.
For an un-archived dataset, administrators have the ability to select No for the Read-Only option.
To Archive a dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Choose the dataset you want to archive.
Click to edit the dataset.
Click Yes to Archive the dataset.
You can Scrunch 398 Temporary Differences to combine the data by code and temporary difference type with
the same rate for the following components:
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
After-Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
You can include the following items when scrunching datasets.
Subconsolidations
Attachments
Active Workpapers
My Reports
Shared Reports
Report Footnotes
Security Access
Scrunch Temporary Differences
Copy Note
Scrunch Datasets
You can sum current and non-current temporary differences with different tag letters assigned to them while rolling over a dataset.
To utilize the Scrunch Functionality:
Add a new dataset and then select Rollover
387 for the transaction type.
During the rollover process, select Scrunch Temporary Differences.
Follow the temporary difference rules
398 .
When you select Scrunch Temp Diffs, all temporary differences are included in the scrunch process.
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
After-Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
When you select Scrunch Temp Diffs
398
to sum the temporary differences with different tag letters, the total
Ending Balances for Temporary Difference in the Source dataset will be the Beginning Balances in the Rollover dataset. The Beginning Balances appear as single balances along with the Tag selected during the Rollover process.
The application will scrunch data with the same Temporary Difference Code and Current/Non-Current designation.
Federal and State data is scrunched even when the option to override the Federal/State rate is selected. The Class or Tag is assigned to the record that has the overridden rate.
Additional requirements:
NOL 167 : Entries must have the same Ending Rate, Year Generated and Year Expired.
Book/Tax Basis 196 : Entries must have the same Ending Rate, Book Months and Tax Months.
After-Tax - Book/Tax Basis 155 : Entries must have the same Book Months and Tax Months.
224 : Entries must have the same Ending Rate.
State After-Apportionment 204 : Entries must have the same Ending Rate.
224 /State After-Apportionment
204: Entries must have the same Ending Federal Rate.
You can scrunch your tags when rolling over a dataset to aggregate multiple line items into one line. Temporary difference activity for a single deferred balance is often entered at different times, each with a different tag.
For example, tag imported activity with an I, bridged activity with a B, manual adjustments with a M, and return to provision adjustments with a R. As a result, the deferred balance appears as multiple line items which may not be necessary to maintain.
SCRUNCH RULES
The macro aggregates the following Import Numbers Template sheets:
187
#SATTD# State After-Tax Temporary Diffs
151
204
LINES ARE AGGREGATED, ONLY IF THE LINE HAS:
The same deferred code (temporary difference code).
The same current/non-current designation.
The same beginning and ending deferred tax rates.
SCRUNCH RESULTS
If any of the original deferred balances are tagged with an I, the aggregated deferred balance is tagged with an I.
If None of the deferred balances used an I tag, then the single aggregated deferred balance is assigned the tag of the first deferred balance of that aggregation when sorted by unit code, difference code, current/non-current.
EXAMPLE SEQUENCE
Roll over a 2015 dataset to a 2016 dataset. (Leaving multiple beginning balances for each temporary difference.)
Export the 2016 dataset.
Apply the Scrunch macro to generate a new import spreadsheet.
Create a new blank 2016 dataset.
Import the scrunched spreadsheet generated by the macro into the blank 2016 dataset.
You can scrunch the current/non-current GAAP-STAT temporary differences. First, you must activate the GAAP-STAT Scrunch parameter. Then, during the dataset rollover and scrunch process, you can choose a Current GAAP, Current STAT, Non-Current GAAP, and Non-Current STAT class or tag for the scrunch functionality.
The tags and classes that appear in the Current GAAP and Non-Current GAAP lists are based on the tags
and classes designated as GAAP-STAT tags and classes in the Administration > Manage
Configurations > Reporting> Tax Provision
STAT and Non-Current STAT fields.
482 area. All other tags and classes populate the Current
Note: The rules of scrunch 398 described for Scrunch previously will apply to Scrunch GAAP-STAT.
To Scrunch a dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Click Add to add a dataset.
Select Scrunch for the Transaction.
Click Next.
Select the items to include in the rolled over dataset.
Select Scrunch Temp Diffs letters assigned to them.
Click Next.
398 to sum current and non-current temporary differences with different tag
For Scrunch Temporary Differences, select a Tag or Class.
Click Save.
For the refresh report data message, select Yes to update the reports with the scrunched data.
Select No if you do not wish to update the reports at this time.
Note: A new scrunched record is created for each unique combination of the Code, C/NC designation and ending deferred rate in the source dataset. If there are multiple groups of source records that differ only by Ending Deferred Rate, then the system will generate a unique numeric value to use as the record’s subclass. This system-generated subclass will distinguish one like record from other similar records and will allow the system to create as many scrunch records as needed per the number of unique ending rates in the source dataset.
For example, a source dataset may have 4 temporary difference records all sharing the same Code and C/ NC designation, but two records have identical overridden ending deferred rates and two records have not overridden the ending rate. In this case, two scrunched records are created, one for the two records that have identical overridden rates and one for the two that have not overridden the rates. The first record will be created with the default subclass of the class chosen in the wizard and the second will be created with the same class as the first record but with a system-generated numeric subclass, for example, “1”. The system will increment the numeric subclass for each record it needs to create for the same unique Code and C/NC.
This system-generated subclass will not be visible to Administrators in the Administration and cannot be modified.
To set up tags and classes for the scrunch functionality:
To scrunch temporary differences in a new dataset with tags, choose one tag applicable for the current temporary differences, and another tag applicable for the non-current temporary differences from the source dataset. You cannot use the same tag name to scrunch the current and non-current temporary differences.
To scrunch temporary difference in the new dataset with classes, choose one class applicable to the current temporary differences, and another class applicable to the non-current temporary differences from the source dataset. You cannot apply the same class name to scrunch current and non-current temporary differences.
Rules:
When you select Scrunch Temp Diffs to sum the temporary differences, the total Ending Balances for Temporary Difference in the Source dataset will be the Beginning Balances in the Rollover dataset. The Beginning Balances appear as single balances along with the Tag or Class selected during the Rollover process.
The application will scrunch data and create a separate entry for the current and non-current type temporary differences using two different tags or classes (depending on whether it is a tag dataset or class dataset).
Federal and State data is scrunched even when the option to overwrite the Federal/State rate is selected.
The system will not scrunch temporary differences with an overwritten line item rate.
The dataset parameter SCRUNCH_TAG with Alphanumeric value is no longer applicable. This dataset parameter applies to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision v. 9.2 and earlier.
The Copy Notes option is not available when the scrunch functionality is selected for the new dataset.
Additional requirements:
NOL: Entries must have the same Ending Rate, Year Generated, and Year Expired.
Book/Tax Basis: Entries must have the same Ending Rate, Book Months, and Tax Months.
After-Tax - Book/Tax Basis: Entries must have the same Book Months and Tax Months.
Federal/State: Entries must have the same Ending Rate.
State After-Apportionment: Entries must have the same Ending Rate.
State/State After-Apportionment: Entries must have the same Ending Federal Rate.
Analysis Datasets let you to select datasets for the Analysis functionality. A license is required in order to see the Analysis functionality. When the Analysis license is activated, the Analysis option appears in Administration > Manage Datasets. Within Manage Datasets, you can select the Analysis Dataset(s) for the data to analyze. To activate the Analysis functionality, a license code and license key are required.
Note: You can see Analysis Datasets only when the license key and code are activated in the system.
Available Datasets
Assign and remove Analysis Datasets to maintain the available datasets calculated in the Analysis page.
You can assign one or multiple datasets to Available Analysis Datasets.
In the All Datasets list, you can sort by Name and Assigned Classes.
You can also filter the Dataset list.
Dataset Details
Use the grid to review the Analysis Datasets Name, Status, Fiscal Year, Fiscal Period and Type.
To add datasets to Analysis:
In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Analysis Datasets.
In All Datasets, select a Dataset. To add multiple datasets, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the datasets.
Click the right arrow to assign the datasets. The dataset(s) will move to the Available Analysis Datasets list.
Click Save.
To remove the Datasets:
Select a dataset in Available Analysis Datasets.
Click the left arrow to remove the dataset.
Click Save.
To Filter the dataset details:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
Note: Select Change View to switch the view from the Horizontal view to the Vertical view and vice versa.
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Reporting Datasets use Reporting Datasets to combine multiple datasets into a single dataset view for reporting.
There are two types of reporting datasets: Sequential
405 .
You can modify the name and units assigned to an existing reporting dataset.
Reporting datasets are for viewing purposes, only. You must update data in the original dataset and then re-create the reporting dataset to see the changes.
When deleting a reporting dataset, export the categories for a backup file because the dataset cannot be restored.
See Import Reporting Datasets 592 for more information about importing reporting dataset.
Sequential Datasets
Use Sequential datasets to combine datasets from continuous periods to create a multiple period view of the data. They are ideal when you need to review dataset information on a quarterly or monthly basis on a year- to-date or annual basis.
Use a sequential reporting dataset to view: Month to Date data, Year to Date data, and Annual data.
Do not change beginning balances. Enter amounts as activity, deferred only, or balance sheet only.
If the ending balances from the first dataset do not tie exactly to the beginning balances of the second dataset, a message appears "Alignment check failed. Dataset could not be added. Please view
408
Other Sequential Dataset Information
The reporting dataset can have as many datasets as necessary as long as they are in sequential order. For example, a sequential dataset could have 18 months to represent a year and a half of information or 8 quarters to represent two years.
The functionality requires that ending rates and balances in the first dataset agree with the next chronological dataset's beginning rates and balances. Although not advised, there is a parameter
Remove Sequential RDS Constraints 492 , that can be turned on to override this check.
Rates and balances within each dataset do not change. The reporting dataset shows the net impact of all datasets in the reporting dataset.
When a dataset is added to a reporting dataset, it is locked as read-only. To make changes to the dataset, remove it from the reporting dataset. Make necessary changes and re-add it to the reporting dataset.
Use Additive datasets to layer datasets from the same period together so that results are seen in a single dataset view. They are ideal when there are different types of data for a specific period that needs to be both isolated and combined with other data for the same period.
Other Additive Dataset Information
Use Additive reporting datasets to view: With and Without Stat to GAAP, Current Year Only to With Adjustments for Prior Years True-Ups, and Without Tax Contingencies to Financial Basis reporting.
The reporting dataset can have as many datasets as necessary as long as they have the same year and period.
The rates and balances within each dataset do not change and the reporting dataset shows the net impact of all the datasets in the reporting dataset.
How to Add Reporting Datasets
To add a Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Reporting Datasets.
Type a name for Reporting Datasets. This name must be unique and cannot be the same as a Dataset name.
For Type, select Sequential or Additive.
Click Add.
In the Reporting Dataset Name list, choose the Reporting Dataset. The reporting dataset will then be highlighted.
Select the appropriate datasets in the Datasets Represented in Reporting Datasets drop-down list.
Click Add.
To view the Reporting Dataset, select My Datasets. The Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset
will appear in the All Datasets tab. The Type appears as Seq or Add.
You can add the Reporting dataset in All Datasets to My Review List.
Click Review for the Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset in My Datasets. The Review & Edit page opens.
Click Reporting to select a report to view the data.
Interim Datasets are another type of dataset used in the Tax Provision application. Interim Datasets calculate the interim tax provision based on the annualized effective tax rate. When you create an Interim dataset two datasets appear in My Datasets.
Forecast - A Forecast dataset calculates the annualized forecasted effective tax rate.
Actual - An Actual dataset applies the forecast effective tax rate to the actual data.
To Create a New Interim Dataset:
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Interim Datasets.
Click Create New.
Type a Name.
Select the Interim Approach from the drop-down list. Click YTD Basis or Isolated Basis. There are two Interim Approaches available when creating Interim Datasets.
YTD (Year to Date) Basis creates a copy of the previous quarter and advances the data to the next quarter. The YTD Basis time period is a continuum. When the current dataset is advanced to the next period, (instead of seeing an isolated subset of data) YTD Basis will be built of the Actual data.
Isolated Basis lets the application advance from Period Type to Period. The Isolated Basis takes the ending balances in the current dataset and populates the beginning balances of the next period Actual dataset.
Type a Group Rate %.
Click Classes or Tags to apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.
If you want Tags applied to the dataset select Tags for the dataset.
If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset select Classes & Subclasses for the dataset.
For Interim Rate Basis, you can choose Overall or Unit by Unit.
If you select Unit by Unit, in the True-Up drop-down list, select a true-up unit.
In the Fiscal Year drop-down list, select a year.
In the Period Type drop-down list, select a period. You can choose between Quarters, Months and Periods.
In the # of Periods drop-down list, select the number of periods.
Click Save New.
Select one of the following options: Empty dataset, Copy existing dataset or Roll over from existing dataset.
Three options are available when creating an interim dataset.
Empty Dataset - Creates an empty interim dataset that does not contain any data.
Copy existing Dataset - Copies an existing interim dataset.
Roll over from existing dataset - An existing provision dataset can be rolled over to a sequential period so that the ending balance and rates in the provision dataset become the beginning balances and rates in the new interim dataset. Before rolling over a provision dataset to an interim dataset, be sure to turn off the VA and NOL Automation.
Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.
There are two Interim Approaches available when creating Interim Datasets. Selecting the dataset designation approach enables the application to advance from Period Type to Period Type and maintain an Isolated Basis approach or build a YTD Basis (Year to Date) approach.
Isolated Basis
Selecting the Isolated Basis approach, creates a copy of the previous quarter and rolls over the data to the next quarter. The Isolated Basis takes the ending balances in the current dataset and populates the beginning balances of the next period Actual dataset.
YTD Basis
Selecting the YTD Basis approach, creates a copy of the previous quarter and advances the data to the next quarter. The YTD Basis time period is a continuum. When the current dataset is advanced to the next period, (instead of seeing an isolated subset of data) YTD Basis will be built of the Actual data.
Period Type
You can set up the Period Type for Quarters, Months or open ended Periods without putting a time constraint on it.
Isolated Basis Dataset, Period Type Months
Select Advance to M2 for Month 2 and all ending balances in Month 1 Actual become the beginning balances for Month 2 Actual.
YTD (Year to Date) Dataset, Quarters
You can select Advance to Q2 for Quarter 2 and beginning balances do not change and remain consistent from Quarter to Quarter.
# of Periods
You can select anywhere from 1 to 15 periods to associate with the Period Type. There is no limitation, you can choose any number of periods for a Period Type.
In an existing interim dataset, the name, interim rate basis, group rate, and read-only status can be modified. The data for all quarters worth of forecasted and actual data in the interim dataset can be exported and imported into this area. You can access the Import and Export buttons at the bottom of the screen. Interim data utilizes this import and export functionality. You will not use the export/import categories spreadsheet.
Important: When deleting an interim dataset be aware that the data cannot be restored. Consider exporting the interim dataset data before deleting the dataset in case the data needs to be restored to another dataset.
Dataset Name
The name of the dataset is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters. The dataset name can be edited after it is created.
The dataset name displays in the My Datasets and the header of reports.
Interim Rate Basis
The interim rate basis is determined on a dataset basis and dictates how the forecasted tax rate is applied to the actual Pre-Tax Book Income. Overall basis applies a blended forecasted rate to all units while the Unit-by-Unit basis applies each unit's forecasted rate.
When the unit-by-unit basis is selected, you must designate a true-up unit where the rounding should be posted.
When you select a true-up unit (e.g., D1000), it cannot be designated as an excluded unit in the Unit- by-Unit basis. If you switch to the Overall basis, D1000 can be designated as an excluded unit.
Read-Only
When the data entry process is complete, the data can be secured by marking the datasets as Read- Only.
The data and reports in Read-Only datasets can be reviewed, but the entry screens have the warning No Edit Allowed and a gray font.
Fiscal Year
A Fiscal Year must be assigned to an interim dataset when it is created.
Group Tax Rate
The rate entered is used in the effective tax rate report as the statutory rate to which the provision reconciles.
ID
A system-generated ID is assigned to the dataset. This field is not used in the creation of an interim dataset and is not editable.
For Sequential datasets, the ending balances and rates in the first chronological dataset must agree with the opening balance and rates in the next chronological dataset. If there are differences in the test of information in the two datasets, they are listed in this log. The sequential dataset test can be overridden with a system
758. Contact your client manager or support 15
for more information.
In Administration > Manage Datasets > Manage Active Datasets you can use Manage Active Datasets to set up the datasets in the Global Access application.
You must activate the Manage Active Datasets
378 list.
For Return to Provision, select a Dataset set up in Dataset Relations. The RTP Provision appears in the Equiv column and the RTP Target appears in the Next column
To add Datasets for Global Access
1. Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Manage Active Datasets.
Select a Dataset and then a Column Type.
Enter a name for the Column Header to appear in Global Access.
Select retprovgs for GAAP to STAT RTP
Click Add.
To change the order of the dataset list, click Up and Down.
To change the dataset information, click Update.
To remove an active dataset from the dataset list, click Delete.
Manage Active Datasets
When rolling over or copying a dataset, you can select to rollover/copy Active Workpapers. You can rollover/ copy the Active Workpaper Mapping in two ways.
As part of the dataset rollover/copy process.
Independent from the dataset rollover process.
Active Workpaper Mapping
DATASET ROLLOVER/COPY - ACTIVE WORKPAPER MAPPING
You have the option to choose Active Workpapers, as part of the dataset rollover and copy process. This lets the system rollover/copy the active workpapers when you rollover/copy the dataset.
To rollover or copy the Active Workpapers Mapping:
Select Yes for Active Workpapers.
Rollover/Copy Mapping to New Dataset
If you do not have user permissions to create a workpaper, you cannot rollover or copy the Active Workpapers mapping in ONESOURCE Tax Provision.
The option for Active Workpapers is set to No and is unavailable. Using your mouse, point to and click the ToolTip, and a message lets you know if you need permissions granted.
See User Permissions 465 for more information about ONESOURCE user permissions.
Active Workpapers ToolTip
ADD NEW DATASET
In Workpaper Name, you can see all workpapers attributed to the source dataset and change the mappings to a new dataset.
In Add New Dataset, select a New Dataset from the drop-down list.
Click Next.
Add New Dataset
SAVE WORKPAPER
You can save the workpaper by renaming the workpaper and saving it to the existing folder or save the workpaper to a new folder. If you do not have permissions to create a folder the option, Add Folder, is unavailable.
To add a new dataset,
In Workpaper Name, type the workpaper name.
In Select Folder, select a folder in the drop-down list.
Click Add Folder to save the workpaper to a new folder.
Active Workpapers
Type the Folder Name.
Click Save.
Add Folder
Notes:
If you do not rename the workpapers or save them to a new folder, a message appears with a list of Workpapers that did not update during the process.
If the Tax Provision system cannot establish communication with ONESOURCE Workpapers, you will receive the following message. The dataset rollover/copy process will not be interrupted even if the Workpapers could not be rolled over/copied."
INDEPENDENT FROM THE DATASET ROLLOVER/COPY PROCESS
You do not have to copy or rollover your active workpapers during the dataset rollover/copy process. To rollover/copy the mapping, you can select Administration > Manage Datasets, click Active Workpaper Mapping.
If you do not have user permissions to create a workpaper, you cannot rollover or copy the Active Workpapers mapping in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. The Active Workpapers button is unavailable. The ToolTip shows you know if you need permissions granted.
See User Permissions 465 for more information about ONESOURCE user permissions.
Active Workpaper Permissions
ACTIVE WORKPAPER MAPPING
In Active Workpaper Mapping, you can select a Source Dataset and Destination Dataset (New Dataset) from the drop-down list. You can see only the datasets in which you have permissions to access. The destination dataset is the same dataset type and dataset option (tag or class) as the source dataset.
In Workpaper Name, you can see all workpapers attributed to the source dataset and change the mappings to a new dataset.
In Active Workpaper Mapping, select a New Dataset from the drop-down list.
Click Next.
The Dataset Source is the same as the source dataset selected.
The new dataset defaults to Destination Dataset for the fields in the source dataset.
Other dataset sources, not the same as the source dataset selected, the “new dataset” will default to the same dataset as the "dataset source”.
Active Workpaper Mapping
Type the Folder Name.
Click Save.
Add Folder
Notes:
If you do not rename the workpapers or save them to a new folder, a message appears with a list of Workpapers that did not update during the process.
If the Tax Provision system cannot establish communication with ONESOURCE Workpapers, you will receive the following message. The dataset rollover/copy process will not be interrupted even if the Workpapers could not be rolled over/copied."
The following pages are located in Administration > Manage Units.
417
419
419
423
424
426
After Tax Temporary Differences
427
428
429
In Administration > Manage Units you can add units.
An existing name, unit, type, country code and currency code, currency code and description can be modified.
Only a unit that has no record 31 in any dataset can be deleted.
To import a new unit, complete the appropriate fields in the #CU# Units tab in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The unit code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters.
Unit codes must be unique.
The unit code and name appear in the Review & Edit and Manage Units pages.
The unit code by default cannot be modified after it is created. You must activate the Modify Unit Code parameter to modify unit codes.
The unit code can be modified after it is created as your corporate structure changes.
When you edit a unit code, the change is reflected in all datasets, even datasets that are locked or archived.
You must create a new mapping relationship for a modified unit code. When modified, unit codes may affect integration with other applications. Changing the code changes the unit mapping with other ONESOURCE products and will need to be remapped in order to restore integration for the unit.
Note: All relationships you've created for an original unit code in the Mapping utility in ONESOURCE are removed, including ONESOURCE Income Tax, Estimated Payments and State Apportionment. With ONESOURCE Fileroom, you will need to change the index for the unit code.
Modify Unit Codes
To modify the unit code field, you must activate the parameter called Modify Unit Code. You can find the parameter in Administration > Manage Configurations > Modify Unit Code. Selecting Yes for this parameter lets you to modify unit codes.
Unit Type
Assign Foreign or Domestic for the Unit Type. You can select the drop-down list to change the unit type.
The system uses the unit's type to determine how the data is reported in the foreign/domestic report.
Country Name and Currency Symbol
Assign Country Name and Currency Symbol for each unit. These selections are optional. If these fields are left blank, undetermined will appear for those fields.
The system is populated with ISO Country Codes
746
add 469 to these codes.
Default Codes:
Country Code Name - U (Undetermined) Currency Code - UND (Undefined)
The currency designation of a unit allows the unit to be combined with other units in local currency reporting.
Description
Type a Description for each unit, if needed.
Administration - Manage Units - Code
In Administration > Manage Units > Unit Sub-Consolidations you can create and maintain sub- consolidations.
To add a new Sub-Consolidation:
Type a Code and Display Name.
Click the Display Name same as Code option for the display name and code to be the same.
Click the Sub-Tier of option and select a dataset that you want the sub-consolidation to be a sub-tier of.
After you have created your sub-consolidations, assign them to units
421 .
To import a new Sub-Consolidation, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSC# SubConsolidations sheet in the Import Categories template.
The #CSC# worksheet lets you:
Create sub-consolidations.
Define the relationship between Tier 1 and Tier 2 sub-consolidations.
Assign sub-consolidations to datasets.
Additionally, you can create a sheet named #CSC2#, which lets you create and populate multiple sub- consolidations for a unit. Column A will have the Unit Code and Columns B through IV will have the CSCs in which the unit is included.
The #CSC2# worksheet assigns sub-consolidations to units.
For Unit Code column, enter the unit code.
For the SubConsol Assignment enter the Name (Display Name).
Existing unit designation in a CSC is replaced, not appended, when the #CSC2# is imported. This sheet does not export when categories are exported and is not in the standard template for import categories.
Description
The name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can add, edit, copy, and delete sub-consolidations, as needed.
You can edit an existing Sub-Consolidation Name.
You can edit the user-defined Display Name.
You can lock/unlock Sub-Consolidations by selecting them and clicking the Lock selected Subconsolidation option.
You can create an unlimited number of sub-consolidations.
You can delete sub-consolidations.However, use care because they are not recoverable.
CSC 708 Sub-Consolidations have specific naming requirements.
You can filter the list by selecting filter button.
The Sub-Consolidation's Name appears in the header of the sub-consolidation's report.
In Review & Edit > Sub-Consolidations, you can see the Sub-Consolidation's Name and the number of units included in the sub-consolidation.
Note: To see your Sub-Consolidations in the Review & Edit page, you must add the dataset to My Review List in My Datasets.
Assign Units to Sub-Consolidations
Sub-Consolidation Members
UNITS
You assign units to Sub-Consolidations for reviewing data in the Review & Edit pages To assign a unit to a Sub-Consolidation:
Select the unit in Available Units.
Click the right arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.
For the Available Units listed, you can filter, select, and assign units to a sub-consolidation. You can filter Available Units by:
Unit Code - The Unit Code column indicates the Available and Assigned Units.
Unit Name - The name you enter to identify a Unit Sub-Consolidation.
Unit Type - The Unit Type column indicates whether a unit is Foreign or Domestic.
Country
Currency
Assign Datasets to Sub-Consolidations
Sub-Consolidation Members
DATASETS
You assign datasets to Sub-Consolidations for reviewing data in the Review & Edit pages. To assign the Datasets to a Sub-Consolidation:
Select the dataset in Available Datasets.
Click the right arrow to add the dataset to Assigned Datasets.
Note: Assigning Sub-Consolidations to datasets lets you have better control of Read-Only datasets.
For the Available Datasets listed, you can filter, select, and assign datasets to a sub-consolidation. You can filter Available Datasets by:
Name - The Name column indicates the Available and Assigned Datasets.
Read Only.
Fiscal Year
Fiscal Period
Type
In Administration > Manage Units you can create Pre-Tax Book Income lines for entering data. To add a Pre-Tax Book Income line item:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
To import a new Pre-Tax Book Income, complete the appropriate fields on the #PTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The Pre-Tax Book Income code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing Pre-Tax Book Income name.
You can delete Pre-Tax Book Income codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The Pre-Tax Book Income code and name appear in reports.
Manage Pre-Tax Book Income
In Administration > Manage Units > Permanent Differences you can create Permanent Differences for entering data.
To add Permanent Differences:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
Select None, All, or Custom for the Included for State option.
To import a new Permanent Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CPD# Permanent Differences sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The Permanent Difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing Permanent Difference name.
You can delete Permanent Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
You can see the Permanent Difference code and name in reports.
Included for State
Determine if the permanent difference federal values will be included for state 25
None
0% flows from the Federal to the States.
All
100% flows from the Federal to the States.
Custom
calculations.
You can use Custom to add custom allocations on a state by state basis and abide by specific state rules.
Note: The default conditions setup at the administration level can be modified at the dataset level. This lets you preserve prior datasets at the 0% or 100% settings with manual entries. This also lets datasets going forward have different % applied on a state by state basis.
Manage Permanent Differences
In Administration > Manage Units > Temporary Differences you can create Temporary Differences for entering data.
To add Temporary Differences:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
Select None, All, or Custom for the Included for State option.
Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.
To import a new Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTD# Temporary Differences sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The Temporary Difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing Temporary Difference name.
You can delete Temporary Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The Temporary Difference code and name appear in reports.
Included for State
Determine if the temporary difference federal values will be included for state
None
0% flows from the Federal to the States.
All
100% flows from the Federal to the States.
Custom
25 calculations.
You can use Custom to add custom allocations on a state by state basis and abide by specific state rules.
Notes:
By default, the Default Type is set to NC-Non-Current. To change the Default Type going forward, you can manually update or export the Categories, update to the proper types and then import them.
The default conditions setup at administration level may be modified at the dataset level. This allows prior datasets to be preserved at the 0% or 100% settings with manual entries. This also allows datasets going forward to have different % applied on a state by state basis.
The administrator has the ability in Manage Configurations to designate a Default Type of C-Current / N-Non- Current to a Temporary Difference. Also, the administrator may disable the drop-down list so that only the Default Type is available. Because there are cases when the Current / Non-Current default type is overwritten, the Default Type can be set up by the administrator to be overridden for any line item.
See your Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up in the system.
Manage Temporary Differences
In Administration > Manage Units > NOL Temporary Differences you can create NOL Temporary Differences for entering data.
To add NOL Temporary Differences:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.
To import a new NOL Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields in the #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The NOL temporary difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and
numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing NOL Temporary Difference name.
You can delete NOL Temporary Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The NOL temporary difference code and name display in reports.
Manage NOL Temporary Differences
After Tax Temporary Differences
In Administration > Manage Units > After Tax Temporary Differences you can create After Tax Temporary Differences for entering data.
To add After Tax Temporary Differences:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.
To import a new After Tax Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The After Tax Temporary Difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and
numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing After Tax Temporary Difference name.
You can delete After Tax Temporary Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The After Tax Temporary Difference code and name display in reports.
Manage After - Tax Temporary Differences
In Administration > Manage Units > Tax Adjustments you can create Tax Adjustments for entering data. To add Tax Adjustments:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
To import a new Tax Adjustment, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTA# Tax Adjustments sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
Tax Adjustments code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing Tax Adjustment.
You can delete Tax Adjustment codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The Tax Adjustments code and name display in reports.
Codes that begin with NC_ are treated as non-cash on the provision.
Manage Tax Adjustments
In Administration > Manage Units > InterCompany Transactions you can create InterCompany Transactions for entering data.
To add InterCompany Transactions:
Select Administration > Manage Units.
Select Add and then type the Code and Name.
Select the State Paying Entity and State Receiving Entity options, if needed.
To import a new InterCompany Transaction, complete the appropriate fields on the #ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types sheet in the Import Categories template.
Code and Name
The InterCompany Transaction code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and
numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing InterCompany Transaction name.
You can delete InterCompany Transaction codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The InterCompany Transaction code and name display in reports.
Receiving and Paying State Treatment
Determine if the InterCompany Transaction federal values will be included for state
Include for State at Paying/Receiving Entity
25 calculations.
Select the appropriate check box to designate whether the adjustment will be included at the paying or receiving entity.
Manage Interco Txn Types
In Administration > Manage Trial Balances, you create and manage Trial Balance Lines
431 .
430
431
Import Master Chart of Accounts
433
Trial Balance Lines are used to roll up the Trial Balance Sublines 431 . In Administration > Manage Trial
Balances > Trial Balance Lines you can create Trial Balance Lines.
To import a new Trial Balance Line, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTBL# Trial Balance Lines sheet in the Import Categories template.
DATA SOURCE HISTORY
Data Source History information is based on the method the trial balance line is created (manual, import, master chart of accounts).
If you edit the trial balance line after it is created, the Data Source History updates, accordingly.
CODE AND NAME
The Trial Balance Lines code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing Trial Balance Line name and classification.
You can delete Trial Balance Line codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The Trial Balance Lines code and name display in reports.
TYPE
Designate each Trial Balance Line with one of the following Types: Income Stmt, Bal Sheet - Asset, Bal Sheet - Liability, or Bal Sheet - Equity.
Manage Trial Balance Lines
Trial Balance Sublines are equivalent to General Ledger accounts. Trial Balance Sublines roll up to the Trial
Balance Lines 430. Create Trial Balance Sublines by selecting Administration > Manage Trial Balances >
Trial Balance Sublines.
To import a new Trial Balance Subline, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTBSL# Trial Balance Sublines sheet in the Import Categories template.
DATA SOURCE HISTORY
Data Source History information is based on the method the trial balance line is created (manual, import, master chart of accounts).
If the trial balance line is edited after it is created, the Data Source History updates.
SUBLINE (ACCOUNT) AND NAME
The Trial Balance Subline account is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
The Trial Balance Subline (Account) cannot be edited after it is created.
The Trial Balance Subline name is user-defined. It can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit the Trial Balance Subline name.
You can delete Trial Balance Subline codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The Trial Balance Subline code and name appear in reports.
LINE (TRC-TCC)
You must designate the TRC-TCC classification for each Trial Balance Line.
You can change the Trial Balance Subline TRC-TCC classification.
TYPE
You must designate the trial balance classification type (asset, liability, equity, income statement) for each Trial Balance Line.
JE POSTING ACCOUNT
Select JE Post and the Subline appears as an option in the Debit/Credit GL Account list in the Journal Entry Data Entry page.
Manage Trial Balance Sublines
Import Master Chart of Accounts
Use Import Master Chart of Accounts to import data from the General Ledger Manager application. You must activate the parameter, General Ledger Manager, to see the Import Master Chart of Accounts option in the navigation tree. You activate the parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > General Ledger Manager.
To import your Master Chart of Accounts select Administration > Manage Trial Balances > Import Master Chart of Accounts.
The Master Chart of Accounts will populate the Trial Balance Lines
SELECT YEAR
Select a year in the drop-down list and click Import.
SELECT MASTER CHART OF ACCOUNTS
431 .
Based on the year selected, the provision type Master Chart of Accounts will be available for selection.
You can choose one or more Master Chart of Accounts.
If any existing trial balance lines are duplicates they are replaced with the TRC-TCC code as the Name from the Master Chart of Accounts.
In Administration > Manage Tax Return, you can create and manage the Tax Return mappings.
434
435
435
Use the Tax Basis/Return Mapping lines to map book/tax differences to the Tax Basis Balance Sheet
298 ,
the Tax Basis Income Statement 300, and the tax return compliance software. Set up your accounts in
Manage Trial Balance to create a Tax Basis Balance Sheet. Then, modify existing Tax Basis/Return mappings as needed.
In My Datasets > More > Tax Basis Mapping, use Tax Basis/Return Mapping 82 to perform dataset-level
mapping. You define the mapping for the Tax Basis Balance Sheet in a Provision dataset. The temporary differences are layered onto the Trial Balance Sublines. The Difference drop-down list shows the Permanent and Temporary Differences in Administration. The Debit and Credit columns show the Trial Balance Sublines
431 created in Manage Trial Balance
430.
Important: At the Dataset level, you are required to designate two sub-line accounts vs. one at the Administration area. Therefore, you must complete the following conversion if the mappings were set up in administration for Manage Trial Balance Mappings.
Complete the appropriate fields on the #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet and #MINC# Map Income Statement sheet in the Import Return Maps template.
Export the dataset.
Copy the data from the #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet sheet to the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet in the Import Numbers template.
Add the required data to the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet.
Save and import the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet.
INCOME SHEET
Map the Tax Return Income Statement by associating a Book Income Statement (Trial Balance
430
with the Book Tax Adjustment (activity) (Permanent
424
and the Page 1, Sch M-1 and Sch M-3 tax compliance software codes.
Map the Tax Return Balance Sheet by associating a Book Balance Sheet (Trial Balance SubLines)
430
with the Book Tax Adjustment (balances) (Temporary Difference) software code.
PERIOD TYPE OVERRIDE
Type a value for the selected mapping line.
BALANCE STATEMENT
424 and the Sch L tax compliance
Map the Tax Basis Balance Sheet by associating a Book Balance Sheet (Trial Balance SubLines) 430 with
the Book Tax Adjustment (balances) (Temporary Difference)
424 .
FACTORS
Type factors (usually 1 and -1) for the P&L, Balance Sheet, and Retained Earnings accounts to adjust the signs of the numbers coming from the system.
You can export Tax Return Mapping items to create an import template. This generates a file with two sheets: #MBAL# Balance Sheet Mappings and #MINC# Income Statement Mappings. Exporting from this page before entering data creates a blank Import Return Maps template.
You can import Tax Return Mapping data. For hosted solutions you can export the mappings to generate the template. The file will have one or both of the following sheets: #MBAL# Balance Sheet Mappings and #MINC# Income Statement Mappings.
For non-hosted you can use the Import Return Maps template. The template is typically stored in the following folder: C:\Program Files\Thomson Reuters\Tax Provision 2016.0.0.0\Templates.
In Administration > Manage States you can create and manage your state information.
436
437
State After Tax Temporary Differences
437
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences
438
439
In Administration > Manage States > States you can create a user-defined state or jurisdiction. You can
add a State Code, Name, Type 437 , Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate, and State Rate.
To import a new state or jurisdiction, complete the appropriate fields on the #CS# States sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The State code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit the State/Jurisdiction name.
The State Name appears in the My Datasets page once you add it to the system.
You can delete custom state or jurisdiction codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The State Code and Name appear in the header of reports.
You can assign the State Type to group states together, designate Mass State rates Beginning Deferred and Ending Deferred Rates and enter the State Tax Rates.
91, enter the
Note: You cannot modify the system's pre-populated states
740.
In Administration > Manage States > State Types you can create user-defined State Types to group states that reside in the States page.
In Administration > Manage States > State After Tax Temp Diffs you can add State After Tax Temporary Differences.
To import a new State After Tax Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSATTD# St AfterTax TempDiff sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The State After Tax Temporary Difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of
alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing State After Tax Temporary Difference name.
You can delete State After Tax Temporary Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The State After Tax Temporary Difference code and name will appear in reports.
Manage State After Tax Temporary Differences
In Administration > Manage States > State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
you can add State After Apportionment Temporary Differences.
To import a new State After Apportionment Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSAATD# St AfterApp TempDiff sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The State After Apportionment Temporary Difference code 20 is user-defined and can be any
combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing State After Apportionment Temporary Difference name.
You can delete State After Apportionment Temporary Difference codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The State After Apportionment Temporary Difference code and name will appear in reports.
Manage State After Apportionment Temporary Differences
In Administration > Manage States > State Tax Adjustments you can add State Tax Adjustments.
To import a new State Tax Adjustment, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSTA# State Tax Adjs sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The State Tax Adjustments code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters. The name can be edited after it is created.
You can edit an existing State Tax Adjustment name.
You can delete State Tax Adjustment codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The State Tax Adjustments code and name display in reports.
Manage State Tax Adjustments
In Administration > Manage Bridge you can create and manage your Bridge mappings. Bridge Import requires the establishment of these mappings to transfer data from the general ledger format to the tax provision.
562
441
442
Permanent Differences-Tax Basis
443
Temporary Difference Activity - Tax Basis
Temporary Difference BSO Adjustments
444
445
Permanent Differences-Book/Tax Basis
443
Temporary Difference Activity - Book/Tax Basis
447
448
592
602
449
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Pre-Tax Book Income you can add Pre-Tax Book Income bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MPTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account is an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
PTBI
The PTBI bridge mapping options are the established PTBI codes.
This mapping posts to the PTBI screen.
TYPE
The PTBI bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
Note: The currency you select here (Local or USD) must match the PTBI policy 181 in the Unit Details page
for the units you want to bridge into the system. If it doesn't match, the PTBI will not calculate.
BEGIN AND END FACTOR
Beginning balance factor is typically zero because it is ignored when computing PTBI.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Tax Accounts you can add Tax Accounts bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MTA# Tax Accounts sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
TAX ACCOUNT
The Tax Account bridge mapping options are: FCP - Federal Current Provision, FDP - Federal Deferred Provision, SCP - State Current Provision, SDP - State Deferred Provision, FDB - Federal Deferred Balance, SDB - State Deferred Balance, FLB - Federal Liability Balance, and SLB - State Liability Balance.
This mapping posts to the Unit Details/taxes per book screen.
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically zero because it is ignored when computing Tax Accounts.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Perm Diffs Tax Basis you can add Perm Diffs - Tax Basis bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MPD# Perm Diffs sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
PERMANENT DIFFERENCE AND TYPE
The Permanent Differences bridge mapping options are the established permanent difference
20.
The Permanent Differences Type bridge mapping options are either E - Equity Adjustment or P - P&L Adjustment.
This mapping posts to the Permanent Differences screen.
TYPE
The Permanent Differences bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically zero because it is ignored when computing Permanent Differences.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file. Adjust the factor the bridge should post to an amount less than 100% of the account balance.
Temp Diff Activity - Tax Basis
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Temp Diff Activity - Tax Basis you can add Temp Diff Activity - Tax Basis bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MTD# Temp Diffs - Tax Basis sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
TEMPORARY DIFFERENCE AND TYPE
The Temporary Difference bridge mapping options are the established temporary difference
20.
The Temporary Difference Type bridge mapping options are either C - Current or NC - Non-Current.
This mapping posts to the Activity column on the Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen.
TYPE
The Temporary Difference bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
The bridge posts an amount that is the net of the beginning and ending account balances.
Temp Diff BSO Adjs - Tax Basis
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Temporary Diff BSO Adjs - Tax Basis you can add Temporary Diff BSO Adjs - Tax Basis bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MTDBSO# Temp Diff BSO sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
TEMPORARY DIFFERENCE AND TYPE
The Temporary Difference BSO bridge mapping options are the established temporary difference
424
20.
The Temporary Difference BSO Type bridge mapping options are either C - Current or NC - Non- Current.
This mapping posts to the Activity column on the Temporary Differences BSO screen.
TYPE
The Temporary Difference BSO bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
The bridge posts an amount that is the net of the beginning and ending account balances.
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis you can add Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MAPD# Amortized Perm Diffs sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
PERMANENT DIFFERENCE AND TYPE
The Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis bridge mapping options are the established permanent difference
423
20.
The Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis Type bridge mapping options are either E - Equity Adjustment or P - P&L Adjustment
This mapping posts to the Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis Differences screen.
TYPE
The Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically zero because it is ignored when computing Permanent Differences.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file. Adjust the factor the bridge should post to an amount less than 100% of the account balance.
Temp Diff Activity Book/Tax Basis
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Temp Diff Activity Book/Tax Basis you can add Temp Diff Activity Book/Tax Basis bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MATD# Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20 .
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
TEMPORARY DIFFERENCE - BOOK/TAX BASIS AND TYPE
The Temporary Difference - Book/Tax Basis bridge mapping options are the established temporary
20.
The Temporary Difference - Book/Tax Basis Type bridge mapping options are either C - Current or NC - Non-Current.
This mapping posts to the Activity column on the Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis screen.
TYPE
The Temporary Difference - Book/Tax Basis bridge mapping options: LOC - Local Currency PTBI or USD - US Dollar PTBI.
OVERVIEW
Beginning balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
The bridge posts an amount that is the net of the beginning and ending account balances.
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Trial Balances you can add Trial Balances bridge mappings.
To import mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #MTBBB# Trial Balance sheet in the Import Bridge template.
You can edit and delete Bridge mappings.
ADD UNMAPPED DATA
The Add Unmapped Data option enables you to utilize a system generated process to map all unmapped trial balance sublines to ledger account codes.
Every unmapped Trial Balance subline will create an identical Ledger Account Code.
UNIT, FLEX 1, AND FLEX 2
The UNIT must be a valid Unit
417
20.
FLEX 1 and FLEX 2 are optional for user-defined codes.
Entering an asterisk (*) in a field applies account rules across all units.
LEDGER ACCOUNT CODE
The Ledger Account should be an account code in the exported trial balance data file.
TRIAL BALANCE SUBLINE
The Trial Balance bridge mapping options are established in the Trial Balance SubLines
This mapping posts to the Trial Balance/Tax Basis screen.
430 .
BEGIN AND END FCTR
Beginning balance factor is typically zero, because it is ignored when computing the Trial Balance.
Ending balance factor is typically 1 or -1, depending on the signs of the exported trial balance data file.
In Administration > Manage Bridge > Unit Mapping you use unit mapping to map the Legacy Unit Code and Unit. To see Unit Mapping in the navigation tree, activate the Manage Bridge Unit Mappings parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Bridge.
To import unit code mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #BUM# Bridge Unit Map sheet in the Import Bridge template.
Unit Mapping Page
You can use Bridge Unit Mapping to map the legacy unit codes from a general ledger to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision unit codes.
You can edit and delete Unit Mappings.
LEGACY CODE
Type the code for the unit from which you want to bridge mappings.
UNIT
Select the unit from the drop-down list to which you want to bridge your mappings.
In Administration > Manage Payable you can create and manage your Payable information.
Manage Payable Transaction Types
450
450
451
451
451
Manage Payable Transaction Types
In Administration > Manage Payable > Manage Payable Transaction Types you can add Payable Transaction Types.
To import a new payable transaction type, complete the appropriate fields on the #CPYTP# Payable Txn Types sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The transaction type code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric
characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing payable transaction name and rollup.
You can delete payable transaction type codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset.
The transaction type code and name display in reports.
ROLLUP
Select the appropriate code from the drop-down list.
Notes:
Do not delete the BBAL and PRV codes.
751 .
In Administration > Manage Payable > Manage Payable Rollups you can add Payable Rollups.
To import a new payable rollup, complete the appropriate fields on the #CPYRL# Payable Rollups sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing payable rollup name.
The rollup code and name displays in reports.
Notes:
The system is pre-populated with five codes BBAL - Beginning Balance, EST - Cash, PRV - Provision, RCL - Inter-Year Reclass, and ADJ - Adjustments.
Do not delete the BBAL and PRV codes.
In Administration > Manage Payable > Manage Payable Buckets you can add Payable Buckets.
To import a new payable bucket, complete the appropriate fields on the #CPYBK# Payable Buckets sheet in the Import Categories template.
CODE AND NAME
The bucket code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing payable bucket name.
You can delete payable bucket type codes/names that have no data entered for them in any dataset
The bucket code and name displays in reports.
You can export Payable Mapping data to create an Import Payable template. Exporting from the application before you enter data generates a blank Import Payable Map template. Payable Mapping can also be
imported using the Import Categories 589 functionality.
The export generates a template with the following worksheets.
#CPYRL# Payable Rollups
#CPYTP# Payable Types
#CPYBK# Payable Buckets
Use Classes and Subclasses when you enter tax adjustment data to make it unique within the application.
You can add multiple classes and subclasses to the system. A Default class and subclass are available in the application. A subclass can be a description. The combination of the class and subclass makes the tax adjustment entry unique.
There are four types of Classes:
Data Entry
Flow Through
System
Transfer
LOCK SELECTED CLASS
Select the Lock Selected Class to prevent a user from deleting, changing the name, or removing assignments. A lock icon appears next to the class.
DEFAULT
Select Default to select the default class and subclass.
HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL VIEW
Click Horizontal or Vertical to change the view from Horizontal to Vertical, if desired.
EXPANDED & CONTRACTED VIEW
When expanded, you can view the entire list of Classes and Subclasses.
Click for a Class to view the Subclass.
Click for the Subclass to view the Subclass Description.
DATA ENTRY
Data Entry classes and subclasses are User-Defined. These classes & subclasses are assigned to tax adjustments by an administrator. The system classes are assigned to user groups.
DEFAULT CLASS
DEF - Default
DEFAULT SUBCLASS
Default - Default
FLOW THROUGH
Flow Through classes are User-Defined. The subclasses are created by the application. These classes are assigned to tax adjustments by the system. The system classes are assigned to user groups by an administrator.
DEFAULT CLASS
FT - Flow Through
Note: The system creates a default subclass during the Flow-Through process based on the selected source & target units.
TRANSFER
Transfer classes are User-Defined. The subclasses are created by the application. These classes are assigned to certain tax adjustments by the system. The system classes are assigned to user groups by an administrator.
DEFAULT CLASS
XFR - Transfer
Note: The system creates default subclass during Transfer process based on the selected source & target units.
SYSTEM
System classes and subclasses are created by the application. These Automation classes & subclasses are applied to certain tax adjustments. The system classes are assigned to user groups.
DEFAULT SUBCLASSES
Auto - System Automation
AMT - AMT Automation
CTA - CTA
Default - Default
NOL - NOL Automation
PAYABLE - Payable Posting
PAYABLE - Payable Reclass
VA - VA Automation
Estim Pay - ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
Default - Default
Estim Pay IncTax - ONESOURCE Income Tax
Default - Default
OCT_AU - ONESOURCE Corporate Tax AU
Default - Default
OCT_UK - ONESOURCE Corporate Tax UK
Default - Default
RTP - Return to Provision
RTP - RTP
RTP_BSO - RTP Balance Sheet Only
RTP_DO - RTP Deferred Only
RTP_GAAP - RTP GAAP
RTP_STAT - RTP STAT
State App - ONESOURCE State Apportionment
Default - Default
NEW CLASSES & SUBCLASSES
The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. To add Classes & Subclasses:
Select Administration and then Manage Data Options.
Click Classes/Subclasses and then one of the classes. For example, click Data Entry.
Click to add a New Class/Subclass and then type the New Class Code. By default Display Name same as Code is selected.
Click Display Name same as Code to remove the option.
Type the Display Name.
Click Sub-Tier of and then Class. For example, click Default, GL Automation, or Pre-Tax Book Income.
Click OK.
EDIT CLASSES & SUBCLASSES
To edit a Classes & Subclasses:
Select the Class/Subclass and then Edit.
Click Edit Class/Subclass.
Type the New Class Name.
Click OK.
DELETE CLASSES & SUBCLASSES
To delete a Classes & Subclasses:
Select the Class/Subclass and then click Delete. A message appears Are you sure you want to delete the selected item(s)?.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the class/subclass.
Click OK to delete.
AVAILABLE USER GROUPS
You assign Available User Groups to Classes/Subclasses.
Select one or multiple user groups and then assign to them to a class/subclass.
Sort the UserGroup list by Name and Assigned Classes.
Filter the User Groups list.
To assign User Groups to Classes & Subclasses:
Select the Class/Subclass.
In Available User Groups, select a User Group and then click the arrow to assign the user group. The User Group is moved to the Assigned User Groups list.
To add multiple user groups to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the User Group.
Click the arrow to assign the user groups.
Click Save.
AVAILABLE DATASETS
You assign Available Datasets to Classes/Subclasses.
Select one or multiple datasets and then assign to them to a class/subclass.
Sort the Dataset list by Name and Assigned Classes.
Filter the Dataset list.
To assign Datasets to Classes & Subclasses:
Select the Class/Subclass.
In Available Datasets, select a Dataset and then click the arrow to assign the dataset. The Dataset is moved to the Assigned Datasets list.
To add multiple datasets to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the Dataset.
Click the arrow to assign the datasets.
Click Save.
Note: When you Copy or Rollover a dataset all classes appear in the new dataset.
AVAILABLE COMPONENT TYPES
When using classes, only the selected columns are available in the Data Entry pages. When you select Post to Ending Balance, the variance between Beginning and Ending Balance is posted to the selected column for Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis only.
The Available Component Types are assigned to the Classes/Subclasses.
Select one or multiple datasets and then assign to them to a class/subclass.
Sort the Component list by Name and Assigned Classes.
Filter the Component Types list.
To assign Component Types to Classes & Subclasses:
Select the Class/Subclass.
In Available Component Types, select a Component Type and then click the arrow to assign the component type. The Component Type is moved to the Assigned Component Type list.
Select the Data Entry Rule, Activity, Deferred or Balance Sheet.
If the component is an Ending Balance, selecting the box enables you to enter only the book and tax ending balance based on the selected class and is used for the Ending Balance Posting.
If the component is OCI, then Activity and Balance Sheet are greyed out.
To Post the Ending Balances, select the Assigned Component.
To add multiple component types to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the Component Type.
Click the arrow to assign the component types.
Click Save.
In Administration > Manage Data Options > Manage Tags you can create tag letters
Tag letters appear in the tag/source drop-down lists in data entry pages.
27.
Tags let you to isolate and identify the originating source of the information you enter in a dataset/unit for an adjustment.
DESCRIPTION AND TAG
The description is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
The description cannot be edited because it will change globally in the system.
The tag can be deleted and re-added with a new description, if desired.
The tag can be any single letter of the alphabet and it can be modified.
In Administration > System you can create and manage your System information.
Manage Global Access Components
458
459
481
468
469
469
470
473
473
Manage Temp Diff Posting (TagsOnly)
473
480
481
534
536
537
538
540
Manage Global Access Components
In Administration > Manage Global Access Components > you can add components in Global Access for a unit.
Using an Import template, complete the appropriate fields on the #CUNC# Manage Global Access Components sheet in the Import Categories template. The Unit Code and the Component Type Code
755
must be entered for each related component 23 code. The action codes: G = Grant, D = Deny.
To add components:
From the Unit List, select a Unit.
For the Component Types, select the Component.
For Member?, select the Components.
To select all components listed, click Check All.
To de-select all components listed, click Uncheck All.
Click Toggle All to toggle between the Check All and the Uncheck All for all lists. You can select Copy from Unit to copy components from another unit.
To copy components from another unit:
Select a unit in the Unit List.
Select the component type in the Component Types list.
Select a unit in the Copy from Unit list and then click Copy from Unit.
In Administration > Manage Users you can create and manage your user's information.
379
404
In Administration > System > Manage Users > Users you can set up the user's information. You can edit, search, and filter the Users information. However, new users are added in the ONESOURCE platform. You cannot delete users from the system, however you can De-Activate them.
USERS DETAILS
The Active Users will have a check mark beside their name.
The User Name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha-numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.
The User ID is assigned when the user is created by the administrator.
The User Role is assigned when the user is created by the administrator.
The Phone number is assigned when the user is created by the administrator.
The Email address is assigned when the user is created by the administrator.
The User Status is assigned when the user is created by the administrator.
The Notes are entered when the user is created by the administrator. Existing user's notes will appear in a list.
The Change Password option is selected to update the user password.
To edit the Users information:
Click Edit.
Type the Name.
Type the User ID.
Select the Role.
Type the Phone number.
Type the Email address.
Select the user to Copy access from information.
Click the User Status to make the user Active or InActive.
Type Notes, if needed.
Click Save.
To search and filter the Users list:
At the bottom of the Users list, Type the keyword.
Click Search.
The Available Units and Assigned Units for a selected user appear on the Units page. You can assign and remove units for a user to maintain the users access to units. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.
To assign the Units:
Select the unit in Available Units.
Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.
Click Save.
To remove the Units:
Select the unit in Assigned Units.
Click the arrow to remove the unit.
Click Save.
UNIT DETAILS
The following Unit Details allow you to view the properties of the unit.
Unit Code
Unit Name
Unit Type
Country
Currency
To Filter the unit details:
Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.
Click the Arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
The Available Sub-Consolidations and Assigned Sub-Consolidations for a selected user appear on the Sub- Consolidations page. You can assign and remove sub-consolidations for a user to maintain the users access to sub-consolidations. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.
To assign the Sub-Consolidations:
Select the sub-consolidations in Available SubConsolidations.
Click the arrow to add the sub-consolidations to Assigned SubConsolidations.
Click Save.
To remove the Sub-Consolidations:
Select the sub-consolidations in Assigned Sub-Consolidations.
Click the arrow to remove the sub-consolidations.
Click Save.
DATASET DETAILS
The following Sub-Consolidations Details allow you to view the properties of the sub-consolidations.
Code
Display Name
To Filter the sub-consolidations details:
Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
Role
A user's access to units is based on the selected Role for the units. For example, if you assign a user to a unit at the Preparer level and not the Reviewer level then, the user can access the unit only as a preparer.
To select user Role(s) for units:
Click Preparer to assign the preparer role to units.
Click Reviewer (Reviewer 1-6) to assign the reviewer role to units.
Click Save.
The Available Units and Assigned Units for a selected user appear on the Units page. Assign and remove units for a user to maintain the Users access to units.
To assign the Units:
Select the unit in Available Units.
Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.
Click Save.
To remove the Units:
Select the unit in Assigned Units.
Click the arrow to remove the unit.
Click Save.
In Administration > System > Manage Users > Users Roles you can set up the user role permissions. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.
With User Roles, you can assign Members, Datasets, Permissions and Classes to users.
There are three default Roles: Administer, Read Only and Read/Write.
You can create forty-seven additional user roles to have fifty roles in total.
You can sort and filter the lists in the columns to quickly find details.
You can manually add roles or use the import process to add the additional User Roles. To import User Roles, update the #CUSRRP# tab within your categories import spreadsheet file.
To Sort the details:
Click the header row.
Click the arrow in the column header.
To Filter the details:
Click the header row.
Click the arrow for the column heading and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the header row for the heading you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
ADD ROLES
To Add Roles
In Administration >System > Manage Users > User Roles.
Click the to add a New User Role.
Type the Name.
Click OK.
The Available Users and Assigned Users for a selected role appear on the Members page. You assign and remove users in a role to maintain the user role members.
To assign the Users:
Select the user in Available Users.
Click the arrow to add the user to Assigned Users.
Click Save.
To remove the Users:
Select the user in Assigned Users.
Click the arrow to remove the user.
Click Save.
Note: Users cannot be assigned to multiple roles and you must decide one role to assign each user.
The Available Datasets and Assigned Datasets for a selected user appear on the Datasets page. You can assign and remove datasets for a user to maintain the users access to datasets. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.
To assign the Datasets:
Select the dataset in Available Datasets.
Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Datasets.
Click Save.
To remove the Datasets:
Select the dataset in Assigned Datasets.
Click the arrow to remove the unit.
Click Save.
DATASET DETAILS
The following Dataset Details allow you to view the properties of the dataset.
Name
Read Only
Fiscal Year
Fiscal Period
Type
To Filter the dataset details:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
The Read Only and Read/Write user role permissions are assigned to the Access Area for My Datasets, Review & Edit, Reporting, Analysis, Administration, and Global Access.
PERMISSION DETAILS
If Read and/or Read/Write user role have permissions assigned, a hyphen appears in the columns for the section with permissions assigned.
Select Read or Read/Write for an Access Area, otherwise the area will not appear in My Datasets, Review & Edit, Reporting, Analysis, Administration, and Global Access.
You can assign separate permissions for the Override Rate for Temporary Differences.
The selections made for States apply to all states.
The selections made for Global Access apply to those pages in the Global Access application.
To assign Permissions to a user role:
Select a Role and then Permissions.
Click to expand the Access Area.
Click the arrow and drill down to the Access Areas.
To assign permissions to all areas, click Read or Read/Read Write in the header.
To assign each Access Area, click Read or Read/Read Write for that area.
Select the minus sign to collapse the Access Area.
Click Save.
Unassigned Permissions for a user group:
If Read or Read/Read Write permissions are not assigned to users for an access area, that area will not appear for users to see in the application.
The Available Classes and Assigned Classes for a selected role appear on the Classes page. You can assign and remove classes in a to maintain the user role classes.
To assign Classes to a role:
Select the Code Name in Available Classes.
Click the arrow to add the user to Assigned Classes.
Click Save.
To remove Classes from a role:
Select the Code Name in Assigned Users.
Click the arrow to remove the user.
Click Save.
To Filter the dataset details:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Filter.
To remove the Filter:
Click the header row for the column you want to filter.
Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.
Click Clear.
In Administration > System > Global Attachments you can upload style sheets and other system files that have various purposes within the system. Once a file is uploaded, it deploys to all users who have access to the system.
Note: You must activate the GLOBAL_XSL system parameter
534
to see this page in Administration >
System. You can import the system parameter or contact support for assistance.
CODE
If the file being uploaded relates to a style sheet, then the code must match the code given for the report. When you are given the file from the system, you are provided with this code.
FILE
Click Browse to locate the file. Once you select Add or Update, the file is stored in the database. Any future changes to the system do not affect the style sheet being used by the system.
DESCRIPTION
Enter a description of the file being uploaded.
Notes:
The Browse and Update Attachment and Attachment Save As buttons only display if the GLOBAL_XSL_BROWSEUPDATE and GLOBAL_XSL_SAVEAS system parameters respectively have been added with a parameter value of 1.
You will need this parameter to view the Audit Trail created when working with the Enhanced Integration transfer.
In Administration > System > Login History the User Name and Last Login Time appears in the page for review.
In Administration > System > Country/Currency you can assign codes to a unit purposes.
417 for reporting
To import country and currency codes, complete the appropriate fields on the #CUR# Currencies and #COU# Countries sheets in the Import Categories template.
COUNTRY CODE AND NAME
You can create additional countries and currencies as needed.
The country code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters.
You can edit an existing country code and name.
At this point you may designate Mass State rates Deferred Rates and Current Tax Rate.
CURRENCY SYMBOL AND NAME
91. Enter the Beginning Deferred and Ending
The currency symbol 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters,
including spaces, up to 60 characters. The currency symbol and name can be edited after the code is created.
The currency symbol appears in the header of reports in the local currency view.
At this point you may designate Global State rates Weighted FX Rate.
91. Enter the Beginning and Ending FX Rates and
Note:The ISO Country deleted.
746
codes are pre-populated in the system and can be updated and
In Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards you can create and manage Deferred Rollforwards. You can set up the deferred columns by Tags or by Classes & Subclasses.
You can make assignments in Administration to create and manage the deferred rollforwards at the
system level.
Notes: You also can manage deferred rollforwards at the dataset level by making assignments in My Datastets > More drop-down list.
The Copy From Admin feature copies the assignments from the Administration set up.
The copied assignments will overwrite the data for the current dataset.
In Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards > by Tag you set up the deferred columns by Tags.
Here are guidelines for managing deferred rollforwards at the system level:
To delete a column, decrease the number of columns.
The deferred rollforward column assignments to tag letters 27 can be modified. Ensure that every
column is referenced at least once in the assignments and that columns that were deleted are not referenced in the assignments.
To import the Deferred Rollforward mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #CDRF# Def Rollforwards sheet in the Import Categories template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
Select the number of columns. These columns appear in the expanded view of the Deferred Balances report.
COLUMN NAME
The column name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters. The column name can be edited after it is created.
ASSIGNMENTS - ACTIVITY/DEF ONLY/BS ONLY
Each tag letter 27 (B-Z) needs to have the three types of deferred events (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance
Sheet Only) assigned to a column. Column names and associations with events display in reports. Click
Save.
Note: The Tag Letter, A is reserved for system automation.
In Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards > by Class you set up the deferred columns by Class.
At the System level, you can Add, Edit, and Delete deferred rollforward columns by class.
Up to 26 columns are allowed and you can move the columns Up and Down in the list using the
Arrows.
The Column default is Unassigned for Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only.
You can assign a default class to the ending balance.
Click Post End Balance Default Class and select the class used to post the ending balance.
NEW DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To add a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select Add and then type the Name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
EDIT DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To edit a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select Edit and then type the new Name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
DELETE DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To delete a Deferred Rollforward Column:
Select a Deferred Rollforward Column.
Select Delete and the message appears "All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to."
Select the Deferred Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the Deferred Rollforward Column.
COPY DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
There is not an option to copy the Deferred Rollforward Column at this time.
ASSIGN DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To assign the Deferred Rollforward Column Value to the Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:
Class Code - Name is a list of available classes.
Unassigned is the default class.
Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only are Data Entry fields for tax adjustments.
The Deferred Rollforward class defines where the balances are entered for an adjustment.
For each class name, you will select Activity, Deferred Only, or Balance Sheet Only for a tax adjustment.
To assign a class to the column for Activity, Deferred, or Balance Sheet Only:
For each Class Code - Name, select the Deferred Rollforward column for Activity, Deferred, or a
Balance Sheet Only tax adjustment.
Click Save.
ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY
The Assignment Summary page lists the column name and the assigned classes.
DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMN NAME
The column name assigned to classes.
CLASS
A list of available classes.
CLASS TYPE
Data Entry
Transfer
Flow Through
System
CLASSES
The types of classes available:
AUTO- System Automation
Bridge - Bridge
DEF -Default
EstimPay - ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
FT - Flow Through
FTE - Flow Through Clearing
FTP - Flow Through Posting
IncTax - ONESOURCE Income Tax
RTP- Return to Provision
StateApp - ONESOURCE State Apportionment
UPTBI - Pre-Tax Book Income
XFR - Transfer
DATA ENTRY COLUMN
The column the entry will appear in the Deferred Rollforward report.
In Administration > System > Manage NOL Rollforwards you can create and manage NOL Rollforwards. You can set up the deferred columns by Tags or by Classes & Subclasses.
You can make assignments in Administration to create and manage the deferred rollforwards at the
system level.
Notes: You also can manage deferred rollforwards at the dataset level by making assignments in Data Entry
145 .
The Copy From Admin feature copies the assignments from the Administration set up.
The copied assignments will overwrite the data for the current dataset.
In Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards > by Tag you set up the deferred columns by Tags.
Here are guidelines for managing NOL Rollforwards at the system level:
To delete a column, decrease the number of columns.
The NOL rollforward column assignments to tag letters 27 can be modified. Ensure that every column
is referenced at least once in the assignments and that columns that were deleted are not referenced in the assignments.
To import the NOL Rollforward mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #CNOLRF# NOLRollforwards sheet in the Import Categories template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
Select the number of columns. These columns appear in the expanded view of the Deferred Balances report.
COLUMN NAME
The column name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters. The column name can be edited after it is created.
ASSIGNMENTS - ACTIVITY/DEF ONLY/BS ONLY
Each tag letter 27 (B-Z) needs to have the three types of deferred events (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance
Sheet Only) assigned to a column. Column names and associations with events display in reports.
Note: The Tag Letter, A is reserved for system automation.
In Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards > by Class you set up the deferred columns by Class.
At the System level, you can Add, Edit, and Delete NOL rollforward columns by class.
Up to 26 columns are allowed and you can move the columns Up and Down in the list using the
Arrows.
The Column default is Unassigned for Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only.
NEW NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To add a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select Add and then type the Name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
EDIT NOL COLUMN
To edit a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select Edit and then type the new Name.
Click Default, to attach the default subclass.
DELETE NOL COLUMN
To delete a NOL Rollforward Column:
Select a NOL Rollforward Column.
Select Delete and the message appears "All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to."
Select the NOL Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.
Click Cancel to close without deleting the NOL Rollforward Column.
COPY NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
There is not an option to copy the NOL Rollforward Column at this time.
ASSIGN NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS
To assign the NOL Rollforward Column Value to the Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:
Class Code - Name is a list of available classes.
Unassigned is the default class.
Activity, Deferred, and Balance Sheet Only are Data Entry fields for tax adjustments.
The NOL Rollforward class defines where the balances are entered for an adjustment.
For each class name, you will select Activity, Deferred Only, or Balance Sheet Only for a tax adjustment.
To assign a class to the column for Activity, Deferred, or Balance Sheet Only:
For each Class Code - Name, select the NOL Rollforward column for Activity, Deferred, or a
Balance Sheet Only tax adjustment.
Click Save.
ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY
The Assignment Summary page lists the column name and the assigned classes.
NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMN NAME
The column name assigned to classes.
CLASS
A list of available classes.
CLASS TYPE
The types of classes available:
AUTO- System Automation
Bridge - Bridge
DEF -Default
EstimPay - ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
FT - Flow Through
FTE - Flow Through Clearing
FTP - Flow Through Posting
IncTax - ONESOURCE Income Tax
RTP- Return to Provision
StateApp - ONESOURCE State Apportionment
UPTBI - Pre-Tax Book Income
XFR - Transfer
DATA ENTRY COLUMN
The column the entry will appear on the Deferred Rollforward report.
In Administration > System > Manage IFRS Rollforwards you can create and Manage IFRS Rollforwards. You can set up the deferred columns by Tags.
You can make assignments in Administration to create and manage the deferred rollforwards at the
system level.
Notes:
You also can manage deferred rollforwards at the dataset level by making assignments in My Datasets
The Copy From Admin feature copies the assignments from the Administration set up.
The copied assignments will overwrite the data for the current dataset.
Here are guidelines for managing IFRS deferred rollforwards at the system level:
To delete a column, decrease the number of columns.
The IFRS deferred rollforward column assignments to tag letters 27 can be modified. Ensure that every
column is referenced at least once in the assignments and that columns that were deleted are not referenced in the assignments.
To import the Deferred Rollforward mappings, complete the appropriate fields on the #CDRF# IFRS Def Rollforwards sheet in the Import Categories template.
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
Select the number of columns. These columns appear in the expanded view of the Deferred Balances report.
COLUMN NAME
The column name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters. The column name can be edited after it is created.
ASSIGNMENTS - ACTIVITY/DEF ONLY/BS ONLY
Each tag letter 27 (B-Z) must have the three types of deferred events (Activity, Deferred Only, Balance Sheet
Only) assigned to a column. Column names and associations with events appear in reports.
Note: The Tag Letter, A is reserved for system automation.
Manage IFRS Rollforwards
Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tags Only)
In Administration > System > Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tags Only) you can configure how a Temporary Difference is populated at the adjustment level instead of at the dataset level. The temporary difference posts to Activity, Deferred Only, or Balance Sheet Only.
You can assign the Use Ending? designation to populate the Book/Tax Temporary Differences Ending Book field. Use Ending? applies to both the book and tax fields.
Select Use Ending? on a code by code basis.
Select the Temp Diff Entry Type: Activity, Balance Sheet Only, or Deferred Only.
Select the Code-Description for the temporary difference, Use Ending? and the Temp Diff Entry Type to post between the beginning and ending adjustment to Activity, Balance Sheet Only or Deferred Only.
Notes:
The ending balances can be imported or bridged if Use Ending is selected.
You can establish and import how each Temporary Difference is posted.
Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tags Only)
On a code by code basis, you can set up an Equity type difference and post the Temp Diff Entry Type for the Balance Sheet Only.
Notes:
You can add Temporary Differences that are not using the Use Ending? balance and those differences are saved, as well.
When creating the Use Ending? balance for a temporary difference, you can enter an Activity, Balance Sheet Only or Deferred Only to have a set amount.
Some features of ONESOURCE Tax Provision, including, Flow-Through, and Journal Entries, require an additional license.
In Administration > System > Manage Licenses you can add the license code and license key.
FEATURE CODE
Type the name of the license, for example, FlowThrough.
FEATURE KEY
Type the key for the license.
Note: Upon saving the feature code and key, the feature is activated and the check icon appears in the Valid? column.
Manage Licenses
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations an Administrator can activate additional functionality within the application. The administrator will activate parameters to configure the application.
From the list of tabs, you can select Reporting, Advanced Functionality, Integration, Data Entry, Global Access or Admin to access parameters. The parameters are organized within tabs and represent specific functions of the application. The parameters are activated by selecting Yes or Add for the parameter option.
Initially, some parameters appear unavailable because the parameter is not activated. Once a parameter is selected, it is activated and appears in blue font to reflect the change. The parameter will change back to black font the next time you access Manage Configurations.
For information about a parameter:
Click the parameter name and the Description for that parameter is available at the bottom of the screen.
Click Description again to unhide the parameter information.
To select parameter in Manage Configurations:
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations and then select the page with the functionality to activate.
Select the parameter to activate it.
Manage Configurations
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting you can find the following topics.
482
484
485
486
486
488
490
492
492
In the Tax Provision tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENHANCED VIEW
Select Yes, to display the Tax Provision report in the enhanced mode which includes the following items:
Detailed view displays the unit PTBI with adjustments if using the USETBPTBI dataset parameter.
Detailed view displays a breakout of the Total Deductible State Tax line into the state by state detail.
Detailed view displays a breakout of the Total State Tax Provision components into State Current Tax Provision, State Deferred Tax Provision and State Equity Adjustment.
Unit Breakout view (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) will display on screen vs.requiring to export to Excel.
HIDE DEDUCTIBLE STATE TAX DETAIL
Select Yes, to hide the breakout of the Total Deductible State Tax to the state by state detail when Enhanced view of the Tax Provision report is active.
ADD GAAP-STAT REPORT
Select Yes, to activate an additional Tax Provision report which has the GAAP-STAT format. The permanent and temporary difference amounts tagged with tag letters configured as GAAP-STAT Tag(s) will be sub- totaled as PTBI in Local STAT. All other permanent and temporary differences tagged with letters other than ones identified as GAAP-STAT Tag will be sub-totaled as STAT to Tax adjustments.
GAAP-STAT TAG
Tag Letter(s) designated in the drop-down list box will be used to separate data into the section that sub- totals to the line called PTBI in Local STAT on the GAAP-STAT Tax Provision report. All permanent and temporary difference activity with the designated tag letter appear in the GAAP to STAT adjustments section. The activity is added to PTBI to arrive at PTBI in Local STAT. All other permanent and temporary differences that do not have the designated tag letter display in the section that shows STAT to Tax adjustments. You can review in the section that sub-totals to the line called PTBI in Local STAT on the GAAP-STAT Tax
Provision report.
ADDITIONAL GAAP-STAT TAG
Additional Tag Letter(s) can be added by selecting a letter within the drop-down list.
GAAP-STAT CLASSES
Classes designated in the drop-down list box will be used to separate data into the section that sub-totals to the line called PTBI in Local STAT on the GAAP-STAT Tax Provision report. All permanent and temporary difference activity with the designated tag letter appear in the GAAP to STAT adjustments section. The activity is added to PTBI to arrive at PTBI in Local STAT. All other permanent and temporary differences that do not have the designated tag letter display in the section that shows STAT to Tax adjustments. You can review in the section that sub-totals to the line called PTBI in Local STAT on the GAAP-STAT Tax Provision report.
ADDITIONAL GAAP-STAT CLASSES
Additional Classes Letter(s) can be added by selecting a letter within the drop-down list.
Note: The same letter should be used for each set of the GAAP-STAT Tags and Additional GAAP-STAT Tag parameters.
ENABLE GAAP-STAT SCRUNCH
Select Yes lets you select a Current GAAP, Current STAT, Non-Current GAAP, and Non-Current STAT class or tag for the scrunch functionality.
Select No lets you select Current or Non-Current Class or Tag for scrunch.
ADD CSC BREAKOUT VIEW
Activates two additional views on the Tax Provision report (at the Sub-Consolidated level). Select Yes, to activate two additional views for the Tax Provision report (at the Sub-Consolidated reporting level) - csc breakout view which shows the unit data grouped into their CSC configuration and CSC breakout comparison which compares two datasets at the CSC grouped level.
EXCLUDE STATE NON-CASH TAX ADJ FROM FED PRV RPT
Select Yes, excludes Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments from the deductible State amount on the Federal Tax Provision Report.
Select No, includes Non-Cash State Tax Adjustments from the deductible State amount on the Federal Tax Provision Report.
In the Effective Tax Rate tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENHANCED VIEW
Activates additional views of the Effective Tax Rate (ETR) report. The report displays the Effective Tax Rate report in the enhanced mode which includes the following items:
Select Yes, to display the Effective Tax Rate report in the enhanced mode which includes the following items:
Breakout All view (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) will appear on screen rather
than requiring you to export to Excel.
Expanded view (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) will have the Brkout view options under each column header that will show the unit by unit detail.
Use Unit Tax Rate view (on Unit level reports) and Use Blended Tax Rate views (on Consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) displays the ETR where it reconcile to the Unit(s) Underlying Tax Rate(s) vs. the Statutory Group Tax Rate designated for the dataset.
ADD CSC BREAKOUT REPORT
Select Yes, to activate the Effective Tax Rate report (at the Sub-Consolidated level) which shows the unit data grouped into their CSC configuration. For this functionality to work, create sub-consolidations using the coding convention CSC#_X. Every unit must be assigned to a CSC#_ sub-consolidation.
ADD CONSOLIDATED PTBI RECONCILIATION
Select Yes, to display an additional line on the Effective Tax Rate report called Effective Rate (As a Percentage of Consolidated PTBI) which reconciles all levels of reports to the consolidated amounts. This parameter works in conjunction with the SHOW_EFFRATECSCBRKOUT parameter.
Note: The custom sub-consolidation view of the Effective Tax Rate report allows the data of a parent sub- consolidation to appear as separate line items for child sub-consolidations.
EFFECT OF RATES DIFF THAN STAT PERM NETTING
Select Yes and the Tax Effect of Rates Different than Statutory for permanent differences is included in the respective permanent difference line.
Select No and the Tax Effect of Rates Different than Statutory for permanent differences is included in the Effect of Rates Different than Statutory line.
In the Regulated tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
EXPANDED (FERC) VIEW ENERGY
The view is created for Federal Energy Regulatory Commission companies.
TD FOR 410. X COLUMN
The parameter controls the 410 behavior of activity on the FERC Deferred Rollforward report with a column that displays the temporary differences.
TD FOR 411. X COLUMN
The parameter controls the 411 behavior of activity on the FERC Deferred Rollforward report with a column that displays the temporary differences.
TD FOR DEBITS/CREDITS COLUMN
The parameter controls the Debits/Credits behavior of activity on the FERC Deferred Rollforward report with a column that displays the temporary differences.
Note: This functionality is for a specific subset clients, Regulated Utilities. Regulated Utilities are required to abide by FERC, which has specific rules for deferred balances. The parameters on this page provide a specific view of the deferred balances report.
In the Export to Returns tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters allow you to export data.
Export to CCH
Export to CorpTax
Export to ONESOURCE Income Tax
Export to Vertex
In the Deferred Balances tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENHANCED VIEW
Select Yes, to display the Deferred Balance report in the enhanced mode which includes the following items:
Brkout views (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) will appear rather than having to export the information to Excel.
CIR expanded (b/s) view is added to the Deferred Balance report which separates the Rate Change column into FX Rate Change and Def Rate Change.
When using this parameter, use the Subtotal Column Placement and Subtotal Column Name parameters to display adjusted beginning balances.
SUBTOTAL COLUMN PLACEMENT
Select the Column number from the drop-down list box. The Column choice will dictate where a sub-total column should be inserted on the Deferred Balance report. This parameter activates an enhanced view of the Tax Provision report. The consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports display the Unit Breakout onscreen instead of requiring an export of data to Excel.
SUBTOTAL COLUMN NAME
The Text entered will become the Header for the sub-total column on the Deferred Balance report. Typically, this sub-total represents adjusted beginning balances. However, it could be used for any sub-total.
Notes:
The Subtotal Column Placement parameter only works when the Enhanced View parameter is activated and the Subtotal Column Name parameter is defined.
The parameter allows you to designate the position for the sub-total column in the Deferred Balance report. This column adds beginning deferred balances with rate changes and prior columns in the expanded (b/s) view. It uses the columns as defined in the Manage Deferred Rollforward screen.
ENDING DEF BALANCE POST TAG AND EVENT TYPE
Enter the Post Tag and Event Type for the Deferred Balances.
ADD CSC BREAKOUT VIEW
Select Yes, to activate the CSC brkout view on the Deferred Balance report (at the Sub-Consolidated reporting level) which show each column with the unit data grouped into their CSC configuration.
This option allows you to see the CSC breakout, in addition to the unit-by-unit breakout for each column in the report. This report defaults to non-current positions. Select the all view option to see current and noncurrent positions.
Notes:
For this functionality to work, you must create sub-consolidations using a coding convention starting with CSC. Use CSC#_X_ for the parent sub-consolidation and CSC#_ for the child sub-consolidations. Every unit in CSC#_X_ must be assigned to a CSC#_ sub-consolidation.
The custom sub-consolidation view of the Deferred Balances report allows the data of a parent sub- consolidation to be broken into child sub-consolidations.
ADD DEFERRED WORKPAPER REPORT
Select Yes, to activate the Deferred Workpaper report which displays the Deferred Beginning and Ending Balances with their Pre-Tax, Tax Effected and Effective Rate amounts on both the Federal and State levels.
In the State Level tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENHANCED VIEW
Select Yes, to activate the Provision Summary report (under State Summary) report. The enhanced view provides an alternate view and additional functionality.
Breakout (States) view on the Unit level report will appear rather than having to export the information
to Excel.
Breakout (by Unit/States) and Breakout (sub-consolidated by State) views (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) will display on screen vs. requiring to export to Excel.
Breakout (subconsolidated by State) view (on the sub-consolidated level report) will show each state column with the unit data grouped into their CSC configuration.
On the Consolidated and Sub-Consolidated levels, the default view, excel breakout (states), changes to breakout (by Unit, States). The breakout (sub consolidated by State) view displays the detail by consolidated state. The report view (on the sub-consolidated level report) will show each state column with the unit data grouped into their CSC setup.
Note: On the Consolidated and Sub-Consolidated levels, the default view, excel breakout (states), changes to breakout (by Unit, States). The breakout (sub consolidated by State) view displays the detail by consolidated state. The report view (on the sub-consolidated level report) will show each state column with the unit data grouped into their CSC setup.
ADD EXPECTED DEFERRED REPORT
Select Yes, to activate the Expected Deferred report which displays each State's Ending Apportionment Rate, Ending Statutory Rate and the two combined to make the Expected Deferred Rate on a unit by unit basis. This report displays the state ending deferred rate (ending statutory rate) and ending apportionment rate.
ADD STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT REPORT
Select Yes, to activate the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout report which displays the State Tax Provision broken out by State and Unit. This report has been enhanced with additional functionality and it can be displayed be viewing the State Summary/Provision Summary in the Breakout (by Unit/States) view.
LIMIT STATES ON STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT
Select Yes, to choose a single State to filter the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report to show that state.
LIMIT UNITS ON STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT
Select Yes, to choose a single Unit to filter the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report to show that unit.
HIDE STATE REPORT MENU WHEN NO STATES?
This option will hide the state report menu items if no states are activated in the dataset. Select Yes, to hide the menu items. Select No, to have the menu items always visible.
HIDE STATE REPORT DETAILS WHEN NO STATES?
This option will cause state details to be hidden on reports if there are no states activated in the dataset.
Select Yes, to hide the menu items. Select No, to have the menu items always visible.
In the Formatting tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
Note: Both the header and footer can have up to 65 characters. The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD REPORT HEADER
Text entered (up to 200 characters) will display as a Header on all reports when they are printed.
ADD REPORT FOOTER
Text entered (up to 200 characters) will display as a Footer on all reports when they are printed.
SET PRINT PAGES WIDE
Enter the number of pages wide that reports should print to. If no amount is entered the reports will shrink to fit into one page.
CLIENT NAME IN REPORTS
Allows the text entered (up to 200 characters) will display in the header of reports and will replace the name from the license file.
REPORTING CURRENCY FOR NAME IN REPORT HEADERS (UP TO 65 CHARACTERS)
When viewing in reporting currency, this parameter allows the text entered to appear in the header of the reports in parentheses after the report name.
TREAT CODES AS TEXT IN EXCEL
Select Yes, to convert any user defined codes that have numbers into text when they are exported to Excel. This preserves leading zeros or where a code resembles a scientific notation instead of converting them where the leading zero is dropped (e.g. 005335A to 55335A) or the formula is converted (e.g. 77E.00001 to 7.7).
EXTENSION OF CLIENT NAME IN REPORTS
The text entered will be displayed as an extension of the 'Client Name in Reports' parameter value and will be displayed in the header of reports. Enter the Client Name that you want to appear on the reports.
NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES FOR RATES
Select the number of decimal places to be displayed for rates as they are displayed on reports.
NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES FOR FX RATES
Select the number of decimal places to be displayed for FX rates as they are displayed on reports.
USE PARENTHESIS FOR NEGATIVE NUMBERS
Select Yes, to display negative numbers using parenthesis (e.g. -1000 to (1,000)). This parameter allows the balances in the application to appear with parenthesis rather than negative numbers to better support the accounting format.
Report settings can be added in the Report Settings tab of the Manage Configurations screen in the System folder, in Administration. You can set the default view for the Tax Provision, Effective Tax Rate, and Deferred
Balances reports.
In the APIC Pool tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following is the parameter and description:
APIC POOL DATA ENTRY + REPORT
Select Yes, to activate the APIC Pool Data Entry and the APIC Pool report which allows the movement in the Additional Paid In Capital Pool to be tracked.
In the Other tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following are the parameters and description:
REMOVE SEQUENTIAL RDS CONSTRAINTS
Select Yes, to remove the sequential reporting datasets check and allows the reporting dataset to exist where the ending balances and rates in the first dataset do not have to agree with the beginning balances and rates in the next dataset.
ALLOW MULTIPLE LOCAL CURRENCIES ON REPORTS
Select Yes, to remove the restriction when the underlying units have differing local currencies to allow data to display (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) in Local Currency.
This parameter removes the consistency constraints, when creating a sequential reporting dataset.
You can create sequential datasets in which the ending balances and rates in the first dataset do not agree with those of the next dataset.
Allows consolidated and sub-consolidated reports with multiple currencies to display in local currency. You can view Local Currency reports when units do not have the same currency.
ADD + DEFINE BS OFFSET SUMMARY REPORT
Allows the BSOS_XXXX system parameter with paramvalue of Tag Letter_Tag Letter (example: parameter of BSOS_Goodwill with a paramvalue of G_G) activates the Balance Sheet Offset Summary report.
Balance Sheet Only amounts entered with the tags established in the system parameter are included.
Balance Sheet Only amounts are rate effected and display in the appropriate column based on the tag.
The report explains the other side of the JE for Equity.
ADD YEAR TO DATE [YTD] REPORTS
Select Yes, to show the add the year to date reports.
ENABLE ADVANCED PLUG-IN REPORTS
Select Yes, to activate the advanced plug-in reports.
UK PROOF AND P&L REPORTS
Select Yes, to activate the UK proof and P&L Reports.
ENABLE VA CONTRA ACCOUNTS FOR THE NET DEFERRED REPORT
Select Yes, to display valuation allowances as contra accounts in the Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities Report. Select No, to display valuation allowances as non-contra accounts.
SHOW LEGACY REPORTS TAB
Select Yes, to show Legacy in the Reporting navigation tree. This parameter lets you view the Reporting (Legacy) reports.
CALCULATE REPORTS USING ALTERNATIVE ROUNDING
Select Yes, to round up numbers in the for JE reports.
Warning:
If you are using Global Access, do not activate the Reporting (Legacy) area. If you do, then Global Access will access the legacy reporting area instead of the new reporting interface.
To access the Global Legacy reports, in Manage Configurations select Global Access and then select Yes for the parameter Show Legacy Reports for Global Access.
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality you can find the following topics.
494
495
496
496
Alternative Provision Calculations
495
500
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)
500
501
In the Payable tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
PAYABLE FUNCTIONALITY (RECOMMENDED)
Activates the Payable functionality which includes the data entry, posting and reports. This functionality works properly when the Simple Liability Functionality is not activated.
Select Yes to activate the Payable Functionality (Recommended).
Notes:
To use the Payable Functionality, the simple liability and the liability tabs should be de-activated. If you are importing the system parameters, SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY and SHOW_LIABILITY are set from a paramvalue of 1 to 0.
If you are using the Liability Functionality, the data must be migrated before using the Payable Functionality. For more information, contact your client manager or the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Support team (Call 877 829 5969, option 2 or email provisionsupport@thomsonreuters.com).
LIMIT PAYABLE DATE RANGE
Removes the date restriction allowing data entry for the payable with dates that are outside the dataset period. For example, a 2013 full year dataset is not restricted to entries from 1/1/2013 to 12/31/2013.
DESIGNATE CALENDAR/FISCAL YEAR FOR POSTING
You can select No offset or the Month for the Payable auto posting entries.
Calendar year filers will select No offset.
Fiscal year filers will select -1 to -11.
The offset option is 12 minus the number of months left in the year to arrive at the fiscal month. For example, select -3 for a September fiscal year, -6 for a June fiscal year.
If importing, the FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET system parameter with a paramvalue of 0 designates a calendar year when the dataset parameter is set to auto-post. This parameter is used when the auto-posting dataset parameter is activated and the posting is based on a fiscal rather than a calendar year.
Entering a paramvalue of -1 to -11 adjusts the auto posting date to reflect a fiscal year.
The paramvalue should be the fiscal month minus 12.
Ending balances roll over to create beginning balances with the code BBAL and a date of fiscal year end plus 1 day. For example, if the paramvalue is -3, CPROV posts with a date of 9/30/CY and BBAL posts with a date of 10/1/CY.
PAYABLE RECLASS FUNCTIONALITY
Allows for the Payable Reclass functionality which uses the Dataset configuration to determine how the unit(s) computed payable is reclassed and posted on another unit.
ENABLE TAX ADJUSTMENTS PAYABLE MAPPING FUNCTIONALITY
Select Yes to activate the Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping functionality. The mapping page then appears within dataset administration in My Datasets > More drop-down list. The dataset level mapping allows you to designate the posting in the payable rather than using the system defaults.
Configure on a dataset by dataset basis.
ENABLE PAYABLE SUMMARY ENTRY
Select Yes to activate the Payable Settings and Payable Summary Entry data entry screens.
NUMBER OF CUSTOM TABS TO DISPLAY
Select 1 or 2 to determine if the Payable Summary entry will have 1 or 2 Custom Tabs.
CUSTOM TAB NAME 1
The text entered is the Custom Tab Name 1 for the Payable Summary data entry screen.
CUSTOM TAB NAME 2
The text entered is the Custom Tab Name 2 for the Payable Summary data entry screen.
ENABLE RECLASS TAB
Select Yes - Items entered on the Reclass tab can only be saved when the Amount Total nets to zero for items on the page.
RECLASS TAB NAME
When the Reclass Tab is enabled, the text entered will rename the Reclass Tab for Payable Summary Entry.
TRANSFER PAYABLE TRANSACTION TYPE
Select the default value from the list for the Payable Transaction Type in Transfer In and Out for the source and target units.
In the Alternative Minimum Tax tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
DISABLE THE AMT AUTOMATION FEATURE?
Select Yes to Disable the AMT Automation Feature.
DESIGNATE AMT FUNCTIONALITY APPROACH (NOT RECOMMENDED)
Select Yes to allow the functionality to calculate the AMT using local currency amounts. This functionality requires that all units have the same local currency.
The Flow Through tab, allows you to activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
IS FLOW-THROUGH ACTIVATED? (CANNOT BE CHANGED HERE) SEE MANAGE LICENSES
480
To activate Flow-Through, you must enter the license information:
For the Feature Code, type Flow Through.
Type the license number for the Feature Key.
AUTOMATICALLY CALCULATE FLOW-THROUGH FACTORS
Select Yes to Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors and the data is transferred from one unit to another based on the Flow-Through profile that is set up.
Select No and the data will not automatically transfer to another unit.
DISPLAY THE CALCULATE FLOW-THROUGH FACTOR RESULTS MENU ITEM
Select Yes to calculate the Flow-Through Factor results menu item.
Select No and the Flow-Through Factor results menu item is not calculated.
DISPLAYS FX FIELDS
Select Yes to Display FX Fields.
Select No and the FX Fields will not be displayed.
ALLOW AUDIT TRAIL FOR FLOW-THROUGH
Select Yes to allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through.
Select No and information for the Flow-Through will not appear on the Audit Trail.
In Journal Entries, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENABLE CONFIGURABLE JOURNAL ENTRY
Select Yes, to enable the configurable journal entry configuration screens and removes the simple journal entry functionality. A license is required to view configurable journal entry reports.
The simple journal entry is available by default.
The configurable journal entry provides User Configurable screens to map calculations and other items in the system with general ledger accounts.
FOR THE CONFIGURABLE JOURNAL ENTRY REPORT
ENHANCED VIEW
Select Yes, to display the Output JE reports of the Legacy Reporting tab in the enhanced mode.
DISPLAY ZERO BOOK CALCS ON JE OUTPUT REPORTS
Select Yes, will display zeros on the configurable journal entry reports for book amounts.
DISPLAY ZERO TAX CALCS ON JE OUTPUT REPORTS
Select Yes, will display zeros on the configurable journal entry reports for tax amounts.
JOURNAL ENTRY SUPPLEMENT FIELD NAME #1-9 (SUPPLEMENTAL_LABEL# (1-9))
Add the Field Name for the system parameters with a paramvalue of the desired header text configures headings on the configurable journal entry screens and reports. There are nine supplemental information fields for entering journal entry data. This parameter allows you to configure each field name, which also displays as a header in reports.
ROUNDING OF JOURNAL ENTRY VALUES
Enter number between -6 and 6 to determine the number of places to round the calculated journal entries to. The default value in the calculation procedure is 2 (no rounding).
2 Decimal Places - Default.
SHOW DELETE ALL JOURNAL ENTRIES MENU OPTION
Select Yes, will add the Delete All Journal Entries option within dataset administration in My Datasets
Units > More drop-down list.
SHOW DELETE ALL BUTTON ON JOURNAL ENTRY SCREEN
Select Yes activates the Delete All button on the Journal Entry Configuration windows.
LOCK JE TYPE FIELD ON J.E. SCREEN
Select Yes, locks the JE Type field so that it cannot be modified after you save a journal configuration.
JOURNAL ENTRY TAG GROUP NAME #1-9
Enter the name to be displayed in the drop-down to indicate which Tag letters are being grouped. For Example, if the tags to be included in this group were S, T and Q the name might be Amounts with the Tag S, T and Q.
Journal Entry Tag Group #1-9.
Enter the Tag(s) that should be included in the Tag Group. If there is more than one tag separate with a comma. For Example, if the tags to be included in this group were S, T and Q, enter S,T,Q.
JOURNAL ENTRY ROLLUP SET
Select the Journal Entry Rollup from the drop-down box.
JOURNAL ENTRY STATE GROUP NAME #1-5
Enter the name to be displayed in the drop-down to indicate which States are being grouped. For Example, if the states included in this group were California, Oregon and Washington the name might be West Coast. Then add the states to the group.
Journal Entry State Group #1-5.
Add States to the Group.
In the Alternative Provision Calculations, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ALTERNATIVE PROVISION CALCULATION
Select Yes, to activate the Alternative Provision calculation which allows for scenario calculations to be layered onto the Tax Provision.
1ST SCENARIO CALCULATION POST
Select the Tax Adjustment code where the 1st scenario results should be posted.
2ND SCENARIO CALCULATION POST
Select the Tax Adjustment code where the 2nd scenario results should be posted.
BBC CALCULATION POST
Select the Tax Adjustment code where the BBC calculation results should be posted.
In the Bridge, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
TAG LETTER USED FOR BRIDGE
Enter the Tax Adjustment code where the BBC calculation results should be posted.
BRIDGE INTO SINGLE UNIT LEVEL
Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for a single unit.
BRIDGE INTO SUB-CONSOLIDATION LEVEL
Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for a Sub-Consolidation of Units.
BRIDGE INTO CONSOLIDATION LEVEL
Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for all active Units.
ACTIVATE UNIT MAPPING SCREEN
Select Yes, to display the Unit Mapping screen and activates unit mapping during Bridge Imports.
In the Currency Translation, you can activate the system parameter. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameter and description include:
ADDITIONAL CTA AMOUNT
Select Yes, to enable the ability to enter a reporting currency only adjustment on the Unit Details Miscellaneous tab.
In the RTP True-Up, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
BALANCE SHEET ONLY RTP TRUE-UPS POSTS
Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.
DEFERRED ONLY RTP TRUE-UPS POSTING
Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered as Deferred Only to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.
STATE RTP TRUE-UPS POSTING
Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered for the State to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration you can find the following topics.
501
502
503
503
In the Return tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENABLE DATATRANSFER FROM ONESOURCE INCOME TAX
Select Yes to transfer data from ONESOURCE Income Tax.
SELECT DATASET TO TRANSFER DATA TO ONESOURCE INCOME TAX
Select the Dataset from the drop-down for data to transfer to ONESOURCE Income Tax.
REVERSE LIABILITY AND EQUITY SIGN?
Select Yes to reverse liability and equity sign.
TRANSFER REPORTING CURRENCY
Select Yes to transfer reporting currency.
TRANSFER DATA TO ONESOURCE CORPORATE TAX
Select Yes to transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax.
SELECT DATASET TO TRANSFER DATA TO ONESOURCE CORPORATE TAX
Select the Dataset to transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax.
Notes:
The transfer from ONESOURCE Corporate Tax to ONESOURCE Tax Provision is available for RTP. These balances will be transferred to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision in local currency. Please be sure to apply the correct FX rates.
The Return Worksheet is available in My Datasets > More, however no data will transfer and an error message is returned to the user.
You may have both parameters turned on at the same time, Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax and Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - (UK, AU).
In the Estimated Payments tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
TRANSFER AMOUNTS IN REPORTING CURRENCY
Select Yes, to choose to transfer data in local or reporting currency.
1ST - 4TH QUARTER ACTUAL DATA
Select source dataset to transfer data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments as 1st - 4th Quarter Actual Data.
1ST - 2ND EXTENSION ACTUAL DATA
Select source dataset to transfer data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments as 1st - 2nd Extension Actual Data.
1ST - 4TH QUARTER ACTUAL MONTHS
Set actual months of 1st - 4th Quarter data.
1ST - 2ND EXTENSION ACTUAL MONTHS
Set actual months of 1st - 2nd Extension data.
1ST - 4TH QUARTER FORECAST DATA
Select source dataset to transfer data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments as 1st - 4th Quarter Forecast Data.
1ST - 2ND EXTENSION FORECAST MONTHS
Select source dataset to transfer data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments as 1st - 2nd Extension Forecast Data.
TRANSFER DATA FROM ONESOURCE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS
Select Yes, to allow data to transfer the estimated payments.
FEDERAL Q1 - Q4 PAYABLE TXN TYPE
Select the transaction type for the 1st - 4th Quarter Estimated Payment in Payable Txn Type - Federal.
FEDERAL EXT PAYABLE TXN TYPE
Select the transaction type for the Extension Payment in Payable Txn Type - Federal.
STATE Q1 - Q4 PAYABLE TXN TYPE
Select the transaction type for the transaction type for the 1st - 4th Quarter Estimated Payment in Payable Txn Type - State.
STATE EXT PAYABLE TXN TYPE
Select the transaction type for the 1st - 2nd Extension Payment in Payable Txn Type - State.
DISPLAY CONSOLIDATED MEMBERS CODE
Select Yes to have the consolidated member codes appear in the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet. Select No to leave out the consolidated member codes in the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet.
In the State Apportionment tab, you can activate the system parameter. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameter and description include:
TRANSFER DATA FROM ONESOURCE STATE APPORTIONMENT
Select Yes to activate the Transfer option to transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment.
Select No to hide the Transfer option.
In the General Ledger Manager tab, you can activate the system parameter. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.
The following parameter and description include:
ENABLE TRANSFER FROM GENERAL LEDGER MANAGER:
Select Yes to enable data transfer from General Ledger Manager. With this parameter have the ability to:
Import Master Chart of Accounts from Administration > Manage Trial Balances > Import Master Chart of Accounts.
Import Master Trial Balance using Bridge Import.
Drill-down to General Ledger Manager and view the Master Trial Balance data.
Import Trial Balance Mappings using Bridge Import.
Select No to disable data transfer from General Ledger Manager.
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Data Entry you can find the following topics.
504
505
506
The Class/Subclass option allows a data entry line item to be created with a system-generated subclass.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
DISPLAY THE NEXT VALUE OPTION WHEN CHOOSING A SUBCLASS
Click Yes to display the Next Value option when choosing a Subclass.
To Exclude Sub-classes during Copy, click Add and select a Class.
Note: Up to five Sub-classes can be excluded during a dataset copy.
In the Temporary Differences tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
Temporary Differences the administrator will have the ability to designate a default Adj Type of C-Current / N- Non-Current to a Temporary Difference. The drop-down may be disabled and you will only see the default.
Or, it may be set up so you can override the default. Please see your System Administrator if you have questions about the Adj. Type default that has been set up. There are cases when the Current/ Non-Current should be overwritten and some cases when they should not. There are options you can select to allow the Read/Write users the ability to modify the Default Data Types. You have the ability to activate system parameters for reports and reporting features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ENABLE DEFAULT DATA TYPES
Select Yes, to enable the Default Data Type feature. This feature will cause data entry screens to default to the default (Current or Non-current) that is defined in the administration page for each component. Optionally it can restrict read/write users from changing the default (see the other parameters on this screen).
USE DEFAULT TYPES IN BRIDGE IMPORT
Select Yes, to use default types in Bridge Import. When the bridge import is run, this option will determine if it forces the data type to be the default value, otherwise it will use the value from the import.
ALLOW READ/WRITE USERS TO MODIFY TD TYPES?
Select Yes, to allow Read/Write users to modify TD types? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify the data type on Temporary Differences during data entry/update.
ALLOW READ/WRITE USERS TO MODIFY NOL TYPES?
Select Yes, to allow Read/Write users to modify NOL types? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify the data type on NOL Temporary Differences during data entry/update.
ALLOW READ/WRITE USERS TO MODIFY ATTD TYPES?
Select Yes, to allow Read/Write users to modify ATTD Types? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify the data type on After Tax Temporary Differences during data entry/update.
ALLOW READ/WRITE USERS TO MODIFY SAATD TYPES?
Select Yes, to allow Read/Write users to modify SAATD Types? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify the data type on State After App Temporary Differences during data entry/ update.
ALLOW READ/WRITE USERS TO MODIFY SATTD TYPES?
Select Yes, for Read/Write users to modify SATTD Types? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify the data type on State After Tax Temporary Differences during data entry/update.
LOCK BEGINNING BALANCES FOR READ/WRITE USERS?
Select Yes, to lock beginning balances for Read/Write users? This option will determine if Read/Write users are allowed to modify beginning balances.
In the Lock Data Source tab, you can activate the system parameter. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameter and description include:
LOCK ACTIVE WORKPAPERS DATA SOURCE
Select Yes, to set all data entry rows, where Data Source is ActiveWorkpapers, to Read Only.
Note: Lock Data Source - Dataset Level: Dataset Parameters can be added to prevent users from importing data using the Bridge or Import functionality.
Locks the ability for the Active Workpapers at the Dataset Level to SET or SYN
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Global Access you can find the following topics.
507
509
509
510
512
512
514
514
516
In the General tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ASSIGN DATASETS TO USERS
Adds the ability to assign datasets to a user.
ACTIVATE QUESTIONNAIRE
Activates the Global Access Questionnaire format.
DISPLAY USER STATUS REPORT
Displays the Global Access user status report.
ACTIVATE MANAGE ACTIVE DATASETS
Activates the Manage Active Datasets screen.
ADD REVIEW LEVELS
Add Review Levels 1-8. Makes Preparer, 1st Reviewer, and 2nd Reviewer viewable on the Manage Global Access Review administration page.
SET FORGOT PASSWORD EMAIL
The email address entered will populate in the To: field of an email when a user clicks the Forgot Password link.
SET REQUEST NEW ACCESS EMAIL
The email address entered will populate in the To: field of an email when a user clicks the Request New Access link.
ENABLE FILING GROUP REPORTS
Displays filing group reports in Global Access.
ASSIGN (NON-INTERIM) DATASETS TO USERS
Adds the ability to assign datasets to a user.
DISPLAY PRIOR YEAR INFORMATION
The Rollforward section of Temporary Difference pages shows data from the dataset that is determined (by the Datasets Relations section of the Datasets screen in Administration) to be the Prior Period.
HIDE RTP COLUMNS
Enables RTP adjustments to be entered directly into the Difference column on the Return to Provision page (Column type: retprov).
ADD COMMENTS TO RTPS
Enables comments to be added on the Return to Provision page (Column type: retprov).
SHOW UNIT DETAILS ON QUESTIONNAIRE REPORT
Activates the Foreign/Domestic classification, Country, and Currency for each unit on the Questionnaire Summary report (Global Access)/Questions report (Corporate Edition).
SHOW NEW QUESTIONNAIRE LAYOUT
Shows the new layout for the questionnaire.
SHOW POST RTP BUTTON
Automatic posting of return to provision adjustments can be triggered by selecting the Post RTP Button on the Return to Provision page.
POST GAAP TO STAT RTP
Enables the GAAP to STAT Return To Provision Posting.
SHOW LEGACY REPORTS FOR GLOBAL ACCESS
Select Yes to show the legacy reports in Global Access.
Activate Datasets for Global Access
To activate the Manage Active Datasets parameter:
In Administration > System >Manage Configurations.
Select Global Access.
In the General tab, click Yes for Activate Manage Active Datasets.
In the ADS Col Type tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
DISPLAY DATASET TYPES IN DROPDOWN #1-10
To display the dataset in the Dataset Type list in the Global Access navigation.
ADS Col Type
In the Switch tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
SWITCH
To add a switch to the application, select a Switch from the drop-down list. The following parameters apply to more than one page throughout the application. From the Switch drop-down list, select a dataset type and then click Add.
Current/Non-Current Column
Displays new column Corporate Ending Balance
Trial Balance Header
Change the column label name to Local Country Input
Upload PTBI Label
ITS Switch
Users may create a switch for the following dataset types.
Q1_actual
Q1_forecast
Q2_actual
Q2_forecast
Q3_actual
Q3_forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs (gaap)
yeprov (stat)
In the PTBI tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO PTBI DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the PTBI drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs
In the Perms tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO PERM DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the perm drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs(gaap)
yeprovgs(stat)
In the Temps tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO TEMP DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the perm drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs(gaap)
yeprovgs(stat)
In the Payable tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO PAYABLE DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the perm drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs
In the Tax Adjs tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO TAX ADJS DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the perm drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs
In the TBS (Tax Basis Subline) tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADD TAG TO TAX BASIS DROP-DOWN MENU
Add manual tags to the perm drop-down menu.
Q1 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprov
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs
In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Admin you can find the following topics.
517
517
518
In the User Options, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
ADMINISTER USER SECTION INFORMATION
Adds additional information fields (Email, phone number, etc.) about a user in the Administer User Section under System.
SET USER RESTRICTIONS
Activates the user restriction assignments for Batch Printing which uses Legacy Reports only and Import Numbers to only assigned Units and Sub-consolidations.
In the Password Options, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
PASSWORD EXPIRATION TIME
Add the TSPasswordExpireDays system parameter with a paramvalue of a number, which determines how many days a password can be active.
MINIMUM DIGITS IN PASSWORD
Add the TSPasswordMinDigits system parameter with a paramvalue of a number, which determines the minimum number of characters for a user's password.
MINIMUM LENGTH OF PASSWORD
Add the TSPasswordMinLength system parameter a paramvalue of a number, which determines the minimum number of keystrokes that must exist in a user's password.
LOCKOUT PERIOD AFTER FAILED LOGIN
Add the LockoutMinutes system parameter with a paramvalue of a number, which determines the amount of minutes a user is locked out of the system after they have reached the maximum number of failed login attempts.
MAXIMUM FAILED LOGIN ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT
Add the MaxFailedLogins system parameter with a paramvalue of a number, which determines the maximum number of times a user can enter the wrong password before the user is locked out of the system.
PASSWORDS KEPT IN HISTORY
Add the PassHistNum system parameter with a paramvalue of a number, which determines the number of unique passwords that must be used before a password can be repeated.
MAKE USER LOGINS NOT CASE-SENSITIVE
Select Yes to make the user logins not case-sensitive.
In the Other tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.
The following parameters and descriptions include:
DEFERRED PROVISION ONLY DATA ENTRY
Configures the use of the Deferred Provision Only field on Unit Details. Choosing 1 will display the Deferred Provision Only field as Read Only. Choosing 2 will remove the Deferred Provision Only field.
TRACK LOG MESSAGES
Select Yes, to have the ability to track log messages.
ALLOW GLOBAL ATTACHMENTS
Select Yes, to have the ability to attach and view Global Attachments.
BROWSE AND UPDATE ATTACHMENT BUTTON
Select Yes, to have the ability to have the browse and update attachment button made available.
ATTACHMENT SAVE AS BUTTON
Select Yes, to have the ability to have the Save As button made available.
ENABLE DATABASE ANALYZER
Select Yes, to enable the Database Analyzer.
ENABLE AUDIT TRAIL WHEN RUNNING REPORTS
Select Yes, to Enable the Audit Trail when running reports to optimize speed.
HIDE DATA SOURCE FOR NON ADMIN USERS
To add Data Source Icons and History:
Click Yes to Enable the Data Source History to be captured.
Click Yes to Hide Data Source for Read/Write users to remove the display for non-Admin users.
DISABLE AUDIT TRAIL NUMBERS IMPORT AND BRIDGING
To disable the audit trail for importing and bridging numbers.
SHOW UNIT NAME BEFORE CODE
Allows the unit name to display before the unit code in the Manage Units page.
MODIFY UNIT CODES
You can modify unit codes in Administration > Manage Units.
HIDE CASE NUMBER IN MANAGE DATASET
Select Yes, to hide the case number in manage datasets.
Manage Configurations Reference Charts
Review the Manage Configurations reference charts to see a list of parameters available in Administration.
519
522
524
525
526
532
Reference chart for the Reporting tab:
REPORTING
PARAMETERS
Tax Provision
Enhanced View
Hide Deductible State Tax Detail
Add GAAP-STAT Report
GAAP-STAT Tag
Additional GAAP -STAT Tag
GAAP-STAT Classes
Additional GAAP -STAT Classes
Enable GAAP-STAT scrunch
Add CSC Breakout View
Exclude State Non-Cash Tax Adj from Fed Prv Rpt
Effective Tax Rate
Enhanced View
Add CSC Breakout Report
Add Consolidated PTBI Reconciliation
Effect of Rates Diff than Stat Perm Netting
Regulated
Expanded (FERC) View
REPORTING
PARAMETERS
TD for 411. x Column
TD for 410. x Column
TD for Debits/Credits Column
Export to CCH
Export to Returns
Export to ONESOURCE Income Tax
Export to CorpTax
Export to Vertex
Enhanced View
Deferred Balances
Subtotal Column Name
Subtotal Column Placement
Add CSC Breakout View
Ending Def Balance Post Tag and Event Type
Add Deferred Workpaper Report
Add Expected Deferred Report
State Level Enhanced View
Limit States on State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout
Add State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report
Hide state report menu when no states?
Limit Units on State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout
Hide state report details when no states?
REPORTING
PARAMETERS
Add Report Header
Formatting
Set Print Pages Wide
Add Report Footer
Reporting Currency Name in Report Headers
Client Name in Reports
Extension of Client Name in Reports
Treat Codes as Text in Excel
Number of Decimal Places for FX Rates
Number of Decimal Places for Rates
Use Parenthesis for Negative Numbers
APIC Pool Data Entry + Report
APIC Pool
Other
Allow Multiple Local Currencies on Reports
Remove Sequential RDS Constraints
Add Year to Date (YTD) Reports
Add + Define BS Offset Summary Report
UK Proof and P+L Reports
Enable Advanced Plug-In Reports
Show Legacy Reports Tab
Enable VA Contra Accounts for the Net Deferred Report
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY
PARAMETERS
Reference chart for Advanced Functionality tab:
Payable Functionality (Recommended)
Payable
Limit Payable Date Range
Simple Liability Functionality (Not Recommended)
Payable Reclass Functionality
Designate Calendar/Fiscal Year for Posting
Enable Payable Summary
Enable Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Functionality
Custom Tab 1
Number of Custom Tabs to display
Enable Reclass Tab
Custom Tab 2
Transfer Payable Transaction Type
Disable the AMT Automation Feature
Alternative Minimum Tax
Designate AMT Functionality Approach
Is Flow-Through Activated? (cannot be changed here)
Flow Through
Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item
Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors
Allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through
Displays FX Fields
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY
PARAMETERS
Journal Entries
Enhanced View
Enable Configurable Journal Entry Report
Display Zero Tax Calcs on JE Output Reports
Display Zero Book Calcs on JE Output Reports
Rounding of Journal Entry Values
Journal Entry Supplemental Field Name #1-9
Lock JE Type field on J.E. Screen
Show Delete All button on Journal Entry Screen
Journal Entry Tag Group #1-9
Journal Entry Tag Group #1-9 Name
Journal Entry State Group Name #1-9
Journal Entry Rollup Set
Alternative Provision Calculations
Journal Entry State Group 1-9 State(s)
1st Scenario Calculation Posts
Alternative Provision Calculations
BBC Calculation Posts
2nd Scenario Calculation Posts
Bridge
Bridge into into Single Unit Level
Tag Letter Used for Bridge
Bridge into Consolidation Level
Bridge into Sub-Consolidation Level
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY
PARAMETERS
Activate Unit Mapping Screen
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)
RTP True-Up
Additional Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) Amount
Balance Sheet Only RTP True -Ups Posts
Deferred Only RTP True_Ups Posting
State RTP True-Ups Posting
Reference chart for the Reporting tab:
INTEGRATION
PARAMETERS
Return
Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax
Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax
Reverse Liability and Equity Sign?
Transfer Reporting Currency?
Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax -UK
Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - UK
Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - AU
Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - AU
Estimated Payments
Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency
INTEGRATION
PARAMETERS
1-4 Quarter Actual Months
1-4 Quarter Actual Data
1-4 Extension Actual Data
1-4 Quarter Forecast Data
1-4 Extension Forecast Data
1-4 Extension Actual Months
Federal (Q1-4) Payable Txn Type
Transfer Data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
Display Consolidated Members Code
State (Q1-4) Payable Txn Type
Clear All Previously Imported Categories and Numbers in Data Query
Data Query Tool
State Apportionment
Choose Data Source for Data Query Tool
Transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment
General Ledger Manager Enable Data Transfer from General Ledger Manager
DATA ENTRY
PARAMETERS
Reference chart for the Data Entry tab:
Display the 'Next Value' option when choosing a Subclass
Classes/Subclasses
Exclude Sub-Classes during Copy
DATA ENTRY
PARAMETERS
Temporary Difference
Enable Default Data Types
Use default types in Bridge Import
Allow Read/Write users to modify TD types?
Allow Read/Write users to modify NOL types?
Allow Read/Write users to modify ATTD types?
Allow Read/Write users to modify SAATD types?
Allow Read/Write users to modify SATTD types?
Lock beginning balances for Read/Write users?
Reference chart for the Global Access tab:
GLOBAL ACCESS
PARAMETERS
General
Assign Datasets to Users
Activate Questionnaire
Display User Status Report
Activate Manage Active Datasets
Add Review Levels
Set Forgot Password Email
Set Request New Access Email
Enable Filing Group Reports
Assign (non-interim) Datasets to Users
Display Prior Year Information
Hide RTP Columns
Add Comments to RTPs
Show Unit Details on Questionnaire Report
Show Post RTP Button
Show New Questionnaire Layout
Show Legacy Reports for Global Access
Post GAAP to STAT RTP
ADS COL Type
Display Dataset Types in Drop-down #1-20
Switch
Current/Non-Current Column
Displays new Column Corporate Ending Balances
Trial Balance Header
Upload PTBI Label
Change the column label name to Local Country entry
Information will display based on ITS Question 5. Answer field can be hidden, read only or editable.
Information will display based on ITS Question 6. Answer field can be hidden, read only or editable.
SKINS PARAMETERS
Q1 Forecast
Q1 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q3 Forecast
Q3 Actual
retprov
reporting
yeprov
retprovgs
yeprovgs
PTBI
PARAMETERS
Add Tag to PTBI Menu
Q1 Actual
D-Default Tag
E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import
M-Manual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q2 Forecast
reporting
Q3 Forecast
retprovgs
retprov
yeprovgs
yeprov
Perms
PARAMETERS
Add Tag to Perm Drop-down Menu
Q1 Actual
D-Default Tag
E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import
M-Manual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q2 Forecast
reporting
Q3 Forecast
retprovgs
retprov
yeprovgs
yeprov
Temps PARAMETERS
Add Tag to Temp Drop-down Menu
Q1 Forecast
Q1 Actual
D-Default Tag
E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import
M-Manual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Forecast
Q2 Actual
Q3 Forecast
Q3 Actual
retprov
reporting
retprovgs
yeprov
yeprovgs(gaap)
yeprovgs
yeprovgs(stat)
Payable
PARAMETERS
Add Tag to Payable Drop-down Menu
Q1 Actual
D-Default Tag
E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import
M-Manual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q2 Forecast
reporting
Q3 Forecast
retprovgs
retprov
yeprovgs
yeprov
Tax Adj
PARAMETERS
Add Tag to Tax Adjs Drop-down Menu D-Default Tag E-Offset Equity
G-Offset Goodwill
I-Import M-Manual
Q1 Actual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q2 Forecast
reporting
Q3 Forecast
retprovgs
retprov
yeprovgs
TBS
PARAMETERS
Add Tag to TAx Adjs Drop-down Menu
Q1 Actual
D-Default Tag
E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import
M-Manual
P-POSTEND R-RTP
Q2 Actual
Q1 Forecast
Q3 Actual
Q2 Forecast
Q3 Forecast
reporting
retprovgs
retprov
yeprovgs
yeprov
Reference Chart for the Admin tab:
ADMIN
PARAMETERS
User Options
Administer User Section Information
Set User Restrictions
Password Options
Other
Password Expiration Time
Minimum Digits in Password
Minimum Length of Password
Lockout Period after Failed Login
Maximum Failed Login Attempts Before Lockout
Passwords Kept in History
Make User Logins Not Case-Sensitive
Deferred Provision Only Data Entry
Track Log Messages
Allow Global Attachments
ADMIN
PARAMETERS
Browse and Update Attachment Button
Attachment Save As Button
Enable Database Analyzer
Enable Audit Trail when Running Reports
Hide Data Source for non-admin users
Disable Audit Trail for Numbers Import and Bridging
Show Unit Name Before Code
Modify Unit Codes
Hide Case Numbers in Manage Datasets
In Administration > System > Manage Restricted Features a parameter list is available that requires a password to access it. The password is typically not released to clients because it opens a page that lets you delete and modify system items that can corrupt the system.
Manage Restricted Features includes:
template.
534 : An Administrator can activate these parameters with the Import Category
Report[****]Settings: The settings are stored in order to generate reports.
Truncate Audit Trail option: Provides a way to delete the data that the system collects for the audit trail.
In Administration > System > Manage Restricted Features you can update the parameter list by importing them. You can import parameters using a system-defined Import Categories template.
You can obtain the Import Categories template by exporting the Categories template from
Administration.
To create a new or modified system parameter, complete the appropriate fields in the #CP# Parameters sheet of the Import Categories template.
The maximum number of characters for a system parameter value is 250.
EXPORT SYSTEM PARAMETERS
To export parameters for Restricted Features:
Select Administration, and then click Export Categories.
Type the File Name, to specify the export file.
Click Save.
Click Yes for Do you want to export Unit Components?
Click Yes for Do you want to export User Component information?
Click OK, when the export is complete.
Open the file and type the parameter in the tab #PD#.
IMPORT SYSTEM PARAMETERS
To import a parameter in Managed Restricted Features:
Select Administration, and then click Import Categories.
To specify the import file, type the File Name.
Choose the file name and then Open.
For Categories Imported Successfully, click OK.
The Import Log will appear for review.
If Errors exist, correct the #CP# Parameters sheet and re-import the file.
Warning: Some parameters ensure the proper functionality of the system. Do not manipulate a pre-loaded crucial parameter without understanding its purpose. If a crucial parameter is edited or deleted, it may
corrupt the software and the system may not run properly or at all. Parameters can only be deleted in
PARAMETER NAME
534 .
The parameter name is case-specific and must be entered exactly as it is given. Some of the available
system parameters 758 are contained in the reference section. For more information regarding parameters
and their functionality, contact your Client Manager or Support
PARAMETER VALUE
15.
The parameter value is the associated value for the specific Paramkey. There can be more than one Paramvalue and each may have a different purpose.
In Administration > System > Manage Rollups you can create multiple rollup sets of data. There are three types of rollup sets:
The Effective Rate rollup determines how data is rolled up and presented on the Effective Tax Rate
report.
The Deferred rollup determines how data is rolled up and presented on the Deferred Balances report.
The Trial Balance rollup determines how data is rolled up and presented on the Tax Basis Balance Sheet report.
Within each rollup set are rollup buckets that define how data should be tiered on reports. On reports, the rollups are sorted alphanumerically based on rollup bucket codes.
To import rollup information, complete the appropriate fields on the #CRU# Component Rollup Sets sheet in the Import Categories template.
COMPONENT ROLLUP SETS
Name each rollup set. Keep in mind that the name displays in the upper right corner of reports.
The code must start with R and can be any code from R10-R99 that is not being used to identify another rollup set.
For the rollup set, select whether this rollup is a 1: Deferred Rollup (DEF on the Import template), 2: Effective Rate Rollup (EFF on the Import template), or 3: Trial Balance Rollup (TB on the Import template).
On the Import template use the code CRS when creating a new component rollup set.
ROLLUPS
Name each rollup bucket. The name can be edited after it is created. The rollup name displays on reports.
The code 20 is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including
spaces, up to 60 characters.
The rollup name and code displays on reports.
On the Import template, use the code CR when creating a new rollup bucket.
ASSOCIATIONS
Each component that is in the categories displays in the Component column. Component types for
755 , Effective Tax Rates
756 differ.
To associate a component, select the item in the Association list. Available rollups that have been created for the rollup set displays in the drop-down list.
If a component is not associated with a rollup, it displays as part of an unassigned rollup on the reports. When new components are added in the system, they default to unassigned in all rollups.
On the Import template, use the code CRR when creating a new rollup association.
To Manage User Questions, you can type questions in the data entry field and then click Update. You must activate the following system parameters in Manage Restricted Features to use this feature.
SHOW_ADVANCEDQUESTIONNAIRE
SHOW_WIZARD
SHOW_NEWWIZARDSTATUS
In Administration > System > Plugin Reports you can create and manage plug-in reports. You must activate the SHOW_PLUGINDEV parameter to use the Plugin Reports. The parameter is activated by importing the Parameter, SHOW_PLUGINDEV with a paramvalue of 1 nto the system.
You can see all selected prompt options when a custom report is selected. You will see a default dataset 1 based on the selection in the Review & Edit.
The functionality expands the types of data that can be brought into a plug-in report. XSL style sheets can be applied to format the queried data and the results can be published in the Reports menu. Using SQL statements, Plugin Reports can query data stored in the application.
Select Make available as a custom report and the report will appear in Reporting. If this option is not marked, you can execute the query within the Plugin Reports page.
Select the report and then click Run Query.
QUERY DETAILS
Select Queries to view saved reports. Upon selection of a report, the other fields are automatically populated with the corresponding information for the saved report. You can create New, Import and Export queries.
For Queries, click New, Save, Cancel, Import or Export.
Click New to create a new query.
Click Save to save the query.
Click Cancel to cancel the query.
Click Import to import a query.
Click Export to export a query.
Note: When you Save a query, the report is saved and published. Once saved, the report can be edited by selecting it from the Queries drop-down list.
Type the Name.
Select the Style sheet file.
Click Browse to locate and upload the XSL style sheet for the report.
Click Save file to save, outside of the application, an already uploaded XSL style sheet being used. This is for editing or backup purposes.
Click Remove file to change the existing XSL style sheet to a new one. Once removed, a new file can be uploaded by clicking Browse.
Type the Description. This field is not required. It is to enter supplemental information about the report you are creating.
Select the Source.
Query
Stored Procedure
Select Options.
Select the Report Location.
Standard
Legacy
Select the Module.
Provision
Estimated Payments
Interim
Select the Menu Location (Report Type). You can select where in the reporting hierarchy the report will appear.
Unit
Filing Unit
Consolidated
Sub-consolidated
Select Sub Menu Location. You can select where in the reporting hierarchy the report will appear.
Federal
State
State Summary
Select Misc.
Make available as custom report.
Compare Datasets
Compare Report Level
Prompt for Rollup
Deferred
ETR
Trial Balance
Prompt for Class
Format results to standard XML.
Select SQL.
Click Run Query to run the query.
Select Result to review the data returned upon running the query.
Select Legend.
Notes:
You can write or copy and paste the SQL Statement for the corresponding report in the Query Details.
You can specify if a XML Source file is a query or stored procedure.
The text boxes are displayed to specify the stored procedure and report string variables.
You can add Dataset Comparison to a plug-in report with a second dataset choice option.
The functionality is available for Standard and Legacy Reporting.
To activate Legacy Reporting, in Administration, select Manage Configurations, Reporting, and select Yes to Show Legacy Reports.
QUERY DETAILS
In Administration > System > Journal Entry Summary you can create custom groupings for your journal entries.
Journal Entry Summary Code
Journal Entry Summary Name
To create a custom grouping for Journal Entries:
Type a user-defined Summary Code and Summary Name.
Note: The Journal Entry functionality requires an additional license 480 to use. If you are interested in this
functionality and have not yet seen a demo, please contact your Account or Client Manager to set up a
demo.
In Administration > Audit Trail you can find a history of data that was entered, adjusted, or deleted in the application.
Each entry is identified with a user name and given a time and date stamp.
The View By filtering option allows data to be scoped to a manageable output level.
The report generated presents the change that occurred and displays the original entry along with the changed entry. The report may be exported to Excel by right-clicking on the report and selecting Export to Excel.
Each change has the following columns of detail: Transaction Type, Component Type, Dataset Component Type Field, Unit Original Value, Unit Changed Value, State, User, Component Code, Tag/ Code, and Date.
Although it is not advised, the audit trail can be truncated
VIEW BY
USER
534 to clear historical data.
Defaults to <all> users, but any user can be selected from the drop-down list.
COMPONENT
Defaults to <all> components, but any component
DATASET
23 type can be selected from the drop-down list.
Defaults to <all> datasets, but any dataset can be selected from the drop-down list.
UNIT
Defaults to <all> units, but any unit can be selected from the drop-down list.
STATE
Defaults to <all> states, but any state can be selected from the drop-down list.
FROM
Defaults to the current date, but can be changed to any date by either entering a date or selecting one from the Calendar drop-down menu.
TO
Defaults to the current date, but can be changed to any date by either entering a date or selecting one from the Calendar drop-down menu.
View Numbers Data Source History
In Administration > Audit Trail > View Numbers Data Source History lets you to review the Audit Trail for balances imported into the Tax Provision application. In View Numbers Data Source History you will find rows of information that you can filter, sort, and export to Excel.
You can select one, all, or various filters to customize the view.
You can filter by Dataset, Component Type, Unit, User, To, From, and State.
To View Data Source History Numbers:
Select All or a specific Dataset.
Select All or a specific Component Type.
Select All or a specific Unit.
Select All or a specific User.
Select All or a specific State.
Select All or a specific To.
Select All or a specific From.
Click Go. All of the data saved for the Audit Trail appears in the page. The list appears in sections by Component Type.
View Numbers Data Source History
Notes:
One benefit of the Data Source History is the ability to filter. Utilize the smart filter by dragging column headers, such as Component Type, Unit, Change Type, Date, and Code to the row Drag a column header here to group by that column. Then, you can export the data to excel, if desired.
View Data Source History Numbers is not available for Read/Write users.
ADMINISTRATION - EXPORT TO EXCEL
You can select the Data Source for data entry such as a Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, Active Workpapers and Data Source Bridge Import.
Click the plus sign to expand the list for review.
Right mouse click and select Export to Excel.
Select the File name and then Save.
DATA ENTRY - EXPORT TO EXCEL
You can select the Data Source for data entry such as a Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, Active Workpapers and Data Source Bridge Import.
Double-click Data Source for a Component Code.
Right mouse click and select Export to Excel.
Select the File name and then Save.
Note: The data is saved in the same format as the filtered information. Upon opening the Excel file, you will see the data in a grid format that mirrors the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. If you choose not to filter, you may end up with a long list of items to sort through.
View Categories Data Source History
In Administration > Audit Trail > View Categories Data Source History lets you to review the Audit Trail for balances imported into the Tax Provision application. In View Categories Data Source History you will find rows of information that you can filter, sort, and export to Excel.
Each entry is identified by user and given a time and date stamp.
Although it is not advised, the categories audit trail can be truncated parameter that will clear historical data.
COMPONENT TYPE
534 by adding a system
Defaults to <all> components, but any component
USER
23 type can be selected from the drop-down list.
Defaults to <all> users, but any user can be selected from the drop-down list.
FROM
Defaults to the current date, but can be changed to any date by either entering a date or selecting the Calendar drop-down menu.
TO
Defaults to the current date, but can be changed to any date by either entering a date or selecting the Calendar drop-down menu.
VIEW BY
To view data for All, single, or multiple Component Types, Data Source, Change Type, Users, Date, and Code select the drop-down boxes and filter the data for that purpose.
You may also select From: and To: for the calendar to get specific dates to capture data.
Select Go, and a list of component types will display for all data that has been captured in the Audit Trail.
You may use the page arrows to page forward, back, to the beginning, and end of the list.
Select Help from the navigation bar to find the contact information for customer support, the help manual, and the About ONESOURCE Tax Provision page.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Select Contact Information to access the support site link, support email address and support call center number.
ONLINE HELP
Select Help Manual to open the help system.
CONTENTS TAB
Displays high-level topic areas. Click closed-book icons to see a list of more topics.
INDEX TAB
Shows all topics in alphabetical order. Look through the topics by typing the first letters of the word you are looking for.
SEARCH TAB
If you do not know the topic name, use the Search tab to search for topics. This finds topics containing the terms you type.
ABOUT ONESOURCE TAX PROVISION
Click About ONESOURCE Tax Provision to find the product version. The application version depends on your last upgrade of the application. Every new version of the application includes additional functionality, enhancements, and fixes. To better assist you, the support group may ask you to email the About page to them.
This section discusses the setup that is required for the integration of ONESOURCE Fileroom with ONESOURCE Tax Provision on the ONESOURCE platform.
Integration with ONESOURCE Fileroom
547
Adding Documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom
547
Integration with ONESOURCE Fileroom
For Hosted Clients who log in through the ONESOURCE platform, you can use one free drawer upon
activating the license 480 . You can utilize the ONESOURCE FileRoom to store and access all of your
documents. Attaching documents in the ONESOURCE FileRoom lets you open a document without having to open the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application to find or attach a document.
You can migrate documents stored in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision datasets to the ONESOURCE
FileRoom.
You can add a document at the dataset, unit, or component level.
Because the system indexes documents, you have quick access to documents when searching for them.
Notes:
Please contact the Tax Provision support team
15 to make this non-revocable choice.
When you license Global Access, you can store Global Access documents in the ONESOURCE FileRoom.
Adding Documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom
You can add documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom at three levels:
Dataset Level
Unit Level
Component Level
In the Tax Provision navigation bar, click Documents to open the ONESOURCE FileRoom application. When the Documents dialog box opens, you can select the required Document Criteria.
The system requires the following information:
Year
Period
Tax Type
Note: The system pre-populates the Description, and File Name when documents are added at the component level.
ONESOURCE FileRoom Setup Section
DRAWER
When you license the ONESOURCE FileRoom, all drawers are available in the Drawer drop-down list. Without a license, one free drawer is available.
To add a document:
Click Actions to open the Attachments dialog box.
Click Add Document. You can view all documents associated with the item.
Attachments Dialog Box
Note: If you continue to add documents at the lowest level (component level), then your Index Values will be pre-populated. The index values will be completed based on the level you are attaching a document.
Example: The index values below are automatically completed for the Dataset, Unit Code, Unit Name because the document is attached at the component level.
Add Document Dialog Box
You can find the status for all of your import and export files in Jobs within the Tax Provision Navigation Bar. The Jobs page lets you review the import/export log information and the status of your import/export request. The system notifies you when the process is complete.
Because the execution proceeds independently in the background, other processes may be started before other processes have finished. You can continue to work on tasks while the Dataset, Data Entry, and Category imports and exports continue to process.
Use Jobs to review the progress of your import and export actions. You can see all import and export requests and log files in this page. Sort and Filter the information in this page to find the jobs, easier. You can also drag columns to group the information in this page.
Jobs
You will see the following information for each job request.
Jobs Part 1
1 | Request ID - System Generated ID |
2 | Transfer - display nature of the request: import or export. |
3 | Transfer Type - display the transfer source type:
|
4 | Dataset Name - display dataset name to be user for target (import) or source (export). |
5 | Report Level - display one of the following levels: Unit, Subconsolidation, Consolidated if applicable. |
6 | Report Level Value - display value for the selected report level. |
You will see the following information for each job request.
Jobs Part 2
1 | Status - display one of the following options:
|
2 | Submitted - display date stamp when request has been submitted. All data is sorted by submitted date (the newest at the top) by default. |
3 | Completed - display date stamp when request has been completed. |
4 | Download - display icon for user to download or preview file (export, bridge preview) where applicable. |
5 | Log - display icon for user to download details for last import log. |
6 | Submitted By -display user id used for login to ONESOURCE platform. |
7 | Components - display components data entry page. |
VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (MY DATASETS)
The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last Spreadsheet Last Import (Dataset)
554 into the
dataset. The log provides the Target dataset name and the path of the Source filename that imported. The log provides each worksheet and the imported data status.
VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (BRIDGE)
The stored logs located in Jobs for the Provision and Estimated Payment datasets are from the last time the
Bridge Import 554 was imported to bridge the General Ledger data into the dataset. The log file has the start
time, the areas of data, and the finish time. To understand the amounts imported using the bridge mapping, review the Bridge Archives.
ONESOURCE STATE APPORTIONMENT LOGS
The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last transfer of the State Apportionment transfer into the dataset. The log provides the following information: Code, Description, File Name, Attached, and By.
ONESOURCE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS LOGS
The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last transfer of the Estimated Payments transfer into the dataset. The log provides the following information: Code, Description, File Name, Attached, and By.
VIEW REPORTING DATASET LOG
For Sequential datasets, the ending balances and rates in the first chronological dataset must agree with the opening balance and rates in the next chronological dataset. If there are differences in the test of information in the two datasets, they are listed in this log. The sequential dataset test can be overridden with a system
554. Contact your client manager or support
554
for more information.
VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (CATEGORIES)
The stored logs located in Jobs reflects the last time categories were imported into the application. To permanently store the information to a file, right-click the log and select Export to Microsoft Excel. Then, you can save and print the log file for reference.
Topics discussed in this section include importing categories, importing data using templates, bridging data from a trial balance extract, and transferring data using integration.
In My Datasets, you can import data using one or multiple worksheets for the following import options:
556
556
562
571
579
577
In Data Entry, you can import your data using one or multiple worksheets.
588
In Administration, you can import categories using one or multiple worksheets for the following import options:
589
To review the status of your import jobs, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.
Dataset Import Options
In My Datasets, you can perform a spreadsheet import, bridge import, or transfer data from other ONESOURCE applications. In the grid, you click to import, bridge, and transfer your data into a selected dataset for multiple units.
Note: To import data from ONESOURCE Income Tax, ONESOURCE Estimated Payments and
ONESOURCE State Apportionment, an administrator must activate the system parameters 758 . To locate
and activate the parameters select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration >
Return.
The Import Numbers spreadsheet lets you transfer information from the spreadsheet to the Dataset. There
are two formats available to import the dataset information: ONESOURCE Tax Provision 558 and Import
559.
Note: When you have a large amount of data to enter, update the import template and then import the
information. To create an import template, you can click and the Export Dataset which you can make selections to create the file.
594 dialog box opens in
Both formats let users with Read/Write access transfer data from an Excel spreadsheet to ONESOURCE Tax Provision.
The ONESOURCE Tax Provision format uses a template where data is divided into types of data on
separate worksheets.
The Import Rolling Pin format utilizes codes entered to identify the type of data on a row and column.
To Spreadsheet import data into a dataset:
Click for a selected dataset to see the Import options.
Select Spreadsheet Import (Dataset). The Run Spreadsheet Import dialog box opens.
CHOOSE FORMAT(S) AND FILE(S) TO POPULATE THE DATASET:
Select OTP Format, or import_rolling_pin.
Click Browse, to choose the file to open.
Select the import file.
The file name is user defined. You can create, name, and save the file using the Export feature.
Click Open and then Add.
Click Next.
Click IMPORT.
Click Refresh rpt data (optional).
When you refresh the report data, the information on the report is current.
To review the progress or log files for the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.
Spreadsheet Import
ONESOURCE Tax Provision Format
You can create a blank Import_Numbers spreadsheet (template), by selecting Export in My Datasets
594, or
Export the Data Entry 598 pages.
Import_Numbers templates cannot contain macros, custom formatting, or links to external workbooks.
If you import numbers with classes to the dataset, the value entered for tags is ignored.
If you import numbers to the dataset with tags, value for classes will be ignored.
The Excel workbook contains a group of worksheets. Each worksheet corresponds to a data entry page in a dataset.
Any data entered in the first two rows will be ignored by the program. Each worksheet of the Excel workbook reserves the first two rows for column headings. Column headings shaded in green signify the data required by the application.
The worksheet name after characters ## can be renamed. This name appears in the log file. See Jobs
551 for more information about the log file.
Do not modify the column order for the worksheet.
The cells for codes must have data, however, cells for balances can be empty. Empty cells are ignored. Entering a 0 (zero) overrides the amount.
If a duplicate row of data exists, the import will write over the initial row of data with the subsequent one.
Imports do not stop on a blank row. The information from every row of a template is imported into the system.
After the import is complete you will review the Import Log information in Jobs 551 to ensure that no
errors occurred to restrict data from being imported. There is a list of possible error codes causes available for reference.
775
and their
Each worksheet can be imported either on a separate basis or with other import spreadsheet worksheets.
DATASET IMPORT WORKSHEETS
The export functionality generates a file with multiple worksheets: #U# Unit, #UQ# Unit Questions
730 ,
423 , #UNOLTD# Unit NOL TDs-Tax Basis
167 , #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis
187 ,
#UATTD# U AfterTx TDs-Tax Basis
184 , #UTBBS# Unit Tax Basis BalSheet
201,
#ULB# Unit Liability Begin Bals
171 , #ULC# Unit Liability Changes, #UTDAM# U Temp Diff-Bk Tx Basis
196 ,
177 , #UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas
171 ,
164 , #DSFX# FX Rates, #S# States, #SPM# State Perm Mods
214 , #STD# St TD-
224, #SAATD# St AfterApp TD-Tax Bas
204, #SATTD# St AfterTax TD-Tax Bas
209, #STA# State
220 , #J# Jurisdictions
89, #USDSP# USDS Params, #UDSP# UDS Params, #DP# Dataset Params
673 , #JEGL# JE GL Calcs
730,
#COU_RATES# Country Rates (Hidden), #CUR_RATES# Currency Rates (Hidden), #S_RATES# State Rates (Hidden), #CTAA# Currency Translation Adj, #DSRF# Dataset RollFrwd, #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping
82, #PARTH# Flow-Through Header, #PARTD# Flow-Through Detail, #PARTTAG# Flow-Through Tags,
#TCM_IS# Tax Calcs Mapping IS, #TCM_BS# Tax Calcs Mapping BS, #ALTRATE# Alt Prov Rates, #ALT1#
Scenario 1 Adj, #ALT2# Scenario 2 Adj, and #UAPIC# APIC Pool Amounts
159 .
The Rolling Pin is a flexible general purpose macro which uses a wide range of spreadsheet formats. Before you import data, some general rolling pin formatting must occur. Once you identify the data in the file, then you can import that data into the dataset.
Use the Rolling Pin spreadsheet format to import data using the Spreadsheet Import (Dataset) 555 option.
You can import before the macro has been run by using the import_rolling_pin file format or after the macro using the ONESOURCE Tax Provision format.
The Rolling Pin macro is a flexible general purpose macro which:
Handles a wide range of spreadsheet formats.
Generates import_categories spreadsheets.
Generates import_numbers spreadsheets.
Is easily configurable.
ROLLING PIN INPUT:
Spreadsheet based provision processes often represent the current provision as follows:
XYZ Corp. | Unit A | Unit B | Unit C | Total |
Pre-Tax Inc. | 200 | 300 | 400 | 900 |
Perm 1: M&E | 10 | 20 | 30 | 60 |
Perm 2: Fines | 0 | 5 | 0 | 5 |
Temporary 1 | 50 | 0 | 30 | 80 |
Taxable Inc. | 260 | 325 | 460 | 1045 |
Tax Rate | 35% | 35% | 12% | N/A |
ROLLING PIN CHALLENGE:
The challenge is assigning the Rolling Pin rows and columns for the source spreadsheet.
From the entry example:
Some rows contain perms while others contain temps, tax rates, and so forth.
Some columns contain unit information while others contain totals, and comments,
At the intersection of a row with perms and a column with unit information is a useful value.
ROLLING PIN OUTPUT:
Most information can be imported by categories and numbers spreadsheets.
These spreadsheets must be arranged in specific ways.
You need separate sheets for perms, temps, and so forth.
The columns in each sheet have specific meanings.
The Rolling Pin must produce spreadsheets that can be imported directly into the system.
ROLLING PIN ANNOTATIONS AND MARKERS:
The Rolling Pin looks for special values in the spreadsheet for values to track what is in the rows/columns.
Consider the (simplified) example:
XYZ Corp. | Unit A | Unit B | Unit C | Total | #mark |
Pre-Tax Inc. | 200 | 300 | 400 | 900 | |
Perm 1: M&E | 10 | 20 | 30 | 60 | #perm |
Perm 2: Fines | 0 | 5 | 0 | 5 | #perm |
etc. | |||||
#mark | #unit | #unit | #unit |
The special values, or annotations, go in marker rows and columns.
Specify marker row with #mark in 1st column.
Specify marker column with #mark in 1st row.
The #unit annotations, indicate that there is unit information in columns 2, 3 and 4.
The #perm annotations indicate that rows 3 and 4 contain Permanent Differences values.
The Rolling Pin can process the sheet and use the annotations to produce an import_numbers #UP# spreadsheet.
The macro iterates through each row and column building the list of permanent difference amounts in the format required by the standard import_numbers #UP# sheet format.
ROLLING PIN CATEGORY CODES:
Unit code is read from the row annotated by #ucode.
Permanent code is read from the column annotated by #code.
The full set of annotations and markers that produce the import_categories #UPD# include:
#mark | |||||||
Unit A | Unit B | Unit C | |||||
A | B | C | Total | #ucode | |||
Pre-Tax Inc | 200 | 300 | 400 | 900 | |||
Perm 1 | M&E | 10 | 20 | 30 | 60 | #perm | |
Perm 2 | Fines | 0 | 5 | 0 | 5 | #perm | |
Temporary 1 | T1000 | 50 | 0 | 30 | 80 | ||
Taxable Inc. | 260 | 325 | 460 | 1,045 | |||
Tax Rate | 35% | 35% | 12% | N/A | |||
C.T.P. | 91 | 114 | 55 | 260 | |||
#mark | #code | #unit | #unit | #unit |
ROLLING PIN EXTRA FEATURES:
Flip the sign (+/-) of a row of values.
Add “–f” to the end of a marker that extracts numeric values in the opposite sign (converting 100 to - 100 and vice versa).
#ptbi-f.
#temp-do-f.
Flip the sign of a whole unit.
Use #unit-f instead of #unit.
You can transfer data for specified components using the bridge import process from two data sources.
The Bridge spreadsheet lets you transfer information from the General Ledger Extract to a selected Dataset. The extract relies on the bridge mapping rules for the transfer of the General Ledger data for various Data Entry pages.
You can transfer data from General Ledger Manager.
Notes:
A user must have access to the Bridge Import assigned by an Administrator.
In order to Bridge data into units, an administrator must assign the units to the user.
To Bridge Import data into a dataset:
Click for a dataset to see the Import options.
Select Bridge Import.
SET UP CONFIGURATIONS FOR DATASET
Select the Target Components to be updated.
Click All Component Types or specific components to update component data.
Bridge Import
Select Class and Subclass or Tag (depending on the Target Dataset type), Report Level and Unit Type Value (for Unit or Subconsolidation Report Levels only).
FOR CLASS/SUBCLASS DATASETS
Select Class. You can change default class value Bridge – GL Automation.
Select Subclass. You can change the Default - Default to a user defined subclass.
FOR TAG DATASETS
Select a Tag. You can change the default tag from I-Import. The tag that you choose is assigned to the data bridged into the application. Consider setting up a tag that easily identifies data that is imported with a bridge file.
REPORT LEVEL
The Report Level enables you to Bridge import data into a unit, sub-consolidation, or consolidated (all units).
Set up the following system parameters to limit the users ability to select units, sub-consolidations, and consolidations.
BRIDGE_ALLOW_UNIT_SELECT
BRIDGE_ALLOW_SUBCON_SELECT
BRIDGE_ALLOW_ALL_UNITS
To activate the system parameters for Bridge select Administration > System > Manage Configurations
Advanced Functionality > Bridge > select the Data Source.
SELECT BROWSE FILE OR UPLOAD FROM GENERAL LEDGER MANAGER.
To browse for the import file:
Choose the format(s) and file(s) of legacy data.
The extract file needs to be defined in a specific format.
There are two file formats - comma and tab delimited.
There are two data formats - 4 and 6 columns.
To open the file directory, click Browse.
Select the file(s) with General ledger extract file.
Click Open and then Add.
To import additional files click Browse, choose a file and then Add.
Click Preview Bridge Import to view the bridge mapping.
Click Submit to update Tax Provision data entry pages.
Click Start Over to cancel the bridge import.
To Upload Data from General Ledger Manager:
Choose the Master Trial Balance Year and Master Trial Balance.
Select Preview Bridge Import to view the bridge mapping.
Select Submit to update Tax Provision.
Click Start Over to cancel the bridge import.
To activate the system parameters for General Ledger Manager as a data source select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > General Ledger Manager > Enable Data Transfer from General Ledger Manager.
Submit Update Tax Provision.
A message appears All report data will be refreshed automatically. Are you sure you want to update Tax Provision?
Click Cancel to cancel the update.
Click OK to update the Tax Provision.
To review the progress of the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.
PREVIEW BRIDGE IMPORT AND ONESOURCE BRIDGE LOGS
You can choose Preview Bridge Import to view Bridge Mapping, Missing Sublines, Missing Bridge Assignment, and Missing Units. Component types include PTBI (Local), PTBI (Reporting), Tax Accounts (Activity), Book Trial Balances (Activity), Perm Diffs – Tax Basis (Activity), Perm Diffs – Book/Tax Basis (Activity), Temp Diffs – Tax Basis (Activity), Temp Diffs – Book/Tax Basis (Activity) and Temp Diffs – Tax Basis (Bal Sheet Only).
The Bridge Import data can be reviewed in Jobs 551 . Jobs also provides the bridge import log status.
When the data source is General Ledger Manager, the beginning and ending balances are hyperlinked to General Ledger Manager. When a hyperlink is selected, General Ledger Manager opens and you can access the supporting details for the selected amount.
The bridge import of the general ledger extract file occurs in the Bridge Import page for Import in the My Datasets area.
Using the bridge functionality can help build an audit trail because it represents the book general ledger data on an account-by-account basis, as well as the tax treatment of that account.
Information that is bridged into the application can be assigned a Tag letter or Classes and Subclasses to identify the source of the data as being bridged from the general ledger information. This allows you to segregate bridged data from amounts that were manually entered or populated by the Import Spreadsheet template in the data review screens and run reports based on the received data for a specific class or class group.
The bridge relies on either the SQL Server utility program “BCP” or the Oracle utility “SqlLdr” to load the general ledger extract file into a staging area database table. This area is available for review of all imported information before updates are made to calculations. The most common problem encountered when using the Bridge is that the BCP or SqlLdr utilities are not installed on the user’s computer. Verify the proper utility is installed before proceeding with the Bridge process.
The database operating server (Oracle or SQL) needs to be known and identified when bridging.
The extracted file 566 from General Ledger can have four or six columns of data and be either a comma
or tab delimited file type.
Note: When using Bridge Import to populate data entry and reporting, you must map the components, PTBI, Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences, and Trial Balances, in Administration. For more
information, refer to the Unit Mapping 449 section.
The file extracted from the General Ledger system can either have 4 columns of data or 6 columns of data. You can format the file as tab delimited or comma separated.
CONSIDER THE FOLLOWING RULES REGARDING THE FILE:
In an Excel spreadsheet file, the numbers are surrounded by quotes. If commas are within the quotes, they are not field delimiters. SqlLdr respects the Excel convention, but BCP will not.
The application does not accept parentheses as notation for negative values. Ensure that the extract contains minus signs (-) at the beginning of negative numbers. Example: (859,621) should be shown as -859621 in the extract file.
When the file reaches a blank line the application considers that the end of the import. If there is more information found after the blank line, it will not be imported. A blank line at the end of an import file may cause the import to fail.
There should not be any commas used as separators in large numbers. This can throw off the import file or cause information to be rejected. Example: 2,598,758 should be shown as 2598758 in the extract file.
COLUMN DEFINITIONS - 4 OR 6 COLUMN FORMAT
Unit Code: The unit code to which the GL Account Code corresponds. This code system.
417 must be in the
Cost Center Code (6 column format only): User-defined code associated with a level of information found in the general ledger system. If not tracking beyond the Unit level, this column should simply have a wild card (*) to hold its place.
User Specific Code (6 column format only): A further level of detail based on a user-defined code. As with the cost center code, use a wild card (*) as a placeholder if this column is not in use.
General Ledger Account Code: The actual book code kept in the general ledger system. When bridge mappings are created, this code is assigned to a component code.
Beginning Balances: The beginning balances within the general ledger system. If you are extracting the income statement items, this column may be populated with all zero (0) balances. However, the column must still be in the extract file.
Note: These amounts (in the Bridge Import file) will not write over the beginning balances in the application. They are used to calculate the changes in temporary differences.
Ending Balance: This is the ending balance as found in the general ledger system.
EXAMPLE OF A 4 COLUMN FILE
EXAMPLE OF A 6 COLUMN FILE
ONESOURCE Import from Other Applications
If you currently use other ONESOURCE Applications, you may transfer data to ONESOURCE Tax Provision directly from the following products:
ONESOURCE Income Tax
ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
ONESOURCE State Apportionment
If an application is not available in My Datasets, you must activate the parameter.
Note: To import data from ONESOURCE Income Tax, ONESOURCE Estimated Payments and
ONESOURCE State Apportionment, an administrator must activate the system parameters 758 . To activate
the parameters select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Return.
In the Return tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for Tax.
Enable Data Transfer from ONESOURCE Income Tax.
In the Estimated Payments tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for Estimated Payments.
Transfer data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments.
In the State Apportionment tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for State Apportionment.
Transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment.
Click Reload System Configurations.
Only users with assigned permissions can access the ONESOURCE applications in the data transfer list.
The worksheet has a common list of action items shared by the applications. Select the ONESOURCE application from My Datasets, Import, and the worksheet appears.
Integration - Return Worksheet
RETRIEVE DATA
To retrieve data from the application select items from the drop-down lists. For example, the Target Dataset and Year.
Click Retrieve Data.
Then, select the type of data to retrieve; the worksheet is populated with data from the application.
The types of data to retrieve differ from one application to another. Additional tabs may be created within the worksheet depending on the data transferred.
Types of Data to Retrieve
Return Worksheet
Retrieves the State Rates.
Retrieves the Income Tax Data.
Estimated Payments Worksheet
Retrieves the State Payments.
Retrieves the Federal Payments.
Retrieves the Federal and State Payments.
State Apportionment Worksheet
Retrieves the State Apportionment.
POPULATE DATA
Review the data on the worksheet that transferred from the application for accuracy.
Update the data on the worksheet, if needed.
If errors occur, they appear on the last column of the worksheet.
Click Populate Data to Provision to transfer the data on the worksheet to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Data entry pages.
The data transfers to the Target Dataset selected.
See Jobs 551 to see the staus of the transfer.
NEW
Click New to create a new worksheet within the workbook.
SAVE
Click Save to save the current worksheet to the local hard drive.
Click Print to send the current worksheet to the printer.
PRINT PREVIEW
Click Print Preview to review the current worksheet before printing.
CUT
Click Cut to cut selected data within the worksheet.
Data within the green cells can be updated.
COPY
Click Copy to copy selected data within the worksheet.
Data within the green cells can be updated.
PASTE
Click Paste to paste selected data within the worksheet.
Data within the green cells can be updated.
Transferring Data between ONESOURCE Income Tax return and ONESOURCE Tax Provision
Integration allows you to send and receive data between the ONESOURCE Tax Provision and ONESOURCE Income Tax systems at the appropriate times of the year. This section describes the transfer process when sending data from the income tax system to the provision application and vice versa.
To transfer data to the ONESOURCE Income Tax application, you need to assign the dataset to transfer.
To transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax select Administration > System > Manage Configurations
> Integration > Return > Select Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax > Yes and then select the dataset from the drop-down list.
Click Reload System Configuration.
To transfer data from the ONESOURCE Income Tax select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Return > Enable Data Transfer data from ONESOURCE Income Tax > Yes.
Click Reload System Configurations.
RETURN TO TAX PROVISION OVERVIEW
To complete the Return to Provision transfer process from the ONESOURCE Income Tax application, you can create an empty dataset or use an existing dataset for each year. This dataset holds the data that is transferred from the Income Tax application to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. Previously, you had to adjust the provision data for Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups manually. The enhanced integration between the two applications allows you to update the provision data by transferring the income tax data from the return and posting the RTP true-ups. To post the RTP adjustments, you must relate the Tax Return Dataset created to the same or previous period RTP Provision Dataset, as well as, the same or future period RTP Target Dataset in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision system’s Dataset area.
Task / Steps:
Create a Return Dataset (for a Return to Provision Transfer) /Creating a Dataset.
Relate the Return Dataset (to the Final Provision and Current Provision) /Setting Up Data Relations.
Create a State Tax Rate Dataset (New Year Provision, Transfer State Rates) / Populate State Rates Option.
Return Worksheet /Return Worksheet.
Post Return To Provision /Posting the Return to Provision (RTP). You will find this option in Return Datasets only.
ACCESSING THE RETURN WORKSHEET
Select My Datasets and then Import.
Select ONESOURCE Income Tax. The Return Worksheet opens.
The Return Worksheet is a staging area for the ONESOURCE Income Tax data.
The return worksheet will have separate tabs for the transferred data.
Within the return worksheet, you can update the adjustment type and reclass data. This is the data highlighted in green.
Verify that the Return Dataset is correct.
The return dataset is a dataset specifically created for entering return data.
The return dataset is populated with the data transferred from ONESOURCE Income Tax.
Review the Year.
The year can be changed if needed.
Choose a Source Dataset from the list.
If the return dataset uses classes, the default source value for the class is IncTax – ONESOURCE Income Tax.
If the return dataset uses tags, the default source value for the tag is A.
Select the Mapset.
Mapsets are created on the ONESOURCE platform.
Select Menu and then Mapping to map ONESOURCE Income Tax to ONESOURCE Tax Provision.
Select Help for additional assistance with mapping ONESOURCE applications.
Review the Related Provision Dataset and verify that it’s the dataset you want to compare to the return data.
Dataset relations are set up in Administration within Manage Datasets in the Dataset Relations tab.
Check that the following fields are correct:
Verify Return Dataset.
Year.
Source from the drop-down list.
Mapset.
Related Provision Dataset.
Click Retrieve Return Data.
Select Populate State Rates or Populate Income Tax Data.
Click Populate Data to Provision.
Select Jobs to verify status of the transfer.
Review the Return Dataset.
Review the Reports.
You can review the results of the transfer in Jobs
551 .
What Transfers to the Return Worksheet
TRANSFERRED ITEMS
Temp Diffs - Temporary Differences transferred.
Perm Diffs - Permanent Differences transferred.
PTBI - The PreTax Book Income transferred is calculated in the ONESOURCE Income Tax program.
The PTBI balance is presented after Reclass.
You cannot verify the PTBI calculation in ONESOURCE Income Tax.
Federal Tax Adjustments - Federal Tax Adjustment transferred.
After Tax Temp Diffs - After Tax Temporary Differences transferred.
NOL Temp Diffs - NOL Temporary Differences transferred.
State Tax Adjustments - State Tax rates transferred.
Grand Total-Total is available for all columns that have balances.
Within the Return Worksheet, you can update the data in the range of the cells highlighted in green. However, the data in the range of cells highlighted in yellow are Read Only. Review the cells highlighted in red, to determine the necessary corrections; then, transfer the data to update the worksheet.
COLUMNS
Units (PTBI) PTBI totals
State Tab 5 Columns
Code Action
Federal NOL Utilized Creates a NOL Temp Diff.
Federal Charitable Contribution Limit Utilized.
Create a Temporary Adjustment.
Federal Capital Loss Limit Utilized Creates a Temporary Adjustment.
AMT Credit Utilized Creates a Temporary Adjustment.
Foreign Tax Credit Utilized Creates ATTD.
Foreign Tax Credits Utilized Creates ATTD.
Federal Tax Expense Federal Tax Adjustment.
State Tax Expense State Tax Adjustment.
WORKSHEET TABS
Several tabs appear at the bottom of the Return Worksheet after the transfer ONESOURCE Income Tax data. These items in ONESOURCE Income Tax will not have codes associated with them because they are generated by the application. In ONESOURCE Tax Provision, you may have already defined codes for this type of data with the exception of Federal Tax Expense and State Tax Expense. The Return Worksheet can have various tabs available depending on the data elements that are transferred. The Temps, Perms, and PTBI tabs are available upon mapping and transferring the temporary and permanent differences. The “other” tabs are available as a result of mapping the N/A data elements within the adjustment mapping area. You may need to create adjustments within the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Administration area in order to complete the mappings for the N/A adjustments. Or, ignore the N/A items if not in a NOL position, have Charitable Loss Carry overs or AMT Carry overs or FTC and so forth.
FEDERAL TAX EXPENSE AND STATE TAX EXPENSE (SEPARATE AND COMBINED)
Federal Tax Expense and State Tax Expense are mapped if you do not transfer all the other data or have zero tax rates because transferring both will duplicate your tax expense in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. If you map PTBI, perms adjustments, and temp adjustments, the application creates a taxable income times a rate equal that should be equal to the tax expense.The application sends the amounts if you want to send the total expense and do a topside RTP comparison. For example, if you do not need to know how the state of Illinois is computed, and you want to compare the $5,000 of tax expense on the return to the calculated
$4,800 tax expense on the Provision, map the State Tax Expense to a State Tax Adjustment code and put a zero state tax rate in the Unit State Details so the system will not calculate tax in the Return Dataset.
NON-CONSOLIDATED BASIS
Pre-tax book income
Book-to-tax adjustments
State tax expense for separate company filings
CONSOLIDATED BASIS - FEDERAL
Federal NOL Utilized
Federal Charitable Contribution Limit Utilized
Federal Capital Loss Limit Utilized
AMT Credit Utilized
Foreign Tax Credit Utilized
Federal Tax Credits Utilized
Federal Tax Expense
CONSOLIDATED BASIS - STATE
State Tax Expense for consolidated states filings
Multipliers combine or break out the state tax expense by entity
State Apportionment
State Rates
Note: State Modifications are not available to transfer.
Transfer Data to ONESOURCE Income Tax
TRANSFERRING PROVISION DATA TO THE RETURN
In the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application, assign the parameter with the correct Provision Dataset.
Assign the dataset with the amounts that you want transferred to start the new ONESOURCE Income Tax return.
In the ONESOURCE Income Tax software, go to Tools > Binder Identification.
Select the Year and Binders.
TRANSFERRING THE RTP
In the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application, create a new, Return, Dataset.
Relate it to the Provision RTP and Provision Target.
In ONESOURCE Income Tax, click Tools > Binder Identification.
Select the Year and Binders.
Click Tools > Options > Enterprise Options.
Select the Year from the drop-down list.
Select Federal and State as Final.
The State Rates option allows the data transfer of both the State Apportionment Rates and the State Tax Rates.
The Apportionment Rates transfer from the State Tax Returns. The transferred data can be confirmed
by reviewing the TI Review Workpapers in ONESOURCE Income Tax. The consolidated apportionment transfers from the consolidation return and the non-consolidated apportionment transfers from the separate state return.
Note: Refer to the ONESOURCE Income Tax User Guide for more information about State Allocation & Apportionment and State TI Workpapers.
The State Tax Rates transfer from the State Tax Rate Chart. The Chart is regularly maintained and has the highest rates the states require. The State Tax Rates can be attained for any year desired using the transfer. On the Return Worksheet, define the Year for the year of the desired State Tax Rates. The year of the dataset or the mapset does not matter in this case. A “dummy” dataset must be created and related for this transfer. This will be the “Related Provision Dataset” in order to transfer the State Tax Rates for the current year.
ONESOURCE State Apportionment
TRANSFERRING DATA FROM ONESOURCE STATE APPORTIONMENT
Integration allows you to transfer state apportionment and tax rates from ONESOURCE State Apportionment to ONESOURCE Tax Provision. This section describes the transfer process when sending data from the apportionment application to the tax provision application. Previously, you had to adjust your tax provision data for State Apportionment manually. The integration between the two applications allows you to update the tax provision data by transferring the State Apportionment and State Rates. You can review the "Audit Trail" and determine the information that is transferred, when the data transferred, and by whom.
To transfer data from the ONESOURCE State Apportionment application, you need to activate the transfer parameter.
To activate the parameter to transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > State Apportionment > Enable Data Transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment > Yes.
Click Reload System Configurations.
State Apportionment Worksheet
The State Apportionment Worksheet is a staging area for the ONESOURCE State Apportionment data. Once you define the State Apportionment Worksheet and transfer the data, the State Apportionment Worksheet acquires several tabs, each which reflects the data that transferred.
ACCESSING THE STATE APPORTIONMENT WORKSHEET
Select My Datasets and then Import.
Click ONESOURCE State Apportionment. The State Apportionment Worksheet opens.
Verify that the Target Dataset is correct.
The transferred data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment populates the State Unit Details/ Rates page.
Review the Year.
The year can be changed if needed.
The application populates the available list of scenarios from ONESOURCE State Apportionment based on the year.
Select a Scenario from the list.
The scenario will have the same name or year as the Target dataset.
The scenario represents a set of data within ONESOURCE State Apportionment.
If the drop-down list is empty:
The selected Year does not have any ONESOURCE State Apportionment Data.
You are not connected or have access to ONESOURCE State Apportionment.
Select the Apportionment Type from the available options. Select Separate, Group, or Separate/ Group.
The "Separate" apportionment type allows you to transfer state apportionment rates for entities filing separate returns.
The "Group" apportionment type allows you to transfer state apportionment rates for entities filing combined or consolidated returns.
Click Use Entity Map and then select the map.
The Use Entity Map is optional. Data transfers without selecting an entity map. When ONESOURCE State Apportionment entities and ONESOURCE Tax Provision units use the same codes an entity map is not required to transfer data.
The Entity Map maps the ONESOURCE State Apportionment entities to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision units.
You create maps in the ONESOURCE platform.
Click Retrieve State Apportionment.
Note: All available scenarios from ONESOURCE State Apportionment appear in the list.
What Transfers to the State Apportionment Worksheet
TRANSFERRED ITEMS
The State Apportionment data received includes:
CHECKBOX
The selected rows populate ONESOURCE Tax Provision from the worksheet. To select all rows, select the box in the header row.
UNIT CODE
The unit code in Tax Provision will equal the Entity number in State Apportionment. If you do not use an "Entity Map", the unit code defaults to the entity code in ONESOURCE State Apportionment.
STATE CODE
The state codes are created using the codes within the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application and can be greater than 2 digits.
You can review the state codes in Administration, within the Manage States folder.
The default state codes in ONESOURCE State Apportionment are 2 digit postal codes.
The State code for ONESOURCE State Apportionment and ONESOURCE Tax Provision must be the same; otherwise a validation error occurs during the data transfer.
STATE TAX RATE
The state tax rate is in percentage format and up to 4 decimal places.
END STATE DEFERRED TAX RATE
The state deferred tax rate is in percentage format and up to 4 decimal places.
STATE APPORTIONMENT RATE/END STATE APPORTIONMENT RATE
The state apportionment rate is in percentage format and up to 4 decimal places.
A hyperlink is available for viewing the state apportionment details. Click the hyperlink and the ONESOURCE "State Apportionment Summary Report" page appears.
You can review the apportionment rate calculation.
Update the information in ONESOURCE State Apportionment, as needed.
If an "Entity Map" is not selected for the transfer, hyperlinks are not available.
APPORTIONMENT TYPE
The apportionment types include Separate, Group, Separate & Group.
ENTITY MAP
You can select a unit map that is set up in the ONESOURCE platform.
Transferring Data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment
Select My Datasets and then Import.
Select ONESOURCE State Apportionment. The State Apportionment Worksheet opens.
Review the following information for accuracy:
Target Dataset
Year
Scenario
Apportionment Type
Use Entity Map
Click Retrieve State Apportionment.
If data being transferred is rejected by the worksheet a validation error appears for rows that rejected the data.
Note: You cannot change any data within ONESOURCE State Apportionment worksheet.
Select Populate Data to Provision to transfer the data from the worksheet to the dataset.
The status bar shows the transfer is in progress.
Open the State Apportionment Dataset, select the States, and review the transferred data.
You can review the results of the transfer in Jobs
551 .
TRANSFERRING DATA FROM ONESOURCE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS
Enhanced Integration enables you to send and receive data between the ONESOURCE Tax Provision and ONESOURCE Estimated Payments applications at the appropriate times of the year. This section describes the transfer process when sending data from the Estimated Payments application to the Tax Provision application.
To receive data from the Estimated Payments application, you will need to activate the parameters.
To activate the parameters to transfer data from Estimated Payments select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Transfer data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments > Yes.
Select Federal and/or State, Quarter and/or EXT to define the Payable Txn Type that appears in Payables within Data entry after the transfer.
Click Yes for Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency.
Select the Actual and/or Forecast Datasets.
Select the Actual Months.
ESTIMATED PAYMENTS OVERVIEW
To complete the Estimated Payments transfer process from the ONESOURCE Income Tax application, you can create an empty dataset each year or utilize an existing one. A dataset holds the data that is transferred from the Income Tax application to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. The integration between the two applications enables you to update the Tax Provision data by transferring the income tax data from the return and to Estimated Payments.
Task / Steps:
Create a new dataset for Estimated Payments or utilize an existing dataset.
Relate the Estimated Payments.
The Estimated Payments Worksheet is a staging area for the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments data. Once you define the Estimated Payments Worksheet and transfer the data, the Estimated Payments Worksheet acquires several tabs, each tab reflects the data that transferred.
You can transfer deductible, state tax balances from ONESOURCE Tax Provision to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments.
Using the ONESOURCE Tax Provision fiscal year you can designate the voucher year in ONESOURCE Estimated Payments, if that year is different from the dataset year.
You can choose Consolidated, Separate, or Both as a Filing Type. If you select Consolidated, a Target Unit list appears for you to select the Target Unit.
When the Target Dataset type is a Tag dataset, a Tag list is available for you to select a Tag as your data source.
To show the Consolidated Members Code in the Estimated Payments Worksheet, you must activate a new parameter called Display Consolidated Members Code.
Note that to make the members codes for the consolidated group appear in column B in the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet, you must activate the parameter called Display Consolidated Members Codes. The Display Consolidated Members Codes parameter appears in the Integration tab of Administration- Manage Configurations, in the Estimated Payments secondary tab.
The Estimated Payment Worksheet allows you to transfer the estimated payment balances for selected Quarters by Jurisdiction and to update the taxes payable.
ACCESSING THE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS WORKSHEET
Select My Datasets and then Import.
Click ONESOURCE Estimated Payments. The Estimated Payments Worksheet opens.
Verify that the Target Dataset is correct.
The transferred value from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments appears on the Federal/State Payable page within the Target Dataset.
Review the Year.
The year can be changed if needed.
Click Quarter or Extension.
The application retrieves data based on the year selected.
You must select at least one quarter or extension in order to transfer the data.
Select the Filing Type.
Select Consolidated, Separate or Both.
For Separate filing type, click Use Entity Map and then choose a map.
An Entity Map is created between ONESOURCE Estimated Payments entities and ONESOURCE Tax Provision units by and administrator on ONESOURCE platform.
If you apply the same code for entities in the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments and units in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision, you don’t need to apply an entity map.
If the Target Dataset is a tag dataset, choose a Tag.
For Consolidated or Both filing types, choose a Target Unit.
The Target Unit selected will be the Unit in ONESOURCE Tax Provision that the information for the consolidated members get transferred into from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments.
Notes:
At least one Quarter or Extension must be selected in order for the data to transfer.
The Use Entity Map is not available prior to the 2013 release. The Unit number and Unit name in Tax Provision must match the Entity number, and Entity name in Estimated Payments and then the mapping is automatic.
When you select Retrieve State Payments, all state data will transfer from Estimated Payments to Tax Provision.
The States must be activated before you populate the data to the Tax Provision for States.
Click Retrieve Data and select one of the options:
Retrieve State Payments.
Retrieve Federal Payments.
Retrieve State and Federal Payments.
ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet - Filing Type, Tag and Target Unit
What Transfers to the Estimated Payments Worksheet
TRANSFERRED ITEMS
The Estimated Payment data received includes:
COMPANY
The company name transfers.
MEMBERS
The members of the consolidated group transfer as a Code or Name depending on the parameter selected in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Display Consolidated Members Code.
UNIT CODE
The unit code in Tax Provision will equal the Entity number in Estimated Payments.
FISCAL TYPE
The filing type transfers.
FISCAL YEAR
The Tax Year transfers.
JURISDICTION
Fed.
2 digit postal code.
TXN TYPE
Value for Transaction type will be populated in the worksheet based on the selection in Administration, within the Manage Configurations folder.
Example:
For Fed: 1ES-F, 2ES-F, 3ES-F, 4ES-F.
For States: 1ES, 2ES, 3ES, 4ES.
AMOUNT (USD)
Transfers only in US whole dollars and no cents.
TXN DATE
The actual transfer date is used.
FX RATE
The rate will pre-populate with the number 1.
DESCRIPTION
The Estimated Payment description is required.
TARGET DATASET WITH CLASSES
The application will utilize the class value and ignore the tag value.
TARGET DATASET WITH TAGS
The tag selected in the Tag list populates the worksheet cells.
CLASS
The class is auto-generated as EstimPay.
SUBCLASS
The subclass is auto-generated as Default.
To transfer data from the Estimated Payments Worksheet to data entry:
Select Populate Data to Tax Provision.
You can review the results of the transfer in Jobs
551 .
Within the Estimated Payments Worksheet, the data in the range of cells highlighted in green can be updated. However, the data in the range of cells highlighted in yellow is Read Only. After you transfer the data from the worksheet to ONESOURCE Tax Provision, review the cells highlighted in red and make the necessary corrections, then transfer the data to update the worksheet.
Note: The data transferred writes over the data previously transferred data.
Transferring Data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
Select My Datasets and then Import.
Select ONESOURCE Estimated Payments. The Estimated Payments Worksheet opens.
Check that the following fields are correct:
Target Dataset
Est Year
Quarter or Extension, for example Q1 or EXT1.
Filing Unit
Use Entity Map
Tag (for Tag datasets)
Target Unit
Click the Retrieve Data icon.
Click Retrieve State Payments, Retrieve Federal Payments, or Retrieve Federal and State Payments.
Select Populate Data to Provision.
The status bar shows the transfer is in progress.
Review the Estimated Payments Dataset.
The Estimated Worksheet is saved in Global Attachments, within the System folder in Administration.
To review the Estimated Payment log file, select Jobs
551.
To verify the transferred data, select Data Entry and verify the Target Dataset data.
Select Federal or State Payable and review the transferred data.
A unique Data Source icon appears for the Unit Payable Data Review and Audit Trail data that populated from Estimated Payments.
Notes:
When data is transferred multiple times and has all the same attributes the transferred data will write over the existing data. If you change one of the attributes then, a new line item will appear when you populate the Payable Entry screen. For example, if you select a different Txn Type for the additional data transfer a new line appears for the Unit Payable Data Review with that Txn Type along with that Amount.
The data transferred will include Franchise Tax as part of the payable amount.
Transfer Data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments
To transfer data to the Estimated Payments for the tax liability calculations, you will need to set up the several parameters.
To activate the parameters to transfer data from Estimated Payments select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Transfer data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments > Yes.
Select Yes, for Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency.
Select the Datasets that represent actual or forecast data in ONESOURCE Estimated Payments.
The data transferred includes the Actual Data for the Quarter and Extension selected.
5. Select the Actual Months.
Select the number of months that represent the Actual Data.
The "Actual Month" field is required when you select dataset value for the selected quarter.
Select the dataset as "actual data representing a minimum of 1 month, or maximum up to 12."
Select the Datasets for the Forecast Data. The Forecast dataset transfers 12 months of data, only.
Notes:
Estimated Payments will annualize the transferred actual data; therefore, Actual Months must be selected for the Actual Datasets.
You can transfer 12 months of data using a Provision, Interim Actual, or Interim Forecast dataset. You are not required to have "months" for the datasets selected in the Forecast Data column because these datasets are presumed to include 12 months of data.
The data transferred includes the Total Deductible State Tax (shown on the Tax Provision report) as a permanent difference in Estimated Payments, with the system-generated code SYS_GEN_PD_DST and description of Deductible State Tax from Tax Provision Report.
In Review & Edit, you can use a single template to import data into a specified component's Data Entry page. When you use the import option in an Data Entry page, the system can import data for just that page. This lets you import a specific template into a component's page. For example, you select the Temp Diff Tax
_Basis component and use the #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis 187 worksheet to import data to that page.
Note: To activate the units, you can Import the #U# Unit worksheet template with a components template.
Click in a Data Entry page and the Import dialog opens. By default, the Base Dataset is selected from My Datasets.
Click the folder and specify the file in which to import.
Click to submit the import request.
Data Entry Import
Select Jobs in the navigation bar to review the import log information and the status of your import request.
Note: An administrator must assign permissions for users in order to import data into Data Entry pages.
In Administration > Import Categories you can import category items using the Import Categories
template 591. The template is an Excel workbook containing multiple worksheets. Each sheet corresponds to
a page found in Administration. Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. After the
template is imported, review Jobs
775 that occurred during import.
Category items can be imported when data is populated in the Import Categories template 589. The template
is an Excel workbook containing multiple sheets. Each sheet corresponds to a page found in the Administration area. Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. After the template is
imported, you can review the status in Jobs for any errors 589 that occurred during import.
You can import Dataset Categories using the category spreadsheet.
To import a new dataset, complete the appropriate fields on the #CD# Datasets worksheet in the import categories template.
To import categories:
Select Administration and then Import Categories. Import Categories
Specify the Categories Import File and then click Open.
For Categories Imported Successfully, click OK.
To review the progress of the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.
To create a template for entering data and importing into the system, you can export categories by selecting
Administration > Export Categories.
The Import Categories template contains the following sheets:
#ADS# Archive Datasets, #ARDS# Archive Reporting Datasets, #CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs, #CD# Datasets, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CDSR# Dataset Relations, #CRD# Reporting Datasets, #COU# Countries, #CUR# Currencies, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CIFTD# Incl. for Temp Diffs, #CLRF# Liab RollForwards, #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs, #CNRF# NOL RollForwards, #CP# Parameters, #CPRU# ParamsReportsUser, #CPD# Permanent Differences,#CPTBI# PTBI Codes, #CPYBK# Payable Buckets, #CPYRL# Payable Rollups, #CPYTP# Payable Txn Types, #CRU# Component Rollup Sets, #CS# States, #CSAATD# St AfterApp TempDiff, #CSATTD# St AfterTax TempDiff, #CSC# SubConsolidations, #CSTA# St Tax Adjs, #CTA# Tax Adjustments, #CTBL# Trial Balance Lines, #CTBSL# Trial Balance SubLines, #CTD# Temporary Differences, #CTDP# Temp Diff Postings, #CU# Units, #CUC# User Components, #CUSR# Users, #CUSRGP# Group Permissions, Users#ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types, #ICOTRTT# Inter Co Trtmnt Types, #CUNC# Unit Components, and #CUNCM# Unit Component Multiple,#JEN# Journal Entry Numbers.
Warning: Do not modify the portion of the sheet names between the # signs. If you do so, the sheet will be ignored upon import.
To use the templates you must keep the columns in the same order and begin entry on the third row. Support documentation can be included in a file and does not interrupt the import process, as long as sheet names do not have a defined template name.
If there are duplicate rows for the same item, the later row overrides the earlier row.
Blank cells are ignored on import.
Even though you receive an error message if you leave a row blank, all data in rows beneath the blank one will be imported.
The Import Categories template often requires that all columns be completed for items to add during import.
Do not change the order of the sheets in the template.
Use Administration > Import Reporting Datasets to import reporting datasets. For Sequential
404
datasets, the periods must be sequential and the underlying data in the datasets must rollover. For Additive
405 datasets, the periods must be identical.
You will import reporting datasets by completing the appropriate fields in the #CDR# Reporting Dataset
worksheet in the Import Categories template 591 . Although the worksheet is in the Import Categories
template, the reporting datasets worksheet will not import when selecting the Import Categories 589 option.
When importing the mappings for the Import Reporting Dataset, the related datasets must be in the system. The system adds the mappings only if the dataset names match the names of the related datasets (exactly) in Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. If there are errors during the import process,
551 .
See Reporting Datasets 404 for more information about Sequential and Additive datasets.
You can Import Bridge Mapping items using the Import Bridge Map template.
For hosted solutions, you can export the mappings to generate the template. The file can contain any of these sheets: #MPTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income, #MTA# Tax Accounts, #MPD# Perm Diffs, #MTD# Temp Diffs
- Tax Basis, #MTDBOS# Temp Diff BSO, #MAPD# Amortized Perm Diffs, #MATD# Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis, and #MTBBB# Trial Balance.
Warning: Importing bridge mappings clears all existing mappings. If you append to existing mappings, you should export them and add to that file, rather than using a new file.
Topics discussed in this section include exporting categories from Administration, as well as dataset data, and component data from the Data Entry pages. When exporting data, and the export is complete, you can save the file from the current browser page. A download message appears for saving the file. The message you see varies and depends on the browser and version of the browser in use.
594
596
598
600
DATASET EXPORT WORKSHEETS
The export functionality generates a file with multiple worksheets:
#U# Unit, #UQ# Unit Questions, #UPD# Unit Perm Diffs, #UNOLTD# Unit NOL TDs-Tax Basis, #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis, #UATTD# U AfterTx TDs-Tax Basis, #UTA# Unit Tax Adjs, #UTBBS# Unit Tax Basis BalSheet, #ULB# Unit Liability Begin Bals, #ULC# Unit Liability Changes, #UTDAM# U Temp Diff-Bk Tx Basis, #UPDAM# Unit Perm Diff Amort, #UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas, #FL# Fed Liability Txns, #ICOTXNS# Inter Co Txns, #DSFX# FX Rates, #S# States, #SPM# State Perm Mods, #STD# St TD-Tax Basis, #SAATD# St AfterApp TD-Tax Bas, #SATTD# St AfterTax TD-Tax Bas, #STA# State Tax Adjs, #J# Jurisdictions, #USDSP# USDS Params, #UDSP# UDS Params, #DP# Dataset Params, #JES# Journal Entries, #JETAX# JE Tax Calcs, #JEGL# JE GL Calcs, #SL# State Liability Txns, #UQUEST# Questionnaires, #UQSTNS# Questions,#UQRESP# Responses, #COU_RATES# Country Rates (Hidden), #CUR_RATES# Currency Rates (Hidden), #S_RATES# State Rates (Hidden), #CTAA# Currency Translation Adj, #DSRF# Dataset RollFrwd, #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping, #PARTH# Flow-Through Header, #PARTD# Flow-Through Detail, #PARTTAG# Flow-Through Tags, #TCM_IS# Tax Calcs Mapping IS, #TCM_BS# Tax Calcs Mapping BS, #ALTRATE# Alt Prov Rates, #ALT1# Scenario 1 Adj, #ALT2# Scenario 2 Adj, and #UAPIC# APIC Pool Amounts.
CATEGORY EXPORT WORKSHEETS
The Import Categories template contains the following worksheets:
#ADS# Archive Datasets, #ARDS# Archive Reporting Datasets, #CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs, #CD# Datasets, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CDSR# Dataset Relations, #CRD# Reporting Datasets, #COU# Countries, #CUR# Currencies, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CIFTD# Incl. for Temp Diffs, #CLRF# Liab RollForwards, #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs, #CNRF# NOL RollForwards, #CP# Parameters, #CPRU# ParamsReportsUser, #CPD# Permanent Differences,#CPTBI# PTBI Codes, #CPYBK# Payable Buckets, #CPYRL# Payable Rollups, #CPYTP# Payable Txn Types, #CRU# Component Rollup Sets, #CS# States, #CSAATD# St AfterApp TempDiff, #CSATTD# St AfterTax TempDiff, #CSC# SubConsolidations, #CSTA# St Tax Adjs, #CTA# Tax Adjustments, #CTBL# Trial Balance Lines, #CTBSL# Trial Balance SubLines, #CTD# Temporary Differences, #CTDP# Temp Diff Postings, #CU# Units, #CUC# User Components, #CUSR# Users, #CUSRGP# Group Permissions, Users#ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types, #ICOTRTT# Inter Co Trtmnt Types, #CUNC# Unit Components, and #CUNCM# Unit Component Multiple,#JEN# Journal Entry Numbers.
Note: To review the status of your export jobs, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.
In My Datasets, you can export datasets in the All Datasets or My Review List tabs. Use Export Group, to export all of your datasets or a set of selected datasets to an Excel file. Or, you can select a dataset and export a single dataset.
You can export 594 data entered for a dataset to an Excel file. Then, make changes to the data in the file
and import 594 the data back into the originating dataset or a different dataset. Also, you can export the
dataset to create a backup of the data as a security measure. To ensure the file can be restored export the
categories 594 in Administration, as well.
You can export worksheets that you have permission to access.
Exporting before you enter information into the system creates a blank template.
When you export multiple datasets, one Excel file is created for each dataset.
You can select units (all datasets, a single unit, or a sub-consolidation of units) for export.
You can ask your client manager or support for additional worksheets to use for importing.
EXPORT GROUP
Select a box to specify the dataset(s) to export to an Excel file.
Clicking the box in the top left side of the grid selects all datasets. A checkmark appears in that column for all datasets.
Click to export a group of datasets.
My Datasets - Export Group
EXPORT DATASETS
To export data from a dataset to create a dataset import template and backup file:
Select a box to specify the dataset(s) to export to an Excel file.
Click and the Export Dataset dialog box opens in which you can make selections to create the file.
Select Dataset(s), Subconsolidation or Unit to export the data for the specified datasets.
Export Dataset
Type the Export File Name and click Export.
551 in the navigation bar.
See Exporting 593 for more information about exporting dataset information.
In the Manage Units page, use Export All Units
593 to export all of your units to an Excel file. When
exporting data, and the export is complete, you can save the file from the current browser page. A download message appears for saving the file. The message you see varies and depends on the browser and version of the browser in use. Open the spreadsheet to review your data in the #U# and #S# tabs.
Export All Units
Export All Units - Example
In Review & Edit, you can select a Base Dataset and a component in Data Entry
145 , and then export that
data to an Excel spreadsheet creating a spreadsheet template for the specified component. You can make
changes to the data in the template and import 598 that data into the originating data entry page or a different
dataset's data entry page. Also, you can export the data to create a backup of the data as a security
measure. To ensure the file can be restored export the categories 598 in Administration, as well.
To export data from a data entry page to create a worksheet template for import and data backup purposes:
Click in the Data Entry ribbon and the Export Components dialog box opens.
Export - Data Entry
Type the filename.
Export Components
2. Click . The system creates a file that you can use to import data for the page. For example, exporting the PTBI page creates the #PTBI# sheet in which you can use to enter data and then import that data.
Note: In Review & Edit, you can click to export data for informational purposes. You can export data from the Summary page, Lead Sheet pages, and Data Entry pages. This file cannot be used as a template to import data into the system.
To review the progress of the export, select Jobs
551
in the navigation bar.
See Exporting 593 for more information about exporting dataset data.
You have the ability to export component entries from a component's page. It's a good idea to export data on a scheduled basis to create a back up file of your data. You can use the export functionality to create a template for importing data.
Only Administrators and Read-write users can import data entry line items.
You can export all entries from a component's page. The export file will contain entries from the page that is open.
The export will consist of Federal and State worksheets (for those components that apply. If there are Federal and State entries the export file will consist of both Federal and State worksheets. For example, Perm Diffs Tax Basis willl consist of #UPD# and #SPD# workssheets (if there are state entries).
If you click Export after creating filters for certain entries; only the filtered selections from all pages will export.
Export jobs are logged in the Jobs section of the application.
To export data from the Data Entry component page:
Click Export in the Data Entry ribbon and the Export Components dialog opens.
Type a filename to specify the export file.
Click Export File to submit the export request.
Select Jobs in the navigation bar to review the export log information and the status of your export request.
It may be valuable to export the categories listed in the system at any given time. These exports can work as a backup method to secure data, as well as shorten the amount of time it takes to do a mass edit. When Exporting categories you are asked two questions: Do you want to export Unit Component? and Do you want to export User Component information?. You can select Yes or No to either question. Keep in mind that there are typically many lines of data on the #CUC# and #CUNC# sheets, so selecting Yes for either of these options dramatically increases the size of the file and the time it takes to generate.
Tax Basis/Return Mapping items can be exported to an Import Return Maps template. In Administration > Manage Tax Basis/ Return select Export Mappings. This creates a file with two sheets: #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet Mappings and #MINC# Map Income Statement. Exporting before items have been entered generates a blank Import Return Maps template.
In Administration > Export Categories you can export the categories listed in the system at any given time.
To export categories:
Select Administration and then Export Categories. The Export Categories dialog box opens.
Administration - Export Categories
Type the filename and answer the export questions.
Export Categories
Click .
To review the progress of the export, select Jobs
Export Bridge Mappings
551
in the navigation bar.
You can export Bridge Mapping data to create an Import Bridge Map template. Exporting from the application before you enter data generates a blank Import Bridge Map template.
The export generates a template with the following worksheets.
#MPTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income
#MTA# Tax Accounts
#MPD# Perm Diffs
#MTD# Temp Diffs - Tax Basis
#MTDBOS# Temp Diff BSO
#MAPD# Amortized Perm Diffs
#MATD# Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis
#MTBBB# Trial Balance
#BUM# Unit Mapping
Use the Functionality section to get familiar with the following features:
604
620
660
673
696
708
711
Tax Basis Balance Sheet/Income Statement
712
714
726
Associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision Applications
729
The system can automatically calculate and post the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) amount using information within data entry and rate fields. The AMT calculated result posts as an After Tax Temporary Difference - Tax Basis with the adjustment code AMT_SYS. It does not take into consideration the calculation going into a recapture position.
Activate Automation 114 policies for a unit by selecting My Datasets > Units > More > Other >
Automation > Enable AMT Automation.
Type the AMT Adjustments (Local), AMT Rate, AMT After Tax Adjustment, and AMT Net Operating Loss Carryover Balance.
The system calculates the AMT Automation using the Reporting Currency approach.
605
606
Use the system or dataset parameter to determine the approach. Using the dataset parameter, lets the system calculate the AMT Automation on a dataset-by-dataset basis.
Notes:
The system uses the NOL_SYS code for the Federal NOL automation. To add the code select
Administration > Manage Units > NOL Temp Differences.
Use the dataset parameter, USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR, and the parameter value 1 to override the Reporting/Local Currency approach.
Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) - Automation
AMT Reporting Currency Approach
By default, the system uses the Reporting Currency Approach along with the AMT Automation
604
functionality. The Reporting Currency approach expands the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation.
No need to activate the NOL Automation to automate the AMT.
Consider and enter the AMT Net Operating Loss Carryover Balance.
Review the AMT Estimator 348 report with reporting currency in Filing Group reports.
Compute the AMT using the unit's data in reporting currency. The system posts the AMT to the parent unit by converting the reporting currency to the parent unit's local currency.
ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM TAX ESTIMATOR
Regular Tax Calculation
The system starts with Federal Tax Current from the Tax Provision report and then considers the impact of Foreign Tax Credits from either Cash Tax Adjustments or user-designated After Tax Temporary Difference activity to arrive at an Adjusted Cash Provision.
Alternative Tax Calculation
The system starts with Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) from the Tax Provision Report and then adds back any entered AMT preference items. The result is offset up to 90% with the AMT NOL to arrive at Alternative Minimum Taxable Income that is rate effected by the AMT rate to arrive at the AMT (pre credits). It then considers any entered AMT Foreign Tax Credits to arrive at the Tentative Minimum Tax.
AMT Liability (Recapture)
The system compares the Tentative Minimum Tax with the Adjusted Cash Provision to determine if an AMT Liability exists or a potential Recapture of an AMT carryover from prior years.
If the Tentative Minimum Tax is higher than the Adjusted Cash Provision, the system posts that
amount to the Parent Unit in the Filing Group as activity in the After Tax Temporary Difference section with the adjustment code AMT_SYS.
If the Tentative Minimum Tax is less than the Adjusted Cash Provision, the system looks to the beginning balance of the After Tax Temporary Difference with the adjustment code AMT_SYS in the filing group's parent unit beginning balance. To the extent there is a balance, it will recapture that amount in activity.
AMT Local Currency Approach (Not Recommended) lets the AMT functionality calculate using Local
Currency amounts. You can manually activate or import the system parameter 758 to use this approach.
Use this approach only if all of the units have the same local currency.
Use the same currency for all units in a filing group 27 for the calculation to be logical.
To manually activate the AMT Local Currency Approach, select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Alternative Minimum Tax > Designate AMT Functionality Approach > Yes.
The Local Currency approach has limited functionality when compared to the Reporting Currency approach.
Computes the AMT calculation in Local Currency.
AMT Automation 114 posts the generated AMT liability as activity on an after tax temporary difference
with the code AMT_SYS.
Note: Use the AMT Reporting Currency approach 605 to consider both regular and AMT NOLs in the
calculation. The system does not consider the Net Operating Losses for both regular tax and AMT separately in the calculation.
Use the Federal NOL Automation 113 to calculate a percentage of the current federal loss to reclass as a
NOL deferred tax asset and enter the Base NOL Allowance. This option creates a Federal Only NOL adjustment while not affecting the state calculation.
Activate the NOL Automation by selecting My Datasets > Units > More > Other > Automation >
NOL > Enable NOL Automation.
Type the percent of the current federal income for reclassing a NOL deferred tax asset. If there is an annual NOL limitation (sec 382), type the amount in the Base NOL Allowance field. The system limits the amount used for current federal income.
Type the annual NOL limitation amount in Base NOL Allowance. For example, your SRLY or sec 382.
Enable NOL Automation
After activating the NOL Automation, the NOL_SYS Code-Description appears in the NOL Temp Diffs
Tax Basis data entry page.
Select Review & Edit > Data Entry > NOL Temp Diffs to manage your NOL's. Use this page to manually enter or import the Beginning Balance, Activity, Deferred Only, and Balance Sheet Only information.
167 -
Data Entry - NOL Temp Diffs
This section contains scenarios that show how various settings in the Federal NOL automation affect the NOL Reclass, the Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL), and the NOL Ending Balance.
Select the following scenarios to see various calculations.
Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4 Scenario 5 Scenario 6 Scenario 7 Scenario 8 Scenario 9 Scenario 10
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
Note: Use reporting to see the NOL Automation detail by selecting Reporting > Dataset > Report Level. Click Tax Provision > Options > Detail (in the View list) > Run. In the report, select a hyperlink to see the lower level detail.
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 100% of the Federal Taxable Income (-2,048,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).
(2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> * 100%<NOL Allow Rate>) + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,024,000)<NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -2,048,000 <NOL reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (5,000,000 <BBal> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O>) + (-2,048,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 2,952,000 <EB>
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 50% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 50% of the Federal Taxable Income, NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0). (2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> * 50%<NOL Allowance Rate>) + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,024,000)<NOL
Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 1,024,000.
2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -1,024,000 <NOL Reclass> = 1,024,000 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal) 5,000,000 <BBal> + -1,024,000 <NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 3,976,000<EB>
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 50,000, the NOL Reclass is the sum of the Base NOL Allowance (50,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).
50,000 <Base NOL Allowance> + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> == - (50,000) <NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 1,998,000.
2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -50,000 <NOL Reclass> = 1,998,00 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal 5,000,000 <BBal> + -50,000<NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 4,950,000<EB>
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 50% and Base NOL Allowance is set to 100,000, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 50% of the Federal Taxable Income, 50% of the Base NOL Allowance (100,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).
[(2,048,000 * .50) + (100,000 * .50)] + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,074,000) <NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 974,000.
2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -1,074,000 <NOL Reclass> = 974,000 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal 5,000,000 <BBal> + -1,074,000<NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 3,926,000<EB>
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is 0. Therefore, the Federal Taxable Income and NOL Ending Balance are not affected by the NOL Reclass.
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is 100% of the NOL Beginning Balance (100,000).
100,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> * (100%) NOL Allowance Rate = -(100,000)<NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -100,000 <NOL reclass> = 1,948,000 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (100,000 <BBal> + 350,000 <DO> + 0<Bal O>) + (-100,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 250,000 <EB>
Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because 100% of Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the product of the NOL Beginning Balance (500,000) and the NOL Allowance Rate (100%).
500,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> * 100% <NOL allowance rate>= -(500,000)<NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -500,000<NOL reclass> = 1,548,000 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (500,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 600,000 <Bal O>) + (-500,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 600,000 <EB>
Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because 100% of Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 40,000, the NOL Reclass is the total NOL Beginning Balance (10,000), because you cannot use more NOL than you have in the beginning balance.
(10,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> = -(10,000)<NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -10,000 <NOL reclass> = 2,038,000 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (10,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (-10,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 0 <EB>
Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because the Base NOL Allowance of the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.
When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100%, the Base NOL Allowance to 0, and there is another NOL Temporary Difference with Activity (500,000), the NOL Reclass is the sum of 100% of the Federal Taxable Income (2,048,000.00) and the NOL Temporary Difference (500,000).
[(2,048,000.00) <Federal Taxable Income> + (500,000)< NOL TD>] – 500,000 <NOL TD> = - 2,048,000.00
<NOL Reclass>
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -2,048,000 <NOL reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (7,010,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (-2,048,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 4,962,000 <EB>
When there is a negative Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the NOL Allowance Rate and the Base NOL Allowance do not affect the NOL Reclass. This occurs because the negative Taxable Income is considered a loss and is added to the NOL Balance Sheet.
If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.
-52,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + 52,000 <NOL Reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>
NOL ENDING BALANCE
(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (10,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (52,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 62,000 <EB>
Currently, there are two issues with the Federal NOL automation:
If you manually enter the Activity in the NOL Temp Differences, when using the NOL automation (the NOL Allowance Rate is set lower than 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0), the Tax Provision report will have incorrect NOL Reclass and Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) amounts.
In the Tax Provision report, the NOL Reclass calculation adds the manually entered Activity amounts before multiplying by the NOL Allowance Rate. This results in incorrect NOL Reclass and Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) amounts.
The Calculate Flow-Through Factor functionality allows you to establish rules then transfer data between entities with unlimited levels of hierarchy and push the detail in bulk. You can use the Flow-Through functionality to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another.
Contact your Implementation Manager to set up the Flow-Through functionality.
Flow-Through assists with automating the following data flows:
Partnerships
Branches
Elimination Companies
ITERATIVE CALCULATION
You can perform the calculation two ways: Manually or Automatically (during a report regeneration).
During calculation, the system:
Re-calculates all modified Source Unit data.
Deletes previous data before the Source Unit data is re-calculated.
Handles multiple parent/child relationships.
Generates consistent and repeated results.
KEY SYSTEM INFORMATION
Requiring an additional License 621 to use the functionality.
Selecting either Class Datasets
621 or Tag Datasets
379 . Keep in mind that you set up Class and Tag
datasets differently in the system.
Calculating the Flow-Through Factor Results, manually
629 , in My Datasets.
Calculating the Flow-Through Factor Results, automatically 632, when running a report. Calculating
Flow-Through, automatically, requires activating the system parameter, Automatically Calculate Flow-
632.
626 relationship, Flow-Through Profile
622 percentage, and an Elimination.
For more information about activating Flow-Through parameters, see Manage Configurations 632 and Manage
621 .
Note: If using Tag Datasets, see Flow-Through Factors and Tags
635 .
Using the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Flow-Through functionality requires an appropriate License Code and License Key.
To review and enter the License Code/License Key select Administration > System > Manage Licenses. A check icon appears in the Valid? column when you add the license.
FEATURE CODE | FEATURE KEY |
Type the name of the license, for example, FlowThrough. | Type the key for the license. |
Manage License - Valid Feature Code/Feature Key
Flow-Through Classes & Subclasses
When using Flow-Through Profiles 622 to transfer data from one unit to another, you must assign Flow-
Through Classes & Subclasses to User Roles, Class datasets, and Component Types. To review or update the class & subclass assignments select Administration > Manage Data Options > Classes & Subclasses > Flow-Through > FT- Flow-Through > User Roles, Datasets, and Component Types.
Use the default class, FT - Flow Through, FTP - Flow Through Posting, or FTE - Flow Through Clearing, if desired.
Create and use user-defined Flow Through classes & subclasses, if desired.
Notes:
You select the Class & Subclass functionality for new datasets when adding them to the system.
You assign a Class & Subclass to a component (tax adjustment) in Data Entry. Assigning the class/ subclass combination makes the tax adjustment entry unique.
The system applies a default class during the Flow-Through data transfer using the source & target unit selections.
For more information see Classes/Subclasses. For more information see Manage Datasets.
Set up Flow-Through Profiles in Dataset Administration. To access Flow-Through profiles, select My Datasets > More > Flow-Through Profiles.
More - Flow-Through Profiles
Note:
621 when setting up Flow-Through profiles.
Review your User Role, license option in the drop-down list.
621 , and parameters
632, if you do not see the Flow Through Profiles
Use the Flow-Through Profiles page to add and maintain Flow Through Profiles. Here you assign Classes
and Components to the profile allowing the component data to transfer between units. Use the General
623,
624 , and Net Adjustments
625
tabs to complete a profile.
Flow-Through Profiles - Page
Note: Set up Flow-Through profiles manually instead of using the import functionality as a best practice.
Use the General tab to enter a Profile Description and make the following selections to complete the profile.
Data Movement: Use Gross Balances to transfer balances or Net Adjustments to transfer calculated values.
624
Transfers Federal data.
Transfers Federal data to the following State data fields: State NOL's, State Credits, and State Bonus Depreciation.
State only modifications do not transfer because:
State activation can vary between the Source and Target units.
Partnerships consider different tax laws for states than federal.
625
Transfers Federal and State data. You can select a State to receive data.
Jurisdictions: Use Federal or State (transfers State only modifications). Keep in mind that you cannot select the State option when transferring Gross Balances.
Source Classes: Use All or Selected Classes to transfer data associated with a class.
Note: Set up Source Classes using All as a best practice. When you add new classes to the system:
Clicking All allows the system to add automatically the class to the profile.
Clicking Selected requires you to choose the class in the profile (after you have added the class to the system).
Use Flip Selection to reverse the class assignments.
Use Target Class to assign a target class to appear in the Target unit. Use an existing class or add a
621
for the Flow-Through process. The system automatically assigns a subclass in the
Target Unit using the Source Unit code and description.
Use Elimination Class to assign elimination entries at the source unit. You can use the same "Source" class for the Target and Elimination Class.
Use Details for the detailed elimination balances for the Source Unit.
Use Summary by Source for the summary using the component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.
Use Summary by Target for the summary using the mapped target component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.
Use Gross Balances to map a source component code to a target component code in a flow-through profile. Then you can transfer Federal data entry balances from one unit to another.
To map Gross Balances, select a Flow-Through Profile, then Gross Balances for Data Movement. Use the columns to select a "Source" component and map to a "Target" component.
In the first column, select a component type to configure the profile mapping or choose "Click here to add" in the Selected Components column, and the Component Mapping page opens.
Use the Selected Components drop-down list to select ALL, SELECTED, or ALL EXCEPT.
Selecting ALL selects all components in the list.
Selecting SELECTED lets you choose components individually.
Selecting ALL EXCEPT lets you select components individually.
Use Target Component to map a component in the Source Unit to the Target Unit.
Use Target Type to map the component type.
Include in Copy: The Component Types to include in the profile. Selecting a component type (PTBI, Perm Differences, Temp Differences), allows the system to copy and factor the data from the source unit to the target unit. The system determines the level of detail in the target unit by selecting Detail Copy Action or Target Rollup Component.
Type: Lists the component type. Note that by default the Pre-Tax Book Income, and Trial Balance component type fields are empty.
All: Use this column to select a component and the Component Mapping page opens.
Selected Components: Use this column to select a component, and the Component Mapping page opens.
Component Mapping: Use component mapping to select components for mapping.
Target Components: Select the Target Component code from the list.
Target Type: Select the Target Component Type from the list.
Use Net Adjustments, to transfer calculated values from one unit to another.
Select specific components to define the current taxes as deferred taxes.
Select a state for the state taxes. For the jurisdiction value, select the Target Adjustment Component, Type and State for each tax affected value to appear on the target unit.
Use the following adjustments to calculate the values for current and deferred taxes for the Flow-Through configurations.
Target Adjustment for Federal Current Taxes
Target Adjustment for Federal Deferred
Target Adjustment for Federal Equity
Target Adjustment for State Current Taxes
Target Adjustment for State Deferred Taxes
Target Adjustment for State Equity
Note: When using Net Adjustments, you cannot select an Elimination Class or Type.
Use Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources to assign Units, Journal Entry, Factors, and Auto Elim to another unit. Select My Datasets > Units > More > Properties > Flow-Through > Flow-Through Targets or Flow-Through Sources.
Unit Properties - Flow-Through Tab
TARGET
The system transfers calculated data from the Source Unit to the Target Unit data entry fields. For example, PTBI, Permanent Differences, and Temporary Differences.
FACTORS
When the system gets data from the source unit, it applies the individual factors. The system multiplies the balance using the assigned factor before the system adds the result to the target unit results.
Partnership Unit Elimination Unit
The following illustration shows factors for a partnerThe following illustration shows factors for an eliminations
target unit. target unit.
APPLYING FACTORS TO UNITS
The following example depicts three levels. You can have as many levels as desired.
Assign Flow-Through Target Unit
Use the Flow-Through Targets tab to assign a Target Unit to the selected Source Unit. Click Add and select Target Unit, Profile, and Create Auto Elim?, then type a Factor. Enter a Profile Comment as needed.
Flow-Through Targets
Assign Flow-Through Source Unit
Use the Flow-Through Sources tab to assign a Source Unit to the selected Target Unit. Click Add and select Source Unit, Profile, and Create Auto Elim?, then type a Factor. Enter a Profile Comment as needed. The system gets the Source Unit data, applies the factors and then transfers the data to the target unit.
Flow-Through Sources
Calculate Flow-Through - Manually
Use the Calculate action to manually calculate the Flow-Through Factor Results. The system can calculate multiple parent/child relationships and then transfer the data to an assigned unit. After modifying data, recalculate the data. The system deletes all previous data during the re-calculation.
Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results
Activate the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item
Through Factor Results in the Calculate drop-down list.
632 parameter to see Calculate Flow-
Notes:
You can let the system automatically
632 re-calculate when running a report.
If a unit is locked, you cannot transfer data to another unit.
To exclude all Flow Through classes for the Target dataset add the Dataset parameter
631 .
Use Review & Edit to review Flow-Through data source history. Select Review & Edit > Base Dataset - A
Data Entry - Component. Examples of Data Entry Components include Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences, and so forth.
In an adjustment row, double-click the Data Source field and the Data Source History page opens to review the source data. You can also review by filtering the Target/Elimination Classes.
Use the Flow-Through report for Provision datasets to review the data movement between units. Run the report for the Parent Unit and the report shows, by Target unit, the contributing Source unit(s) and their components and factor information as they relate to that Target unit. The calculated adjustment and an elimination adjustment (if set up) appear as additional line items in the report.
Data in the Target unit (except for the manual adjustments data) is cleared out before processing. Then, you can execute the flow-through factor procedure multiple times resulting in the same answer. The flow-through factor procedure increments the data for each source unit on top of the data in the target unit. If the target numbers do not start at zero, the flow-through factor procedure adds numbers on top of themselves.
For more information Reporting in the Tax Provision online Help.
Use Jobs to review the status of your Import/Export jobs. When your import/export job is complete, you can review the See Log information to ensure that no errors occurred to restrict data from being imported.
Dataset Import
Dataset Export
Use the import functionality to transfer data for multiple worksheets or each worksheet separately.
Use the export functionality in My Datasets, or the Data Entry pages to create an Excel file (also known as the Import Numbers template) with the following worksheets.
#PARTH# Flow-Through Header
#PARTD# Flow-Through Detail
#PARTTAG# Flow-Through Tags
REFRESH APPLICATION
Use Refresh Application to update the application with data added or removed in the system.
APPLICATION LICENSE
Use import to add your application license to the system.
Use the dataset parameter, EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES, to exclude Flow-Through data from a Source dataset. To activate the dataset parameter select My Datasets > More (for Source Dataset) > Dataset Parameters.
Dataset Parameter
Parameter Name | Parame ter | Parameter Function |
EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES | 1 | To exclude all Flow Through classes for the Target dataset. |
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY - FLOW-THROUGH
Use Administration >System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Flow-Through to configure the Flow-Through data transfer.
Advanced Functionality - Flow-Through Parameters
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY | PARAMETERS |
Flow Through | |
Is Flow-Through Activated? (cannot be changed here) To activate Flow-Through in Manage Licenses:
Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_ENABLE | |
Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors in Reports To automatically calculate Flow-Through factors and transfer data from one unit to another using a Flow-Through profile. The application transfers the current data in the source unit component upon running a report. Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC | |
Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item To see the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results option in the Calculate drop-down list within My Datasets. Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC | |
Displays FX Fields To have the FX fields available for data entry. During Calculations, the system uses the Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx in the Flow-Through Factor page. Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX | |
Allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through To allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through. Parameter Name: AUDIT_FLOWTHROUGH |
See Calculate Flow-Through Factor
632
for more information about calculating the Flow-Through Factor.
Manage Configurations - Advanced Functionality
.
The following system parameter information appears in your Export/Import Categories template.
Activate the following System Parameters using Manage Configurations
632
Parameter Name | Paramete r | Parameter Function |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the FX fields (Use Fx Rates During Calculations, Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate) on the Flow-Through Factor page.
does not calculate, nor store a currency translation adjustment (CTA) in the target unit. The CTA only calculates and appears when going from local currency to reporting currency. The CTA in the target unit report may not match the CTA for the source unit. The correct CTA appears only in the source unit. |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 automatically calculates flow-through factors in reports. |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item in the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets. |
AUDIT_FLOWTHROUGH | 0 or 1 | 1 allows Audit Trail for Flow-Through. |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_ENABLE | 0 or 1 | 1 allows Flow-Through Factors |
ENHANCED_FLOW_RPT_PERF | 0 or 1 | 1 Enhances the system performance for the Flow-Through functionality. |
Using the Flow-Through functionality with Tag Datasets
To transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another, follow these steps:
Create a Provision or Estimated Payments dataset and apply Tags as the Data Option to the dataset.
Select My Datasets > Dataset (Tag) > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.
Click Create New to set up Flow-Through to move data from one unit to another.
Select a unit from the Source Unit drop-down list. The calculated data transfers from a source unit to the target unit using the assigned factors. You can select any unit as a source, except for the target unit.
You cannot select a unit if it or any of its parents are a child of the current unit.
The system activates states in the target unit, which are activated in source unit during the Flow-Through data transfer. You can deactivate the state in the target unit.
Select a Manual Adjustments tag. You can locate the tag in the target unit where you can make manual adjustments to existing balances. The data in the target unit within the manual adjustments tag is not deleted or zeroed out.
Use Apply Default Factor or type a factor in the field. If you de-select Apply Default Factor, you cannot type in the field.
Select Exclusion Tags (for clearing and copying data). For more information, go to the Data Clearing Details section.
EXCLUSION TAGS
An exclusion tag for the target unit keeps existing data for those tags in tact. The system does not delete this data.
When the system calculates the Flow-Through, the system clears the data in the target unit as the first step. Then, the system transfers the data from the source unit to the target unit.
EXCLUSION TAGS HAVE TWO FUNCTIONS:
Prevent data associated with specific tags from being cleared from the target unit.
Prevent data associated with specific tags from being copied from the source unit to the target unit.
Exclude clearing the data for these tags on the target unit when not summarizing You can designate one or more tags for the target unit and the system does not clear that data before executing the flow-through factor procedure. Normally, all data in the target unit (except for the manual adjustments tag) is cleared out before processing. This allows you to execute the flow-through factor
procedure multiple times resulting in the same answer. The flow-through factor procedure will increment the data for each source unit on top of the data in the target unit. If the target numbers do not start at zero, the flow-through factor procedure continues to add numbers on top of themselves.
Exclude pulling these tags from the source unit
You can designate one or more tags to exclude from the flow-through process. Component data using a tag, that you select to exclude, does not transfer from the source unit to the target unit.
Type a factor in the BEG FX RATE and WGT AVG FX RATE fields. Click the box to remove the default calculation.
FX RATES
Use FX Rates during calculations by default. The system uses the Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate for the Flow-Through Factor calculations.
Using FX works in Flow-Through:
Activate the Displays FX Fields
632 parameter to have the FX fields available for data entry. Or, you can
import the parameter using FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX
634
with a paramvalue of 1.
An unknown FX rate forces unknown amounts to zero which may or may not be erroneous. If using the automatic calculation does not provide an error message. However, the manual calculation provides a warning (which you can ignore). This warning message provides a list of the units that have an unknown FX rate so you can correct this data.
The source unit to target unit Flow-Through will not calculate, nor store a currency translation adjustment (CTA) on the target unit. The CTA only calculates and appears when going from local currency to reporting currency. The CTA in the target unit may not match the CTA which appears in the source unit. The correct CTA only appears in the source unit.
Select the type of data (PTBI, Permanent Differences, etc.) to transfer from the source unit.
INCLUDE IN COPY
By selecting a component type (PTBI, Perm Differences, Temp Differences), the system calculates data using the assigned factor from the source unit and transfers it to the target unit. You can determine the level of detail in the target unit by selecting Detail Copy Action or a Target Rollup Component.
Enter an Activity Factor for the selected type of data.
ACTIVITY FACTORS
During the transfer of data from the source unit, the system applies the individual factors. For example, if the Temporary Differences Activity factor is set to 50.00%, then the activity of each temporary difference will be multiplied by 50.00% before the result is added to the target units results.
If a temporary difference was selected, you need to enter a Beginning Balance Activity Factor, Deferred Only Activity Factor, and Balance Sheet Only Activity Factor.
Select a Target Rollup Component a Target Type and Target Tag.
ROLLUP COMPONENTS
Target Rollup Components
When a target rollup component is selected, a target tag must also be selected. When you select a target rollup component and target tag for a component type, the system summarizes all detail items together. The results appear in the selected component/tag in the target unit.
Target Type | TargetTag
If you select a ONESOURCE Tax Provision component, then you must select a target tag for each type. The target tag determines where the data appears in the target unit.
You have two options for copying data from the source unit to the target unit: Copy Detail by Tag and
Summarize Detail by Tag.
Rollup Temporary Differences
The target temporary difference defaults to unit rates:
The Temporary Difference Beginning Rate is the Beginning Deferred Tax Rate from the unit.
The Temporary Difference Ending Rate is the Ending Deferred Tax Rate from the unit.
COPY DETAIL BY TAG
The system copies each component/tag combination from the source unit to the target. Use the tag on the target unit to make manual adjustments to existing numbers. The system does not delete the data in the target unit within the manual adjustments tag.
If data exits in the target unit for a component/tag combination, the system overwrites the information unless you define the target tag in the Exclude Clearing the Data for These Tags option within the Target Unit list. When the system includes data for the Exclude list, the data increments on top of the data that already exists. If you run the flow-through calculation process more than once, the source data increments on top of itself with each run.
Caution: If the system does not clear the existing data in the target unit, first, and a tag is selected for both exclude from clearing and summarized, its detail in the target unit is deleted as an override to the clearing tag exclusion. The summarize tag designation takes priority over the clearing exclusion. The system prompts you message when this occurs, however, the system is not prevented from clearing the data.
COPY DETAIL BY TAG
Each component/tag combination from the source unit is copied to the target:
TARGET ROLLUP COMPONENT: COPY DETAIL BY TAG
If data exits in the target unit for a component/tag combination, it will be overwritten unless the target tag is defined on the Exclude Clearing the Data for These Tags on the Target Unit list. When data is included on the Exclude list, it will be incremented on top of the data that already exists. This is undesirable if the flow- through calculation process is to be run more than once because the source data will increment on top of itself on each run.
COPY AND SUMMARIZE
Data is cleared from the target unit as the first step. Then data is copied from the source unit to the target unit. There are two options for copying data from the source unit to the target unit: Copy Detail by Tag and Summarize Detail by Tag.
SUMMARIZE DETAIL BY TAG
Each component from the source unit is summarized into the Summarization Tag before it is copied to the target:
TARGET ROLLUP COMPONENT: SUMMARIZE DETAIL BY TAG
Note: All data for the X tag will be deleted prior to processing.
To manually or automatically calculate the Flow Through data and transfer the data from one unit to another.
Manually by clicking Dataset > Administration > Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results. The following message displays: Are you sure you would like to calculate unit factor results? WARNING: This will erase all data not tagged with the 'Manual Adjustments Tag' and 'Exclusion Tags' in each target unit. Click Yes.
Automatically during the report data regeneration process.
You must activate the parameter to calculate the Flow Through when running reports..
BEST PRACTICES
A given component type will only use one of the three detail copy types with the following order of precedence:
Roll all detail into a Target Rollup Component.
Copy Detail with Original Tag or Summarize Detail into Tag.
If a component type is not selected, then its data will not be changed. It will not be deleted, zeroed out or copied (factored).
ONESOURCE Tax Provision will add the data from multiple source units together and place the additive results into the target unit top of it self on each subsequent run.
Data will be cleared from the target unit as the first step in the calculation process.
If a state is not activated, it will be and the unit data for the source will be used as the basis for creation. It can be changed once the unit is activated.
For a selected unit, any unit can be selected as a source except for the selected unit itself.
A unit cannot be selected if it or any of its parents are a child of the current unit.
The flow-though factor calculation process may either be triggered manually (through the use of a menu selection) or automatically (during the report data regeneration process). The selection of which options are available can be configured in the “Manage Restricted Features” section of the administration module.
The following terminology for Flow-Through includes:
SOURCE UNIT
The unit from which numbers are pulled. Factors are applied to source unit data before it is written to the target unit. You can designate multiple source units. Data from all source units is added by the system. The result is placed in the target unit.
TARGET UNIT
The unit to which numbers are pushed or written.
TARGET TAG
Determines where data is written in the target unit.
TARGET CLASSES
Determines where data is written in the target unit.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS TAG
A target unit tag allowing users to make manual adjustments to existing numbers. Data in the target unit in the manual adjustments tag is not deleted or zeroed out.
EXCLUSION CLEARING TAG
A target unit tag specifying that existing data should not be deleted or cleared out. You can designate one or more exclusion clearing tags.
EXCLUSION PULLING TAG
A source unit tag specifying that existing data should not be pulled. You can designate one or more exclusion pulling tags.
COMPONENT TYPE
A type of data that can be copied from source unit to target unit. (Examples: PTBI, permanent differences, temporary differences) A component type rolls all detail into a Target Rollup Component. Then the detail is either copied or summarized by tag.
Note: The data for a component type that is not selected is not changed; it is not deleted, zeroed out, or copied (factored).
ACTIVITY FACTOR
A percentage applied to source unit numbers before they are written to a target unit. Factors can be positive or negative. For example, if the Temporary Differences factor is set to 50%, the activity of each temporary difference is multiplied by 50% and the result is added to the target unit.
INCLUDE IN COPY
Designated component types for which data from the source unit is copied and factored into the target unit. The level of detail in the target unit is determined by the Detail Copy Action option selected or if a Target Rollup Component is selected.
Each unit is designated a currency type
643, as well as exchange rates that are used to convert the unit's
local currency information to reporting currency. Enter 1 for the exchange rate if the local and reporting currency are the same currency.
In converting currency, there are several potential issues that can occur. The Pre-Tax Book Income (PTBI)
provided may be converted at different exchange rates. On a unit basis, the PTBI policy 108 can be selected
so that the correct exchange rate is used to convert. The interplay of the Weighted Average and Spot rates
may require that a Currency Translation Adjustment 644 (CTA) be posted to account for the difference in
rates. The system automatically posts the CTA as an equity adjustment to the deferred tax asset/liability.
There is only one reporting currency concept in the system. This allows the combination of units in sub- consolidated or consolidated reports in the reporting currency view. The local currency view of the report may not make sense unless all units have the same currency.
CONCEPTS
Currency Types
Functional Currency: Primary Currency in which the books of record are maintained. The currency in which an entity does business.
Local Currency: Currency of the country where the business is physically located.
Reporting Currency: Currency in which the entity reports financial statements. Reporting currency symbol options are US Dollar, Euro, and Japanese Yen. The default is US Dollar. It can be modified
758 .
Hyper inflationary Environment: When the cumulative rate of inflation exceeds 100% over the three year period, then FAS 52 requires USD to be the functional currency. The unit’s local currency should be set to USD.
Currency Options
Currency Codes: There are pre-populated currency codes
746
that can be expanded, as necessary, in
the Manage Countries/Currencies 469 screen.
Thousands Separators: The system defaults to a comma (1,000.00) for the thousands separator. The
comma can be changed to a period (1.000,00) with a system parameter
758.
ENTRY FORMAT
When entering foreign exchange rates on the Unit Details screen, the format should be the amount 1 unit of Reporting Currency would equal in Local Currency or Reporting Currency/Local Currency. For example, if reporting is USD and 1 USD equals .60 of another currency, the rate would be 1.666667 (1/.6).
Note: You cannot enter a zero FX rate.
TYPES
Weighted Average Rates: Blended foreign exchange rate for a period of time that is applied to Income Statement items.
Spot Rates: Foreign Exchange rate on a specific date that is applied to Balance Sheet items.
ADJUSTMENTS
Currency Translation Adjustment: The difference between Weighted Average rate and Spot rate, when Income Statement items have an impact on Balance Sheet items.
Change in Rate and Currency Translation
Deferred Balances Report in the Expanded (Balance Sheet) View
Beginning Balance column balances are converted using the Beginning Spot rate and the Beginning Tax rate.
The Rate Change column creates an adjustment to restate the Beginning Balance column at the Ending Spot rate and the Ending Tax rate.
All other Columns are converted using the Ending Spot rate and the Ending Tax rate.
The Ending Balance is the sum of the columns and is effectively the Ending Balances converted using Ending Spot Rate and the Ending Tax rate.
Deferred Balances Report in the CIR Expanded (Balance Sheet) View
The Rate Change column is broken out into FX Rate Change and Def Rate Change.
The FX Rate Change is the impact of the FX rate change on the beginning balance, including the impact of any FX rate change from a change in the deferred rate.
The Deferred Rate Change is the impact of the deferred rate change on the beginning balances.
More detail on each of the rate change activities can be displayed by viewing the Deferred Balances report in the Expanded (Income Statement) view.
FX Rate Change
The FX Rate Change is the impact of the FX rate change on each of the beginning balances, including the impact of any FX rate change from a change in the deferred rate:
(Beginning Balance / Beginning FX Spot Rate) – (Beginning Balance / Ending FX Spot Rate)
+ (Beginning Balance X (Ending Deferred Rate – Beginning Deferred Rate) / Ending FX Spot Rate) – (Beginning Balance X (Ending Deferred Rate – Beginning Deferred Rate) / Weighted Avg FX Rate)
Def Rate Change Computations
The Deferred Rate Change is the impact of the deferred rate change on each of the beginning balances. [((Beginning Balance X Ending Deferred Rate) / Weighted Avg FX Rate) – ((Beginning Balance X Beginning Deferred Rate) / Weighted Avg FX Rate)].
Deferred Balances Report in the Expanded (Income Statement) View
Currency Translation Adjustment.
Deferred Balances in USD are translated from Local Currency Balances using the Beginning and Ending Spot FX Rates.
USD Change in Deferred Balances.
Deferred Expense in USD is translated from the Local Currency Activity using Weighted FX Rates
USD Deferred Expense
Currency Translation Adjustment Computation
Adjusts the Weighted Average FX Impact and the Ending Spot FX Rate
Detail of CTA Calculation Components
Information for the Calculation | |||
Beginning Temporary Difference Balance | 100,000 | ||
Temporary Difference Activity | 10,000 | ||
Beginning FX Spot Rate | 0.45 | Current Tax Rate | 37% |
Ending FX Spot Rate | 0.55 | Beginning Deferred Tax Rate | 35% |
Weighted Average FX Rate | 0.50 | Ending Deferred Tax Rate | 40% |
On a Unit level, all reports can be viewed in Local Currency.
Viewing sub-consolidated or consolidated level reports in Local Currency is available if all Units have been assigned the same currency.
A Unit’s currency designation can be modified, if necessary, by an Administrator in the Manage Units
417 folder.
The error message, The Current Consolidation contains Units with multiple currencies; Cannot display Local Currency Report ..., displays when there are different currencies in the units being combined.
To view reports in the Local Currency view when the Units have different currencies, you must add the
system parameter 758 ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPORT to override the error message above and
display the report. Use care when activating the parameter. The following message appears: "The report you are about to display contains multiple currencies. The report data will not be consistent."
Currency Translation Adjustment
The system can automatically calculate Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) for all temporary differences. The calculation takes into account the differences between the Weighted Average FX Rate, Beginning Deferred FX Rate, and Ending Deferred FX Rate. It can also, if applicable, take into account any differences in Unit Tax Rates that have a foreign exchange impact.
CTA amounts can be viewed in three different reports: Tax Provision, Deferred Balances (cir expanded b/s), and Deferred Balances (expanded i/s), which is the most comprehensive report. The Tax Provision report displays the total CTA amount, while the Deferred Balances (cir expanded b/s) report only displays the CTA for the Beginning Balance. The Deferred Balances (expanded i/s) report, however, displays CTA on Activity, differences between beginning and ending tax rates, differences between current and deferred tax rates, and Deferred Only Adjustments.
There are three options for calculating CTA:
The first computes the CTA and impacts the Ending Payable accounts. The CTA is offset in an Equity account. The Ending Deferred Tax Asset/Liability accounts are then offset in an Equity account.
The second (Alternative CTA - International Financial Reporting Standards: IFRS) computes the current Tax Expense, which is offset in a Taxes Payable account. The Deferred Tax Expense is offset in the Ending Deferred Tax Asset/Liability accounts.
The third (Additional CTA) allows you to manually calculate and enter additional CTA amounts. The entry is in the Reporting Currency and After Tax Rate format. Depending on which fields are populated, the amounts could impact both Current and Deferred Tax Expense, Deferred Only Tax Expense, or Equity. Amounts are tracked and shown on reports with a system-defined After Tax Temporary Difference.
This section describes the setup involved for all three options.
Option 1 does not require any setup. The system automatically calculates CTA when applicable.
To enable the Alternative CTA calculation, you must add the dataset parameter to the system. Select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters.
Enter the following information. Parameter Name: CTA_ALT_CALC Parameter Type: Alphanumeric Parameter Value: 1
Option 3 lets you manually enter CTA calculations.
First you must add the system parameter SHOW_CTA with the value 1. Select Administration > System >
Manage Restricted Features.
Next, select a Provision dataset, click My Datasets > Units > More > Other. You can enter your CTA data manually in the Add’l CTA (Reporting) page.
This section contains scenarios for each option.
The first option for CTA is an existing feature that does not require additional setup for it to function. Only temporary differences are used for the example. However, the CTA calculation takes all types of adjustments into consideration.
UNIT TAX RATES ARE THE SAME
If there are differences in the Weighted Average FX Rate, Beginning FX Rate, and Ending FX Rate, a CTA adjustment must be made for all temporary differences.
Option 1 - Scenario A Reports
The CTA is in the Tax Provision report. It is used to calculate the Deferred Tax Provision.
EXPANDED B/S
The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (cir expanded b/s).
EXPANDED I/S
The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded i/s).
Note: You can set corresponding relationships between tag letters and report columns by selecting
Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
UNIT TAX RATES ARE DIFFERENT
If there are differences in the Weighted Average FX Rate, Beginning FX Rate, and Ending FX Rate, a CTA adjustment must be made for all temporary differences.
Note: Only temporary differences are used for example. However, the CTA calculation takes all types of temporary differences into consideration.
Option 1 - Scenario B Reports
The CTA is in the Tax Provision report. It is used to calculate the Deferred Tax Provision.
EXPANDED B/S
The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (cir expanded b/s).
EXPANDED I/S
In the Expanded I/S report, you can view the impact of the CTA through Activity, the Deferred Rate Change, the Rate Difference between Current and Deferred, and Deferred Only Adjustments.
To enable the Alternative CTA calculation, the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC must be entered by selecting the Provision dataset and clicking Data Input > Dataset > Administration > Dataset Parameters.
All calculations and deferred report data for the CTA amount are the same as for Option 1. However, the placement of the CTA amount is before the Return Basis Provision in the Tax Provision report.
Example: Unit Tax Rates are the Same
Option 2 - Scenario A Tax Provision Reports
The yellow highlighted area is where the CTA amount will be located after you add the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC.
Example: Unit Tax Rates are Different
Option 2 - Scenario B Tax Provision Reports
The yellow highlighted area is where the CTA amount will be located after you add the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC.
ADDITIONAL CTA
First, add the SHOW_CTA system parameter in Manage Configurations
481 . Next, select a Provision
dataset, click My Datasets > Units > More > Other. You can enter your CTA data manually in the Add’l CTA (Reporting) page.
The SHOW_CTA parameter also automatically generates an After-Tax Temporary Difference labeled CTA_SYS. The information entered in the Additional CTA will show up as an After-Tax Temporary Difference.
Option 3 - Scenario A Reports
The Additional CTA amount can be viewed in the Tax Provision report under After-Tax Temporary Differences. This amount is created using the system-generated After-Tax Temporary Difference CTA_SYS. EXPANDED B/S
Additional CTA information can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded b/s).
EXPANDED I/S
Additional CTA information can also be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded i/s).
Note: You can modify column names for the Deferred Balances Report (expanded b/s) by selecting the Administration section and clicking System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.
If SHOW_CTA is deactivated and data was entered in the Additional CTA, CTA values will still show up in the Tax Provision, Deferred Balances (expanded b/s), and Deferred Balances (expanded i/s) reports. Additional CTA data must be deleted for CTA values not to show up in the reports.
The Interim dataset facilitates the collection of data and the computation of the Provision during the interim
period. Using an Interim Dataset 406, you can produce the provision for the first three-quarters of the year.
The system separates the data into two data entry areas - Forecast
667 .
Forecast Type - Use to enter data and compute the Annualized Forecasted Effective Tax Rate.
Actual Type - Use to enter data and calculate the current tax on Pre-Tax Book Income from the quarter and the provision for Discrete/Extraordinary items arising in the quarter.
406
to enter your interim data. To add interim datasets to the system select
Administration > Manage Datasets > Interim Datasets.
INTERIM RATE BASIS
Using the Interim Rate Basis option lets the system determine how to apply the computed Annualized Forecasted Tax Rate to the Actual Pre-Tax Book Income. The system posts the true-up to a unit designated for the true-up (with no other adjustments) to track the true-up amount in reports.
The Overall rate basis applies the consolidated forecasted rate to all units.
The Unit-by-Unit rate basis applies each unit's component of the overall forecasted rate to the unit and posts a true-up adjustment to the designated True-Up unit.
667 descriptions for more information about this functionality.
READ-ONLY OPTIONS
Using the Read-Only option locks the dataset. After selecting Read-Only?, you cannot enter data in the dataset.
Advancing a dataset to the next quarter sets the dataset to Read-Only?, the system sets the prior
quarters to read-only for that dataset.
See the Interim Process 669 description for more information about this functionality.
IMPORT AND EXPORT OF DATA
Import/Export all quarters of forecast and actual data plus the Interim dataset configuration in Administration > Manage Datasets > Interim Datasets. Exporting from this page creates seven Excel files. The system requires all seven files to import data into the application.
555
a single quarter of forecast or actual data.
Export quarterly data by selecting the Forecast or Actual dataset in My Datasets.
Import quarterly data by selecting the Forecast or Actual dataset in My Datasets.
Interim Dataset Options
CALCULATING THE ANNUALIZED FORECAST EFFECTIVE TAX RATE
My Datasets > Forecast Unit > More > Interim Unit Details
161
INTERIM UNIT DETAILS
Enter the Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income expected for the year. You can track by a quarter or on an annual basis.
For each unit, enter the Statutory Tax Rates expected to be enacted by the end of the year.
For a state, you must include the expected apportionment factors for states/jurisdictions.
You can exclude Units from the forecast rate calculation. Exclude a unit, on a unit-by-unit basis, when the unit has a loss or when the unit has either income or a loss.
Interim Dataset Rates
Enter Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, Tax Adjustments, NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis, InterCompany Transaction Entry and State data.
Enter all known Annualized Book/Tax Differences expected to impact the effective tax rate (for
example, permanent differences, tax adjustments, and temporary differences with deferred only activity).
Manually enter amounts or import them using the Spreadsheet Import Numbers Template
556 .
DETERMINING THE BASIS THAT THE ANNUALIZED FORECAST EFFECTIVE TAX RATE SHOULD BE APPLIED
There are several ways to interpret the guidance for Interim reporting. Depending on your interpretation, you can present the Forecast Effective Tax Rate on an overall or unit-by-unit basis. You select the interim rate
basis when creating an interim dataset
406 .
REVIEWING THE ANNUALIZED FORECAST EFFECTIVE TAX RATE
342
report tor review the results of your data entry. The report has several views to
understand better how the system generates the rate.
CALCULATING THE INTERIM PROVISION FOR THE QUARTER
Populate the Actual with the Actual Pre-Tax Book Income that was generated for the quarter.
Populate the Statutory Tax Rates in effect during the quarter for each unit. For state, be sure to include the expected apportionment factors for states/jurisdictions.
Populate the Extraordinary and Discrete Items that arose during the quarter in the appropriate section.
True-up (if necessary) for the impact of a change in the forecasted annual effective tax rate on prior quarters' Pre-Tax Book Income.
Activity should be reflected in either the Payable or the APIC Pool balances for the quarter.
Populate the dataset by entering amounts directly in the system or by using the Import Numbers
556 .
INTERIM PROVISION / INTERIM EFFECTIVE TAX RATE
The system calculates the interim effective tax rate two ways:
(0) Uses total pre-tax book income that does not include the pre-tax book income of Exclude Foreign Loss and Exclude Unit units.
(1) Uses pre-tax book income that includes the pre-tax book income of all units, regardless of whether it is an Exclude Foreign Loss or Exclude Unit unit.
Use the dataset parameter 57, USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR with a parameter value of 0 or 1, to
determine how the system calculates the interim effective tax.
Although the tax effect of pre-tax book income at forecast rates of Exclude Foreign Loss and Exclude Unit units may not be included, the tax effect of its discrete items are included in the interim provision.
APPLYING THE ANNUALIZED FORECASTED EFFECTIVE TAX RATE VERSUS UNIT RATES
The system uses the Annualized Forecasted Effective Tax Rate 663 to compute the current tax on the
Pre-Tax Book Income based on either a unit-by-unit basis or on an overall basis, depending on the option you select for the dataset.
The system uses Unit Rates to compute the current, deferred taxes, and equity impact on the Extraordinary and Discrete Items for the quarter.
REVIEWING THE INTERIM PROVISION RESULTS
The Interim Provision 258 report shows the Current, Deferred, and Equity provision calculations. The
system applies the Forecast rate to the Pre-Tax Book Income,then adds that amount to the Extraordinary/Discrete items at the unit rates to arrive at the provision for the quarter. Also, there is a state level Interim Provision report.
The Effective Tax Rate Reconciliation
275
report shows the components of the interim provision.
Although, similar to the report in a Provision dataset, the Interim report has an additional line that reconciles the Forecast versuss Actual rate impact on Pre-Tax Book Income.
The Deferred Balances, Temporary Difference Summary, Foreign/Domestic Summary, Payable, and Journal Entry reports are identical to the reports in the Provision dataset. They display the data for the interim period.
The Interim Dataset contains data entry fields for Forecast and Actual data for three-quarters, eleven months or one-to-fifteen periods. When working with interim datasets, you advance a dataset to the next Quarter/ Month/Period or you Rollback to the prior Quarter/Month/Period.
PRIOR FULL YEAR TO QUARTER 1
When you designate a Provision dataset as a full year (FY), 4th quarter (Q4) or month 12 (M12), the system can use that data as the basis for Quarter 1 or Month 1 when creating an Interim dataset. You select Quarter/Month/Period when rolling over an existing provision dataset. The Period Type drop- down menu lists all available Provision datasets. Select a dataset for 4th quarter, 12th month, or full year for the year prior to the interim dataset year that you are creating.
Ending rates in the prior provision roll over to the new dataset as the beginning rates in the forecast and actual sections and the ending balances in the prior provision roll over to the new dataset beginning balances in the actual section.
ADVANCE TO NEXT QUARTER
The active Current Quarter is noted in the section under Data Review in an Interim dataset's navigator bar. When expanded, it can have several options for determining the active Current Quarter. When you create a new Interim dataset, Q1 appears as the first active Current Quarter dataset.
Advance the first quarter to the second quarter to enter data in the second quarter data entry fields. Advance the second quarter to the third quarter to enter data in the third quarter data entry fields.
Advancing a dataset to the next quarter locks the prior quarter and opens up the data entry fields for the next quarter. The system copies the Forecast data in the prior quarter to the next quarter. The Actual ending rates and balances roll forward from the prior quarter to the next quarter.
Advancing a dataset lets you review all prior quarter data entry pages and all reports, however, you can not edit the data without rolling back the quarter to the prior quarter.
ROLL BACK TO PRIOR QUARTER
Use the option to rollback to the prior quarter data entry fields if you advance a prior quarter in error or need to change data. Export your data entry in the current quarter before the rollback, then import that data when you advance the dataset.
Note: Once you advance a dataset to the next quarter, changes made in the prior quarter do not appear in the Advanced quarter. The system copies your data entry to the next quarter the first time you advance the quarter. Any subsequent time you advance to the next quarter, you must update the data (manually or by importing) in the previously advanced quarter with the rolled back quarter data. You can export and re-import the Forecasted data into the previously advanced quarter. For example, if you adjust the Actual ending balances in the rolled back quarter (temporary difference, NOL, payable, and so forth.), you must adjust the beginning balances in the next quarter.
Advance | Rollback Quarter
You can generate an interim state forecasted tax rate based on multi states. When the system generates a Forecast State Rate, it includes the impact of the forecast state apportionment.
ACTUAL APPORTIONMENT TOTALS 100% FOR ALL UNITS
In the Actual section of the software, if the Apportionment for a unit adds up to 100%, then the system properly allocates 100% of the Actual PTBI and multiplies it by the Forecasted State Rate post forecasted apportionment.
ACTUAL APPORTIONMENT IS GREATER/LESS THAN 100% FOR ANY UNIT
In the Actual section of the software, if the Apportionment for a unit is less than or more than 100%, the system does not accrue the correct amount and an adjustment must be made. The software first apportions the PTBI by the Actual Apportionment and then apply the Forecasted State Rate, which already has the impact for the Apportionment from the Forecast included.
To allocate 100% of the PTBI, activate an additional state (possibly AO All Other) in the unit and enter the difference between the total units apportionment as Current Apportionment for that state. No other apportionment or tax rates need to be entered for the state. It is not recommended that you change the apportionment in the existing active states, because they may obtain an incorrect accrual for the state tax time apportionment for discrete items.
To quantify the amount that the unit is over or under 100%, an Administrator can run a query in the TS
351 .
Copy the following query statement: select u.code, d.name, sum(STATEAPPRATE) from UNITSTATEDATASETS usd, units u, datasets d where usd.datasetid=(<cc_dataset>) and u.unitid=usd.unitid and d.datasetid=usd.datasetid group by u.code, d.name.
Paste the query in the top section of the TS Database Analyzer screen and click Run Query.
A 4-column report is generated that lists all active units with the sum of the state apportionment. If the result is .85, create a state in that unit with a current apportionment of 15% or if the result is 1.12% then create a state in that unit with a current apportionment of (12)%.
INTERIM FORECAST STATE RATE
You can calculate the forecast state rate two ways. The designation is made by using the
USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE dataset parameter 57 with a paramvalue of 0 or 1.
The system uses pre-tax book income that includes only units with an active state record if you set the dataset Parameter Value to 0.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE
Parameter Value: 0
The system uses pre-tax book income that includes the pre-tax book income of all units, regardless of whether it has an active or inactive state record if you set the Parameter Value to 1.
Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE
Parameter Value: 1
Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE applies to both Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.
The Journal Entry functionality includes general concepts, Journal Entry Reports and Journal Entry setup.
Although, the functionality is similar, the difference between Journal Entry Configuration and Journal Entry Profile is where you set up and maintain your journal entries in the application.
You can use the JE configuration 677 to set up your journal entries at the Unit level. This is the initial
journal entry functionality available in the application.
You can use the Journal Entry Profile 679 to set up your journal entries at the Dataset level. This is
additional journal entry functionality is applicable to multiple units.
The Journal Entry (JE) Report options are:
673 which is known as the default view
675 .
673
for a flexible approach to accounts, calculations, and format. You
must activate the JE parameter for this option.
Use the Configurable JE report 673 to create a "user specified" version of the custom JE Module. To
use this option, you must obtain a license
677
and activate an additional parameter
677 .
ONESOURCE Tax Provision calculates the components of the Total Tax Provision, Current Provision & Deferred Provision.
Adjust Tax Accounts on the books to reflect the Provision.
Use Journal Entries to make Book adjustments by using the Trial Balance.
Use Deferred Only Adjustments to impact the ending balances and deferred expense.
Note: ONESOURCE Tax Provision is not account driven for provision calculations.
The provision calculation is independent of the General Ledger account structure. Accounts impacted by ONESOURCE Tax Provision's calculated amounts include:
Accounts assigned during the journal entry configuration.
Accounts mapped for each Journal Entry.
Each General Ledger account mapped to one or more ONESOURCE Tax Provision's Calculation and one or more book account.
Data entry fields and their impacts on the calculation for reporting.
Current Tax Provision | Deferred Tax Provision | Ending Balances | |
Current Activity | X | X | X |
Deferred Only Adjustments | X | ||
Balance Sheet Only Adjustments | X | ||
Tax Adjustments | X |
Core Calculation Overview
Simple Journal Entry (default view)
The simple Journal Entry Report is the default view of the Provision Journal Entry (simple/old)
339 report. The
simple journal entry report shows journal entries with a fixed number of book and tax accounts. The system uses the fixed set of book values for tax accounts from the Taxes Per Book page.
The report output is in a fixed format. However, you can export it to Excel to customize the report.
No breakout of assets/liabilities, current/non-current
No reference to GL Accounts
Not in Debit/(Credit) format
Not Configurable
To access the simple journal data entry page select My Datasets > Units > More > Other > Taxes Per Book.
For example, the system calculates adjustments for the following book accounts:
Current Tax Expense is $100 on books
Tax Provision calculates Current Tax Provision of $106
Adjustment of $6 needed to Current Tax Expense
Taxes Per Book - Fixed Set of Book Values for Tax Accounts
The system creates each journal entry by comparing the following:
ONESOURCE Tax Provision value
Book value
Difference: ONESOURCE Tax Provision and Book
Note: You can also view journal entry (JE) reports using configurable JE or custom JE functionality.
The Customized JE is based on your specifications and provides a flexible approach to accounts, calculations, and format. The Custom Journal Entry lets you account for a more complex set of tax
accounts. See the example for Journal Entry Data-Support for a complex set of Tax Accounts
693 .
Ability to use data in the Taxes Per Book
675
fields.
Uses the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Trial Balance to store the Taxes Per Book amounts.
Allows an unlimited number of Tax Accounts.
Provides Journal Entry by Unit and by Filing Group.
Uses a sample Journal Entry report for more complex set of Tax Accounts.
Uses a custom Journal Entry to extract specific accounts based on special settings (JE_TBSL_xx).
Isolates sets of deferreds (Val. Allowance) - Specified by configuration giving first few characters of deferreds, for example, JE_FILTER1 = VA.
Breaks out assets/liabilities, current/non-current.
Isolates Balance Sheet Only adjustments (by tag).
Isolates Tax Adjustments.
Allows summation of multiple account values.
Allows upload of G/L amounts by using spreadsheet or Bridge import.
You can customize the journal entry report based on a your specifications. The system lets you combine
each of the calculations in the system, as well as data in either the taxes per book
201 lines, to create a journal entry report. Mappings are hard-coded in a stylesheet.
Please contact your Client Manager for assistance with creating a custom report.
You can configure the Journal entry report to an expanded version. The system lets you combine each of the
provision calculations in the system, and data in either the taxes per book
201 lines,
to create a journal entry report. You need to add several parameters to use the configurable JE functionality. The Journal Entries page lets you configure how calculations and other data appear in the Output Journal Entries reports.
The Configurable JE module provides a flexible mechanism for generating tax Journal Entries. You must consider several factors when configuring this module.
For further assistance, contact either your Client Manager or the Tax Provision support
LICENSE
15 team.
You must have an appropriate License Code and License Key to view Configurable JE reports. Administrators enter this information by selecting the Administration > System > Manage Licenses.
Note: Hosted clients cannot enter the license information and must contact the Tax Provision Technical Support team to get the license assigned to their account.
Manage Licenses
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
Level of Data
You can set up the lines of the Journal Entry to show the results as a summary or with details. The level for a company’s tax accounts determines the number of required lines. Some require, even when all tax account balances go to one account, you must enter the components of the journal entry at the data entry level.
Types of Data
You can configure the various components of the provision:
The standard current and deferred tax impact of the provision.
The impact of Equity items on an income statement and balance sheet.
Other items that occur, such as the impact of RTP and uncertain tax positions.
The impact of an amount provided from a previous quarter in the payable or deferred tax asset/liability unit-by-unit.
Set up Units at a granular level. Book units within a filing group on the parent or on the unit. Calculate Journal entries for both.
Mappings are for Federal amounts or State amounts.
Configure Unit by Unit
You can set up some units at a granular level and others at a topside level.
Units that are part of a filing group can be booked on the parent or unit – Journal Entries will be calculated for both.
Federal/State/Foreign
All mappings can be done for the federal / state / foreign amounts.
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Determine the journal entry configuration on a unit-by-unit basis in My Datasets > Units > More > Journal Entries.
After configuring each unit's JE, you can import data for all units using the Import Numbers template the following worksheets: #JES# Journal Entries, #JETAX# JE Tax Calcs, and #JEGL# JE GL Calcs.
REPORTS
556
with
You can view Journal Entry reports 691 for a single unit, filing group, sub-consolidated, or consolidated
basis (if the local currency is the same). Select Reporting > Journal Entry > Output Journal Entries. You can assign up to 99 custom reports for Output Journal Entries.
All users can view JE reports.
Amounts appear in a Credit Debit format.
Unlike most reports, this functionality is not self-reconciling. There are no system checks. Make sure you have configured the Journal Entry, correctly. Reports will show Journal Entry does not net to zero.
Note: The Configurable Journal Entry module provides a flexible mechanism for generating tax Journal Entries. There are some factors to consider when configuring this module.
For further assistance, contact either your Client Manager or the support 15 department.
The report has a flexible approach for the book and tax accounts as well as the format.
Each journal line is configured separately.
You can create one or more lines for a debit/credit balance.
You can configure and maintain the data, once set up.
Use to review the granular components of Tax Provision Calculation.
Allows for summation by GL Account.
Breaks out Federal and State (all, individual or groups) calculations.
Provides Journal Entries by Unit and Filing Group.
Note: You activate the Configurable JE report by selecting Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries > Enable Configurable Journal Entry.
Use Journal Entry Profiles to manage your journal entries at the dataset level for multiple units by selecting My Datasets > More > Journal Entry Profiles.
For each dataset, Journal Entry Profiles lets you
Create multiple JE profiles
Copy JE profiles
Use Profile Definition, Journal Lines, and Assigned Units tabs to set up your journal entry profiles.
Note: You Import/Export JE profiles in the My Datasets page.
Use the Profile Definition to select classes for the Journal Entry Profile. You can choose to include all classes, or one or more classes to isolate specific journal entry calculations.
Use Journal Lines to set up the Journal Entry lines.
Use Assigned Units to assign units to the Journal Entry Profiles.
Use Journal Lines to Add, Delete, and Copy journal entry lines.
You configure and maintain each journal entry line separately.
Use one or more lines to debit/credit an account.
Provides granular components of Tax Provision Calculation.
Allows for Summations by GL Account.
Breaks out Federal and State (all, individual or groups) calculations.
Provides Journal Entries by Unit and Filing Group.
Use Journal Lines to determine the JE Type, JE Code, JE Summary, Name (Description), Debit Account, and Credit Account.
JE Type: Jurisdiction or locality reference for the journal line. The options include: Federal, State - All, individual states, and state groups.
JE Code and Description: Each JE line is determined by a user-defined Code and Name (Description). The Code and Name (Description) appear in the JE report.
JE Summary: Custom grouping of Journal Entries. Select the JE Type then select one of the custom groups you've created from the JE Summary drop-down.
Note: JE Summary codes are optional.You are not required to have information in the JE Summary field. Select Administration > System > Journal Entry Summary to create JE Summary codes.
Debit GL Account/Credit GL Account: Accounts from the Trial Balance Sublines where a debit or credit amount is posted in the general ledger. If the calculated amount is positive, the system uses the debit account. If the calculated amount is negative, the system uses the credit account.
Journal Lines Data
Note: To see accounts in the Debit GL Account/Credit GL Account lists, you must select the JE Post option for that subline code, when setting up the Trial Balance Sublines.
To view the accounts set up in Trial Balance Sublines select Administration > Manage Trial Balances >
Trial Balance Sublines > JE Post.
Use the supplemental information fields to add information for your journal entry lines. These fields are set up in Administration using the Flex field parameters and are for informational purposes only. You can select to show/hide this supplemental information in the Journal Lines page.
Each Journal Entry line can have up to 9 user-defined Supplemental Information fields that appear in the Journal Entry Report, allowing you to provide data needed for the JE to be entered in the accounting software.
Sample fields include: Posting GL Account, Posting Sub Account, Organization, Cost Center, Department, Budget Code, Currency Code, Account Name, JE Description, and JE number.
Supplemental Information is pushed to the output journal entry database table displays on the JE report.
Supplemental Information only appears in the JE Export detail report.
Notes:
Although the system does not use Supplemental Information fields for journal entry calculations, you can use them to group like entries together when creating a JE file for the general ledger.
Use the JE_Supplemental_Label# to create labels for Supplemental Information fields.
Supplemental Information - Example
Field Number | Parameter Key | Sample Parameter Value |
1 | JE_Supplemental_Label1 | Cost Center |
2 | JE_Supplemental_Label2 | Department Code |
3 | JE_Supplemental_Label3 | Profit Center |
To access the Supplemental Labels select Administration > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries > Journal Entry Supplement Field Name #.
Supplemental Information - Data Entry Fields
Tax Calculations and GL Sources allows the configuration of the components of the journal entry. You can configure the data and calculations to create the debit and credit lines making up the journal entry that is booked for tax. The factors convert the signs to achieve a debit-credit format for the journal entry. A valid journal entry requires that debits and credits equal one another.
TAX CALCULATIONS
Lets you assign tax calculations or other data in the system to create a line item in the journal entry. Factors are used to adjust the derived calculated number. Federal and State Calculations and other data can be mapped as separate lines or grouped together in one line depending on the level of detail that is in the General Ledger. Amounts displayed in the JE are in Local Currency, not Reporting Currency.
Available Calculations
Current Tax Expense
Current Provision - Profit & Loss
Current Provision - Equity Offset
Income Statement – Equity Offset
Tax Adjustments
Payable Balances (Federal and State)
Provision (Total Deferred Expense: activity+deferred)
Deferred Provision Activity (Activity only)
Deferred Provision – Other Tax Adjustments (Deferred only)
Balance Sheet Only Adjustments (Equity Offset)
Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities (Ending Balance and Starting Balance)
Rounding (the difference caused by rounding between the Deferred Provision and the Ending Deferred Balance – Starting Balance – Balance Sheet Only Adjustments)
Deferred Provision Related (activity, deferred only, expense, rounding)
Balance Sheet Only Adjustments
Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities
Federal Return Basis Provision
GL SOURCES
Lets you assign account balances from Trial Balance data that is populated in the application (typically by the bridge import). You can consider amounts previously booked in tax accounts, for prior quarters, when provision data is on a year-to-date basis. The system creates a journal entry for the incremental amount to be booked.
Tax Calculations & GL Sources
Use Tax Calculations to filter calculations by group and view the tax calculation list.
Use GL Sources to determine the account balances from Trial Balance data.
Use Assigned Units to add one or more units to journal entry profiles. Journal Entries are assigned on a unit
by unit basis.
UNIT ASSIGNMENT
Allows for assignment of one or more units to each profile
Each unit can have either Journal Entry profiles or Unit Journal Entry configurations, not both
When assigning a unit that has previous entries defined a notice will appear. If OK is selected, previous journal entry configurations at the unit level will be permanently deleted.
UNIT LEVEL JOURNAL ENTRIES
The previous iteration of the JE functionality.
Unlike the Profile where you can just assign units, the Unit Level JE exists in every unit within My Datasets > Units > More > Journal Entries.
Your unit can only have one or the other: Unit assigned to JE Profile or Unit Level JE configurations.
The Data Entry section is the same as the JE profile JE line creation.
The import sheets are different from Profile sheets and exist just before the profile sheets in a numbers export.
Can be used with both Tags and Class Datasets.
Note: Each unit can have either Journal Entry profiles (Dataset level) or Unit Journal Entry configurations (Unit level), not both. When assigning a unit to a Journal Entry Profile at the "Dataset" level, if that unit has journal entries defined at the "Unit" level, a message appears letting you know that, if you continue, the journal entry configurations at the unit level will be permanently deleted.
Journal Entries System Parameters
ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY
You can activate the parameters in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries.
The simple journal entry is available by default.
The Configurable Journal Entry provides User Configurable screens to map calculations and other items in the system with general ledger accounts.
The Configurable Journal Entry Report generates the Output JE - Base report found under Output Journal Entries in the reports list.
Supplemental_Label# (1-9) system parameters with a paramvalue of the desired header text, configures headings in the configurable journal entry pages and reports. There are nine Supplemental Information fields for entering journal entry data. This parameter lets you configure each field name, which also appears as a header in reports.
Journal Entries Parameters
REPORTING
A rounding system parameter for reports lets you see the same balance for the JE tax calculation and the deferred. To create JE reports with rounded numbers after summation, select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Other > Calculate Reports using alternate rounding > Yes.
Note: Only Administrators are able to turn on this functionality.
Additional Configuration Options
FILTERS
Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, and Ending Deferred Balance calculations can be isolated and grouped based on filters. Up to nine filters can be created. Each filter applies to both federal and the related state amounts. In addition to the use of filters, you can configure journal entries by adding or subtracting components or by using rollups.
The system parameters JE_FILTER#, with a paramvalue of a Temporary Difference Code, and JE_FILTER_NAME#, with a paramvalue of the filter group name, need to be activated to use filters. Filters add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen. The Base filter group contains the amount left over after all filters have been applied.
The system parameter JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET_CODE, with a paramvalue of the component rollup
set code of the rollup group, needs to be activated to use rollups. (Use the Manage Rollups 536 screen to
create rollup sets and groups.) Rollup groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.
TAG GROUPS
Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, Ending Deferred Balance, and Payable calculations can be isolated and grouped based on tags. Up to nine tag groups can be created. Each tag group applies to both federal and the related state amounts.
The system parameters JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME, with a paramvalue of the tag group name, and JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS, with a paramvalue of a group of tags separated by commas, need to be activated to use tag groups. Tag groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.
GAAP TO STAT / STAT TO TAX
Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, and Ending Deferred Balance calculations can be isolated and grouped based on the GAAP to Stat and Stat to Tax breakout. The GAAP to Stat and Stat to Tax breakout applies to both federal and the related state amounts.
STATE GROUPS
You can group similar states together, based on their common general ledger accounts. Up to nine state groups can be created.
The system parameters JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_#, with a paramvalue of the state group name, and JE_STATE_GROUP_%_STATE##, with a paramvalue of a state code, need to be activated to use state groups. State groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.
Journal Entry Standard Reports
Journal Entry reports can be viewed on a single unit, filing group, sub-consolidated or consolidated basis (if the local currency is the same). All users can view the Journal Entry reports.
To access the Journal Entry reports, select Reporting > Journal Entry > Output Journal Entries.
ONESOURCE Tax Provision Reports are self-reconciling, and some tax calculation balances, in Output Journal Entry Reports, will tie back to other reports using the correct filters, for example, Tax Provision and Deferred Balances.
OUTPUT JE – BASE (UNIT SUMMARY AND UNIT DETAIL, FG DETAIL)
This report will yield all calculated JE values based on Debit/Credit “GL Account” designation within the profile. It will list as many Journal Lines as you have created and show the value under the Debit or Credit column based on whether the balances net to positive or negative (Debit = Positive, Credit = Negative).
Unit Summary will net all units in the consolidated, sub-consolidated report level. Unit Detail will break lines out by unit.
FG Detail report will net values across the FG parent and child units. You will not see a breakout of units on this report, just the parent unit.
OUTPUT JE – JE BY GL ACCOUNT
This report will net the GL account values from the Output JE Base report, regardless of jurisdiction. The total of this report may not match the Base due to the way the numbers net together. For example, two GL Accounts with a Debit balance net with a GL Account that has a Credit Balance can net to a Debit or Credit designation.
OUTPUT JE – JE BY GL ACCOUNT (BY LOCALITY, BY UNIT, BY UNIT AND LOCALITY)
By Locality: this report will respect jurisdictions and separate the JE Base report into Federal and State. By Unit (available in consolidated or sub-consolidation): Each unit section should tie back to the unit level report for the JE by GL account since this report just combines those individual reports and displays them together.
By Unit and Locality (available in consolidated or sub-consolidation): This report will give you the JE by GL account (by Locality) for each unit.
OUTPUT JE CALCULATION DETAIL (UNIT SUMMARY AND UNIT DETAIL)
Book values come from Trial Balance Tax Basis data entry screen. These are the GL sources specified in the Profile.
Tax values are calculated based on tax calculations in JE Profile.
The most detailed Output JE that will give you information on the JE Profile associated with the Locality, GL Account, JE Profile, Journal Line Code and Name, the Locality, Book or Tax designation, and Amounts).
OUTPUT JE – JE SUMMARY BY GL ACCOUNT
Similar to the JE by GL account, this report utilizes the JE Summary field in the JE Profile Journal Lines setup to breakout JE reports further.
OUTPUT JE – JE SUMMARY BY GL ACCOUNT (BY LOCALITY)
Similar to the JE by GL account (by Locality) report, this report will net values between Fed and State, while still breaking out the report by JE Summary.
OUTPUT JE – EXPORT DETAIL
This report is the same as the JE Base (unit detail) with extra details from the JE Profile Line including supplemental data, an audit trail of when the JE was created, and details of whether any system, dataset, or
unit-dataset parameters are associated with the line.
OUTPUT JE – CONFIGURATION DETAIL
This report details the JE Profile configuration details regarding the number of JE lines, number of Tax Calculations, number of GL sources (book), and whether a unit is assigned to the JE profile in question. Best report to validate across Reporting Datasets as this report gives you a dataset column.
JOURNAL ENTRY SUPPORT REPORT
This report summarizes Tax Calculations and Book GL Source values with acronyms.
Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of Tax Accounts
Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of Tax Accounts
Unit Code | Account Number | Account Description | Book Value | Tax Provision Value | Adjustment |
Income Statement | |||||
A1000 | 123001 | Current Tax Expense | 1,800,000 | 2,006,900 | 206,900 |
A1000 | 123009 | Current Tax Expense for Equity | 0 | 0 | 0 |
A1000 | 123002 | Deferred Tax Expense (Current) | -100,000 | -175,000 | -75,000 |
A1000 | 123003 | Deferred Tax Expense (Non- Current) | 0 | 0 | |
Balance Sheet: Assets | |||||
A1000 | 123001 | Deferred Tax Assets (Current) | 65,800 | 175,000 | 109,200 |
A1000 | 123012 | Deferred Tax Assets (Non-Current) | 0 | 0 | 0 |
Example - Journal Entry Calculations
CURRENT PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY
Debits | Credits | |
Current Tax Expense | 1,593,725 | |
Taxes Payable | 1,593,725 |
JOURNAL ENTRY CALCULATION (B/S)
DEFERRED TAX PROVISION | ||
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability | Debits 207,813 | Credits |
Deferred Tax Expense | 207,813 | |
JOURNAL ENTRY CALCULATION (I/S)
TOTAL DEFERRED PROVISION | ||
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability | Debits 207,813 | Credits |
Deferred Tax Expense | 207,813 | |
DEFERRED PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY (I/S APPROACH)
DEFERRED PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY
(B/S APPROACH)
Total Ending Balances 17,857,028
Balance Sheet Only Adjs (17,500,000)
Total Beginning Balances (149,215)
= Deferred Provision 207,813
Temporary Difference Activity 559,180 x Tax Rate 35%
+ After-Tax Temporary Diff Activity 12,100
= Deferred Provision 207,813
Use the Payable Functionality (Recommended) to track payments, refunds, and other adjustments in the taxes payable account.
ACTIVATING THE PAYABLE
By default, the system activates the Payable Functionality (Recommended) parameter. You can activate
765 parameters for additional Payable functionality.
To activate Payable system parameters select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable.
To activate Payable dataset parameters select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters.
PAYABLE
The Payable is a component of the Provision dataset.
Users who previously used Liability tab functionality and now wish to use integrated dataset Payable
functionality must first contact the support group 15 to ensure that data is properly migrated before the
Payable functionality in the Provision dataset is activated.
If Liability tab functionality was never used, no migration is necessary.
PAYABLE SET-UP
Configure the payable report by setting up items in Administration > Manage Payable
450 .
Activate the Automatic posting 701 of the current cash provision on a dataset-by-dataset basis.
The payable data entry default lets you enter only activity with dates within the dataset's period. To
enter activity for any date, activate the system parameter 758 , Adjust Payable Date Range.
Activating the Adjust Payable Date Range removes the date restriction and allows data entry in the Payable with dates that are outside the dataset period. For example, you can enter data in a 2016 full year dataset with dates that are outside 1/1/2016 to 12/31/2016.
PAYABLE REPORTING
Use the two payable report types: Payable Rollforward
335 and Payable Detail
337. Each report shows the
payable information in a different format and has various views to adjust the report's format.
Payable Functionality System Parameters
See Payable Settings 79
Summary.
for information about assigning Transaction Types to a Custom Tab for the Payable
The system computes the Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) on a transaction-by-transaction basis using a transaction's Weighted Average FX rate and the Unit’s Ending Spot rate. Use the Payable Summary Entry page to add your data by selecting My Datasets > More > Payable Summary Entry.
Enter all amounts for the Payable in Local Currency.
Enter the Weighted Average FX rate on a transaction-by-transaction basis. You cannot enter a zero FX rate.
Modify the Automatic Postings pre-populated with the Unit’s Weighted Average FX rate.
View the Payable Rollforward and Payable Detail reports in Local and Reporting Currency.
View the CTA amounts in the Payable Rollforward, and Payable Detail reports.
Access Payable Summary Entry
Payable Summary Entry
You can add a Dataset Parameter to let the provision automatically post to the Payable.
Current Provision Posting | Fiscal Year | Payable Txn | Payable |
Cash Activity | |||
Current Tax Provision excluding Tax Adjs with NC code | Dataset Year | CPROV | Calculated Provision |
Non-Cash Activity | |||
NC_RTP | Dataset Year minus 1 | RTP | Calculated True-Up |
NC_RTP_YEAR_NAME | Year entered after NC_RTP_ | RTP | Calculated True-Up |
NC_ATR | Dataset Year minus 1 | ATR | Audit Settlement |
NC_ATR_YEAR_NAME | Year entered after NC_ATR_ | ATR | Audit Settlement |
NC_OTHER | Dataset Year minus 1 | OTHER | Other |
The system posts the Federal amount in the Federal Payable Entry. You can add the parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable Functionality (Recommended) > Yes. The system posts each state in that State’s Payable Entry. The automatic posting defaults to the payable bucket named LIAB, however, you can configure to other buckets at the Dataset, Unit, or Unit State level. The configuration is done by adding dataset, unit, or unit state parameters that all start with PAYABLE_.
The automatic posting uses 12/31 for the dataset year. To post for a fiscal year, the system
parameter, FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET 759 , lets you determine a different month end. You can add
the parameter by selecting Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality. Select an option in the Designate Calendar/Fiscal Year for Posting list.
To return to manual entry, you can can turn off the automatic posting to the Payable module by deleting the Dataset Parameter or by changing the Key Value from Y to N.
The Payable Reclass functionality uses the Dataset configuration to determine how the payable computed in unit(s) is reclassed and posted in a different unit.
You can reclass provision amounts between units in the Payable Entry page of the system. Using the reclass functionality, you can transfer data for multiple companies to a single parent unit (or paying unit). The system transfers the entire tax from the unit (where it was originally posted) to the parent unit.
Note: The Recalc Payable Reclasses parameter.
702
option is available when you add a dataset and system
Use this section to set up the parameters for a payable reclass to occur.
ACTIVATION
Payable System Parameters
To activate the Recalc Payable Reclasses system parameter select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable > Payable Reclass Functionality > Yes.
Payable Dataset Parameters
To activate the Recalc Payable Reclasses dataset parameter 57 select My Datasets > More > Dataset
Parameters > Add > type PAYRECTYPE for the Parameter value. Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.
Select one of the following values:
0: Disables all Payable Reclass automation.
1: Reclasses both Federal and State auto-posted payables to the unit identified by the unit level parameter PAYRECUNIT (or performs no reclassification if that unit level parameter is missing).
2: Reclasses Federal auto-posted payables to the unit identified by the unit level parameter PAYRECUNIT, and State payables to the equivalent state in the unit specified by the state level parameter PAYRECUNIT (or performs no reclassification if that unit level parameter is missing).
Note: If the dataset parameter PAYRECTYPE is missing or contains an invalid value, the system automatically inputs a value of 1.
Unit Dataset Parameter
When you need to reclass a unit’s auto-generated payable transactions to a parent unit, add the unit dataset
parameter 106. You add the parameter in every child unit for which the payable is to be reclassed.
To add the unit dataset parameter select My Datasets > Units > More > Unit Dataset Parameters.
Type PAYRECUNIT for the Parameter Name.
Select Alphanumeric as the Parameter Type.
Select the Unit Code(Parent) for Parameter Value.
Unit State Dataset Parameter
When you need to reclass a unit’s auto-generated payable transactions to a parent unit at the state level,
add the unit dataset parameter reclassed.
135 . You add the parameter in every child unit for which the payable is to be
To add parameters in Unit State Dataset Parameters select My Datasets > Units > Fed/State > Unit State Dataset Parameters.
Type PAYRECUNIT for the Parameter Name.
Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.
Select the Unit Code(Parent) for Parameter Value.
Note: It is possible to reclassify many units to a single target unit. For example, you can reclassify units A, B and C to unit X. The reclassification payable transaction entries in the target unit X represents the aggregation of all the reclassification's from each of A, B and C.
After setting up the Payable Reclass, the system posts the provision in the child unit
27. Review the
provision amounts originally posted at the child level for accuracy. Then, select My Datasets > Calculate >
Recalc Payable Reclasses. Recalc Payable Reclasses
The reclass uses similar (but different) transaction types to move amounts between entities:
Provision Reclass
CPROV CPROV-REC
RTP RTP-REC
ATR ATR-REC
OTHER OTHER-REC
The system transfers the provision posting from the child to the parent character from the original posting. Also,
27 , keeping the year level and
The system removes all payable transactions, CPROV-REC, ATR-REC, RTP-REC, and OTHER-REC tagged with a C.
The system looks for the units that have the PAYRECUNIT unit and/or state level parameters configured and creates new payable transactions that cancel out the CPROV, ATR, RTP and OTHER payable transactions posted by the Payable Auto-posting. (These are type CPROV-REC, ATR-REC, RTP-REC, and OTHER-REC tagged with a C.)
The system creates additional payable transactions in the target units. (These are type CPROV-REC, ATR-REC, RTP-REC, and OTHER-REC tagged with a C).
702
for more information about the Recalc Payable Reclasses option.
You can isolate Payable Reclasses in reports by assigning transaction types to a Reclass Rollup code in Administration.
First, you create a reclass rollup code within the Manage Payable Rollups page. Select Administration >
Manage Payable > Manage Payable Rollups > Add >
Type the Code and Name. Manage Payable Rollups
Then, assign the reclass rollup code to the following transaction types:
CPROV-REC
RTP-REC
ATR-REC
OTHER-REC
Select Manage Payable Txn Types and then Code.
Next, type the Code, the Name and then select the Rollup code.
Manage Payable Txn Types
Example: Reclass on Payable Rollforward
OUTSIDE OF DATASET YEARS
The default configuration when using the Payable module assumes that the user is a calendar year taxpayer and that payments and transactions are limited to the current year or period. The system designates the current year and current period by using the settings assigned when creating the dataset. For example, if you create a dataset as a 2015 Full Year Dataset, the system does not let you to enter transactions with a date of 1 January 2016 or greater. If the dataset is a 2016 First Quarter dataset, you can enter transactions between 1 January 2016 and 31 March 2016.
To enable greater flexibility when using the Payable Reclass functionality, you can deactivate this constraint and enter or import data outside the dataset ranges. To disable the time constraint, activate the system parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable
Limit Payable Date Range > Yes.
You must activate the parent unit for the system to post the Payable Reclass from the child unit in the parent unit. The system does not warn the user when the parent unit is not activated.
This section gives an overview of the Custom Sub-Consolidation (CSC) Functionality and information about how to include headers and footers in reports.
Use the Consolidated Sub-Consolidation
Create user-defined Headers and Footers
708 functionality to view tiered Sub-Consolidations.
710 for reports.
Custom Sub-Consolidation Reporting
OVERVIEW OF CUSTOM SUB-CONSOLIDATION (CSC) FUNCTIONALITY
By default, the system configures reports using the Custom Sub-Consolidation system parameters for the
Tax Provision and Effective Tax Rate.
The Custom Sub-Consolidation system parameter lets you:
View the Tax Provision and Effective Tax Rate reports at the sub-consolidated level showing Sub Consolidation, rather than Unit detail.
Create multiple CSC groupings in the system; for example, define one CSC to view units by region and another to view units by management lines.
To review the parameter, select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting.
SET-UP OF CSC
Add CSC Breakout View in the Tax Provision tab.
758
481
Add CSC Breakout Report in the Effective Tax Rate tab.
Add Consolidated PTBI Reconciliation in the Effective Tax Rate tab.
TO CREATE THE SUB-CONSOLIDATIONS:
In Manage Units > Unit Sub-Consolidations 419 , create a parent sub-consolidation beginning with
CSC#_X_. You can have multiple CSC breakout's by multiple parent Sub-Consolidations (for example, CSC1_X_Regions and CSC2_X_Management). In each of the parent sub-consolidations, include all units for the child Sub-Consolidation.
To create a parent add a Code, and Name.
In Manage Units > Unit Sub-Consolidations 419 , create multilple child sub-consolidations starting with
CSC#_ (for example, CSC1_North America and CSC1_EMEA or CSC2_Corporate, CSC2_Manufacturing).
Include all units defined for the Parent CSC in only one Child sub-consolidation to ensure that report results are meaningful.
To create a child add a Code, and Name.
In the following example, D1000, D2000, F1000, and F2000 can only belong to one child sub-consolidation, either CSC1_Domestic or CSC1_Foreign.
Unit Code | CSC1 X Worldwide | CSC1 Domestic | CSC1 Foreign |
D1000 | X | X | |
D2000 | X | X | |
F1000 | X | X | |
F2000 | X | X |
D1000, D2000, F1000, and F2000 can only belong to one child sub-consolidation, either CSC1_Domestic or CSC1_Foreign.
To import, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSC# Sub-Consolidations sheet in the Import Categories template. You can create a sheet named #CSC2#, which allows the creation and population of multiple sub-consolidations for a Unit. Column A should have the Unit Code and Columns B through IV should have the CSCs in which the unit should be included. Existing unit designations in a CSC are replaced, not appended, when the #CSC2# is imported. This sheet does not export when categories are exported and is not in the standard template for import categories.
VIEWING CSC REPORTS
After activating parameters, the Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout report is available.
To display a report, be sure to select the parent sub-consolidation (for example, CSC1_X_Regions and CSC2_X_Management) in the Report Level list. The report displays a Total column and a column for each CSC.
To activate the Header and Footer functionality, an Administrator must activate system parameters
758 in
481 .
Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Other > Formatting.
In addition, the Client Name in Reports adds the client name in report pages, as well as in the header of printed reports.
Stock Options issuances and exercises under FAS 123R may impact different aspects of the tax provision.
You must consider both pre-adoption FAS 123R and post-adoption FAS 123R rules when providing for the Stock Based Compensation in the provision.
Track the APIC (Additional Paid in Capital) Pool balance to ensure proper treatment of the exercises in the future.
Activate the APIC Pool system parameter
712 to view the APIC Pool
304
report.
PRE FAS 123R AND INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS
At Issuance
There is no impact on the tax provision on issuance.
Upon Exercise
Typically these options, when exercised, impact the Current Tax Expense, which offsets in Equity.
This type of option was vested before the adoption of FAS 123R or consists of qualifying distributions of Incentive Stock Options (ISOs).
To impact the current provision and an offset in equity, enter the option expense details as a
permanent difference 174 with Type E for Equity Adjustment.
STOCK BASED COMPENSATION
At Issuance
Certain options issued and vested after the adoption of FAS 123R are amortized as stock-based compensation expense for book.
For tax, you must reverse stock-based compensation amortization during the vesting of options. You can accomplish this by entering the amortization amount as temporary difference activity.
Reversing the book expense builds a Deferred Tax Asset that can later be offset when options are exercised.
Upon Exercise
Options issued and vested after the adoption of FAS 123R or disqualifying distributions of ISOs that are exercised generate a Current Tax Expense. The offset to the current tax expense may be to Equity or may have an impact on P&L.
You enter the option expense as activity for the temporary difference vesting period.
You must determine the Excess Benefit/Detriment treatment.
187 that was created during the
Enter Excess Benefit or Windfall (tax expense is greater than the book expense) as a Balance Sheet Only adjustment to the temporary difference to remove the remaining deferred tax liability created when the tax expense was taken. The same amount is an addition to the APIC pool.
Excess Detriment or Shortfall (tax expense is less than the book expense) requires measurement against the APIC pool to determine if there is available APIC to offset the detriment. If there is capacity in the APIC pool, enter the detriment as a Balance Sheet Only adjustment to the temporary difference to remove the remaining deferred tax asset. If there is no APIC pool or not enough to absorb the entire detriment, enter the excess amount as a Deferred Only adjustment to the temporary difference. The excess detriment will reduce the APIC pool. Be sure that the APIC pool does not go below zero.
APIC POOL FUNCTIONALITY
Use APIC Pool Functionality to track balances in the APIC Pool on a unit-by-unit basis. The APIC Pool tracks the beginning balances and all activity that occurs during the period. When you roll over the dataset to a new period, the ending balances become the beginning balances in the new dataset.
You can review the APIC Pool reports for Unit, Sub-Consolidated, and Consolidated basis.
APIC POOL PARAMETER
Entry + Report.
159 functionality and reports you must activate the system parameter
758 , Pool Data
To activate the APIC Pool functionality, select Administration > System > Manage Configurations >
Reporting > APIC Pool > APIC Pool Data Entry + Report > Yes. APIC Pool Data Entry + Report Parameter
Tax Basis Balance Sheet/Income Statement
To create a Tax Basis Balance Sheet/Income Statement, establish, populate, and map the trial balance accounts in the system.
713
You can assign Cumulative temporary differences 713 to specified trial balance accounts. You can also
make Other adjustments 713 to book trial balance amounts.
You can view the Tax Basis Balance Sheet
298 and Tax Basis Income Statement
300
reports in local
and reporting currency at the unit, sub-consolidated, or consolidated basis. You can set up these
reports to have one or more roll-ups 38 of sub-lines.
ONESOURCE Tax Provision uses trial balance accounts to calculate a tax basis balance sheet and income statement. You define trial balance accounts by mapping them, then enter balances for those accounts. You enter data by using the bridge import functionality, the numbers import template and manually.
430 to map accounts in trial balance lines
431. This
determines the presentation of the accounts.
562
functionality to transfer balances in an extract file (from a general ledger).
Use the Import Numbers template
555 in the Trial Balance/Tax Basis
201 page.
Use the Import Master Chart of Accounts 713 to populate data using your General Ledger system.
Populate the book trial balances then make Book Adjustments, Tax Re-class, and Other Adjustments, as needed.
Note: Generally, you populate trial balance accounts in a pre-closed basis and have book adjustments close out Income Statement items in Retained Earnings, and assets equal liabilities plus equity on reports.
Manage Trial Balance
Cumulative Temporary Differences
You can layer Cumulative Temporary Difference data using the book balance sheet to build a Tax Basis Balance Sheet and Income Statement.
In Manage Tax Basis/Tax 434 , map the cumulative temporary differences to the trial balance accounts.
The upper section of the Tax Basis / Return Mappings 434 page and the input for Sch L are used for
Export to Return 731 functionality and the Tax Basis Income Statement.
Each cumulative temporary difference can only be mapped to one trial balance subline 431 . Therefore,
it may be necessary to create additional sublines properly.
431 to map cumulative temporary differences
The system shows the cumulative temporary beginning balance, as well as activity that occurred during the period.
Tax returns for the prior year are typically filed in the current year. After filing tax returns, you must book a true-up for the difference between what was accrued in the prior year's provision and the actual amount on the tax returns. You book this true-up in the current year's provision.
There are several approaches to representing true-up adjustments. You can represent the true-up in the
current year's provision by entering the true-up using the single dataset approach.
714 or a multiple dataset
715
In the single dataset approach, you enter the Return to Provision true-up adjustments for Prior Periods in the Current Period’s Dataset. There are pros and cons to this approach.
PROS
You need a minimal amount of information.
You have all information in the same dataset.
CONS
Adjustments to temporary differences appear in the effective tax rate report twice netting to zero.
The true-up to the current tax expense requires that the tax adjustment you calculate the tax adjustment manually to ensure the correct current tax rate is used.
The state deferred expense is trued up, but state tax adjustments are not.
If there is a change in the deferred rates for prior years, the true-up includes the impact of the true-up and the change in rate.
Note: Each true-up item needs to be entered in a dataset.
PERMANENT DIFFERENCES AND TAX ADJUSTMENTS
The true-up for these items impact the current tax expense and the taxes payable. You achieve this by entering the true-up as a tax adjustment code starting with NC_, so that results are represented after the cash provision total.
TEMPORARY AND AFTER TAX TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
The true-up for these items impact the deferred and current tax expense, the deferred tax asset/ liability, and the taxes payable.
The current tax expense and taxes payable true-up can be achieved by entering the true-up as a tax adjustment code starting with NC_, so that the results are represented after the cash provision total.
The deferred tax expense and deferred tax asset/liability true-up can be achieved by entering the true- up as a deferred only temporary difference.
NET OPERATING LOSSES
If the true up is a year in which the provision was in a Net Operating Loss position, the NOL should be offset, instead of the taxes payable account.
In the multiple dataset approach, you enter the Return to Provision true-up adjustments for prior periods in a separate dataset. The true-up dataset has the current year's activity in another dataset. The reporting dataset will have the total current provision. There are pros and cons to this approach.
PROS
The system automatically calculates the current expense.
The amount is recalculated if items change.
Permanent adjustments flow from federal to state. Therefore, the state current expense is automatically calculated.
Information is isolated from the current year provision.
Adjustments to temporary differences do not display in the effective rate report.
CONS
There are multiple datasets that need to be managed, including appropriate tax rates.
Deferred tax assets/liabilities balances need to be migrated from the true-up dataset. If not, balances will be in two different datasets. Balances can be merged using the dataset combine feature when creating a new dataset.
To view reports for the current year provision, be sure you are looking at the appropriate dataset(s). The dataset view needs to be adjusted to view the separate true-up dataset, the current year's provision dataset, and the reporting dataset with the total current year's data.
Note: Each true-up item needs to be entered in a dataset.
PERMANENT DIFFERENCES AND TAX ADJUSTMENTS
The true-up for these items should impact the current tax expense and the taxes payable. This can be achieved by entering the permanent true-up amount as a permanent difference with an R tag and tax adjustments.
The impact to the current tax expense is computed based on statutory rates.
TEMPORARY AND AFTER TAX TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
The true-up for these items should impact the deferred and current tax expense, the deferred tax asset/liability and the taxes payable.
The current and deferred tax expense, deferred tax asset/liability and taxes payable true-up can be achieved by entering the true-up amount as activity with an R tag.
The impact to the current and deferred tax expense is computed based on statutory rates.
NET OPERATING LOSSES
If the true up is a year in which the provision was in a Net Operating Loss position, the NOL should be offset, instead of the taxes payable account.
Dataset Relations lets you automatically update the Tax Provision through the calculation and posting of RTP true-ups. For the system to post RTP adjustments, you must relate a dataset with Tax Return data (holds the filed tax return data) to the same or previous period dataset with Provision data (final provision), and a same or future period Target dataset (current year tax provision).
You activate RTP adjustments from the Return dataset. The Return dataset is a PROV (Provision Dataset) loaded with Tax Return data. The system posts True-ups to the current year Tax Provision (target dataset)
using Non-Cash Tax Adjustments 184 (for the current) and Deferred Only adjustments (for the Deferred).
Through the use of parameters, the system also allows you to post multiple RTP adjustments to a single RTP Target dataset.
Important:
This feature is only available for the PROV (Provision Dataset).
Create new dataset relations by selecting Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.
Complete the data entry and set up the Dataset Relations
394.
View and update dataset relations by selecting Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets. Select a dataset (one loaded with return data), click the Edit icon and set up the Dataset Relations
.
394
Dataset Relations
556
for more information about that functionality.
Activate the RTP posting by setting up the Dataset Relations for a Return dataset. Then, the RTP posting, Post Ret-to-Prov, option appears only in the dataset designated as the Return dataset.
Select My Datasets > Dataset (designated as the Return Dataset in Manage Relations) > Calculate
Post Ret-to-Prov.
Choose which units to post the Return to Provision Adjustments in the Related Current Provision (RTP Target).
Use Dataset (all units) to post the adjustments for all units in that dataset.
Use Subconsolidation to post the adjustments for all units within the Subconsolidation. Select Subconsolidation then a sub-consolidation within the drop-down list.
Use Unit to post the adjustments for one unit. Select Unit then a unit within the drop-down list.
Post Return to Provision
Return to Provision Posting
Post RTP
This section covers the general setup of dataset relations. The major steps are:
Creating datasets for the previous year Provision, previous year Return, and Current Provision.
Selecting the Return, Provision, and Target datasets.
Creating tax adjustments.
To create datasets for the previous year Provision, previous year Return, and Current Provision:
Note: The following Dataset information is used only as an example.
PREVIOUS YEAR PROVISION
Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.
Set up a dataset for the prior year provision:
Type the Dataset Name: 2016 Provision.
Select the Type: PROV.
Select the Fiscal Year: 2016.
Select the Fiscal Period: FY.
Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.
For Transaction, select Copy.
For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.
For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.
For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.
Select the items to copy.
Click Save.
PREVIOUS YEAR RETURN
Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.
Set up a dataset for the prior year return:
Type the Dataset Name: 2016 Return.
Select the Type: PROV.
Select the Fiscal Year: 2016.
Select the Fiscal Period: FY.
Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.
For Transaction, select Copy.
For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.
For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.
For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.
Select the Copy Items.
Click Save.
CURRENT PROVISION
Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.
Set up a dataset for the current year provision:
Type the Dataset Name: 2017 Provision.
Select the Type: PROV.
Select the Fiscal Year: 2017.
Select the Fiscal Period: FY.
Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.
For Transaction, select Rollover.
For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.
For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.
For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.
Select the items to Include From Source Dataset.
Click Yes for the message "Do you wish to refresh the report data?"
Click Save.
To releate the Return, Provision, and Target datasets:
Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.
Select the 2016 Return dataset and click the edit icon.
Select Dataset Relations.
Select 2016 Provision in the RTP Provision drop-down list. (The Provision dataset must be from the current or a prior period.)
Select 2017 Current Provision in the RTP Target drop-down list. (The Target dataset must be from the current period or a future period.)
Datasets.
409 for Dataset Relations is in Administration > Manage Datasets > Manage Active
Select the dataset (for which Dataset Relations were created), from the Dataset drop-down list. The RTP Provision is listed in the Equiv column and the RTP Target will be listed in the Next column.
Add Non-cash tax adjustments manually before generating the RTP posting.
To create Non-cash tax adjustments:
Select Administration > Administration > Manage Units > Tax Adjustments.
Create a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Permanent Differences and one for Temporary Differences using the following format (with the appropriate year): NC_RTP_YYYY_PERM and NC_RTP_YYYY_TEMP. In this example, NC_RTP_2016_PERM and NC_RTP_20162_TEMP are created.
Note: If non-cash tax adjustments do not exist in the system, the RTP posting fails.
When you select the Post Ret-to-Prov 50 menu option, the system automatically calculates the differences
between the 2015 Provision and 2015 Return and generates them in the 2016 Current Provision as Non-Cash Tax Adjustments to true-up the Current Provision.
When the Post Ret-to-Prov menu option is selected, the system automatically calculates the differences between the 2012 Provision and 2012 Return and generates them on the 2013 Current Provision as Non- Cash Tax Adjustments to true-up the Current Provision. The true-up is separated into two non-cash tax adjustments:
NC_RTP_2012_PERM, which includes Pre-Tax Book, Permanent Differences, and Tax Adjustments.
NC_RTP_2012_TEMP, which includes Temporary Difference Activity, NOL Temporary Differences Activity, and After-Tax Temporary Differences Activity.
You need to manually add the tax adjustments 428 (or import them using Import Categories) and label them
NC_RTP_2012_PERM and NC_RTP_2012_TEMP.
The system automatically calculates the differences between the 2016 Return Temporary Differences and 2016 Provision Temporary Differences and generates them on the 2017 Current Provision to true-up the Deferred Provision.
The impact to the Deferred Provision displays in Temporary Differences as Deferred Only adjustments. The system calculates the Temporary Difference Activity True-ups and Deferred Only True-ups separately.
On the 2017 Current Provision, true-ups are tagged with the dataset parameters RTPTAG (Activity) and DORTPTAG (Deferred Only) from the 2016 Return.
See the Dataset Parameters 725 section for more information.
Use the following system parameters to create additional RTP true-ups by selecting Administration >
System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > RTP True-Up.
Use Balance Sheet Only RTP True-Ups Posts, and the system considers Balance Sheet Only amounts when the RTP posting functionality processes.
Use Deferred Only RTP True-Ups Posting, and the system considers Deferred Only amounts when the RTP posting functionality processes.
Use State RTP True-Ups Posting, and the system considers State amounts when the RTP posting functionality processes.
In addition, NC_2013_PERM and NC_2013_TEMP must be in the system for State Non-Cash Adjustments to be posted:
Select Administration and then Manage States.
Select State Tax Adjustments.
Type a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Permanent Differences; use the following format (with the appropriate year), NC_RTP_YYYY_PERM.
Type a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Temporary Differences; use the following format (with the appropriate year), NC_RTP_YYYY_TEMP.
Note: If Federal and State Tax Adjustment codes in the system, the following error message appears
Posting the True-Up Adjustments requires the following Unit and State Tax Adjustment Codes be
added: NC_RTP_YYYY_Temp, NC_RTP_YYYY_Perm.
RTPTAG AND DORTPTAG
The system uses tags to designate RTP Deferred Only adjustments when you add the RTPTAG and DORTPTAG dataset parameters. In the 2016 Current Provision, the system tags the true-ups with the dataset parameters RTPTAG (Tag: X) and DORTPTAG (Tag: Z) from the 2015 Return.
Select My Datasets > Provision Dataset > Return Dataset > More > Dataset Parameters.
In order for the system to distinguish the 2016 Temporary Difference True-ups from the 2017 Temporary Difference True-ups, the tags for the Dataset Parameters HOLDSRTP_2016 and HOLDSDORTP_2016 must be different from the HOLDSRTP_2017 and HOLDSDORTP_2017 tags.
Enter the following:
Parameter Name: DORTPTAG
Parameter Type: Alphanumeric
Parameter Value: Z
Enter the following:
Parameter Name: RTPTAG
Parameter Type: Alphanumeric
Parameter Value: X
HOLDSRTP_2016 AND HOLDSDORTP_2016
Dataset parameters HOLDSRTP_2016 and HOLDSDORTP_2016 will be system-generated in the 2017 Current Provision once the Post Ret-to-Prov menu option is activated in the 2016 Return. The value entered for the dataset parameter RTPTAG sets the tag used in HOLDSRTP_YYYY and the value entered for the dataset parameter DORTPTAG sets the tag used in HOLDSDORTP_YYYY. If tags are not specified in RTPTAG and DORTPTAG, HOLDSRTP_YYYY will default to R and HOLDSDORTP_YYYY will default to Q.
Note: If you are using multiple RTPs, you should manage tags through the RTPTAG and DORTPTAG dataset parameters, so that the system distinguishes the adjustments separately.
The system uses the Amortized Permanent Differences' Book-Tax Difference to calculate the NC_YYYY_PERM (Non-Cash Adjustment).
The system posts the Book-Tax Difference for Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis, and the Book-Tax Difference true-ups for After-Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis, in the RTP Target Dataset as Temporary Differences and After-Tax Temporary Differences.
The tag letter for Non-Cash Tax Adjustments defaults to the associated tag letter set by the Dataset Parameter RTPTAG.
Use Valuation Allowance to post amounts automatically for deferred tax assets, based on a pre-determined percentage.
Activate Automation 114 policies for a unit by selecting My Datasets > Units > More > Other >
Automation > Enable Valuation Allowance Automation.
The system generates the valuation allowances and appears as a contra asset in reports.
The system determines the Automation on a Separate Attribute
728, or
Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax 728 basis.
Enable Valuation Allowance Automation
By default, the system uses the Separate Basis Valuation Allowance to calculate the valuation allowance. In
the Automation 114 page, you can enter percentages to calculate the valuation allowance for After Tax
Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, and Temporary Differences.
The functionality analyzes each of the three component types separately. For example, if balances in Net Operating Losses for the unit netted to an asset, the system posts a valuation allowance contra asset at the entered percentage for Net Operating Losses. However, if balances for the Temporary Differences for the same unit netted to a liability, the system will not post a valuation allowance.
Current/Non-Current balances that make up the component's asset determine the designation of current or non-current status for the valuation allowance.
For units in a filing group percentage for the group.
27 , the parent unit determines the valuation allowance automation and
Use the Aggregated Valuation Allowance functionality to combine the three component types and determine if a net asset will have an offsetting valuation allowance.
Activate the Aggregated Valuation Allowance functionality by importing dataset parameter with a paramvalue of 2.
556 the VA_CALCTYPE
114
page, you can enter percentages for the net amount of After Tax Temporary
Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, and Temporary Differences in the Unified VA Rate.
The functionality analyzes the net of the three component types. For example, if balances in Net Operating Losses for the unit netted to an asset and the Temporary Differences for the same unit netted to a liability, when the NOL and the Temporary Differences are netted to an asset, the system posts a valuation allowance contra asset at the entered percentage for Aggregated Base Valuation Allowance.
The Current/Non-Current balances that made up the component's asset determine the designation of current or non-current status for the valuation allowance.
For units in a filing group percentage for the group.
27, the parent unit determines the valuation allowance automation and
Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis
Use the Aggregated Post-Tax Valuation Allowance functionality to combine the three component types and determine if a net asset will have an offsetting valuation allowance.
Activate the Aggregated Valuation Allowance functionality by importing dataset parameter with a paramvalue of 4.
556 the VA_CALCTYPE
114
page, you can enter percentages for the net amount of After Tax Temporary
Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, and Temporary Differences in the Unified VA Rate.
The functionality analyzes the net of the three component types. For example, if balances in Net Operating Losses for the unit netted to an asset and the Temporary Differences for the same unit netted to a liability, when the NOL and the Temporary Differences are netted to an asset, the system posts a valuation allowance contra asset at the entered percentage for Aggregated Base Valuation Allowance.
The Current/Non-Current balances that made up the component's asset determine the designation of current or non-current status for the valuation allowance.
For units in a filing group percentage for the group.
27, the parent unit determines the valuation allowance automation and
This method identifies where a unit or filing group has a Net Deferred Tax Asset and posts on After-Tax Basis to the codes VA_SYS_ATTD_C and VA_SYS_ATTD_NC.
Converting from Aggregated to Aggregated Post-Tax
Converting from the Aggregated Attribute to Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis:
Change the paramvalue for the VA_CALCTYPE dataset parameter from 2 to 4.
Export your data to create an Import Template. You can also save this file to create a back up of your data prior to changing it.
In Reports, select a report and then Run. The program computes the automation amounts for Valuation Allowances on an Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax method and then generates an updated report.
You can re-import your Beginning Balances for Valuation Allowances, if necessary.
Note: If you need to convert from the Aggregated Attribute to Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis, please
contact your client manager or Support
15.
Associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision Applications
You can license associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision applications to support the overall provision.
730
application is a data collection tool designed to guide remote users.
The UTP (Uncertain Tax Positions) 731 application tracks the uncertain tax positions/IAS 12 tax
reserves and generates annual disclosures.
Global Access is a web-based data collection tool that streamlines the process of populating data and ultimately assists in the consolidation of provision information.
Open the Global Access application by selecting the Global Access tile in the ONESOURCE platform.
Set up Global Access datasets by selecting yes for the Activate Manage Active Datasets
508
parameter and then adding them in Manage Active Datasets
409 .
Unlike tax packages in Excel that require data manipulation, once information is entered in Global Access, the system populates the database in real time.
Each Global Access instance is configured to meet a company’s data collection requirements.
Users are guided through procedures with step-by-step instructions.
Specific tasks that need to be performed are presented in an orderly step-by-step fashion.
Only the units assigned to a specific user display when the user logs in. Data in the work flow/drop- down menus can be defined by a user.
Users see the same reports as the corporate office, so they understand the results they are reporting in both Local and Reporting currency.
The multi level Sign-Off configurable process and the Audit Trail help ensure accountability about the data submitted.
For more information or a demo of Global Access, please contact your Client Manager or the support
15 group.
Accounting for Uncertain Tax Positions requires the recognition and measurement of tax contingencies.
The UTP application allows the positions to be tracked using the same dataset, unit, and component codes as ONESOURCE Tax Provision.
Categories can be migrated from the provision to the UTP application to minimize set-up time.
After positions have been determined, the total amount of unrecognized tax benefits that would affect the Effective Tax Rate needs to be represented in the provision.
As positions age, there may be additional interest that needs to be accrued each period. The UTP application has the ability to compute interest using the IRS or State-defined tables, or a flat rate. Interest compounds over a user-defined period.
The UTP application can post either a position-by-position detailed entry or a single topside number to represent the impact of any change in the amount of unrecognized tax benefits during the period.
The required Uncertain tax positions disclosures can be viewed and printed from the UTP application. Additionally, there are reports that support the accounting for tax contingencies in the Taxes Payable, Deferred Tax Asset, and Current and Deferred Tax Expense.
For more information or a demo of the UTP application, please contact your Client Manager or the
support 15 group.
The data in a Provision dataset in the system can be exported into a file that is in a format that meets the import specification of major compliance systems. This allows the Tax Return process to start with Provision data that can be adjusted as necessary.
Each compliance system has specifications for the type of file and the data it requires. The system has an export feature for major compliance system file formats. There are some additional mappings and configurations that must be established in the system to mesh the provision and return presentation.
For more information about export to your specific compliance system, contact your Client Manager or
the support 15 group.
This section provides you with reference items for components, parameters and other information to help with completing your provision processes.
You can use the Data Table buttons to view specific data for each page in the grid.
Data Table Options
Use to maximize the space on the page. | |
Use to change the comparison from Column to Side by Side view. All Datasets and Datasets are grouped together. | |
Use to change the percentage from % to $ amount. | |
Use to change the currency from Local to Reporting. | |
Use to turn on and off the grid filters. The grid filters let you define which data will appear in the grid so you can review specific data. | |
Use to hide various columns. For example, you can hide the columns so that you see only the Effective Tax Rate column. |
The following screenshots let you see the Data Table buttons and actions available as you navigate from one page to another in the application.
My Dataset Grid
Manage Units Grid
Review & Edit Summary Grid
Review & Edit Summary Grid - Comparing Data
Leadsheet Grid - Comparing Data
Data Entry Grid
Position the curser over the border of the column and drag the border to adjust the column width.
You can filter data for one or more columns in the grid. Filtered data shows only the information that meet the criteria that you specify and hides information that you do not want displayed. By default, the filter functionality is turned on. To turn the filter off, click the filter button.
To determine if a filter is applied, note the icon in the column heading:
A drop-down arrow means that filtering is enabled but not applied.
A Filter button means that a filter is applied.
To filter or search for a specific value in a column:
Point to the column header and click the to see the options in the drop-down list. The options include: Ascending, Descending, Filter by Condition, Filter by Value, Search, Select All and Blank. The options vary according to the type of data in the column.
To enter filter criteria:
Select Filter by Condition and the filter options appear.
Select the conditions in the fields and then click Apply.
To restore the entire grid, click Clear Filter.
You can select the options in the Filter to control the list that you see in the dataset grid. You can filter and search the lists to reduce the length of the list.
To filter the list, click Ascending, Descending, Filter by Condition, or Filter by Value.
To search for text or numbers in the system, type the information in the search box.
Use Filters and Settings to customize the dataset grid.
Dataset Filter
Click the column name to sort its data in ascending order. Click again to sort in descending order. By default, data is sorted in descending order.
To show columns in a grid, click the Settings button and a list of columns appears. The list that appears depends on which page you have open at the time. By default, all columns in the list will show in the grid. Clear the check box next to the column name to hide it from the grid. The grid updates instantly using the selections you made in the list. To revert to the default grid, select all of the column names.
Data Entry - Perm Diffs - Tax Basis Page
List of Columns
You can select the options in the Settings drop-down list to control the columns that you see in the dataset grid.
Dataset Grid Settings
Drag any column header to the left or right to reorder the grid.
Drag any column header to the area above the headers to group data in the grid.
739
State | Code | State | Code |
Alabama | AL | Montana | MT |
Alaska | AK | Nebraska | NE |
All Other | AO | Nevada | NV |
Arizona | AZ | New Hampshire | NH |
Arkansas | AR | New Jersey | NJ |
Blended State | BS | New Mexico | NM |
California | CA | New York | NY |
Colorado | CO | New York City | NYC |
Connecticut | CT | North Caroline | NC |
Delaware | DE | North Dakota | ND |
Florida | FL | Ohio | OH |
Georgia | GA | Oklahoma | OK |
Hawaii | HI | Oregon | OR |
Idaho | ID | Pennsylvania | PA |
Illinois | IL | Rhode Island | RI |
Indiana | IN | South Carolina | SC |
Iowa | IA | South Dakota | SD |
Kansas | KS | Tennessee | TN |
Kentucky | KY | Texas | TX |
Louisiana | LA | Utah | UT |
Maine | ME | Vermont | VT |
Maryland | MD | Virginia | VA |
Massachusetts | MA | Washington | WA |
Michigan | MI | Washington DC | DC |
Minnesota | MN | West Virginia | WV |
State | Code | State | Code | |
Mississippi | MS | Wisconsin | WI | |
Missouri MO | Wyoming | WY | ||
Country Name | Country Code | Country Name | Country Code | |
Afghanistan | af | Liechtenstein | li | |
Albania | al | Lithuania | lt | |
Algeria | dz | Luxembourg | lu | |
American Samoa | as | Macau | mo | |
Andorra | ad | Macedonia | mk | |
Angola | ao | Madagascar | mg | |
Anguilla | ai | Malawi | mw | |
Antarctica | aq | Malaysia | my | |
Antigua and Barbuda | ag | Maldives | mv | |
Argentina | ar | Mali | ml | |
Armenia | am | Malta | mt | |
Aruba | aw | Marshall Islands | mh | |
Australia | au | Martinique (French) | mq | |
Austria | at | Mauritania | mr | |
Azerbaidjan | az | Mauritius | mu | |
Bahamas | bs | Mayotte | yt | |
Bahrain | bh | Mexico | mx | |
Bangladesh | bd | Micronesia | fm | |
Barbados | bb | Moldavia | md | |
Belarus | by | Monaco | mc | |
Belgium | be | Mongolia | mn | |
Belize | bz | Montserrat | ms | |
741 | ||||
Country Name | Country Code | Country Name | Country Code |
Benin | bj | Morocco | ma |
Bermuda | bm | Mozambique | mz |
Bhutan | bt | Namibia | na |
Bolivia | bo | Nauru | nr |
Bosnia-Herzegovina | ba | Nepal | np |
Botswana | bw | Netherlands | nl |
Bouvet Island | bv | Netherlands Antilles | an |
Brazil | br | New Caledonia (French) | nc |
British Indian Ocean Territory | io | New Zealand | nz |
Brunei Darussalam | bn | Nicaragua | ni |
Bulgaria | bg | Niger | ne |
Burkina Faso | bf | Nigeria | ng |
Burundi | bi | Niue | nu |
Cambodia | kh | Norfolk Island | nf |
Cameroon | cm | North Korea | kp |
Canada | ca | Northern Mariana Islands | mp |
Cape Verde | cv | Norway | no |
Cayman Islands | ky | Oman | om |
Central African Republic | cf | Pakistan | pk |
Chad | td | Palau | pw |
Chile | cl | Panama | pa |
China | cn | Papua New Guinea | pg |
Christmas Island | cx | Paraguay | py |
Cocos (Keeling) Islands | cc | Peru | pe |
Colombia | co | Philippines | ph |
Country Name | Country Code | Country Name | Country Code |
Comoros | km | Pitcairn Island | pn |
Congo | cg | Poland | pl |
Cook Islands | ck | Polynesia (French) | pf |
Costa Rica | cr | Portugal | pt |
Croatia | hr | Puerto Rico | pr |
Cuba | cu | Qatar | qa |
Cyprus | cy | Reunion (French) | re |
Czech Republic | cz | Romania | ro |
Denmark | dk | Russian Nationaleration | ru |
Djibouti | dj | Rwanda | rw |
Dominica | dm | S. Georgia and S. Sandwich Isls. | gs |
Dominican Republic | do | Saint Helena | sh |
East Timor | tp | Saint Kitts and Nevis Anguilla | kn |
Ecuador | ec | Saint Lucia | lc |
Egypt | eg | Saint Pierre and Miquelon | pm |
El Salvador | sv | Saint Tome (Sao Tome) and Principe | st |
Equatorial Guinea | gq | Saint Vincent and Grenadines | vc |
Eritrea | er | Samoa | ws |
Estonia | ee | San Marino | sm |
Ethiopia | et | Saudi Arabia | sa |
Falkland Islands | fk | Senegal | sn |
Faroe Islands | fo | Seychelles | sc |
Fiji | fj | Sierra Leone | sl |
Finland | fi | Singapore | sg |
Country Name | Country Code | Country Name | Country Code |
France | fr | Slovak Republic | sk |
French Guyana | gf | Slovenia | si |
Gabon | ga | Solomon Islands | sb |
Gambia | gm | Somalia | so |
Georgia | ge | South Africa | za |
Germany | de | South Korea | kr |
Germany | de | Spain | es |
Ghana | gh | Sri Lanka | lk |
Gibraltar | gi | Sudan | sd |
Great Britain | gb | Suriname | sr |
Greece | gr | Swaziland | sz |
Greenland | gl | Sweden | se |
Grenada | gd | Switzerland | ch |
Guadeloupe (French) | gp | Syria | sy |
Guam (USA) | gu | Tadjikistan | tj |
Guatemala | gt | Taiwan | tw |
Guinea | gn | Tanzania | tz |
Guinea Bissau | gw | Thailand | th |
Guyana | gy | Togo | tg |
Haiti | ht | Tokelau | tk |
Heard and McDonald Islands | hm | Tonga | to |
Honduras | hn | Trinidad and Tobago | tt |
Hong Kong | hk | Tunisia | tn |
Hungary | hu | Turkey | tr |
Iceland | is | Turkmenistan | tm |
Country Name | Country Code | Country Name | Country Code |
India | in | Turks and Caicos Islands | tc |
Indonesia | id | Tuvalu | tv |
Iran | ir | Uganda | ug |
Iraq | iq | Ukraine | ua |
Ireland | ie | United Arab Emirates | ae |
Israel | il | United Kingdom | uk |
Italy | it | United States of America | us |
Ivory Coast (Cote D'Ivoire) | ci | Uruguay | uy |
Jamaica | jm | Uzbekistan | uz |
Japan | jp | Vanuatu | vu |
Jordan | jo | Vatican City State | va |
Kazakhstan | kz | Venezuela | ve |
Kenya | ke | Vietnam | vn |
Kiribati | ki | Virgin Islands (British) | vg |
Kuwait | kw | Virgin Islands (USA) | vi |
Kyrgyzstan | kg | Wallis and Futuna Islands | wf |
Laos | la | Western Sahara | eh |
Latvia | lv | Yemen | ye |
Lebanon | lb | Yugoslavia | yu |
Lesotho | ls | Zaire | zr |
Liberia | lr | Zambia | zm |
Libya | ly | Zimbabwe | zw |
745
Currency Name | Currency Code | Country Name | Country Code |
Afghanistan | AFN | Lebanon, Pounds | LBP |
Albania, Leke | ALL | Lesotho, Maloti | LSL |
Algeria, Algeria Dinars | DZD | Liberia, Dollars | LRD |
Angola, Kwanza | AOA | Libya, Dinars | LYD |
Argentina, Pesos | ARS | Lithuania, Litai | LTL |
Armenia, Drams | AMD | Macau, Patacas | MOP |
Aruba, Guilders (also called Florins) | AWG | Macedonia, Denars | MKD |
Australia, Dollars | AUD | Madagascar, Ariary | MGA |
Azerbaijan, New Manats | AZN | Malawi, Kwachas | MWK |
Bahamas, Dollars | BSD | Malaysia, Ringgits | MYR |
Bahrain, Dinars | BHD | Maldives (Maldive Islands), Rufiyaa | MVR |
Bangladesh, Taka | BDT | Malta, Liri (expires 2008- Jan-31) | MTL |
Barbados, Dollars | BBD | Mauritania, Ouguiyas | MRO |
Belarus, Rubles | BYR | Mauritius, Rupees | MUR |
Belize, Dollars | BZD | Mexico, Pesos | MXN |
Bermuda, Dollars | BMD | Moldova, Lei | MDL |
Bhutan, Ngultrum | BTN | Mongolia, Tugriks | MNT |
Bolivia, Bolivianos | BOB | Morocco, Dirhams | MAD |
Bosnia and Herzegovina, Convertible Marka | BAM | Mozambique, Meticais | MZN |
Botswana, Pulas | BWP | Myanmar (Burma), Kyats | MMK |
Brazil, Brazil Real | BRL | Namibia, Dollars | NAD |
Brunei Darussalam, Dollars | BND | Nepal, Nepal Rupees | NPR |
Bulgaria, Leva | BGN | Netherlands Antilles, Guilders (also called | ANG |
Currency Name | Currency Code | Country Name | Country Code | |
Florins) | ||||
Burundi, Francs | BIF | New Zealand, Dollars | NZD | |
Cambodia, Riels | KHR | Nicaragua, Cordobas | NIO | |
Canada, Dollars | CAD | Nigeria, Nairas | NGN | |
Cape Verde, Escudos | CVE | Norway, Krone | NOK | |
Cayman Islands, Dollars | KYD | Oman, Rials | OMR | |
Chile, Pesos | CLP | Pakistan, Rupees | PKR | |
China, Yuan Renminbi | CNY | Palladium Ounces | XPD | |
Colombia, Pesos | COP | Panama, Balboa | PAB | |
Communauté Financière Africaine BCEAO, Francs | XOF | Papua New Guinea, Kina | PGK | |
Communauté Financière Africaine BEAC, Francs | XAF | Paraguay, Guarani | PYG | |
Comoros, Francs | KMF | Peru, Nuevos Soles | PEN | |
Comptoirs Français du Pacifique Francs | XPF | Philippines, Pesos | PHP | |
Congo/Kinshasa, Congolese Francs | CDF | Platinum, Ounces | XPT | |
Costa Rica, Colones | CRC | Poland, Zlotych | PLN | |
Croatia, Kuna | HRK | Qatar, Rials | QAR | |
Cuba, Pesos | CUP | Romania, New Lei | RON | |
Cyprus, Pounds (expires 2008-Jan-31) | CYP | Russia, Rubles | RUB | |
Czech Republic, Koruny | CZK | Rwanda, Rwanda Francs | RWF | |
Denmark, Kroner | DKK | Saint Helena, Pounds | SHP | |
Djibouti, Francs | DJF | Samoa, Tala | WST | |
Dominican Republic, Pesos | DOP | São Tome and Principe, Dobras | STD | |
East Caribbean Dollars | XCD | Saudi Arabia, Riyals | SAR | |
Egypt, Pounds | EGP | Seborga, Luigini | SPL | |
747 | ||||
Currency Name | Currency Code | Country Name | Country Code |
El Salvador, Colones | SVC | Serbia, Dinars | RSD |
Eritrea, Nakfa | ERN | Seychelles, Rupees | SCR |
Estonia, Krooni | EEK | Sierra Leone, Leones | SLL |
Ethiopia, Birr | ETB | Silver, Ounces | XAG |
Euro Member Countries, Euro | EUR | Singapore, Dollars | SGD |
Falkland Islands (Malvinas), Pounds | FKP | Slovakia, Koruny | SKK |
Fiji, Dollars | FJD | Solomon Islands, Dollars | SBD |
Gambia, Dalasi | GMD | Somalia, Shillings | SOS |
Georgia, Lari | GEL | South Africa, Rand | ZAR |
Ghana, Cedis | GHS | Sri Lanka, Rupees | LKR |
Gibraltar, Pounds | GIP | Sudan, Pounds | SDG |
Gold, Ounces | XAU | Suriname, Dollars | SRD |
Guatemala, Quetzales | GTQ | Swaziland, Emalangeni | SZL |
Guernsey, Pounds | GGP | Sweden, Kronor | SEK |
Guinea, Francs | GNF | Switzerland, Francs | CHF |
Guyana, Dollars | GYD | Syria, Pounds | SYP |
Haiti, Gourdes | HTG | Taiwan, New Dollars | TWD |
Honduras, Lempiras | HNL | Tajikistan, Somoni | TJS |
Hong Kong, Dollars | HKD | Tanzania, Shillings | TZS |
Hungary, Forint | HUF | Thailand, Baht | THB |
Iceland, Kronur | ISK | Tonga, Pa'anga | TOP |
India, Rupees | INR | Trinidad and Tobago, Dollars | TTD |
Indonesia, Rupiahs | IDR | Tunisia, Dinars | TND |
International Monetary Fund (IMF) Spec Drwig Rghts | XDR | Turkey, New Lira | TRY |
Currency Name | Currency Code | Country Name | Country Code |
Iran, Rials | IRR | Turkmenistan, Manats | TMM |
Iraq, Dinars | IQD | Tuvalu, Tuvalu Dollars | TVD |
Isle of Man, Pounds | IMP | Uganda, Shillings | UGX |
Israel, New Shekels | ILS | Ukraine, Hryvnia | UAH |
Jamaica, Dollars | JMD | United Arab Emirates, Dirhams | AED |
Japan, Yen | JPY | United Kingdom, Pounds | GBP |
Jersey, Pounds | JEP | United States of America, Dollars | USD |
Jordan, Dinars | JOD | Uruguay, Pesos | UYU |
Kazakhstan, Tenge | KZT | Uzbekistan, Sums | UZS |
Kenya, Shillings | KES | Vanuatu, Vatu | VUV |
Korea (North), Won | KPW | Venezuela, Bolivares (expires 2008-Jun-30) | VEB |
Korea (South), Won | KRW | Venezuela, Bolivares Fuertes | VEF |
Kuwait, Dinars | KWD | Viet Nam, Dong | VND |
Kyrgyzstan, Soms | KGS | Yemen, Rials | YER |
Laos, Kips | LAK | Zambia, Kwacha | ZMK |
Latvia, Lati | LVL | Zimbabwe, Zimbabwe Dollars | ZWD |
Code | Description | Code | Description |
FY | Full Year | M9 | Ninth Month Only |
Q1 | 1st Quarter Only | M10 | Tenth Month Only |
Q2 | 2nd Quarter Only | M11 | Eleventh Month Only |
Q3 | 3rd Quarter Only | M12 | Twelfth Month Only |
Q4 | 4th Quarter Only | 2M YTD | First Two Months |
M1 | First Month Only | 4M YTD | First Four Months |
M2 | Second Month Only | 5M YTD | First Five Months |
M3 | Third Month Only | 7M YTD | First Seven Months |
M4 | Fourth Month Only | 8M YTD | First Eight Months |
M5 | Fifth Month Only | 10M YTD | First Ten Months |
M6 | Sixth Month Only | 11M YTD | First Eleven Months |
M7 | Seventh Month Only | 2Q YTD | First Two Quarters |
M8 | Eighth Month Only | 3Q YTD | First Three Quarters |
Name
Rollup Code
Adjustments ADJ
Beginning Balance
BBAL
Cash EST
Provision
PRV
Inter-Year Reclass RCL
Default Payable Transaction Types
Name | Code | Rollup |
Non-Payment Adjustments - Federal | NPADJ-F | ADJ |
Non-Payment Adjustments | NPADJ | ADJ |
Beginning Balance | BBAL | BBAL |
1st Quarter Estimate - Federal | 1ES-F | EST |
1st Quarter Estimate | 1ES | EST |
2nd Quarter Estimate - Federal | 2ES-F | EST |
2nd Quarter Estimate | 2ES | EST |
3rd Quarter Estimate - Federal | 3ES-F | EST |
3rd Quarter Estimate | 3ES | EST |
4th Quarter Estimate - Federal | 4ES-F | EST |
4th Quarter Estimate | 4ES | EST |
Audit Refund | AREF | EST |
Audit Settlement | ASET | EST |
Federal Extension | 1EXT-F | EST |
Sub-Federal Extension | 1EXT | EST |
Income Return - Federal | INCR-F | EST |
Income Return | INCR | EST |
Name | Code | Rollup |
Settlement - Federal | SET-F | EST |
Refund | REF | EST |
Settlement - Federal | SET-F | EST |
Settlement | SET | EST |
Settlement - CCI Other Federal | SET-CCI R | EST |
Settlement - CEI Other Federal | SET-CEI R | EST |
Unitary Allocations | UALLOC | EST |
1st Quarter Provision - Federal | PQ1-F | EST |
1st Quarter Provision | PQ1 | PRV |
2nd Quarter Provision - Federal | PQ2-F | PRV |
2nd Quarter Provision | PQ2 | PRV |
3rd Quarter Provision - Federal | PQ3-F | PRV |
3rd Quarter Provision | PQ3 | PRV |
4th Quarter Provision - Federal | PQ4-F | PRV |
4th Quarter Provision | PQ4 | PRV |
6 Month Provision - Federal | PQ2YTD-F | PRV |
6 Month Provision | PQ2YTD | PRV |
9 Month Provision - Federal | PQ3YTD-F | PRV |
9 Month Provision | PQ3YTD | PRV |
Full Year Provision - Federal | PFY-F | PRV |
Full Year Provision | PFY | PRV |
Payable Auto Posting - Curr Prov | CPROV | PRV |
Payable Auto Posting - Curr Prov Reclass | CPROV-REC | RCL |
Payable Auto Posting - RTP | RTP | PRV |
Payable Auto Posting - RTP Reclass | RTP-REC | RCL |
Name | Code | Rollup |
Payable Auto Posting - ATR | ATR | PRV |
Payable Auto Posting - ATR Reclass | ATR-REC | RCL |
Payable Auto Posting Noncash item | OTHER | PRV |
Payable Auto Posting Noncash item Reclass | OTHER-REC | RCL |
Provision Adjustments - Federal | PADJ-F | PRV |
Provision Adjustments | PADJ | PRV |
Return-To-Provision True-Up - Federal | PRTP-F | PRV |
Return-To-Provision True-Up | PRTP | PRV |
Intra-Year Reclass - Federal | ADJ-F | RCL |
Intra-Year Reclass | ADJ | RCL |
Description | Code |
After Tax Temporary Differences | ATTD |
Book Trial Balance | TBBB |
Jurisdictions | J |
Liability Transactions | LTXNS |
NOLs Temporary Differences | NOLTD |
Permanent Differences - List | CPD |
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | SAATD |
State After Tax Temporary Differences | SATTD |
State Permanent Differences | SPD |
State Tax Adjustments | STADJ |
Tax Adjustments - List | CTADJ |
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis | TD-A |
Temporary Differences - List | CTD |
Description | Code |
Access Rights Level | |
Reporting Dataset List | CDS |
Sub Consolidation List | CSC |
Unit List | CU |
Preparer - Global Access | SO1 |
1st Reviewer - Global Access | SO2 |
2nd Reviewer - Global Access | SO3 |
Component Rollup Codes - Deferred
Line | Rollup Code | Line Description |
Temporary Differences | TD | Temporary differences balances and activity. |
NOL Temporary Differences | NOLTD | NOL temporary differences balances and activity. |
After Tax Temporary Differences | ATTD | After tax temporary differences balances and activity. |
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences | SAATD | State after apportionment temporary differences balances and activity. |
State After Tax Temporary Differences | SATTD | State after tax temporary differences balances and activity. |
Component Rollup Codes - Effective Rate
Line | Rollup Code | Line Description |
Pre-Tax Book Income | PTBI | Pre-Tax Book Income from the Pre-Tax Book Income page. |
State and Local Taxes | ST | Computed deductible for current state and local taxes. |
Effect of Rates Different From Statutory | ERDS | Impact of statutory rates for units when their current tax rate differs from the group tax rate defined for the dataset. |
Permanent Differences | PD | Permanent differences with type of P&L Adjustment. |
Temporary Differences | TD | Temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column plus the impact of the change in deferred rates and the impact of the difference between current and deferred rates. |
NOL Temporary Differences | NOLTD | NOL Temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column plus the impact of the change in deferred rates and the impact of the difference between current and deferred rates. |
Tax Adjustments | TADJ | Tax Adjustments. |
After Tax Temporary Differences | ATTD | After tax temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column. |
Deferred Provision Only Adjustment | DPOA | Deferred Provision Only Adjustment from the Unit Details page. |
The lines on the Effective Tax Rate Report do not have rollup capabilities. |
Component Rollup Codes - Trial Balance
Line | Rollup Code | Line Description |
Trial Balance | TBBB | Trial balance sub lines |
Shortcut | Description | References |
<cc_dataset> | The dataset or group of datasets (as represented by the reporting dataset) currently selected. | Datasets.DataSetID |
<cc_unit> | The unit currently selected. | Units.UnitID |
<cc_subcon> | The group of units (as represented by the sub-consolidation) currently selected. | Units.UnitID |
<cc_con> | The group of units (as represented by the consolidation), i.e., all units. | Units.UnitID |
<cc_state> | The state currently selected. | States.StateID |
<cc_currency> | The report type currently selected. | ReportTypes.ReportTypeID |
You can activate the following System Parameters in the application for additional functionality. The Parameter Function column describes the functionality.
**Enter in Manage Restricted Features
Parameter Name | Parameter | Parameter Function |
ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPO | YES | YES allows sub-consolidated reports to display in |
RT | Local Currency, when the Unit designated Currency | |
does not agree. | ||
ALTCALC2_ADJ | YES | Define Where 2nd Scenario Calculation Posts |
BRIDGE_ALLOW_ALL_UNITS | Y or N | Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows |
all users to bridge data into all units in the system | ||
regardless of whether or not they have access rights | ||
to the units. N removes the consolidation option for | ||
the bridge. | ||
BRIDGE_ALLOW_SUBCON_SEL | Y or N | Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows |
ECT | all users to bridge data into Sub Consolidations to | |
which they have access rights. N, no longer | ||
displays the Sub Consolidation drop-down menu for | ||
the bridge. | ||
BRIDGE_ALLOW_UNIT_SELECT | Y or N | Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows |
all users to bridge data into Units to which they have | ||
access rights. N no longer displays. The Unit drop- | ||
down list for the bridge. | ||
BRIDGE_DEFAULT_TAG | Tag Letter | Creates a default Tag Letter to be used when data is |
brought in via the bridge. | ||
BSOS_XXXX | Tag Letter_Tag | Activates the Balance Sheet Offset Summary |
Letter | report. Balance Sheet Only amounts entered with | |
the tags established in the system parameter are | ||
included. These amounts are rate effected and | ||
display in the appropriate column based on the tag. | ||
CC_DISABLE_STATES | 0 or 1 | 1 removes pre-defined states from the Data Entry > |
Jurisdiction drop-down list. | ||
CLIENTDISPLAYNAME | Text | **Enter the name of the client to display on report |
pages in the system, as well as in the header of | ||
printed reports. | ||
DefEndBalDefault | Tag letter and | Designates where the difference is posted when |
type of event | Ending Balances are entered vs Activity for Book/ | |
Tax Basis Temporary Differences.Examples:
| ||
DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN | 1 through 26 | Selects the column in the Deferred Balances Report |
to display a sub-total balance for the Adjusted | ||
Beginning Balance or any other purpose. |
Parameter Name | Parameter | Parameter Function |
DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME | Text | Column Heading for the column created with DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN parameter. |
DISABLE_DEFERREDPROVONL Y | 1 or 2 | 1 displays the Deferred Provision Only entry field. However, no entry is permitted. 2 removes the Deferred Provision Only entry field. Note: This parameter does not work for the State Details page. |
DISABLE_RDS_CONSTRAINTS | 0 or 1 | 1 removes the check when joining datasets in a sequential dataset. |
EffectRatesDiffStat_PermNet | 0 or 1 | 1 The Tax Effect of Rates Different than Statutory for permanent differences is included in the respective permanent difference line. |
EFFRATEBRKOUT | 0 or 1 | 1 enables the Unit Tax Rate view in Unit and Filing Group reports. It also enables on-page breakout, as well as the Use Blended Rate view in Sub- Consolidated and Consolidated reports. |
ENABLE_APICPOOL | 0 or 1 | 1 enables the APIC Pool functionality and report. |
Enable_GS_Scrunch | 0 or 1 | 1 enables you to select a Current GAAP, Current STAT, Non-Current GAAP, and Non-Current STAT class or tag for the scrunch functionality. |
ENABLE_TSDEBUG | 1 | Information for the support team. |
EXTENDED_USER_RESTRICTIO N Activate in Manage Configuration | 0 or 1 | **1 enables assignments made for a user in the Admin area under System/Administer Users to restrict Import of data and Batch Print reports to only assigned datasets, units and sub- consolidations. |
FILTER#_NAME | Text | Names the filtered Deferred Balances Report created with the FILTER#_SQL parameter. |
FILTER#_SQL | SQL query | Filters deferred balances based on a SQL query to show a subset of deferred balances. |
FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET 0-11 0 designates a calendar year for the payable auto
posting. For fiscal years, enter the fiscal month minus 12 (e.g., -1 = November; -2 = October, etc.).
Ending balances roll over to create beginning balances with the code BBAL and a date of fiscal year end plus 1 day. For example: If the paramvalue is -3, CPROV posts with a date of 9/30/CY and BBAL posts with a date of 10/1/CY.
Parameter Name | Parameter | Parameter Function |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE _FX | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the FX fields (Use Fx Rates During Calculations, Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate) on the Flow-Through Factor page. |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUT OCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 automatically calculates flow-through factors in reports. |
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MAN UALCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item in the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets. |
FORMAT_FOR_EXCEL | 0 or 1 | 1 configures the Excel output to treat Leading Zeros or Scientific Notation as text, not numbers. |
GLOBAL_XSL | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the Global Attachments 468 page in the Administration area. This page allow the JE style sheet to be uploaded. |
GLOBAL_XSL_BROWSEUPDAT E | 0 or 1 | **1 displays the Browse and Update Attachment button on the Global Attachments 468 Page. |
GLOBAL_XSL_SAVEAS | 0 or 1 | **1 displays the Attachment Save As button on the Global Attachments 468 page. |
GlobalRegion | US or EUROPE or CANADA | **Select US, EUROPE, or CANADA to determine presentation of certain terminology in the user interface and reports. |
gstags# | Tag Letter | Tag Letter isolates GAAP to STAT entries on the Tax Provision report. This parameter works in conjunction with the SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT. |
JE_AUTOCREATE_OUTPUTJE | 0 or 1 | 1 Configurable Journal Entry |
itstagpermsgaap-yeprovgs-1 | G:Manual | Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features. |
itstagpermsstat-yeprovgs-1 | S:Manual | Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features. |
itstagtempsgaap-yeprovgs-1 | G:Manual | Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features. |
itstagtempsstat-yeprovgs-1 | S:Manual | Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features. |
JE_AUTOREGEN_TAXCALCS | 0 or 1 | 1 Configurable Journal Entry |
JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_FEDE | Component ID | **Filters the Federal Component list for detail JE |
RAL_XXX | configurations. | |
JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_STAT | Component ID | **Filters the State Component list for detail JE |
E_XXX | configurations. | |
JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET | Alphanumeric | **The component rollup set code of the rollup group. |
_CODE | Example: R99. (Use the Manage Rollups page to | |
create rollup sets and groups.) Rollup groups add | ||
items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the | ||
Journal Entries page. | ||
JE_DATASET_DELETE_ALL | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the Delete all Journal Entries menu |
option in the Provision dataset under Data Review > | ||
Dataset > Administration. | ||
JE_FILTER# | Text | **A Temporary Difference Code. # can be any |
number from 1-9. Filters add items to the Tax | ||
Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries | ||
page. | ||
JE_FILTER_NAME# | Text | **The name of the filter group, such as Depreciation. |
# can be any number from 1-9. Filters add items to | ||
the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal | ||
Entries page. | ||
JE_ROUNDING_DECIMAL_PLAC | Any integer from | Number of places to which calculated journal entries |
ES | -6 to 6. | are rounded. The default value in the calculation |
procedure is 2 (no rounding). | ||
JE_SHOW_ZERO_BOOKCALCS | 0 or 1 | 1 indicates that zero dollar Book calculations |
display on Output Journal Entries reports. | ||
JE_SHOW_ZERO_TAXCALCS | 0 or 1 | 1 indicates that zero dollar Tax calculations display |
on Output Journal Entries reports. | ||
JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_# | Text | The state group name. # can be any number from 1- |
9. State groups add items to the Tax Calculation | ||
drop-down list on the Journal Entries page. | ||
JE_STATE_GROUP_% | Text | A state code. % can be any number from 1-9 and |
_STATE## | ## can be any number form 00 - 99. State groups | |
add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on | ||
the Journal Entries page. | ||
JE_Supplemental_Label# | Text | The header text for Output Journal Entries reports. |
JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME | Text | The tag group name. # can be any number from 1-9. |
Tag groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop- | ||
down list on the Journal Entries page. | ||
JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS | Text | A group of tags separated by commas. Example: |
F, M, Q | ||
# can be any number from 1-9. Tag groups add | ||
items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the |
Parameter Name | Parameter | Parameter Function |
Journal Entries page. | ||
JE_TYPE_LOCKED | 0 or 1 | 1 prevents the JE Type field on the Journal Entries page from being editable after a journal entry configuration is saved. |
JE_UNIT_DELETE_ALL | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the Delete All button on the Journal Entries page. |
LIMIT_PAYABLE_DATES | Y or N | Y allows only dates within the dataset to be used when making entries in the payable. N lifts the restriction and allows any date to be entered. |
LockoutMinutes | Numeral | Number of minutes a user should be locked out of the system once they have exceeded the specified number of login attempts. |
MaxFailLogins | Numeral | Number of login attempts before a user is locked out of the system. |
PassHistNum | Numeral | Number of unique passwords that must be used before a user's password can be repeated. |
POST_AMORTIZED | 0, 1 or 2 |
AT Temp Diff – Tax Basis posts the RTP to AT Temp Diff – Tax Basis. |
POST_DO | 0 or 1 | 1 enables the calculation of Deferred Only Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups. |
POST_BSO | 0 or 1 | 1 enables the calculation of Balance Sheet Only Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups. Your adjustments with balance sheet only amounts will post the RTP to the respective Tax Basis and Book/ Tax Basis lines. |
POST_GAAP | 1 enables the GAAP to STAT RTP posting |
POST_STATE 0 or 1 1 enables the calculation of State Return to
Provision (RTP) true-ups. | ||
PRINTFORMAT_PAGESWIDE | Numeral | Number of pages reports should print to override the |
default of shrink to fit 1 page. | ||
PROVISION_HIDE_STATES | 0 or 1 | 1 adjusts the Stored Procedure Tax Provision report, |
so that the detailed view does not display state-by- | ||
state detail. | ||
PROVSCBRKOUT | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the CSC Tax Provision Report under sub- |
consolidation. | ||
REPORT_FOOTER | Text | Text entered displays as a page footer on reports |
when printed. | ||
REPORT_HEADER | Text | Text entered displays as a page header on reports |
when printed. | ||
ReportingCurrencySymbol | Text | By adding this parameter, you can change the |
default three-letter reporting currency symbol (USD) | ||
that appears in the header of reports when viewed in | ||
Reporting Currency. | ||
SEPARATESTATE# | State Code | Enter the State code to configure how the State Tax |
Prov Rpt Breakout displays works with the | ||
STATE_BREAKOUT_UNIT parameter. Activate in | ||
Manage Configuration | ||
SHOW_ADVANCEDLIABILITY | 0 or 1 | 1 allows Payable functionality and allows it to work |
properly. SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY and | ||
SHOW_LIABILITY should be 0. SHOW_LIABILITY | ||
SHOW_ALTPROVCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 Alternative Provision Calculations |
SHOW_ALTPROVCALC | 0 or 1 | 1 Define Where 1st Scenario Calculation Posts |
SHOW_BRIDGEUNITMAP | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the Unit Mapping page in the Manage |
Bridge section. | ||
SHOW_CASHPYMTS | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the Cash Payments report, which |
displays the Return Basis Provision (formerly known | ||
as the Cash Provision) and subtracts the payments. | ||
SHOW_CTA | 0 or 1 | 1 enables you to manually enter Currency |
Translation Adjustment (CTA) calculations for all | ||
temporary differences via the Additional CTA option. | ||
The entry is in the Reporting Currency and After Tax | ||
Rate format. Depending on which fields are | ||
populated, amounts could impact both Current and | ||
Deferred Tax Expense, Deferred Only Tax Expense, | ||
or Equity. Amounts are tracked and shown on | ||
reports with a system-defined After Tax Temporary | ||
Difference. |
Parameter Name | Parameter | Parameter Function |
SHOW_DEFBALCSCBRKOUT | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the CSC Deferred Balances Report under sub-consolidation. |
SHOW_EFFRATECONSOLPTBIP CT | 0 or 1 | 1 displays an additional line in the effective tax rates that further analyzes the components in the CSC ETR Report under sub-consolidation. |
SHOW_EFFRATECSCBRKOUT | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the CSC Effective Tax Rate Report under sub-consolidation. |
SHOW_EXPECTEDDEFERRED | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the Expected Deferred Report. |
SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT | 0 or 1 | 1 allows GAAP to STAT functionality. This parameter works in conjunction with the GAAPTOSTAT and gstags parameters. |
SHOW_JE | 0 or 1 | 1 allows the Journal Entry functionality. |
SHOW_LIABILITY | 0 or 1 | 1 enables the Liability tab, if using. SHOW_ADVANCEDLIABILITY should be set to 0. |
SHOW_OUTPUTJE | 0 or 1 | 1 activates the configurable journal entry. |
SHOW_PAYABLERECLASS | 0 or 1 | 1 activates the reclass functionality to allow unit-to- unit reclass of the payable liability. |
SHOW_PLUGINDEV | 0 or 1 | ***1 to display the plug-in report settings page. |
SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY | 0 or 1 | 1 enables Simple Liability if using. SHOW_ADVACEDLIABILITY should be set to 0. |
SHOW_WORKPAPER | 0 or 1 | 1 displays the Workpaper Report. |
STATE_BREAKOUT_UNIT | Unit Code | 1 Enter the Unit code to configure how the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout display works with the SEPARATESTATE# parameter. |
TBIS_ADJ | 0 or 1 | 1 Define where BBC Calculation Posts |
TSPasswordExpireDays | Numeral | 1 The number determines how many days a password can be active. |
TSPasswordMinDigits | Numeral | The number determines the minimum number of digits that must be in a user's password. |
TSPasswordMinLength | Numeral | The number determines the minimum amount of keystrokes that must be in a user's password. |
0 or 1 **0 uses the Reporting Currency Alternative USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR_Def Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation method for any ault new dataset that is created. 1 creates new datasets with the Local Currency AMT methodology. | ||
USE_SPDEFBALREPORTS | 0 or 1 | 1 allows additional view options on the Deferred Balances report and the expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel. |
USE_SPPROVISIONREPORTS | 0 or 1 | 1 allows additional view options on the Tax Provision report and the expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel. |
USE_SPPROVSUMMARYREPO RTS | 0 or 1 | 1 allows additional view options on the State Provision Summary report. The expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel. |
UserExtended | 0 or 1 | 1 adds more information fields about a user (email, phone, number, etc.) in the Administer User section under the Administration area under System. |
CASE_INSENSITIVE_LOGIN | 0 or 1 | ** 0 specifies that all user logins are case-sensitive. 1 specifies that all user logins are not case- |
sensitive | ||
SHOW_CASHPYMTS | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the Cash Payments report, which displays the Return Basis Provision (formerly known as the Cash Provision) and subtracts the payments. |
SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the TS Database Analyzer, which allows Administrators to run SQL queries on database data. |
SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER | 0 or 1 | **1 activates the TS Database Analyzer, which allows Administrators to run SQL queries on database data. |
You can activate the following "Dataset Parameters" in the application for additional functionality. The "Parameter Function" column describes the functionality.
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
AdvLiabPosting | Alphanumeri c | N | Deactivates the auto payable posting |
AdvLiabPosting | Alphanumeri c | Y | Activates the auto payable posting. |
AWP_WRITE | Alphanumeri c | 0 or 1 | 1 makes Active Workpapers read/ write for Read/Write users. |
BSORTPTAG | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter | Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default Balance Sheet Only posting tag. |
CASENUMBER Alphanumeri c
User Defined Code
Case number that identifies the unit when exporting data to compliance
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
systems. | |||
CTA_ALT_CALC | Alphanumeri c | 1 | Enables automatic calculation of Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) for all temporary differences via the Alternative calculation (through P/L). This calculation computes the current Tax Expense, which is offset in a Taxes Payable account. The Deferred Tax Expense is offset in the Ending Deferred Tax Asset/Liability accounts. |
CUSTOM_HEADERS | Alphanumeri c | 1 |
|
Alphanumeri c | 0, 1, or 2 |
| |
DefEndBalDefault | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter and type of event | Designates at the dataset level where the difference is posted when Ending Balances are entered vs Activity for Book/Tax Basis Temporary Differences. Examples:
Note: This parameter overrides the DefEndBalDefault system parameter. |
DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN | Alphanumeri c | 1 thru 26 | Selects the column in the Deferred Balances Report to display a sub- total balance for the Adjusted Beginning Balance or any other purpose for a specific dataset. Note: This parameter overrides the |
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN system parameter. | |||
DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME | Alphanumeri c | Text | Column Heading for the column created with DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN parameter. Note: This parameter overrides the DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME system parameter. |
DORTPTAG | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter | Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default Deferred Only posting tag. |
EstPymtFranchiseType | Alphanumeri c | Tag Letter | Dictates the tag letter used in the payment summary report for income payments. |
EstPymtPctCushion | Decimal Number | 1.XX | Cushion amount that should be added to Estimated Tax Payments. |
EstPymtRoundFactor | Whole Number | X00, X000 | Rounding factors applied to Estimated Tax Payments. |
EstPymtType | Alphanumeri c | Tag Letter | Dictates the tag letter used in the payment summary report for income payments. |
FATTD_Prefix | Alphanumeri c | AT Temp Diff Code | Identifies which of the After Tax Temporary Differences (ATTD) should be considered as Foreign Tax Credit Carryover amounts for the Alternative Minimum Tax Calculation. If no value is entered, no ATTD is included in the calculation. |
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE | Alphanumeri c | FED/STATE | "FED" Federal Benefit of State impact in the Federal Rate or "State" Federal Benefit of State impact in the State Rate. |
*Mass Update Rates: | |||
CountryRates | Alphanumeri c | Y | Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update country rates for a dataset. |
CurrencyRates Alphanumeri c
Y Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
currency rates for a dataset. | |||
StateRates | Alphanumeri c | Y | Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update state rates for a dataset. |
NOLAUTO_BSO_EXCLUSIONYY Y | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter | Used to exclude Balance Sheet Only amounts from the Federal NOLs Automation balance. (YYY are numbers and Tag Letter is the tag that should be excluded.) Multiple tags can be excluded by setting up multiple parameters. |
NOLAUTO_DEFONLY_EXCLUSI ONXXX | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter | Used to exclude Deferred Only amounts from the Federal NOLAutomation balance. (XXX are numbers and Tag Letter is the tag that should be excluded.) Multiple tags can be excluded by setting up multiple parameters. |
PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_BUCK ET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's Federal Current Return Basis Tax Charge posts to. |
PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_BUCK ET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Federal National Return Basis Tax Charge posts to. |
PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_STAT E_BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's State Current Return Basis Tax Charge posts to. |
PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_STATE _BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Current State Return Basis Tax Charge posts to. |
PAYABLE_FXRATE_CALC | Alphanumeri c | 1 | 1 allows you to specify for a particular dataset not to default to the filing unit's FX rate, but to calculate by summing all Cash Federal Provisions in Local Currency and dividing by all Cash Federal Provisions in Reporting Currency when payable items are being calculated for a filing group. |
PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_BUCKET Alphanumeri
c
Payable Bucket Code
Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's Federal Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Federal Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to. |
PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_STATE_B UCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's State Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to. |
PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_STATE_B UCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's State Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to. |
Alphanumeri c | 0, 1 or 2 | Determines how the PAYRECUNIT parameter functions:
| |
Alphanumeri c | Tag Letter | Determines which NC_ and Deferred amounts are considered in the Prior Year Breakout view of the Foreign/ Domestic Summary report, based on their tag letters. For example: To include NC_ and Deferred amounts tagged with R and X, add the dataset parameters:
|
PULL_PAY_FROM_DATASET Alphanumeri
c
Dataset Name Entering the name of the Provision
Dataset in the Estimated Tax Payments dataset posts payable
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
transaction codes 1ES, 1ES-F, 2ES, 2ES-F, 3ES, 3ES-F, 4ES, 4ESF,ADJ and ADJ-F total display on the Federal Est Pymt and State Est Pymt reports after Reset Report Data. | |||
RestrictTA | Alphanumeri c | Beginning of code which should not be modifiable | Restricts Read/Write users on data entry/modification of tax adjustment codes. |
RestrictTag_X | Alphanumeri c | Beginning of tag which should not be modifiable |
|
Alphanumeri c | 0 or 1 |
| |
RTPTAG | Alphanumeri c | Tag letter | Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default RTP posting tag. |
RTPSUBCLASS | Alphanumeri c | Y | Activate this dataset parameter when you want to post multiple years of GAAP and STAT Return-to-Provision true-up adjustments for Class datasets. When activated in the return dataset, this parameter will append the year to the system generated RTP Class and Subclass appropriately identifying the year and the GAAP or STAT designation. |
SCRUNCH_TAG Alphanumeri c
Any letter from A through Z.
Enables similarly-coded and similarly-designated (Current/Non- Current) temporary differences (with the same or different tag letters) to be aggregated when rolling over datasets using the Scrunch functionality.
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR | Alphanumeri c | 0 or 1 | 0 uses the Reporting Currency approach for the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation for the dataset, overriding the system parameter. 764 . 1 uses the Local Currency methodology. |
USETBPTBI | Alphanumeri c | 0 | Deactivates the PTBI bridge posting |
USETBPTBI | Alphanumeri c | 1 | Activates the PTBI bridge posting for all income statement accounts |
USETBPTBI | Alphanumeri c | 2 |
|
VA_CALCTYPE | Alphanumeri c | 0, 2, 3 or 4 |
Allowance automation. |
The following Unit Dataset Parameters relate to the JE and Payable functionality.
Parameter | Paramete r | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
JE_CALCULATE_ENTRIES | Alphanumeri c | 0 or 1 | Y indicates that journal entries are calculated for a unit. |
PAYABLE_CPROV_BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Define which payable bucket the Current Cash Provision posts to. |
PAYRECUNIT | Alphanumeri c | Parent Unit Code | Available in versions 6.0.0 and higher. Reclasses the unit's payable information to a parent unit. Enter the code for the unit in which the payable information should be included as the key value.
dataset parameter is activated with a paramvalue of 2, the system reclasses Federal auto- posted payables to the unit identified by the unit level parameter PAYRECUNIT. Note: The paramvalue of 2 is available in versions 6.1.0 and higher. |
PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Define which payable bucket the Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to. |
Unit State Dataset Parameters
The following Unit State Dataset Parameters relate to the Payable functionality.
Parameter | Paramete r Type | Parameter Value | Parameter Function |
PAYABLE_CPROV_BUC KET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Define which payable bucket the Current Cash Provision posts to. |
PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET | Alphanumeri c | Payable Bucket Code | Define which payable bucket the Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to. |
PAYRECUNIT | Alphanumeri c | Unit | Available in versions 6.1.0 and higher. Reclasses the unit's payable information to a parent unit on the state level. Enter the code for the unit in which the payable information should be included as the key value. Note: This parameter is only valid when the PAYRECTYPE 769 dataset parameter is activated with a paramvalue of 2. |
The following list of special characters are supported by the application. These characters will appear on reports.
Import Categories
Example: |
import NOL temporary differences incomplete/badly formatted data, sheet #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs, line 3 |
“incomplete/badly formatted data” – Necessary information is missing.
Go back to the page indicated and check that you have entered all the necessary information.
Import Numbers
Example: |
import state tax adjustments D1000/NY/STA1000: badly formatted data |
“Badly formatted data” – Not enough information for that unit/perm diff/temp diff, etc. Means the same thing as “Incomplete record.” Found in #UTA# Unit Tax Adjustments, #UTBBS# Unit Trail BalSheet.
Verify that you have entered information into all the mandatory fields.
Example: |
import temporary differences D1000/T1000/: incomplete record |
“Incomplete record” – Not enough information for that unit/perm diff/temp diff, etc. Means the same thing as “Badly formatted data.”
Verify that you have entered information into all the mandatory fields.
Example: |
import NOL temporary differences D1000/NOL1000/D: key references non-existing categories |
“Key references non-existing categories” – When you have referenced a unit, temp diff, or perm diff that has not yet been created in import_categories.
Go back to import_categories and create that unit, temp diff, or perm diff in the appropriate page (e.g., #CU# Units to create a unit). Then go to import_numbers and input the information for that unit, temp diff, or perm diff in the appropriate page (e.g., #U# Unit for a unit, #UPD# Unit Perm Diffs for a permanent difference, etc.).
If you’ve already created the unit, temp, perm diff, etc., and the error message is still coming up, make sure that you have not entered a space before any of the codes. For example, “ D1000” should be “D1000”.
Example: |
import NOL temporary differences D2000/NOL1000/D: no parent record |
“No parent record” – When you have referenced a unit, temp diff, or perm diff that exists (i.e., has been created in import_categories), but for which no record has been created in import_numbers.
Go to import_numbers and input the information for that unit in the appropriate page (e.g., #U# Unit to create a unit record, #UPD# Unit Temp Diffs for a temporary difference, etc.
Where to Enter Items in Onesource Tax Provision
Entry Column: | Current Tax Provision | Deferred Tax Provision | Ending Deferred Balance | Effective Tax Rate |
Activity | ||||
Deferred Only | ||||
Balance Sheet Only |
Access Rights Levels 755 Accounts
Ending Deferred Tax Asset 648 Ending Payable 648
Actual Pre-Tax Book Income 660, 667 Add
After Tax Temporary Difference 427
Bridge Mappings 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448,
449
Intercompany Transaction | |
NOL Temporary Difference | |
Payable Transaction Types | |
State After Apportionment Temporary Difference 438
State After Tax Temporary Difference 437 State Tax Adjustment 439
Temporary Difference 424 Trial Balance Line 430 Trial Balance SubLine 431 Unit 417
Additional CTA 648, 649, 658, 659, 659
Additional Paid in Capital 711 ADJ (Adjustment) 450
Balance Sheet Only 723 Book 713
Federal Non-Cash Tax 723 Non-Cash Tax 716
Return to Provision 399 RTP Deferred Only 725 State Non-Cash 723 State Non-Cash Tax 723 Tax 716
Administrators 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 35, 38, 38, 57, 89, 93,
167, 171, 184, 201, 217, 220, 351, 376, 534, 556, 562, 592,
After Tax Temporary Differences 32 Add 427
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis Import 155
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Import 151
After-Tax Temporary Difference CTA_SYS 658, 659
Aggregated Attribute Basis 726 Alternative CTA 648, 649, 654
Alternative Minimum Tax 114, 348, 605
Local Currency approach 604 Local Currency Method 606 Reporting Currency approach 604
Alternative Minimum Tax Estimator Calculation 605
Reporting Currency approach 605 Aministrators 20
Amortized Permanent Differences 446, 726
APIC Pool Amounts 159 APIC Pool Parameters
Apportionment
Balance Sheet Only 59, 75, 723
BBAL (Beginning Balance) 450, 450
Book Balance Sheet 434, 713 Book Income Statement 434 Book Months 398
Book Tax Adjustment 434 Book Trial Balance 712
Book-Tax Difference | |
Bridge Extract File 4 Column Format | |
6 Column Format |
Comma Separated File Format 566 Tab Delimited File Format 566
Bridge File Formats 566 Process 565
Bridge Map Template 592 Bridge Mapping 562, 592, 602
Bridge mappings 440, 443, 444, 446, 447, 713
Add 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449
Delete 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449
Import 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449
Bridge Parameters SHOW_BRIDGEUNITMAP 449
Quarterly Estimated Payments 332, 346 State Forecast Rate 315
State Tax Provision 318, 321, 328, 330
Export Payable Categories 451 Categories Audit Trail 545 Category items 20
Access Rights Levels 755 AMT_SYS 604, 605, 606
Component Rollup 755, 756, 756
NOL Temporary Difference 21 Non-Cash Tax Adjustments 21 Permission Component Types 754 Reclass Rollup 705
Valuation Allowance Automation 21 Combination of Datasets 23
Component Code 731 Component Rollup Codes
Effective Tax Rate 756 Trial Balance 756
Components
Book to Tax Adjustments 23 Payable Items 23
Consolidated Sub-consolidations 708
Contra Asset 726, 727, 728, 728
Countries 93 Country Codes
Create
CTA Parameters
CTA_ALT_CALC 649, 654, 655, 657
Cumulative Temporary Differences 713 Currencies 93
Currency 37, 643, 644, 644, 699
Local 230, 348, 349, 441, 604, 605, 606, 648, 730
Reporting 230, 348, 350, 441, 604, 605, 606, 730
Reporting Currency 108, 643 Currency Codes
Currency Translation Adjustment 648 Local 37, 643, 644, 699
Current 32, 398, 444, 445, 447
Current federal loss 607 Current Provision 719, 722, 723
Data Collection tool 33, 730 Data Entry Policy 181
Rollover 384, 398 Dataset Parameter
CTA_ALT_CALC 649, 654, 655, 657
DEFAULT_TD_TAB 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209,
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE 307, 308, 308, 765
NOLAUTO_DEFONLY_EXCLUSIONXXX 765
PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_STATE_BUCKET 765
PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_STATE_BUCKET 765
PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_STATE_BUCKET 765
PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_STATE_BUCKET 765
RESTRICT_TD_TABS 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204,
Interim 378, 660, 660, 663, 669
Provision 332, 346, 669, 719, 722, 731
Reporting 22, 23, 378, 404, 592, 715
Reporting - Additive 23, 404, 592
Reporting - Sequential 23, 404, 408, 592
True-up 715 Datsets
Deactivate a unit 31 Deferred Only 59, 75
Deferred Rollforwards 59, 470 Deferred Rollforwards Columns 470 Deferred Tax Asset 159
Deferred Tax Assets 726 Deferred Tax Provision 651, 652 Delete
After Tax Temporary Difference 427
Bridge Mappings 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448,
449
Intercompany Transaction | |
NOL Temporary Difference | |
Payable Transaction Types | |
State After Apportionment Temporary Difference 438
State After Tax Temporary Difference 437 State Tax Adjustment 439
Temporary Difference 424 Trial Balance Line 430 Trial Balance SubLine 431 Unit 417
Ending Deferred Tax Asset account 648 Ending Payable account 648
Export Mappings 435, 602 Exporting to Return 603 Extension payments 18
Extraordinary/Discrete items 667
FBOS Parameters
FEDBENEFITOFSTATE 307, 308, 308
Federal Benefit of State 307, 308
Federal Provision 25 Federal Taxable Income 614
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) 610, 611, 612,
613, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 619
Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) 610, 611, 612, 613,
Federal/National Reports AMT Estimator 251
Deferred Workpaper 251 Effective Tax Rate 251
Effective Tax Rate – CSC Breakout 251 Expected Deferred Rate 251
Federal Est Pymt 251 Forecast True Up 251 Forecasted Rate Report 251
Federal/National Reports Journal Entry Reports 251
Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities 251 NOL Balances 251
Tax Basis Balance Sheet 251 Tax Provision 251
Tax Provision - Interim 251 Temporary Difference Summary 251
Temporary Difference Summary (Fed Filing Group) 251
Trial Balance Reports 251 Unit Summary 251
User Status 251 File Formats
Filing Group 27, 284, 286, 606, 727, 728, 728
Forecast State Apportionment 671 Foreign Currency issues 603 Foreign Exchange Rates 37
Gaap to STAT Parameters GAAPTOSTAT# 264
General Ledger Extract 565, 566
Import 57, 89, 116, 151, 155, 159, 164, 167, 171, 174, 177, 184,
187, 196, 201, 204, 209, 214, 217, 220, 224, 379, 404, 417,
419, 423, 424, 426, 427, 428, 429, 430, 431, 436, 437, 438,
439, 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 450, 451,
Import Bridge Map Template 602 Import Bridge Template
#MAPD# Amortized Perm Diffs 446, 592, 602 #MATD# Gross Temporary Difference 447 #MATD# Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis 592, 602 #MPD# Perm Diffs 443, 592, 602
#MPTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income 441, 592, 602
#MTA# Tax Accounts 442, 592, 602
#MTBBB# Trial Balance 448, 592, 602
#MTD# Temp Diffs - Tax Basis 444, 592, 602
#MTDBOS# Temp Diff BSO 592, 602
#MTDBOS# TemTemp Diff BSO 445 Bridge Mappings 448
Import Categories 592 Import Categories Template
#CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs 427
#CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs 591 #CD# Dataset 591
#CDR# Reporting Dataset 591 #CDR# Reporting Datasets 404, 592 #CDRF# Deferred Rollforwards 470 #CDRF# Deferred Rollforwards 591 #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs 426 #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs 591 #CNRF# NOL RollForwards 473, 591
#CPD# Permanent Differences 423, 591
#CPYBK# Payable Buckets | 451, 451 |
#CPYBK# Payable Buckets | |
#CPYRL# Payable Rollups | |
#CPYRL# Payable Rollups |
#CPYTP# Payable Types 450, 451 #CPYTP# Payable Types 591
#CRU# Component Rollups 536, 591
#CSAATD# State After-App Temp Diff 438, 591 #CSATTD# State AfterTax TempDiff 437, 591
Import Categories Template
#CSTA# State Tax Adjs 439, 591
#CTA# Tax Adjustments 428, 591
#CTBL# Trial Balance Lines 430, 591
#CTBSL# Trial Balance SubLines 431, 591
#CTD# Temporary Differences 424, 591
#CUC# User Component Access | |
#ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types | |
After Tax Temporary Difference | |
Country Codes | |
Currency Codes | |
Intercompany Transaction | |
NOL Temporary Difference | |
Payable Transaction Types | |
State After Apportionment Temporary Difference 438
State After Tax Temporary Difference 437 State Tax Adjustment 439
Temporary Difference 424 Trial Balance Line 430 Trial Balance SubLine 431 Unit 417
Import Error Messages Import Categories 775
Bridge Mappings 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 449
Import Numbers Template 220, 558, 663, 667 #DP# Datasets Params 57
#FL# Fed Liability Txns 171 #FORU# Forecast Unit 161 #ICOTXNS# Inter Co Txns 164 #J# Jurisdictions 89
#SAATD# St AfterApp TempDiff 204 #SATTD# St AfterTax TempDiff 209
#SATTD# Statel After-Tax Temporary Differences 399
#SL# State Liability Txns 217 #SPM# State Perm Mods 214 #STA# State Tax Adjs 220 #STD# St Temp Diff Adjs 224
#STDR# State Temp Diff Rates 224 #U# Unit 114, 116, 116, 117, 181
#UAPIC# APIC Pool Amounts 159 #UATTD# U AfterTax TempDffs 151
#UATTD# Unit After-Tax Temporary Differences 399
#UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas 155 #UNOLTD# Unit NOL Temp Diffs 167 #UPD# Unit Perm Diffs 174
#UPDAM# Unit Perm Diff Amort 177 #UTA# Unit Tax Adjs 184
#UTBBS# Unit Tax Basis BalSheet 201 #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs 187
#UTD# Unit Temporary Differences 399 #UTDAM# Unit Temp Diff Amort 196
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 Amortized Permanent Differences 177
APIC Pool Amounts 159 Dataset Parameters 57
Intercompany Transaction Entry 164 Jurisdiction Management 89
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167 Payable Entry 171
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209
State Permanent Differences 214 State Tax Adjustments 220
Tax Adjustments 184 Taxes Per Book 116
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187
Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201 Import Reporting Dataset
Import Return Maps Template
Import Return Maps Template
#MBAL# Balance Sheet Mappings 435, 435 #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet 434
#MINC# Income Statement Mappings 435, 435 #MINC# Map Income Statement 434
Import Rolling Pin 556 Import Spreadsheet 556 Import Update Rates Template
#GSTD# Generate State Temp Diff 224
State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 Include for State 25
Income Statement items 713 Intercompany Transaction Entry
Intercompany Transactions Add 429
Interest 731 Interim Dataset
Interim Datasets 406, 660, 660, 663
Interim Methodology 258 Interim Process
Prior Full Year to Quarter 1 669 Roll Back to Prior Quarter 669
Journal Entry configuration 603 Journal Entry Parameters
JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET_CODE 690
Journal Entry Summary Code 540 Journal Entry Summary Name 540 Jurisdiction Management
Jursisdiction Management 332, 346
Levels
Local Currency 37, 108, 230, 348, 349, 441, 604, 605,
606, 643, 643, 644, 644, 648, 699
Macro 398 Macros
Manage Bridge 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447,
Manage Payable 450, 450
Export Payable Categories 451 Manage Restricted Features
Manage Tax Basis/Return 434 Manage Trial Balance 430 Manage Units 417, 417
Mass Update Rates 55, 56, 81, 91, 91
Multiple Dataset Configuration 722
Net Operating Loss 714 Net Operating Losses 606 NOL 715
Base NOL Allowance 607, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614,
Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) 609
NOL Allowance Rate 610, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616,
NOL automation 607, 619 NOL Balance Sheet 619
NOL Balance Sheet Only 610, 611, 612, 613
NOL Beginning Balance 615, 616, 617
NOL Deferred Only 610, 611, 612, 613
NOL Deferred Tax Asset 607, 615, 616, 617
NOL Ending Balance 609, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614,
NOL Reclass 609, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616,
NOL Temp Differences 619 NOL Temporary Difference 618
NOL Rollforwards Columns 473 NOL Temporary Difference 21 NOL Temporary Differences 32
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Import 167
Non-Current 32, 398, 444, 445, 447
Override Rates 93, 167, 187, 204, 224
Override Rates Option 55, 56, 81
Parameters 230, 257, 258, 261, 275, 313, 332, 346, 673,
Dataset | |
Reports | |
System |
Unit State Dataset 34 Parent 27
Parent Unit 702, 707, 727, 728, 728
Payable Bucket 701 Payable Buckets
Payable Reclass 702, 704, 705, 707
Payable Reclasses 48 Payable Rollups
BBAL (Beginning Balance) 450 Delete 450
RCL (Inter-Year Reclass) 450 Payable Transaction Types
BBAL (Beginning Balance) 450 Delete 450
Permanent Differences 25, 443, 715
P&L Adjustments 174, 177 Permission Component Types 754 Plug-in Parameters
Pre-Tax Book Income 181, 643, 660 Pre-Tax Book Income Policies
Enter Local, FX and Calc USD 108
Enter Local, USD and Calc FX 108 Enter Local, USD and FX 108
Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding 108 Enter USD, FX and Calc Local 108
Previous Year Provision 719 Previous Year Return 719 Provision 702, 704, 711, 722
Provision Calculations 257, 258, 261, 264, 270, 274, 275
Provision Dataset 731 Provision Items
Change in Rate 277, 292, 311, 324
Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) 277, 292,
Current Federal Tax Expense 257, 258, 261, 264, 348
Current State Tax Expense 318, 321, 328, 330, 333
Deferred Federal Tax Expense 258, 261, 264, 348
Deferred State Tax Expense 318, 321, 330, 333
Deferred Tax Asset/Liability 277, 284, 286, 288, 292,
Deferred Tax Expense 277, 292, 311
Effective Tax Rate 255, 258, 261, 264, 270, 274, 275,
Equity Offset to Current Expense 258, 261, 264 Forecast Effective Tax Rate 315
State Deferred Tax Asset/Liability 324 State Deferred Tax Expense 324
State Effective Tax Rate 310 State Ending Deferred Rate 313
State Equity Offset to Current Expense 318, 321, 330,
333
State Tax Expense 258, 261, 264
Total Current Tax Provision 326, 327, 335, 337
Total State Tax Provision 309, 310, 318, 321, 330,
333
Total Tax Provision 255, 258, 261, 264, 270, 274,
Provision Transaction Types ATR 704
provisionsupport@thomsonreuters.com 15
PRV (Provision) 450, 450
Rates
Annualized Forecasted Effective Tax 660, 660, 663,
667
Beginning Deferred Tax 161, 181
Beginning Spot 91, 161, 181, 644
Ending Deferred 91 Ending Deferred Tax 161
Ending Deferred Tax Rates 181 Ending Federal 398
Ending Spot 91, 161, 181, 644, 699
Federal Deductibility 307, 307
Rates
Interim State Forecasted Tax 671 Spot 108, 643, 644
Weighted Average 108, 643, 644
Weighted Average Foreign Exchange 161, 181
Weighted Average FX 93, 164, 167, 174, 184, 214, 217,
Weighted FX 91 Wghtd Avg FX 181
Rates/Apportionments 261 RCL (Inter-Year Reclass) 450 Read/Write 93
Recalc Payable Reclasses menu option 48 Reclass 48, 607, 702
Reclass Transaction Types ATR-REC 704, 705
Records
Refunds 696 Report Levels
Report Parameters CLIENTDISPLAYNAME 710
Reporting Currency 37, 108, 230, 348, 350, 441, 604,
Reporting Dataset Log 404, 408, 592 Reporting Datasets
Reporting Datsets Additive 404, 592
AMT Estimator 251, 348, 349, 350
APIC Pool Summary 304 Attachments Review 30, 251, 306
Deferred Balances 32, 38, 38, 59, 251, 277, 295,
308, 311, 470, 648, 651, 652, 659, 659, 667
Effective Tax Rate 38, 251, 270, 270, 275, 308, 708 Effective Tax Rate – CSC Breakout 251
Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout 274 Effective Tax Rate Reconciliation 667 Expected Deferred Rate 313
Federal Estimated Payments 89, 346, 346 Federal Estimated Payments Summary 348 Flow Through 297
Forecast Rate 342, 663 Forecast State Rate 315 Forecast True Up 251, 341 Forecasted Rate Report 251
Forecasted State Rate Report 251 Foreign/Domestic Summary 251, 280, 667
Interim Provision 258, 333, 667
Journal Entry 116, 667 Journal Entry Reports 251 Legacy Tax Provision 251
Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities 251, 288
Payable Detail 38, 251, 337, 699
Payable Rollforward 38, 251, 335, 699, 705
Provision Summary 251 Provision Summary (State) 309
State Deferred Balances | ||
State Est Pymt Summary | ||
State Estimated Payments | ||
State Estimated Payments | Summary | |
State Legacy Tax Provision | ||
State Payable Rollforward | ||
Tax Basis Balance Sheet 38, 251, 298, 712 Tax Basis Income Statement 300
Tax Provision 184, 220, 251, 255, 257, 261, 307, 315,
342, 610, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 644,
648, 651, 652, 655, 657, 659, 659, 708
Temporary Difference Summary 32, 251, 667
Temporary Difference Summary (Fed Filing Group) 251
Temporary Differences Summary 284
Temporary Differences Summary (Fed Filing Group) 286
Trial Balance - Balance Sheet 301 Trial Balance - Income Statement 302 Trial Balance Reports 251
Unit Summary 251, 255 User Configurable JE 673 User Status 251
Reset Report Data 351 Restrict Users Parameteres
RestrictTA 93, 94, 94
RestrictTag_X 93, 94, 94
Return to Provision 603, 716 Multi Dataset Approach 714
Return to Provision true-ups 394 Single Dataset Approach 714, 714
Roll Back to Prior Quarter 51 Rolling Pin
Simplified Example 559 Rollup Codes
Trial Balance 38 Rollups
Effective Rate | |
Trial Balance |
True-ups 716 RTP Parameters
After Tax Temporary Differences 417, 427
After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155
After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 Amortized Permanent Differences 177, 440, 446 APIC Pool Amounts 159
Attachments and Comments 30 Country Rates 56
Global Attachments 457, 468 Intercompany Transaction Entry 164
Intercompany Transactions | |
InterCompanyTransactions | |
Journal Entry Summary 457, 540
Manage Countries and Currencies 91 Manage Countries/Currencies 457, 643
Manage Deferred Rollforwards 38, 59, 457, 470 Manage Interim Datasets 406
Manage NOL Rollforwards 38, 75, 457, 473
Manage Payable Buckets 450, 451
Manage Payable Rollups 450, 450 Manage Payable Transaction Types 450 Manage Payable Txn Types 450 Manage Reporting Datasets 722
Manage Restricted Features 457, 534, 534
Manange Countries/Currencies 469 NOL Temporary Differences 426
NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167, 294 Payable Entry 171
Permanent Differences 174, 417, 423, 440, 443
Reporting Datasets 378, 404 Spreadsheet Import (Dataset) 558 State 31
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204, 436
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209, 436
State Details 27, 93, 261 State Payable Entry 217
State Permanent Differences 214
State Tax Adjustments 220, 436, 439
State Tax After Apportionment Temporary Differences 438
State Tax After Tax Temporary Differences 437 State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 States 436, 436
Tax Basis/Return Mappings 434, 434 Tax Loss Temporary Differences 417 Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis 447 Temporary Difference 59
Temporary Difference Activity - Book/Tax Basis 440 Temporary Difference Activity - Tax Basis 440 Temporary Difference BSO Adjustments 440 Temporary Differences 417, 424, 445
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187, 444 Trial Balance Lines 430, 430
Trial Balance SubLines 430, 431
Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201, 298, 448, 713
Unit Details 27, 93, 348, 604, 726, 727, 728, 728
Unit Sub-Consolidations 417, 419, 708
View Categories Audit Trail 35, 457, 545
Self Reconciling Reports 253 Separate Attribute Basis 726 Sequential Reporting Datasets 408 Software upgrade 15
Special Characters 774 Spreadsheet Import (Dataset) 556 SQL 538
State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Import 209
State Codes 740 State Payable Entry
State Permanent Differences Equity Adjustments 214
State Provision 25 State Reports
Legacy Tax Provision 251 Payable Detail 251
Payable Rollforward 251 State Est Pymt 251
State Summary 307 State Summary Reports
Expected Deferred Rate 251 Forecasted State Rate Report 251 Provision Summary 251
State Est Pymt Summary 251 State/Unit Summary 251
State Tax After Apportionment Temporary Differences Add 438
State Tax After Tax Temporary Differences Add 437
State Temporary Differences
After Apportionment - Tax Basis 204 State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis
Stock Based Compensation 711 Stock Options 159, 711
Sub-consolidations 24, 26, 708
USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR_Default 605, 606
System Parameters 534, 604, 643, 711
ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPORT 648, 758
BRIDGE_ALLOW_SUBCON_SELECT 758
DISABLE_DEFERREDPROVONLY 181, 758
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC 758
FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC 758
System Parameters 534, 604, 643, 711
JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_FEDERAL_XXX 758
JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_STATE_XXX | |
JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET_CODE | |
JE_ROUNDING_DECIMAL_PLACES 758
JE_STATE_GROUP_%_STATE## 690, 758
JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_# 690, 758
JE_Supplemental_Label# | |
JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME | |
JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS | |
SHOW_EFFRATECONSOLPTBIPCT 708, 758
SHOW_EFFRATECSCBRKOUT 708, 758
TSPasswordExpireDays | |
TSPasswordMinDigits | |
TSPasswordMinLength |
UserExtended 758 System Pararmeters
Tax Basis Balance Sheet 434, 434, 603, 712, 713, 713
Tax Basis/Return Mapping 435, 435 Tax Basis/Return Mapping line 434 Tax Contingencies 731
Tax Return 434, 434
Tax Return Income Statement 434 Tax Return Mappings 434
Taxes Payable account 648, 696, 714 Taxes Per Book
Temporary Differences 25, 32, 445
After Tax - Book/Tax Basis 155 After Tax - Tax Basis 151
After-Tax Temporary Differences 726 Amortized 398, 398
Amortized After-Tax 398, 398
Amortized After-Tax Temporary Differences 726 Amortized Temporary Differences 726
Delete | ||
Federal | ||
Import | ||
State After Tax - Tax Basis | ||
State After-Apportionment | 398, 398 | |
Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 447 Import 196
Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 444 Import 187
Tentative Minimum Tax 605 Terminology 16
Tiered Sub-consolidations 708 Total Current Provision 715 Transaction Buckets 171, 217
Transaction Types 171, 217, 704
Trial Balance 116, 201, 430, 430, 431, 448, 712
Trial Balance Accounts 448, 712, 713, 713
Trial Balance Acoounts 443, 444, 445, 446, 447
Trial Balance Mapping 713 Trial Balance Subline 713
Trial Balance SubLines 201, 430, 434, 448, 713
Trial Balance/Tax Basis Import 201
True-up Dataset 715 True-ups
Deferred Only 723 Deferred Only RTP 723
Temporary Difference Activity 723 Truncate Audit Trail 534
Types
Current 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209, 224
Non-Current 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209, 224
Uncertain Tax Positions 729 Uncertain Tax Postions 731 Unit 27, 648, 671, 731
Unit Dataset Extensions (UserNum9) 116 Unit Dataset Parameters
Unit State Dataset Parameters PAYABLE_CPROV_BUCKET 773
Unit Tax Rates 650, 652, 654, 656
Import 417 Users
Valuation Allowance automation 21, 603 Valuation Allowance Parameters
VA_CALCTYPE 728, 728
Valuation Allowances
Aggregated Attribute Basis 726, 728, 729
Valuation Allowances
Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis 728, 729
Separate Attribute Basis 726, 727
© 2016Thomson Reuters. All rights reserved.
Republication or redistribution of Thomson Reuters content, including by framing or similar means, is prohibited w ithout the prior w ritten consent of Thomson Reuters. 'Thomson Reuters' and the Thomson Reuters logo are registered trademarks and trademarks of Thomson Reuters and its affiliated companies.
For more information
Send us a sales enquiry at thomsonreuters.com/about/contact_us
Read more about our products at thomsonreuters.com/products_services Find out how to contact your local office thomsonreuters.com/about/locations.